3830 2_MLM_Vol_R03_Dec1978 2 MLM Vol R03 Dec1978
User Manual: Pdf 3830-2_MLM_Vol_R03_Dec1978
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 232
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
if,
l~
c c
(: (=
£
(~
(:
(
(,:~
(~
(,'~
(:
£ (: (
'"
(
(
(
£
===::.-=
--~--~ =--=
- --
~~:;-=
-== -=-. ==-
('
(
Volume 3
PLAN ~!:~OUT
LGND
M LX
STARTMAINT
MSG
PANEL
MI CR 0 ~~~~-ICS
OL
SENSE
FS
PWR
IN T R
CM D
M IC
LEGEND
ABBREVIA TlONS
SYSTEM
MESSAGES
('
Maintenance Library
Volume 2
CROSS
REFERENCE
3830-2
('
Volume 1
'
Storage Control, Model 2
c
(
(.
POWER
TDIAG
DATA
IFAULT SYSTEM
INDEX
C RL
MPL
MPL
CH L I
CT L I
T
CONTROL
23FD
ATTACHMENT
-
CHANNEL
INTERFACE
-
CONTROL
INTERFACE
ODUCTION
COMMANDS
ROPROGRAM
MICFL~~~~
LOC
I NST
INDEX
ATIONS
ALLATION
(
c'
(
t l t
t
,
SAFETY
CE SAFETY PRACTICES
CE-MLM Feedback forms are provided at the front of Volume ROI
for reader comments. If the forms have been removed, send your
comments to the address below.
;
This manual was prepared by the IBM Systems Development Division,
Product Publications, Department G24, San Jose, California 95114.
SAFETY
Be constantly aware of hazardous situations when working on the 3830-2 Storage Control. Take time to
review the CE safety practices listed below which have been reprinted from the pocket-size card available
from Mechanicsburg (Order No. S229-12641.
All Customer Engineers are expected to take every safety
precaution possible and observe the following safety practices while maintaining IBM equipment:
1. You should not work alone under hazardous conditions
or around equipment with dangerous voltage. Always
advise your manager if you MUST work alone.
2. Remove all power, ac and dc, when removing or assembling major components, working in immediate areas of
power supplies, performing mechanical inspection of power supplies, or installing changes in machine circuitry.
3. After turning off wall box power switch, lock it in the
Off position or tag it with a "Do Not Operate" tag, Form
229-1266. Pull power supply cord whenever possible.
4. When it is absolutely necessary to work on equipment
having exposed operating mechanical parts or exposed
live electrical circuitry anywhere in the machine, observe
the following precautions:
a. Another person familiar with power, off controls must
be in immediate vicinity.
b. Do not wear rings, wrist watches, chains, bracelets, or
metal cuff links.
c. Use only insulated pliers and screwdrivers.
d. Keep one hand in pocket.
e. When using test instruments, be certain that controls
are set correctly and that insulated probes of proper
capacity are used.
f. Avoid contacting ground potential (metal floor strips,
machine frames, etc.1. Use suitable rubber mats, purchased locally if necessary.
5. Wear safety glasses when:
a. Using a hammer to drive pins, riveting, staking, etc.
b. Power or hand drilling, reaming, grinding, etc.
c. Using spring hooks, attaching springs.
d. Soldering, wire cutting, removing steel bands.
e. Cleaning parts with solvents, sprays, cleaners, chemicals, etc.
f. Performing any other work that may be hazardous to
your eyes. REMEMBER - THEY ARE YOUR EYES.
6. Follow special safety instructions when performing specialized tasks, such as handling cathode ray tubes and extramely
high voltages. These instructions are outlined in CEMs
and the safety portion of the maintenance manuals.
7. Do not use solvents, chemicals, greases, or oils that have
not been approved by IBM.
8. Avoid using tools or test equipment that have not been approved by IBM.
9. Replace worn or broken tools and test equipment.
10. Lift by standing or pushing up with stronger leg musclesthis takes strain off back muscles. Do not lift any equipment or parts weighing over 60 pounds.
11. After maintenance, restore all safety devices, such as guards,
shields, signs, and grounding wires.
12. Each Customer Engineer is responsible to be certain that
no action on his part renders products unsafe or exposes
customer personnel to hazards.
13. Place removed machine covers in a safe out-of-the-way
place where no one can trip over them.
14. Ensure that all machine covers are in place before returning
machine to customer.
15. Always place CE tool kit away from walk areas where no
one can trip over it; for example, under desk or table.
16. AVOid touching moving mechanical parts when lubricalin~l.
checking for play, etc.
17. When using stroboscope, do not touch ANYTHING - it
may be moving.
18. AVOid wearing loose clothing that may be caught in machinery. Shirt sleeves must be left buttoned or rolled above
the elbow.
19. Ties must be tucked in shirt or have a tie clasp (preferably
nonconductive) approximately 3 inches from end. Tie
chains are not recommended.'
20. Before starting equipment, make certain fellow CEs and
customer personnel are not in a hazardous position,
21. Maintain good housekeeping in area of machine while performing and after completing maintenance.
Knowing safety rules is not enough.
An unsafe act will inevitably lead to an accident.
Use good judgment - eliminate unsafe acts.
ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
General Considerations
1. Start Immediately - Seconds Count
Do not move victim unless absolutely necessary to remove
from danger. Do not wait or look for help or stop to
loosen clothing, warm the victim, or apply stimulants.
2. Check Mouth for Obstructions
Remove foreign objects. Pull tongue forward.
3. Loosen Clothing - Keep Victim Warm
Take care of these items after victim is breathing by himself or when help is available.
4. Remain in Position
After victim revives, be ready to resume respiration if
necessary.
5. Call a Doctor
Have someone summon medicai'aid.
6. Don't Give Up
Continue without interruption until victim is breathing
without help or is certainly dead.
Rescue Breathing for Adults
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Place victim on his back immediately.
Clear throat of water, food, or foreign matter.
Tilt head back to open air passage.
Lift jaw up to keep tongue out of air passage.
Pinch nostrils to prevent air leakage when you blow.
Blow until you see chest rise.
Remove your lips and allow lungsto empty.
Listen for snoring and gurglings - signs of throat obstruction.
9. Repeat mouth to mouth breathing 10-20 times a minute.
Continue rescue breathing until victim breathes for himself.
Thumb and
finger positions
Final mouth-tomouth position
3830-2
SAFETY
©
"
.. .-
''to.
Copyright IBM Corporation t972, 1973
"
'\,
"
,--
J
/'
.'-
/
-~
,
-
-"
")",
,-
..J
I"
,-
.
j
"',
1''\
.,'
1-
... -
~t
!!ll;;",,_',
,
r
(
""
,
"
"I
(/
L~
C
(j
(
(
c c
c
(
(
'
(
.'
(
(
(.
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
PWR 1
Power
Power Supply Principles
Major Components
Power Sequence Box
Primary Power Control Box
Power Supplies and Regulators
Basic Power Sequencing Concepts
Power Failure Sensor
Indicator Lights
MPL File Power Control
Sequencing of Logic Gate Voltages
Reset Signel
Power-On Anti-Recycle Circuits
Power On/Off Sequence
PWR
Facility P_-Up Problem Analysis
PWR
Common Exit -
2
PWR
PWR
240
245
CP3 Trips I Fan Problem I
PWR
260
CP16 or CP17 Trips
PWR
270
3830-2 Missing or Out-Ot-Spec Voltages.
PWR
280
Distribution, Control Unit AC and DC
PWR
300
Distribution By Power Terminals
PWR
305
Power Sequencing Flo'Nehart
PWR
310
10
PWR
20
3830-2 Power Problem Analysis
PWR
30
CB2 Trips
PWR
40
CP5 -
Power Problem Analysis
CP12 Trips
PS7 Voltage Distribution .
PWR
46
3830-2 Power Supply Adjustment Procedure
PWR
50
Bulk 1 ICpal Power Problem
Bul k
Supply.
PWR
PWR
60
61
Bulk 2 (CP71 Power Problem
Bul k 2 Supply
PWR
PWR
70
71
CP4 Trips
PS15 Bias Supply Distribution
PWR
PWR
80
85
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION
Power Sequence Problem .
3830-2 Power Sequence Theory and Locations .
Voltages Present in Power Down Condition
Two Step Process to Produce Final Regulated Voltages
Power Supply Sequencing for CU Control Storage
Controlled Delay in 6V Supply to 1/0 Interfaces
Timer Operation for Power-Up Sequence Control and
Automatic Verification
Anti-Recycle Latch
Voltage to be Expected at the Output of a Relay Driver
Voltage Sequencing Logic
Control Module Power Sequencing.
PWR
PWR
100
105
Early 3830-2 Storage Control Units contained som e power
components that have been discontinued in later m achines.
The changeover took place with serial numbers 30000
(U.S.A.). 73-81000 (Germany). 97-20000 (Japan)
PWR
PWR
110
132
CP1 or CP2 Trips .
24V dc Distribution
PWR
PWR
135
140
CP6, 9, or 10 Trips
12V dc Regulator
PWR
PWR
150
155
CP15118 Trips _
Solid Trip
PS3 Voltage Distribution
Intermittent Trip
PWR
PWR
PWR
PWR
160
160
165
170
CP14 Trips
P54 Voltage Distribution
PWR
PWR
180
185
CP13 Trips .
PS5 Voltage Distribution .
PWR
PWR
200
205
CP11 Trips _
PS6 Voltage Distribution .
PWR
PWR
220
225
MPL File AC Control
~14_1:_7_D!_~_~_5-L
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation
1975
______
t
1
G- CP9
G-CP10
o
4 - - - CP6 - Early
CP6
Machines
Only
In this section, information pertaining specifically to one
level or the other is labeled "only for early machin es (with
CP7)" or "only for late machines (without CP7)"
~~
______
~
______
~
______
~
Machines can be identified (early/late) by opening the rightfront cover and observing the circuit protectors (C PsI as
shown here.
~
cr CPl
cr CP2
cr CP3
cr CP5
cr CP4
0
o
G-
I--- CP7
CP7
CPS
~
Early
Machines
Only
0
~
~
________L -____
~1 IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
CONTENTS
PWR 1
POWER SUPPLY PRINCIPLES
POWER SUPPL YPRINCIPLES
A 12-second delay degates the effect of PLD sensing during
power on.
•
Solid state sequencing with voltage sensing.
•
Relays and contactors control and distribute power.
•
Control modules are powered up sequentially.
•
MPL file is powered up by control unit and is powered up
and down by program control after system is operating.
•
Power is shut down if line disturbances are sufficient to
affect data integrity.
Indicator Lights
Three indicators signal fault conditions in the power area:
1. Power Supply Failure - CP tripped.
2. Power Supply Thermals.
3. Gate and Memory Thermals.
Indicators are latched on by fault signals. The first latch set
degates the other latches. Latches are reset manually (Test/
Reset switch) or by logic during power on.
MAJOR COMPONENTS
Major components are power sequence box, primary power
control box, power supplies, and regulators.
MPL File Power Control
AC and dc voltages to the MPL file are switched by relays.
AC is supplied by energizing K 10 and K 11. DC (+24, +6,
and -3V) is provided by energizing K6. These three relays
are energized by a control unit signal (+3V MPL File On,
VB 148) to the power sequence logic. This signal is activated
during the power-on sequence (MPL) or during execution of
program instructions requiring MPL file operation. The
MPL file is powered down when not in use.
Power Sequence Box (YB011)
In this enclosure reside all control circuit components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Time-elapsed meter and associated components.
Power system fault-indicating lights and Test/Reset switch.
Control circuit logic cards.
Control circu it 12V regu lator.
Control circuit fogic board.
Control relays.
PWR 2
Power-On Anti-Recycle Circuits
The anti-recycle latch prevents repeated unsuccessful power-on
attempts by the 3830-2. Power on is unsuccessful if a voltage
is low, a thermal is open or a CP is tripped.
The anti-recycle latch is initially reset off when K 1 is down
and no power-on signal is available from the stepping switch.
When the switch advances to select the 3830-2, K 1 is picked
to bring up power and set the anti-recycle latch. If a fault
now occurs, K 1 drops providing the final ANDing condition
with the anti-recycle latch to hold K 1 driver cut off.
If a tripped CP prevented power-up, reset the CP and try to
power up. To reinitiate power up, move Mode switch to a
CE position and operate CE panel Power switch. With ac
power on, the 3830-2 signals the system to advance the
stepping switch to the next subsystem. Now position
mode switch to Normal.
Power On/Off Sequence
Refer to PWR 310 for flowchart of power-on/off sequence.
Sequencing of Logic Gate Voltages
Primary Power Control Box (YBO 11)
Initially the following power supplies turn on:
1. PS5 (-3/+1.25V)
2. PS7 (-3V/+l.25V)
3. PS3 (-36V, early machines only)
This compartment contains ac control components:
1. Circuit breakers'and circuit protectors.
2. Main distributfon cireuit breakers.
3. Control unit main ac contactor.
4. MPL file contro~ ac relay.
Then power to the memory panel B3 (W1 in logics) is
applied in the following sequence:
Power Supplies and Regulators
1. PS7 (-3/+l.25V on initially)
2. PS6 (+3.5V)
Major power supplies and regulators are located in the front of
the control unit.
1. Two bulk supplies (one in later machines).
2. DC regu lators.
3. DC circuit protectors.
Finally +6V IPS 3) is turned on to the I/O channel.
Reset Signal
The function of this circuit is to check that the machine completes the power up sequence.
BASIC POWER SEQUENCING CONCEPTS
This check is achieved by starting a timer (K 1 hold delayed
by 12 seconds) with the pick (power-on) signal and checking
against selected points in the sequence circuit. If any of the
check signals have not changed to their normal on state in
the timing period, the 3830-2 is reset to the off condition.
Power Failure Sensor
The power failure sensor determines if the power line
disturbance (PLD) ride·through capability has been
exceeded and if all voltages are present.
This circuitwill also initiate power down sequence, after the
machine is fully sequenced up, if a check point reverts to its
off state.
The sensor monitors all bulk supply and bias supply output
voltages. The outputs form an OR which indicates when any
of the voltages dip below the specified tolerance levels. Any
voltage not within tolerance powers down the the subsystem.
447460
3830-2
'-.:~
".
'\.J
The circuit resets to the normal off condition ready for
another start cycle once the pick signal is removed.
1
19Dec75~______~~______- L______~~______~______~______~
© Copyright IBM Corporation '975
,":- -'.
r ""'., r ~"",
,"--y
''-J
'-.;
"-~
"-Ji
,.,---co"'' ' ,
,f· ""'~,
,,"-,J/
"'--.. fi
"-. ... Ji
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
POWER SUPPLY PRINCIPLES
L...,_ )
PWR 2
c:
,, C'-. ---'\, LP C-'
b
\
(
~..
':
'.,.,,/
FACI LITY POWER-UP PROBLEM ANALYSIS
PWR 20
~~////////////////////////////////////~
CHECK ERROR INDICATORS ON
~IDANGER
~~
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
~
~
~
PWR 10
FACILITY POWER-UP PROBLEM ANALYSIS
POWER SEQUENCE BOX BEFORE
POWERING UP. THIS IS BECAUSE
INDICATORS ARE RESET AUTO·
MATICAllY ON POWER UP.
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
,~
POIIible Fault Conditions:
START 10
---,I
I
'-----
,---I
I
___________ .1I
~//////////////////////////////////Q/.a
ASSUME THAT THE
3830-Z/DR I VE
FACILITY IS NOT AT
FAULT
Mllin Printed Cin:tlit Board
3830-2 Power Sequence Box
III
:OD9
@a
.....
•
:
!
~
!i ii !lii 11
::
!1 II
;;1:: ;;1 11
•
ii@)
i:
n
i l!Ij iiII iij1ii
Un
i
1. Unable to power up facility
2. System power sequence problem.
3. Bloweds) not running.
4. 3830-2 Power Sequence Panel
indicator lamps on. (Thermal
or CP failure).
5. System console message "Drive
Intervention Required" (when
a power problem is suspected).
6. Exit from non-PWR page without
repair.
0
.4
l1lil1li
CHECK FOR A VISIBLE PICK
CONDITION OF RELAY K4
REMOVE THE DUST COVER
BY SQUEEZING THE TOP
AND BOTTOM OF THE COVER
TO BOW OUT THE SIDES AS
•
YOU PULl.
MEASURE FOR CONTINUITY
ACROSS K4-3 (THESE ARE
UNUSED CONTACTS WITH
NO VOL TAGE).
MEASURE AT THE REAR OF
RELAY K4 BETWEEN THE
COMMON AND THE NORMALLY
OPEN CONTACTS.
00
Tabs
5-10
•
•••
••
CHECK FOR OPEN
o I ODE OR LAND
BETWEEN CONNECTOR
I-II AND K4 COIL
SIDE e AND REPAIR
•• ••
NO
REPLACE
CHECK 0 lODE TO
K4 COIL SIDE A
IYBIZOI
--,I
K4
I
Reer view of relays
K1 and K4
K4Sequence
Complete Relay
Test points
0
o
0
N/C
.0
0
N/O
Common
o
I
CPU LOG I C FOR
PROPER SYSTEM CPU
SEQUENCE STEP
SWITCH OPERATION
I
I
I
I
NO
4 3 2
0
CHECK THE SYSTEM
0
0
0
B
A
I
PWR ZO
I
I
I
REPLACE
I
YES
DIODE
I
I
I
Coil
I
I
I
lOR FORM THE
NTACTS. IF
CLEAN AND/OR FORM THE
K4-1 CONTACT (FOR
CONTROL S YSTEM I) OR
K4-2 CONTACT (FOR
USE SCOPE/METER
TO ISOLATE AND
REPAIR SYSTEM
CPU PROBLEM
KlOR~E~¢~RIF
FOUND TO BE
CONTROL SYSTEM 2).
UNABLE TO REPA I R.
REPLACE K4 RELAY.
GOOD, TEMPORARILY
IF
I
I
I
1
REPA I R LAND AND ORDER
NEW MAIN PRINTED
C I RCU IT BOARD.
J
~
PWR ZO
K1 AND K4 ARE
INTERCHANGEABLE
FOR TROUBLESHOOTING
PURPOSES.
SOUEEZE THE SIDES
OF THE RELAY AS
YOU PULL
AND THE COVER
I
----~
WILL STAY ON.
3830-2
FACILITY POWER-UP PROBLEM ANAL VSIS
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
PWR 10
v
c c
~c
-------
C' C
c
C'"
I"
~/
.'
COMMON EXIT - POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS
I'"
.~<
c
(,
COMMON EXIT - POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS
FIX VERIFICATION AND CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
(;-.
PWR 20
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~IDANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~
~
~
~'
~
8
in the power servicing area.
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized.
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
PAGES
ALL
~
~
~
~
~////////////////////////////////////h_~
VERIFY UNIT
POWERS UP
AND DOWN
CORRECTLY
A CHART OF NORMAL POWER UP AND
POWER DOWN SEQUENCES I S SHOWN
____ ON PWR 120 FOR THE CU.
A SIMPLIFIED LOGIC DIAGRAM OF THE
ENTI RE CU VOLTAGE SEQUENC I NG AREA
IS SHOWN ON PWR 110 AND 120.
YES
NO
WAS ANY COMPONENT
REPLACED OR ANY LOOSE
WIRING FOUND WHICH COULD
AFFECT vOl. TAGE AO,JUSTMENT
VERIFY THAT
CORRECT PATH
PWR
RE-INSTAll
10
ALL REMOVED
WAS FOLL.OWED ON
, COMPONENTS.
MAPS
JUMPERS, ETC.
RETURN ALL
SWITCHES TO
NORMAL.
RETRACE PATH
RETURN TO PAGE
SPEC I F I ED ABovE
RUN APPROPR I ATE
DIAGNOSTICS TO
ENSURE UNIT IS
OPERATING
PROPERLY.
OPEN PIN CONNECT IONS AND I OR LANDS
MAY ESULT IN ABNORMAL LOGIC VOLTAGE
LEV
S (FLOATING CONDITIONSI.
THE MAPS 0 I AGNOSE TROUBLE TO A
FIC C
ULT COULO BE A
OR OTH
IN THE
FROM THE CARD.
- C I RCU ITRY
NOTE THAT T
IYER MAY
INDICATE PR
LEVEL AT
I TS OUTPUT
WHEN THE
RELAY CIRCUIT T
V. DC SUPPLY
IS OPEN (SEE PWR
ND 120).
3830·2
COMMON EXIT - POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
PWR 20
3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS (PART 1 OF 21
3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (PART 10F 2)
START 15,
PWR 10
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
31
~
C
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
in the power servicing area
~
SAF ETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
o
~
THE RELATED
BLOWER IS
RUNNING
3830·2 CE PANEL)
DC READY LAMP
OFF
•
CHECK THE POWER
SEQUENCE I NO I CATOR
PANEL FOR THE
FOLLOW I NG ERROR
INDICATIONS
~/////////////////////////////////////..a
•
PWR
YES
~
B20R
•~C~S
SCHEMATIC SHOWN
ON PWR 31
YES
AT THE
RELATED FAN
CONNECTOR
NO
CP 1 OR CP 9
TRIPPED
~
See PWR 31 for component locations.
r ____________________
..
THE FAN
~
IS ON
INDICATOR
FAIL~ri~f~~~~TOR
AC INPUT POINT
TO THE RELATED
FAN
EXIT TO PAGE
CP 3TO FANS
PWR 260
YES
CP4TOPS 15
BIAS' SUPPLY
PWRBIl
CP 5 AC TO MPL filE
PWR45
CP 6 24V DC POWER
SEO (NOTE 11
PWR 150.
ENTRY A
AFTER APPROXIMATELY 15 SECONDS
TO 2 MINUTES AFTER POWER DOWN, A
FAILING THERMAL WILL NORMALLY
CLOSE AGAIN. ALLOWING THE UNIT
TO BE POWERED UP.
ATTEMPT TO
POWER UP UN I T
POWER
Y
!r_____
t
PlNR 70
CP8ACTO BULK 1
PWR 60
PWR 150,
ENTRY A
CP 11 TOPS6
PWR 220
CP12TOPS7
PWR 240
CP 13 TO PS 5
PWR 200
CP 14TOPS4
PWR 180
CP 15 TO PS 3
(+6V PORTION OF
DUAL PSI
PWR 160
CP 16 +6V PS (NOTE 1)
PWR 270
CP 17 -36V PS
(NOTE 1)
PWR 270
CP 18 TO PS 3 (-36V
PORTION OF DUAL
PSI (NOTE 11
PWR 160
OBST~~~T!
CU
POWER UP
(DC READY
LIGHT ON,
YES
FOUND
NO
IF THE CB.'CP IS
TRIPPED
EXIT TO
PAGE
CB 2 MAIN AC
POWER
PWR40
POWER DOWN, THEN
MOVE OPERATION
MODE SWITCH BACK TO
NORMAL AND POWER UP
FROM CPU
-.
NO
CP 2 TO
CONVENIENCE
I
CHECK FOR AN OPEN
THERMAL BY
MEASURING FOR THE
PRESENCE OF + 12V
ACROSS THE RELATED
THERMALS
r ______
GO
TO
NO~11i111l!111<''lfJl. ~~,
~NO~~C~Y~E~S
CHECK THE POINT· TO·
POINT INPUT WIRING OF
THERMALS FROM THE POWER
CIRCUIT BOARD
CONNECTORS FOR THE LOSS
OF +12V. CORRECT THE
PROBLEM IF NO PROBLEM
FOUND. REPLACE
CARD P A1Ol.
AN OPEN
THERMAL .AS
FOUND
.------------;.;.;;;c:
..
90 DEG F
(26DEG C)
PWR 20
YES
j
N-F-O-R-M-t:-~-:LIS-~-~-6-~-~M-y~-:-o-' '-v-I~-~-~-E-~-T-H~-~-~I-g-~-~-l-G-~O-~-o-'
____- ,
CONNECT A JUMPER
AROUND THE OPEN
THERMAL AND POWER
ON THE UNIT IF IT IS NOT
ALREADY ON
I
I
'-T-PRIOR TO JUMPERING PAST A
THERMAL, CHECK THEAREA IN
QUESTION FOR UNUSUAL AMOUNTS OF
HEAT DAMAGE. OPEN COVERS, DUCTS,
ETC. THAT ALLOW COOLING AIR TO
ESCAPE.
WHEN THE UNIT FEELS SUFFICIENTLY
COOL, BYPASS THE THERMAL IN
QUESTION TO ALLOW OR MAINTAIN
POWER UP FOR FURTHER TROUBLE
ISOLATION.
DO NOT LEAVE THE THERMAL
BYPASSED WITH POWER ON FOR
MORE THAN 5 MINUTES, OR UNTIL AN
ABNORMAL HEAT BUILDUP IS FELT
AGAIN (WHICH EVER OCCURS FIRST).
T
L OPE~~R~A~Tm
ING!
~o
IBM Y~!tALL
?~~
PLANNING REPRESE
IVE
IF THERE IS A CO
ING
CAPACITY PROBLEM H
NO
ON
-+I
CORRECT THE
PROBLEM
FOR LOGIC AND
STORAGE
CP 10 +24V DC POWER
SEO INOTE 21
Y.:.;E:;S:c
:>=E~S~______________________________________________
PWR31
CP 7 AC TQ BULK 2
fOR DRIVERS
(NOTE II
FOLLOW THE CB/CP
TRIPPED EXIT TO ANOTHER
PAGE ONLY IF THE CB/CP
REPEATEDLY (SOLIDLY)
TRIPS, OR IF FREQUENT
SERVICE CALLS ARE MADE
AT THIS INSTALLATION
FOR THE SAME CBICP
BEING TRIPPED.
PANELS. ETC.
sucg:~F~rL.
AND Tft Y TO POWER UP
LOCALLY
I N THE
D~T~flR~:og~~~
ATTEMPT TO RETURN THE UNIT TO
THE CUSTOMER. FOLLOW THE CP
TRIPPED EXIT TO ANOTHER PAGE
ONLY IF THE CP REPEATEDLY
(SOLIDLYI TRIPS OR IF FREOUENT
SERVICE CALLS ARE MADE AT THIS
INSTALLATION FOR THE SAME CP
BEING TRIPPED.
OPERAT I ON MODE
5WI TCH TO CE MODE
FOR AIR
OBSTRUCT! ONS
CP TRIPPED.
INITIALL V RESET TRIPPED CP AND
SWITCH THE
INITIALLY RESET
TRIPPED CB OR CP
AND ATTEMPT TO
POWER UP FROM CPU.
CHECK
0
ISON
IF THE CP IS
TRIPPED
NO
YES
CHECK
REPLACE.
~YE~S~~~S00~~~~EE~~~~N~O~---------------,
FAILURE
PWR 30
PWR 135
PWR 135
MOVE THE
OPERATION
MODE SWITCH
BACK TO NORMAL
.+______~
__
CP9t12VTO
PWR 150
POWER SEQUENCE
BOARD
_________....,
~g C821T~::t<@>·
. . POWE~ t~
START
COMPONENTS. REPLACE ANY
RUN
DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAMS TO
ENSURE PROPER OPERATION
SIGNAL PRESENl
AT PC 1 5
DAMA¥~~ ~~~~g~~~I~E
NO
•
I F NO HEAT'DAMAGE IS
N~~~~tJAEt~FAg.EI~~fl~~D
T:~r~D"HOERCTu~lt5~~~,bN
ATJ~~~~J~:fo~ER
METER PANEL
ROOMISBELOW90DEG.F.
'-~H-I~-~-~-N-l-j--~~J::b:~:G:~:~Af.~:~:R:;=='l
S~~~¢T6u
FORS~~5E
SIGNAL
(26 DEG. CI
CHECK THE POWER
SEQUENCE INDICATORS
BY OPERATING THE
POWER SEOUENCE
PANEL LAMP TEST
SWITCH
USE
SC
I SOL AT
T~~ES~ltHE
THIS LATCHES
THE LAMPS ON
AND LAMP
RESET Will
HAVE TO BE
PUSHED TO
TURN THEM
OFF
~.
K
PWR 31
M~e~~~
UP
SYSTEM.
~
TER TO
REPAIR.
NOTES:
1. Only for early machines (with CP 7).
2. Only for late machines (without CP 7).
CHECK K 1 PICK AND
HOLD PATHS THRU
CE NORMAL SWITCH.
REPAIR OPEN CKT
FROM PC1-5 THRU
SYSTEM STEP
SWITCH TO PC1 ..6
GO
TO
PWR 20
3830-2
3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANAL VSIS (PART 1 OF 21
© Copyright
PWR30
IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
o o
-"
;
"\
'.-
C
'./
Pc
L
.0"
C C C,:
(~I
C' C
'
..
-'
{,
(,",;
(~r
C
(
. ,
C' C C:
..
c)
c~
(:'
C.
.
"
C C C C C C C C C C C C' C C
,'-,':.;
3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (Part 2 of 2)
' '
-".,
,,'".1
3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANALYSIS (Part 2 of 21
PWR 31
~w///////////////////////////////////~
~"~DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~
~
I GNORE THE COND I TI ON OF THE
OR I VE REQUESTED POWER DOWN
INDICATOR. IT IS NOT
IONNECTED IN THE SUBSYSTEM.
~
in the power servicing area.
~
~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
~
~' SAFETY cannot be overemphasized, ~
~
~
~W////////////////////////////////.//.a
YES
.
ND
YBtOI
CHECK THE PO I NT TO
POINT WIRING OF' 24V
DC THROUGH CP • TO
TAB 5 BY ISOL.ATlON.
EITHER CORRECT THE
WI RING OR REPL.ACE
CP ••
CHECK THE
CUSTOMER'S
POWER PANEL FOR
A TRIPPED CB
REPL.ACE THE DC
READY INDICATOR
LAMP
PWR 20
PIS Thermals
C4HH»-_r____~®
T
MEASURE FOR
PROPER 3 PHASE
PRIMARY POWER
I NPUT TO THE CB
2 TERMINAL.S
PWR
PWR 20
141
-.
r~. . . . . . . . . . . .__A~. . . . . . . . . ._ _. .~,
+12V GatllMemory
®YB710®~:f.-_ _:~h_e_rm_.I_S~
EC2·F
~
EC2·E
YB160
YB100
YES
:~_)-+E.>Therma:a;mal
YB110®
...
GatelMemory Thermals
~>
~
+12V PS
......__.........."
~,. . . . . ._ _. . . . . . . .~*~
Sequence Logic P Gate
24V de Sequencing Supply
~
" " ' " , , . liT
~
~ fVT~s
~({j
Tabs 11-14
/
BOARD
......,....__·Tabs 19-21
Tabs 22-34
TURN OFF THE CUSTOMER' S
POWER PANEL CB AND THEN
DISCONNECT THE AC L.I NE
CORD FROM THE
CUSTOMER I 5 OUTLET.
MEA SURE FOR CONTI NU I TY
BETWEEN AL.L. PL.UG L.EADS
AND THE CB 2 TERM I NAL.S.
PIS Thermal
Failure
L.OCATED ON BACK WALL
•••• OF POWER SEQUENCE BOX.
(SEE PWR 1551
002
Gate and Memory
Thermal Failure
K7
K11
PS
Failure
CORRECT THE
LACK OF
CONTINUITY
FOUND
REPL.ACE
QI OR REPA IR
WIRING AS
NECESSARY
SEE PWR 501
FOR
••
PROCEDURE
I
AD.JUST + 12V
REGULATOR
PWR 20
*Only for early machines (with CP7)
**Only for late machines (without CP7)
3830·2
3830-2 POWER PROBLEM ANAYLSIS (Part 2 of 21
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 197="
PWR 31
CB2TRIPS
CB2 TRIPS
~~/////////////////////////#///////////////~
~
~
~
~
~
DANGER
LETHAL VOL TAGES are present
in the power servicing area.
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized.
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
PWR40
p
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~///////////////////////////////////////////.a:
Turn off main circuit breaker at customer's power panel before
plugging or unplugging the power plug. See general safety CEM
(metal clad plugs)
REMOVE WALL... PLUG
AND CHECK FOR
SHORTS BETWEEN
WIRES AND EACH WIRE
TO GROUND FROM CB2
SEE PWR 300 FOR DISTRIBUTION
NO
g~CK c~~~ ~p~ A~5tY
YES
CP 1 •
TR, ~p t NG WHEN t T SHOULO
tWELDED CONTA
C.I.
IF THIS FOUND
E
CP7 AND BULK PWA
SUPPLY 2 NOT USED
ON LATE MACHINES
~~9 S Cb~A~7~~
a
APPROPRIATE PAGE
THE F AUL T THAT C
DAMAGED CPo
REP A I R SHORT
Note 1
ETHE
FIND
SED THE
~------1~
6~ g~~. A~~2NO~P~ADt
PWR 160 -36V PS 3
REPLACE CB2.
Note 1
YB200
~-~>>---II"'~
Note 1
YB200
...
.-..-~»---t~
PWR 20
PWR 210 AND YA020
PWR 270 AND YA020
PWR 160 +6V PS 3
PWR 70
Note 1
1------111000 PWR 220 PS 6
Bulk 2 (Note 1)
YB100
Note 1
YB160 and YB202
Note 2 _
PWR60
PWR 240 PS 7
Bulk 1
YB100
1------1l1000 PWR 200 PS 5
YB160 and YB201
K8
3 Phase
PWR 180 PS4
+24V Supply
YB101
I - - - - - - - - - - - - - - t . , . PWR 135
Fans
YB10l
2 Phase
Notes:
1. Only for early machines (with CP1).
2. Only for late machines (without CP7).
3. Not used on late 60Hz machines.
YB160
1------1l1000 PWR 135
Use Meter
SCRID Lamps
PWR 260
YB110
t - - - - i Bias Supply PS 1 5 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - t 1 PWR 80
1 - - - - -... PWR 135
YB165
YB10l
~--------_-----. PWR 35
I---~ Convenience
Outlet. l15V lOA
1
23FD Control
YB100
PWR45
YBl80
3830·2
CB2 TRIPS
© Copyright IBM
"
j
"
t
/~
'.
Corpor~tion
("
1972, 1913
/~
"
\.~.j
;
~
""
"-..j
/~
'---..j
L'
/-"
~,
" "'
\~j
"'-
;!
;!
,,~j
/
~.,
"'--J
'-- ..,
",-j
PWR 40
C: C C C~.~' C C 'C C: C C' C Ci C,' C C; C
.
,
",'.'.:
'"
... " /
".
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before p_ring up machine.
_~
~
~
~
Z
~
~
~
~
~
Z
PWR
«
TB 11-7 YBI63
40
Tab 34
t~
TB 11-5 YB163
BE MADE WHILE IMPL SWITCH
K Tab 33
<~ Tab 28
LB 1-7 YB18S
YB121
REFERENCE DRAWING ON
THIS PAGE FOR
~L~
OV
Tab 26
+24V
APPROPRIATE CONTACT
LB 1-2 YBl85
TO CLEAN AND/OR FORM.
IF UNABLE TO REPAIR
REPLACE KG. IF NO K6
TROUBLE FOUND. USE
THIS ORAWING TO
CHECK OUT ANO REPAIR
WIRING.
~//H/////////////////////////////////..a
OV
K6-2
IS OPERATED
KTab 27
1~IATELY.
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
T1-TB 2-4 YBIOI
~T~I-~T~B~2~-2~Y~BI~0~1~«~T~ab~31~ ~-~>T~~~~~~r____
SeeMPL 1'Q tor MPL fite component locations
________
~
$ee·lOC 12 for tab locations
AC
YBI80
d 1-4 YBIl5
2
181-3
CB2
K8
~Yi~loo~------------~O----O------~~--~--------~~~~+-~ 3
L3
T3
LOGIC LEVELS
J2 IS THE BOTTOM
For Power Sequence Logic (P-A 1 Board
VBP.... t
forCt1",Y';;E;;'S_.....,
______---,
-I
CHECK INPUT WI RING F"ROM
3-PHASE PR I MARY BACK TO
CP e. REF"ERENCE SECOND
LEVEL DRAW I NG ON PWR
6 I. LOOK FOR SHORTS
BETWEEN LEADS AND EACH
LEAD TO GROUND.
ISEE NOTE 1.1
POWER UP THE
UNIT
1
1
CORRECT THE
PROBLEM F"OUND
YES
rb
~-
o
PWR 2
1
YES
WITH P
DO~~~ ~~P
NO
CP 8 TRIPS
GO
TO
PWR 20
ALL
CAPACITORS
MEASURE
NORMAL
t
REPLACE
BLOWN
CAPAC I TOR I S}
RECONNECT
~
•
I
~~~Ag: ~~RM~d~E C ~tROSS
EACH CAPACITOR WITH AN
OHMETER (X I OHM SCALE 1
I N BOTH 0 I RECTI ONS
LOOK I NG F"OR A SHORT OR
OPEN. A NORMAL CAPACITOR
WILL GIVE A CAPACITIVE
KICK FOLLOWED BY A
RETURN TO INF"lNITY.
REPLACE
NO
BLOWN
CAPAC I TORS
~=-----...,
TRIPS
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
YES
~NO~~(~Y~E~S~
FOUND
LABEL. THEN 0 I SCONNECT
THE SLI P ON CONNECTORS
TO F"ERRO-RESONANT
BLOWN
CAPAC I TORS
F"OUND
07,
~!~KC *~L~ Mg~N~DEK
'THE
NEAR PRE-LOAD RESISTORS
150 WATT I RI-R3}.
CT
PRIMARY P
I NPUT LEADS.
----'~------t'------------------~
REPLACE
_--=CNO~APA~T~ORS
.---
MEASURE
NORMAL
BAD RESI STDR I S} •
RECONNECT ALL
RESISTORS •
RECONNECT
REPLACE
ALL RES I STORS
BAD CAPACITORIS).
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
_ _....."..._ _....J
I
I
YES
~~~E~OL~~i~ N8 I fi8N~~~6s.
A. HEAT SINK 1 TO WI
IAT HEAT SINK}.
B. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY
COMMON 13 WIRES} TO
W2 I AT W2}. I REF"ERENCE
SECOND LEVEL DRAWl NG
ON PWR 611.
POWER UP THE
UNIT
~~~E~OL~~i~N8 I m~~7CT
A.
B.
C.
O.
~~~E~OL~~i~N8 I C~~~~7CT
"'.HEAT SiNK I TO WI IAT HEAl SINK}.
B. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON
13 WIRES} TO W2 IAT W2}.
C.HEAT SINK 2 TO W3 (AT HEAT SINK).
D. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON
13 WIRES} TO W4 IAT W4}.
E.HEAT SINK 3 TO W5 IAT HEAT SINK).
F" • TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY COMMON 13
FROM WI AND W2 TO RI.
F"ROM W3 AND W4 TO R2.
F"ROM W5 AND W6 TO R3.
REMOVE R4 FROM
CAPACITOR C12.
1
NO
CP
e
TRIPS
YES
POWER UP THE
UNIT
G.~ms~,~~ :6T6AtH~6\;}
REPLACE
SIDE OF" CI2 IAT CI2).
H. TRANSF"ORMER SECONDARY
COMMON 13 WI RES} TO THE
I-I SIDE OF" CI2 IAT CI2}.
BAD
CAPACITORIS}
6
MEASURE ACROSS
R I -R3 F"OR 5 OHMS
+/- 10%. MEASURE
ACROSS R4 F"OR 50
OHMS +/- 5X.
THE UNIT WILL NOT POWER
UP NORMALLY AT THIS POINT,
BUT WILL ST A Y UP LONG ENOUGH
IMINIMUM OF" 12 SECONDS}
F"OR A CP TRIP CONDiTION TO
~~g~~SA~~ ~~A~b~~:E~n
BE MADE.
TO
GO
TO
PWR 20
NO
CP 8 TRIPS
ES
PWR 64
A
GO
TO
Note 1:
PWR 20
Note 2:
For troubleshooting, e short is considered 0-1 ohm.
Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts.
Bulk 1 TBt is located on the Bulk t supply.
PWR 62
E
PWR 63
3830-2
BULK 1 (CPS) POWER PROBLEM (PART 1 OF 6)
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978
\
/
PWR60
C-
P("
(- L.
C,'"
(/
, ,
"
c
C (:
.. -"'
(
c: c
(:.
BULK 1 (CP 8) POWER PROBLEM (Part 2 of 6)
BULK 1 (CP-II POWER PROBLEM
SEE LOC 6,B, and 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATION
•••~.~
~BULK1SUPPLY~.~~~
L
T1 Secondaries
CRI
WI
CPI3
-AIA2810
A
Phase
I
Diode Soldered--'
Connectlons
.
CB2
K8
CP8
~
~----------o
L1
-10
Phase
I
-9
I ~--o-~--~~
I
SINK
I
beck wall of bulk
_mbly on aarly
machina.. R ..istor
mounted across bu.
tarminals on lata
machin...
CR6
CR9
TB1
88
P-AIE1Jll
EI
hm
"
HEAT
Pri mary Power
Control Box
PWR 61
..-,.~.... \
Primary
CR4
c: c
+
I
VB100/PWR 40
~"
"~~1~~~~m~.MM(No.1'
k
l:p-erroresonant T r a n s f o r m e r '
itij A Connection
CR3
Input
AC Line
Filter
C'
"Bulk 1 Dual 5.3V min to .nlor (Note1)
P-AIE1JIO
,......tCH!"';-- EI
CR8
To PS7
T1
I
I
I
-+...-0------0
'S Pha.e
Q.
C
2
L2
~
91
TB1
-6-5
I
~
a.
--...l.-
C
I') Pha.e
3
L3
On lat. machine••
I °n--o--o--ol2f-1~\\.)
SINK
4
L - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _------ EI
A6
A
C C C
P-A I A2D02 P-A I EI DO,
T2 Secondaries
Ferroresonant Transformer T2
t:. Connection
Phase
I
.'
"Bulk 2 + 4,5 minimum to sensor
BULK 2 SUPPLY
Input
AC line
Filter
('.
--L
C
3
l3
No.2
o
Gnd
TBl
-2
CR31
-I
T3
No. I
AC Gnd Bus
Bll
II
II
II
A,B
~+--------~~+--E3
L-~~~;t::~~~==t=~_'~~
ToPS3
40.5 to 47,5V Unreg DC
PWR 160
~
~--------------++-~Frame
Ground
~
CR32
YB160
and
YB202
~:>-.:.;;.;..---=~- E11
~~:}If'
A,B
Cl2
A,B
To PS3
Cl3
P·A1A2B08 P·A1E1J09
A,B
'-4I,.;..;:.:;--.......:j~-bI--N
CR35
• Bulk 2 - 39.4V Minimum to Sensor
CR36
VB115
Ii!
L..._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...:+t-_ T810- 10
R7
:,:;:i
40.5 to 47.5V Unreg DC
PWR270
CPI7
~-"""---TalO-3
'These lines normally have the bulk voltage outputs
shown, The minimum value indicated in the line name
is what the sensor requires to consider bulk supolies
normal. PLD sensor card on YB145,
3830-2
ONLV FOR EARLV MACHINES IWITH Cn)
PWR 71
BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBI,.EM (PART 3 OF 51
BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBLEM (Part 30f5)
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
A Iter replacing any capacitor.
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
.~
•
SEE PWA 71 FOR VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION.
,
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
DOWN
R
DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT
D~W~ha~D
SEE BOX ON PWR 73:
"CHECKING POWER DIODES."
,
MEASURE
CR25-CR36
SHORTS OR
.1
THE LEADS FROM W' AND
WIO TO Rb AND R7. (R6
ANO R1 CONNECTIONS ON
AND WID ARE AT C2b.1
LEADS FROM
AND
TO R5. (THE R5
CONNECTION ON W1
ANO W8 IS AT CI9).
.8
S•
SEE lOC 6, 8, AND 10 FOR
COMPONENT LOCATIONS.
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
1
~/////////////////////////////////////..a
•
~
DANGER
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
PWR 72
••
-r
1
YES
REPLACE
BAD OIODE(SI.
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
,
CHECK F"OR THE F"DLLOWI NG
HIGH RESISTANCE SHORTS
TO F"RAME GROUND:
SINKS 5 AND &
UNO.
SOLDERED
CTION OF" DIODES
CR36 TO GROUND.
MEASURE ACROSS R6
MEASURE ACROSS R5
FOR 4.5 TO 5.5 OHM
(5 OHM +/- 101).
ALSO CHECK FOR
SHORTS TO GROUND.
(SEE NOTE 1.1
AND R7 FOR 95.TO
105 OHM EACH (tOO
OHM
5%1. ALSO
GROUND.
(SEE NOTE 1.1
NO~YES
r
VALUE CORRECT
,~
NO
RESISTOR
VALUES
CORRECT
YES
REPLACE
REPLACE
THE BAD
RESISTOR
R5
PWR 20
"/~
CHECK FOR SHORTS TO
CHECK THAT THE MACHINE
60 HZ ONLY.
~~~ cgG~~'
~a~~. YBt60,
VOLTAGE RATING TAG,
INPUT VOLTAGE MEASURED.
AND THE FOLLOW' HG
JUMPERS ARE IN
AGREEMENT:
••
.8
INPUT
VOLTAGE
l+/-IO'U
JUMPERS AT
BULK 2 182
ZOOV AC
2-4,6-8,IQ-12
220V AC
Z301
2-3.6-1,10-1'
zoel
REMOVE
REMOVE THE W1
ANO
BUS BARS
FROM C16-C19
AND WID BUS
BARS FROM
CZ4-CZ6.
RECONNECT
RECONNECT LEADS
TO W9 AND WIO
LEADS TO W1 ANO
we
235v AC
MEASURE ACROSS EACH
CAPAC I TOR FOR A SHORT.
A NORMAL CAPAC I TOR WI LL
GIVE A CAPACITIVE KICK
THEN RETURN TO I NF I N I TY
IN EACH DIRECTION ON
THE X I OHM SCALE.
YES
POWER UP THE
UNIT
MEASURE ACROSS EACH
CAPAC I TOR FOR A SHORT.
A NORMAL CAPAC ITOR WI LL
GIVE A CAPACITIVE KICK
F"DLLOWED BY A RETURN TO
INF"INITY IN EACH
D I RECTI ON ON THE • I OHM
SCALE.
POWER UP THE
UNIT
NO
MEASURE ~HE 3 PHASE
INPUT VOLTAGE
ACROSS BULK 2 TB2-2
CHECK THE
APPRQPR lATE
TRANSF"ORMER
SECONDAR I ES F"OR
F"RA YEO OR SHORTEO
WIRING
TI) T82-6, T8Z-2 TO
TB2;:6 0 tB~':'? 0 :BZ-6
CORRECT THE SHORTED
HEAT SINK.
RECONNECT ALL INPUT
LEADS TO THE W BUS
BARS.
POWER NUS T BE
DOWN
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
POWER MUST 8E
DOWN
DOWN
THIS MAY HAVE TO BE
MEASURED DURING A
PA~TlAl POWER UP
CYCLE IBEFORE TIME
OUlI
<6>'"
REPLACE
CP 1 TRIPS
THE SHORTED
CAPAC ITOR I S I
FOUND
NO
YES
CP 1
0'"
REPLACE
CP 1 TRIPS
DANGER
THE SHORTED
CAPACITORISI
FOUNO
NO
REINSTALL
FIX THE WIRE
INSULATION.
RECONNECT ALL
I NPUT LEADS TO
THE W BUS BARS,
REINSTALL
W1 AND W8 BUS
BARS
W9 ANO WIO BUS
BARS
sm.
TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY
(T2A A ~~~~H~~
ARE
RECONNECT ALL INPUT
LEADS TO THE W BUS
BARS.
REPLACE
CORRECT
JUMPERS ON T82
REF"ERENCE THE INST
SECTION OF THIS
MANUAL TO CHECK
THAT OTHER
TRANSFORMERS ARE
WIRED CORREcn Y F"OR
THIS INPUT VOLTAGE.
RECONNECT
RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
ALL LEADS
~
TO
Pw.A 20
GO
TO
PWR 2Q
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
Note 1: For troubleshooting. a short is considered 0-1 ohm.
Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts.
383()'2
ONLY FOR EARLY MACHINES (WITH CP7)
~ PW R 72
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
J 0 0
r\
V
0 0 0 0 0
0)
V
0
,-,' 0
I
,
0
",--y
0 0 0 0 0 () '-,Y
;r'~
"
'<...,
!
,..-..\
i
)
"""----'
~
j
,r
"
fr
"
~,
"-
;.
",--- ""
y
;.
.-
"'".-
/
j
,
.,>,
}
\ ....
Of
",j
(::
p
L
('"
'-'
('~
(:,
c;
(j (~
(',/
C'
C
(-~"
('
(\ ('
-:,1
(/ (,/
C:
C' C\ C
('
,_./
",;.-;/
,',)
(~
..
.v
C C:
(,~.
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
C C: C C' C C C C
"""J
BULK 2 ICP7) POWER PROBLEM IPART 4 OF 5)
BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBLEM (Part 4 of 5)
~~////////////////////////////////////~
c:'
..
PWR 73
PWR 70
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area,
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
Z
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
CHECKING POWER DIODES
A QUICK CHECK FOR SHORTED DIODES
CAN BE MADE WITH THE CE TEST LAMP.
IT I S NOT NECESSARY TO 0 I SCONNECT
~~~oe~gD~~6MB¥~PS!~~I~~~T
BE
BE
POWER MUST BE:
DOWN.
HOLD THE TEST L
AND
TO
eKED.
ACT
SHOR
TRA
THE
THE L
WITH INPUT LEADS .9
AND WID STILL
THE ABOVE TEST DOES NOT CHECK FOR
OPEN DIODES. OPEN DIODES AND MOST
OTHER I RREGULAR I TI ES CAN BE
DETECTED WITH POWER ON BY
OBSERV I NG THE REel I F' I ER OUTPUT
WAVEFORM ON AN OSCILLOSCOPE.
WITH INPUT LEADS TO
W7 AND W8 ST ILL
gI6g~~~m~~R~~~8~
SHORTS OR OPENS.
ob?gg~~g~~~ !C~~~CK
FOR SHORT S OR OPENS
CAUTION;
00 NOT OPER It. TE POWER SUPPLY WI TH
CAPAC I TORS OR LOAD 0 I SCONNECTEO.
SUSPECT 01
AN BE GIVEN A FINAL
CHECK BY 0
ECT I NG THEM FROM THE
SURING FORWARD AND
HEAT SINK
BACK RES I S
I TH AN OHMMETER.
FORWARD RE
E SHOULO BE QU I TE
LOW I COMPA
A KNOWN GOOD
DIODEI. BA
RESISTANCE SHOULD BE
HIGH. SUT NOT INFINITE.
YES
REPAIR
TRANSFORMER
SECONDAR I ES FOR
FRAYEO OR SHORTEO
WIRING.
THE SHORTED HEAT
SINK. RECONNECT THE
I NPUT LEADS TO W7
AND W8.
YES
DANGER
YES
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
REPAIR
RECONNECT
I NPUT LEADS TO
W7 AND W8.
RECONNECT
I NPUT LEADS TO
W7 AND W8.
WIRE INSULATION.
RECONNECT THE INPUT
LEADS TO W7 AND W8.
NO
TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY.
I T2A l ~~~~H~~D S~~: I ARE
RECONNECT I NPUT LEADS
TO W7 AND W8.
SHORTED HEAT SINK.
RECONNECT INPUT
LEADS TO W9 AND
WIO.
TRANSFORMER
SECONDAR I ES FOR
FRAYED OR SHORTED
WIRING
LABEL AND DISCONNECT
PWR 20
THE FOLLOW I NG LEADS:
I. HEAT SINK 6 TO .9
IAT W91.
2. TRANSFORMER
SECONDARY COMMON ('3
WIRES) TO WIO (AT WtOI.
THE UNIT WILL NOT
POWER UP NORMALLY AT
THIS POINT. BUT WILL
STAY UP LONG ENOUGH
IMINIMUM OF 12
SECONDS I FOR A CP
TRIP CONDITION TO
~~~u~Ec~~sI2lLLOW
MEASUREMENT TO BE
MADE.
REFER TO THE
SECOND LEVEL
DRAWING ON
PWR 11
PWR 20
PWR 20
I NPUT LEADS TO
W9 ANO WIO
CHECK
IN ORDER OF FAILURE
PROBABILITY 1
I. CP7 TRIPPING WITHOUT
EXCESS I VE CURRENT.
2. A~~A~s~g~M~~5RnAtoB.
GROUND OR WINDINGS.
YES
SCOPE OR METER
ISOLATE AND REPAIR
PROBLEM. THEN
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
POWER UP THE
UNIT
REPAIR
WIRE INSULATION.
RECONNECT INPUT
LEADS W9 AND WIO.
TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY
IT2Al ~~~~H~~DSH:I ARE
RECONNECT I NPUT LEADS
TO W9 AND Wl0.
Note 1: For troubleshooting, a short is considered 0-1 ohm.
Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts.
PWR 12
PWR 20
3830-2
ONLV FOR EARL V MACHINES IWITH CP7)
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
~ PWR 73
8000
()
00
o
0. ·.·.
10
J
o
r-··",
\.j)
,r-"
~)
"
,
".
y
--
'.
.>
--
,
'.
'. . ,-_?'
.
.'"
.../
,,-
'"i
-------"
.....
c'
~(
..
<=
c
(-, (,j
C,:1 (/ ("'; ("
'",1'"
(
(-
(', (
(,'
(
(~
(0
C C C·
...
(~
("
"~
C (' (' C'
'-'-
BULK 2 (CP7) POWER PROBLEM (Part 5 of 5)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
C C C
c:
PWR 74
110
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present ~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
.~
PWR 11
I
OURING A POWER UP
MEASURE
THE BULK 2 OUTPUT IN QUt. S T I ON
FOR THE PROPER OUTPUT:
BULK 2
OUTPUT TO:
DANGER
I. PS3(+bV
SECTIONI
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
MEASURE:
.'(+1
we
TO
(-I
LABEL AND 0 I SCONNECT
THE PROPER SET OF LEADS FOR THE
8ULK 2 OUTPUT I N QUEST ION:
VALUE:
BULK 2
OUTPUT
TO:
10.& TO
t2.4V DC
A.
40.5 TO
41.5V DC
CHECK
THE FOLLOW JNG CAPAC I TORS
FOR 8LOWN OUT VENT CAPS:
•
t • C 16-C 19 ANO C.24-C2&
(LOCATED UNDER/OR NEAR
THE • W' BUS BARS THAT
TIE THE CAPAC I TORS
TOGETHERt.
2. e21 -C23 I MOUNTED ON
THE 8ACK WALL OF BULK
2 NEAR PRE-LOAD
RESISTORS ,50 WATTI
RI-R3 AND R5-Rll.
SEE LOC 6. 8. AND 10 FOR
COMPONENT LOCATIONS
SEE PWR 71 FOR VOL TAGE
DISTRIBUTION
eYCLE~
l
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
~/////////////////////////////////////..a
•
(:
BULK 2 (CP71 POWER PROBLEM (PART 5 OF 51
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
c:
0 I SCQNNECT LEADS
(REF PWR 11):
CPI5
AND CPI6
8.CPt1
AND cPle
LA8EL
I.
HEAT SINK 5 TO W1
,AT .1).
2. TR ANSFORMER SECONDAR Y
COMMON (THREE WIRE S I
TO W8 (AT W81.
I.HEATSINK&TOW9
IAT W91.
2. TRANSFORMER SECONDARY
COMMON (THREE W'RESI
TO W10 (AT Wl01.
AND 0 I SCONNECT
SL I P-ON CONNECTORS
AT
AND
CZth':ZZ
MEASURE THESE
CAPAC I TORS FOR SHORTS
OR OPENS. A NORMAL
CAPACITOR WILL GIVE A
'CAPACITIVE KICK'
FOLLOWED BY A RETURN TO
INFINITY IN 80TH
DIRECTIONS ON THE XI
OHM SCALE.
YES
CHECK
SEE BOX ON PWR 73
"CHECKING POWER DIODES."
FOR AN OPEN CP WITHOuT
vISI8LE INDICATION.
AL SO CHECK FOR AN
OUTPUT WI RING PROBLEM
I N THE POWER SUPPL Y OR
SENSING LOGIC.
BULK 2 OUTPUT TO:
MEASURE DIODES:
A.
e.
CRZS-CR30
CR3t-CR3b
CPt!> AND CPI&
CPI1 AND CPl8
REPLACE
THE BLOWN
CAPAC I TOR
MEA SURE THE INPUT
THREE PHASE VOLTAGE
ACROSS BULK 2 T82-2
TO T8 2-&, T8 2-2
TO .2~:
THIS MAY HAVE TO
BE MEASURED DURING
A PARTIAL POWER UP
CYCLE (BEFORE TIMEOUT!
~o I ~B ~~? 0 TB
REPA IR
OR REPLACE AS
NECESSARY
PWR 20
60 HZ ONLY. FOR 50
HZ, SEE LOGIC PAGES
YB 160. YB202.
YES
BAD
CAPAC I TOR,S I •
j
NO
CHECK THAT THE MACHINE VOLTAGE
RATING TAG, INPUT VOLTAGE MEASURED,
AND THE ~OLLOWI NG JUMPERS ARE IN
AGREEMENT:
•
--
INPUT VOLTAGE
( +1011
JUMPERS AT BULK
...:Z~T::B";Z::""'_ _ _ _ _
PWR 20
RECONNECT
I
ALL LEADS
10-12
10-11
10-9
200V AC
208/220v
230/235v
BAD OIODEISI
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
PWR 20
FOR THE BULK 2 OUTPUT I N QUE S T ION.
DISCONNECT THE PROPER SET O~
CAPAC I TORS THEN MEASURE FOR
SHORTS OR OPENS:
RECONNECT
YES
BULK 2
OUTPUT TO:
LEADS TO
CAPAC 1 TORS Cll,
C22 AND C23
A.
CPI!>
MEASURE
ACROSS
0 I SCONNECT
EACH
(REF PWR 7 I I: CAPAC I TOR'
REMOVE Wl BUS
FROM CAPAC I TOR
BANK
CPI&
Clb-CI9
B. CPt1
CP 18
I
REMovE W9 8US
C24-C2&
F'ROM CAPAC 1 TOR
BANK
A NORMAL CAPAC I TOR WI LL Ci I VE A
• CAPAC I T I VE KICK' rOLLOWEO BY A
RETURN TO INFINITY IN 80TH
DIRECT IONS ON THE X I OHM SCALE
FOR THE BULK 2 OUTPUT IN QUESTION.
01 SCONNEC T AND MEA SURE THE PROPER
PRE-LOAD RES I STaRS I
BULK
OUTPUT
0 I SCONNECT
~ RESISTOR;
(REF PWR 111: OHM VALUE;
CORRECT JUMPERS
ON BULK TB 2
A.
Z
CPI5
CP I &
R5
LEADS AT
W1 AND we
4.5-5.5
8. CPI1
CPI8
REFERENCE THE INS T
SECT I ON OF' TH I S
MANUAL TO CHECK
THAT OTHER
TRANSFORMERS ARE
WI REO CORRECTLY ~OR
THIS INPUT VOLTAGE
NO
RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
REPLACE
BAD CAPAC I TOR,S I •
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
PWR 20
REPLACE
GO
TO
TRANSFORMER
ASSEMBLY. 1 T2A,
T28, AND T2C ARE A
MATCHED SET!.
BAD PRE -LOAD
RESISTORISI
PWR 20
447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation
1975
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ONLY FOR EARLY MACHINES (WITH CP71
~ PWR 74
,
"
CP4 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 61
CP4 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 6)
PWR 80
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES arc present
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
in the power servicing area.
Z
SAFETY cannot be overemphasIzed. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reInstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
DANGER
CP 4 TRIPS.
PS
POWER MUS T BE
15 81AS SUPPLY
PROBLEM.
PWR
'00.1
2, 0,
~OWN.
eo. 190.200
30.240 I 250
LA8EL AND DISCONNECT
~/////////////////////////////////////..a
JUMPER OR LEADS AT THE
FOLLOW I NG POWER
SUPPLIES:
PS 4, E 1 2 . LEAD
PS 5, £8 TO Fll JUMPER,
PS €:I, E12ILEAD)
PS 7, faTOE11 (JUMPER I
NORMALLY A
O~FERRED
MA I NTENANCE
CAl.L
f\J'
• SH t Of; 10 HJH C()MPON~
L OCA r IONS
• SllPr'IHHblf)H!XffHt-JA! f:IHCljll
ANIJ I OC;A TlONS
MEASURE THE PS 15
OUTPU1S FOR A READINC
OF FROM lb. b TO 24 vDC
AT:
TB
TB
TB
TB
2-1
2-3
2-5
2-1
,.,
'"
TO
TO
TO
Hl
TB
TB
T8
T8
2-2
2-'
2-6
2-6
LABEL AND 0 I SCONNECT
THE FOLLOWlNCi OU-TPUT
LEADS AT PS 15:
I-I
I-I
I-I
I-I
TB 2-1
TB 2-3
T8 2-5
TB 2-1
UNIT WILL NOT POWER
UP NORMALLY AT THIS
PO I NT, BUT YOU ARE
LOOKING FOR A CP 4
TRIP CONDITION ONLY
DANGER
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
PWR 90
LABEL AND REMOYE
OR BOTH
JUMPER AT PS 5, E8
TO Ell. DISCONNECT
LEAD AT PS
2-3
15, T8
8
T8 2-8 ONLY
lOR YOU
ARR I YEO HERE
FROM PIR
240, PS11
PQWE R UP UNlT
TB 2-3 TO T8 2-4 ONLY
lOR YOU ARR I vEO HERE FROM
PWR 200, PS5 I
DANGER
(NOTE 1,)
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
DANGER
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
LABEL AND
DANGER
POWER MU S T BE
DOWN.
LABEL AND REMovE
LABEL AND REMOVE
POWER UP UNIT
(NOTE 1.)
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
...JUMPER AT P5 5, EB
TO Ell. 01 SCONNECT
LEAD AT PS IS, TB
2-3
LEAD AT PS6,
E 12, DISCONNECT
LEAD AT PS 15,
T82·5
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
REPLACE
PS
15
PWR 20
POWE R UP UN IT
(NOTE 1.1
PWR 93
Note 1: Unit will not power up normally at this point, but
should remain up long enough to make the required
measurement.
3830·2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation
· 0:,0,,·,
O
,
,-',.'
CP4 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 61
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
PWR 80
1975
o
00 0 0 0
A
.~
(~
~
0
0,
0
0 0 0
"
;t=,,\
.
~j
,
"
",'""
i..
1
»
,~
''-_.'
i
r
""
>
(
"
'\.J
'"
"
_J"
:1)"
~'..
..
,/
.."
~
.....~.
f
"--
')"
(
(
(/'
(
(
(
(.'
(~/ (
(
(/
(~
(/
(
(
(
(
(:
(
(:
,.
c
'CP4 TRIPS (Part 2 of 6)
PRIMARY POWER CONTROL BOX
YB100
K8
CP4
PS 15 Bias Supply
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
(',
(,'
I
~
TB 1-10
H---o~I--o:.~.::.oo--crJ
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
.~
I
3 Phase I
AC Input I
I
TB2-2
YB165
"
Turn on of PS under \
control of the Pwr
Sequencing klgic
..
.0,
Aux Contact
for PS CP Trip
Indicator
EI2
(E9
(YBI48)
PS4
(EIO
P-A IA2BI2
1-'-o:~-.:.T::(B1)--2=--.:.:TB~I...:-3:'-'-~~=---4-_4-o
PWR 85
YBnO
turn on
(-)
-<::
(
-(Gnd level)
(+)
I
~/////////////////////////////////////...a
,-
A.
Comman
\~\
I
(~
(
PS15 BIAS SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
PS15 BIAS SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
~ DANGER
(,
+7V dc
P-A I EIB02 PlD
Sensar
(YBI45)
Card
• Raw Bias 12V
min to Sensar
200/208V
2 ac Tap
220/230/330V
ac Tap
04 235/408V
acTap
3~~~----------------C
4~~~---------------,[-
AC Gnd
CP9, 10,6
PS 15
Bias Supply
16.6-24V de
(nominal'" 18V de)
(at TB2 terminals)
PS 4
El$
..c
'"
'"iOc
<
~
<
a
;:;
g
..
.a.
~
a
<
'i
~
n
<
a
if
(9
'i
--
n
II
a.
SE2
El$
7
8
0
72 J 1
0
•<<
SeeN ote 1
a
.
'"
!•
i
Sl
!l
a.
Jl
HS
.Ill
~!!l!1
a
$
E15$
(E9
(EIO
PS6
+2.2V de
0
SE4 $E15
E2S
n
0
(-)
A
E14 E12
-(Gnd level)
turn on
E14
E13
E12
Ell
EIO
E9
E8
E7
E6
E5
PS6
SEI
E3S
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SE3
E15$ E4&
E5
E6
E7
EB
E9
EIO
Ell
E12
E13
E14
6
A
(+)
0
~
0
;
PS5
5
Auta-tu rnon
Jumpers
~
$
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
~
E3S
E5
E6
E7
EB
E9
EIO
Ell
E12
E13
E14
~~
SE4 $E15
E2S
Turn on of PS under
control of the Pwr
Sequencing Logic
t.
n
~
a.
i
!
...iO
..Sla.
n
(9
(9
'---
SEJ
So
SEI
--
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E14
E13
E12
Ell
EIO
E9
EB
I E7
I E6
I E5
0
(+)
A
(E14
(-)
Ell
PS 7
-3V/+l.25V de
J....
• This line normally has the bias
voltage of + 16.6 to 24 Vdc.
The minimum value in the line
name (+ 12V) is what the sensar
requires to consider the bias
supply normal.
0
PS 7
Power Supplies are physically inverted on left and right sides
Note 1: Overvoltage card not present if power
supplies at EC 716230 or later.
1447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
© Capyright IBM Corporation 1975
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
PS15 BIAS SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION
PWR 85
c
CP4 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 6)
CP4 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 6)
~~//////H////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
•
'~
G
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
Z
Alter replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall a" SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
~
DANGER
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
PowER MUST BE
DOWN
<;?'"
TRIPS
REMOVE THE
REGULATOR
CAROtSl FROM PS
NO
~/////////////////////////////////////..a
•
eo
PWR
~
~
PWR90
DANGER
POwER MUS T BE
DOWN-
SEE LOC 10 FOR
COMPONENT LOCATIONS .
SEE PWR 85 FOR
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT
ANO LOCATIONS.
-
ISEE NOTE 31
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER UP UN I T
ISEE NOTE 21
CP 4 TRIPS
THE LEAO AT PS 15,
TB 2-3. CONNECT THE
JUMPER AT PS 5. E8
TO Ell
THEN 01 SCONNECT THE
AC INPUT LEADS AT
PS 15 (T8 I J • I SEE
PWR 85 FOR TERM 1NAL
LOCATIONS.)
NO
1
OANGER
POWER UP UN I T
LABEL
YES
L
!
DOWN
DANGER
POWER UF' UN I T
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
ISEE NOTE 21
CP 4 TRIPS
CP 4 STILL
~~~~ ~6N~~CP tH~B
NO
TRIPS
NO
P WR '91
DANGER
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
TO CHECK THE AC
INPUT WIRING FROM
PS 15 BAt;:t<. TO CP 4
9
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REMOVE THE
REGULATORCARD IS) FROM PS
4
ISEE NOTE 31
REMOVE THE
REGULATOR
CARD I 5) FROM PS
5
ISEE NOTE 31
POWER UP UN I T
POWER UP .UN I T
ISEE NOTE 21
iSEE NOTE 21
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CHECK
REPLACE
PS· 15
LEADS AT PS 15.
RECONNEC TALL
LEAOS I JUMPERS THAT WERE
DISCONNECTED ON PS 4,
5, 6, AND 1
CORRECT THE
PROBLEM FOUND
CP 4 TRIPS
NO
1
NO
~.
CURRENT IN
PS 1S
TB 2-1
AND
B 2-2
MEASURES
WITHIN
SPEC
t
DANGER
1
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
RECONNECT
POwER MUST BE
DOWN
YES
YES
1
I
REPLACE
REGULATOR
CAROtSI IN PS 4
ISEE NOTE 31
REGULATOR
CAROISI IN PS 5
ISEE NOTE 31
-~
1
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
1
PS 5
ADJUST
PS REGULATOR
AFFECTED
I
PWR 20
,"0
REPLACE
PS 4
TO
LEAD AT PS 15. TB
2·7. CONNECT THE
JUMPER AT PS 7.
EB TO Ell.
CURRENT IN
PS 15 t TB 2-3
MEASURES
WITHIN
SPEC
I
1
REPLACE
RECONNECT
~
~
1
REPLACE
ALL LEADS
1
Note 3: Some power supplies have two cards
(one a regulator, the other overvoltage). If
there are two cards in the power supply remove them both. If the measurement comes
within specifications, insert one card at a
tlmp. until the shorted card is found.
DANGER
RECONNECT
powER MUST BE
DOWN
1
PWR 91
I
I
ISEE NOTE 21
Note 2: Unit will not power up normally at
this point, but should remein up long enough
to make the required measurement or observe
a CPUip.
1
OANGER
TO GROUND IF NO
FAULT FOUND
REPLACE CP 4
ISEE NOTE 1.1
POWER UP UNI T
K
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
9
DANGER
(fARD~H..t'NHd m~\m~
DANGER
Note 1: For troubleshooting, a short is considered 0-1 ohm.
REGULATOR
CAROlS) IN PS 1
ISEE NOTE 31
1
REPLACE PS 1
~~:~
1
YES
REGULATOR
CAROlS) IN PS 6
IsEE NOTE 31
NO
DANGER
PS •
I
SCOPE IMETER
RECONNECT
THE LEAT AT Ps 15.
TB 2·5. CONNECT THE
LEAD AT PS6. EI2
REPLACE
CURRENT IN
PS 15 t TB 2-1
AND
B 2-8
MEASURES
WITHIN
SPEC
1
YES
2
!
~
REPLACE
REPLACE
LEAD AT PS 4, EI2
J
YES
YES
1
1
RECONNECT
YES
ISEE NOTE 21
~
CURRENT IN
PS 15 t TB 2-5
AND
B 2-6
MEASURES
WITHIN
SPEC
NO
PWR 91
POWER MUST BE
ISEE NOTE 21
POWER UP UN I T
POWER UP UN 1T
ISH NOTE 21
YB b.5
RECONNECT
REMOVE THE
RECiULATOR
CAROtSl IN PS 1
ISEE NOTE 31
6
OANGER
-(§
-
-
E
!'r.B :,0
I
TO
PWR 20
3830-2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
/447460
19 Dec 75
CP4 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 6)
UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
PWR 90
@Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
J 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 () 0
.'
.
.
.
0 0
,
.') V
~
0 0 0 0
;r'~,
('.
\.j
"-Y
r,
\-..]
~,
I
jl
:0
"'-.y
/"'
.
.,.
"...- ,.
j
~1
,
/
..i
~"'.
JI
.......!~
.;
)i
\~I
~~-------
(
(/ (
(
(-
(
( ..
(
C
(~.
(-"
("
,...../
('
("
C
(~-
(
(~
(.
(~
"
C-
('
(
,.
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~~W//////////////////////////////////~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
.
Z
SAFETY cannot be overemphasIzed. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
Alter replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
LABEL.
THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE
FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS
5:
I. E8 TO Ell I,JUMPER I
4:
2. EI4
3. E7 FRQM PS
2. E9
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
LABEL
LABEL
THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE
FOLLOW INC LEAOS AT PS
&:
I. EI4 T~.E~~.IJUMPER).
15
THEN DISCONNECT THE
FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS7
1. Ell TO E8IJUMPER)
2. El'
3. E7TO PS 15
,
3. El0.
SEE lOC 10 FOR COMPONENTS
•
LOCATIONS .
SEE PWR 85 FOR EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT AND LOCATIONS.
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
POWE R uP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
"g'n~H~~~I,T
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
~
~
~~:~5
DANGER
SCOPE/METER
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
TO
IN THE WIR INC
TO I SOLATE A SHORT
IN THE WIRING
BETWEEN PS I 5, T8
2-3 AND TB 2-4 AND
PS 5, E7 AND E14
PS 4, E9 AND EID
RECONNECT
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REMOVE
CHECK FOR A
SHORT BETWEEN
LEADS AND EACH
LEAD TO GROUND
ISEE NOTE 3.1
REGULATOR
CAROlS} IN PS 4
ISEE NOTE 2.1
DANGER
RECONNECT
DANGER
LEADS AT PS 4,
LEADS AT PS
E14, EJi I E8
YES
~llll
SCOPE /METER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
I SOLA TE A SHORT
BETWEEN PS 15, 18
2-1 AND T8 2-2 AND
EI2, E9, EIO
,
TRIPS
TRIPS
~o
CHECK FOR A
SHORT BETWEEN
LEADS AND EACH
LEAD TO GROUND
ISH NOTE 3)
REMOVE
REGULATOR
CAROlS} IN PS 5
ISEE NOTE 2.1
~~!n
SCO PE/METER
,
oANGER
E~18h~~~
TO
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REGULATOR
CARDIS) IN PS 6
ISEE NOTE 2.1
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
PROBLEM FOUND
~
RECONNECT
YES
CP 4
TRIPS
ALL LEADS
NO
~.
PROBLEM FOUND.
CP 4
TR IPS
TO
REPLACE
REGULATOR
CARDISI IN PS 4
ISEE NOTE 2.)
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
PWR 20
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
CHECK FOR A
SHORT BETWEEN
LEADS AND EACH
LEAD TO GROUND
ISEE NOTE 3.)
REMOVE
REGULATOR
CAROlS} IN PS 7
ISEE NOTE 21
1
DANGER
REGULATOR
c,~~F~b\-~
is)
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
5
CORRECT
RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
ALL LEADS
~.
PWR 20
DOWN
REPLACE
,~
r
•
REPLACE
PWR 20
AD.JUST
PS REGULA TOR
AFFECTED
~
TO
PWR 20
3830-2
447460
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation
1915
-~
PWA 50
1
RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
-~
TO
1
REPLACE
PS
PWR 20
1
I
PS 5
I
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REGULATOR
CAROlS} IN PS 7
ISEE NOTE 2.1
REPLACE
I
,
DANGER
NO
PS b
PS 4
PROBLEM FOUNO
YES
CP 4 TR IPS
TO
REGULATOR
CAROlS} IN PS 6
ISEE NOTE 2}
REPLACE
REPLACE
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
1
RECONNECT
TO
REPLACE
ORREeT
PROB LEM FOUND
POWER MUST BE
,
DANGER
1
I--""';C
I SOLATE A SHORT
IN THE WIR INCi
1
o
CORRECT
~m~
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
LEADS AT PS 1
Ell t EI4, AND
El
J
CH ECK FOR A
SHD RT BETWEEN
LEA DSAND EACH
LEA TO GROUND
IS EE NOTE 3.1
REMOVE
l
SCOPE/METER
BETWEEN PS 15, T8
2-1 AND T8 2-8 AND
PS 1, £ 1 AND E 14
RECONNECT
POWE R MUST BE
DOWN
LEADS AT PS &
, ~~'"
~
DANGER
TO I SOL ATE A SHORT
IN THE WIRINCi
BETWEE N PS 15. TB
2-5 AND T8 2-& AND
PS b. E 9, AND E I O.
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
RECONNECT
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CORRECT
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
PWR 91
1
LABEL
I. EI2
(
DANGER
THEN 0 I SCONNECT THE
FOLLOW. NG LEADS AT PS
3. El0
(~-
9
DANGER
DANGER
~/////////////////////////////////////M:
•
(~
CP4 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 61
CP4 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 6)
~ DANGER
(,
('-
Note 1: The unit will not power up normally at this point, but
you are looking for a CP 4 trip condition only_
Note 2: SOme power supplies have two cards (one a regulator,
the other overvoltllf/ll).
1fthere are two cards in the power supply, remove
them both. If the CP stops tripping, insert one at a time
untiI the shorted card is found.
Note 3: For troubleshooting, a short is considered 0- 1 ohms.
Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
PWR 50
I
ADJUST
PS REGULATOR
AFFECTED
~
TO
PWR 20
CP4 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 61
PWR 91
'CP4 TRIPS (PART 5 OF 6)
CP4 TRIPS (PART 5 OF 61
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
PWR 92
P
~
A
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
A Iter replacing any capacitor.
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
CHECK THE MACH I NE
VOLTAGE RATING TAG TO
J
CHECK THE PS 15 INPUT
VOL T AGE AS F'OLLOWS;
r
________________
ND~YES
r-----~'< MEASUREMENTS
REvERSED
VOLTAGE
CHE:CK
At: I '
~
'"
230V
10 I
I +/- lOt.I INPUT VOLTAGE
AGREE 5 WITH THE MACH I NE
VOLTAGE RATING TAG AND
DANGER
CBl TERMINALS
,...______
0,
INFORM THE
USE THE PROPER
CURRENT PROBE FOR
THE SCOPE YOU HAVE.
THE MAX I MUM CURRENT
MEASURED SHOULD BE
0.7 AMPS OC A
MORE THAN O. 7
PIP AC SUPER I
FOR A PEAK C
0.74 AMPS.
YES
>-=------------,
MEASURE PS 15 f S OUTPUT
CURRENT AS FOLLOWS I
MEASURE THE CURRENT IN
EACH OUTPUT LEAD;
TB 2-1.
TB 2-4,
TB 2-1,
AGREE
CHANGE THE
INPUT TAPS ON
PS 15. T8 1 TO
YES
AGREE WITH THE
I NPUT VOLTAGE
SCOPE/METER
CUSTOMER
THE
I MPROPER INPUT
VOL T AGE TO THE
UNIT
~
ATI~gLf~gEAND
t6N~fCr mN~
N~O~~VOL+~~~TTO
CU WITHIN
SPEC
"
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
CONTROL UNIT AT
CP 4
CHECK THAT THE 208/230Y
VA
loa
REPLACE
YES
VB . .
>-=----_,
INPUT TO THE
PS 15 OUTPUTS WITH A
TB
TB
TB
TB
~ND~I~C~V~E~S----_,
.'THIN SPEC
MEASURE THE ,OLLOW I NG
SCOPE FOR A MAX I MUM
RIPPLE OF O.IiIV PIP:
THE PROPER CONNECTI ON
AT PS 15, T8 I
VA
1:1\1 .J III
.'.Hl .J(ltl
208Y AC t 187.2V-228.8Y)
OR T8 '-I TO T8 1-3230
v AC 1207.0V-253.0Y)
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
• SEE LOC 10 FOR COMPONENT LOCATIONS.
• SEE PWR 85 FOR EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT AND LOCATIONS.
I ".. ~{
PS 15 T8 I - I TO T8 '-2
DETERMINE THE INPUT
.----VOLTAGE OF THIS MACHINE
REFER TO THE I NST
SECTI ON OF' TH I S
MANUAL TO CHECK
THAT THE OTHER
VOL T AGE TAPS ARE
CORRECT ,OR TH IS
INPUT VOLTAGE
TO ISOLATE THE
CHANGE I N VOLTAGE
,ROM THE INPUT
LINES TO PS 15
CORRECT
NO
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REPLACE
REPLACE
CHANGE THE
CONNECT 1ON ON PS
PS
Act6~DI~c~
PS 15
15
.17TH
C,EALD PAGE YB 165
RE,ER TO THE IN5T
SECTION OF" THIS
MANUAL TO CHECK
THA T THE OTHER
VOLT AGE TAPS ARE
CORRECT ,OR TH IS
I NPUT VOL T AGE
PROBLEM F'OUND
DANGER
DANGER
DANGER
RECONNECT
PWR 20
ALL LEADS
PWR 90
PWR 90
GO
TO
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
19 Dec 75
3830·2
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
'V COPYright IBM Corporation 1975
::) 0
o o
""'--
...
(r'h
"j
o
~
,
'
""j
,,,~
~J
CP4 TRIPS (PART 5 OF 61
PWR92
;'''''
U
---'
(-
c'
c
C·.'"
C:
.
CP4 TRIPS (PART 6 OF 6)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
DANGER
OANG[R
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUS T 8E
DOWN
POWER MUS T 8E
DOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
RECONNECT
RECONNECT
RECONNECT
1
1
RECONNECT
THE LEAD AT PS
15, TB 2-5
THE LEAD AT PS
15. T8 2- 1
THE LEAD AT PS
15. T8 2- r
THE LEAD AT PS
15, T8 2-5
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
1
1
• SEE LOC 10 FOR COMPON~ N1 U)CATIONS
• SEE PWR 85 FOR E:.XHRNAl
CIRCUIT AND LOCATIONS
LABEL
LABEL
LABEL
THEN OISCONNECT THE
FOLLOW I NG LEADS AT
THEN 0 I SCONNETC
FOLLOW I NG LEADS
PS 6:
I . E9.
5.
2. E' O.
2.
E1
I
1. E 14.
LEAD FROM PS
ONLY I
THEN D I SCUNNEC T THE
FOLLOWING LEADS AT PS
T.
I . E' 4.
2. £7 lLEAD FROM PS 15
ONLY 1.
LABEL
TH EN DISCONNECT THE
FOL LOWING LEADS AT PS
PS 4:
I. E9.
5
THE
AT
2. E' O.
1
1
.~
2-1
2-2
1+'
I - I
TO 18
BETWEEN
I ~~In"""'~
SCOPE IMETER
TO ISOLATE A SHOR
I
DOWN
1 AND T8 ') ') AND
PS~ EHANf) E 10
1
DANGER
RECONNECT
PS 4 LEADS
POWER MUST BE
El2. ~r6 AND
DOWN
1
i~ ~'IM£ tB~l-t'~m
,
PS 15, T8 'J 3 AND
fB 2 4 AND PS 5, E 7
REMOVE
RESISTANCl:
SHORT Hl:TWl:l:N
LE ADS AND EACH
HAD TO (,ROUND
REGULATOR
CARDtS) IN PS 4
(SEE NOTE 2 I
J
1
CORRECT
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
t
REPLACE
.s2
Note 2:
Note 3:
Some power supplies have two cards (one a
regulator, the other overvoltage). If there are
two cards in the power supply, remove them
both. If the measurement comes within specifications, insert one at a time until the shorted
card is found.
For troubleshooting, a short is considered O· 1 oh m.
Ensure meter is zeroed before checking for shorts.
447460
3830·2
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
20
PS 15, TB
YES
2- I (+ I TO TB
' " 2-2 I-I BETWEEN
16.6 TO 24.0V
DC
REGULATOR
CARD!S) IN PS 4
(SEE NOTE 2.1
L
NO
DANGER
PS 5 LEADS E' 4 ,
E7, AND £8 TO
EI' I JUMPERJ •
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
REMOVE
CHECK FOR A HIGH
RESISTANCE
SHORT BETWEEN
LEADS AND EACH
LEAD TO GROUND
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
THE FOLLOWING LEADS
PS 6:
,. E9.
2. E 10.
3. E I 2 TO E I 4
REGULATOR
CARD lSI IN PS 5
ISEE NOTE 2.1
REMOVE
REGULATOR
CARDISI IN PS 6
ISEE NOTE 2.1
REPLACE
PS 4
I
RECONNECT
DANGER
FOLLOWING LEADS AT
PS 1;
El' I EI4, AND ET
POWER MUST BE
DDWN
1
CHECK FOR A HIGH
RESISTANCE
SHORT BETWEEN
LEADS AND EACH
LEAD TO GROUND
REMOVE
REGULATOR
CARolSl IN PS I
(SEE NOH?)
1
POWEA UP UNIT
!SEE NOTE U
PROBLEM FOUND
1
CDRRECT
CDRRECT
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1 )
PRDBLEM FOUND
P()WtH UP lINIT
jSEf NOH II
PROBLEM FOUND
1
RECONNECT
RECONNECT
ALL LEADS.
ALL LEADS
RECONNECT
YES
ALL LEAOS
YES
t
.s2
REPLACE
REPLACE
REGULATOR
CARD IS) IN PS 5
ISEE NOTE 2.1
REGULATDR
CARDIS) IN PS 6
!SEE NOTE 2.1
20
I
AD.JUST
PS REGULATOR
AFFECTED
~
{!
EE
PWR
50
s2,
REGULATOR
CARDIS) IN PS 7
(SEE NOTE") I
PWR
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
20
ADJUST
REPLACE
REPLACE
NO
TO
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MU S T BE
DOWN
2_~T+:5toT~B
' " 2-81-1 BETWEEN
16.6 TO 24.0V
DC
REPLACE
PWR 20
1
1
1
AT
I JUMPER I •
1
PWR
I
DANGER
1
TO
DANGER
YES
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
ISOLATE A SHORT
IN THE WIRING
BETWEEN PS , 5. TB
2-1 AND T8 2-8 AND
PS 7. E 7 AND E' 4
1
ALL LEADS
PWR
RECONNECT
TO
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
1
CHECK FOR A HIGH
RESISTANCE
SHORT BETWEEN
U:ADS AND EACH
LEAD Tr GROUND
1
RECONNECT
Unit will not power up normally at this point,
but should remain up long enough to make
the required measurement.
TO I SDLATE A SHORT
IN THE WIRING
BETWEEN PS 15, T8
2-5 AND TB 2-6 AND
PS 6, E9 AND EIO
CORRECT
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
PROBLEM FOUND
TO
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
RECONNECT
DANGER
1
CHf.CK f- OR A HI{iH
2-7(+1 to T8
2-8(-1 8ETWEEN
SCOPE/METER
SCOPE/METER
AND E 14
(SEE NOTE 3.1
~NOTE31
~
I~~:n~
~~:n""""
I
POWER MUST BE
,
NO
YES
YES
DANGER
IN WIRING BETWEEN
PS 15. IH
}
P()\\Il: A UP UN' r
ISH NOH 1 \
POWER UP UNIT
(SEE NOTE 1 )
POWE:H UP UN' r
ISEE NOTE I I
P()Wl H UP UNIT
ISH- NOH 1 I
NO
PWR 93
'9
~o
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized, ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor.
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
bclore powering up machine,
_~
Note 1:
~
CP4 TRIPS (PART 6 OF 61
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
r
,
PS b
PS REGULATOR
AFFECTED
-
1!E
PWR
50
1
REPLACE
PS
T
PS 5
~
~
TO
TD
PWR 20
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNeLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
CP4 TRIPS (PART 6 OF 61
PWR 93
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM IPART 1 OF 71
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (PART 1 OF 7)
PWR 100
~~W//////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
Alter replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
P
o
CHECK FOR THE FOLLOW I NG
MINIMUM BULK 1 DC VOLTAGE
LEVELS AT THESE PO, NTS:
MINIMUM
VOLTAGE
•
PS
PS
PS
PS
2 ... 5.311
3. .. 5. 3v
4.
+IO.4Y
1
5
6
•
TURN ALI. OR I vE
START /STOP
SWITCHES TO
STOP
~/////////////////////////////////////~
•
MEA SUREMENT OUTPUT
PO 'NT
TO
I . . . 5.311
SEE PWR 105 FOR COMPONENT
AND TERMINAL LOCATIONS
PARENTHETICAL INFORMA nON
BENEATH DECISION BLOCK
IS LINE NAME
ATTEMPT TO POWER UP
THE CU WITH
OPERATOR CU POWER
ON SW, TCH ON METER
PANEL
1I.1EASURE" FOR THE
FOLLOWING LEVELS AT
THE POWER SEOUENCING
lOGIC BOARD PAl THE
REOUESTED LEVEL
SHOULD OCCUR SOll.1ETII\lE
PRIOR TO THE 8 1\1
SECOND TURN Of- F
PO\\'E R UP EACH TIPo.1E:.
AND t\lEASURE FOR THE:
REOUESTED LEVEL
PRESS POWER OFF"
CHECK FOR THE FOLLOW I NG
MINIMUM DC VOLTAGE LEVELS
AT THESE POINTS;
MINIMUM
VOLTAGE
I.
Z.
MEASUREMENT
OUTPUT TO
POINT
P53 .. DRIVES
.. bl/ SECTION
-3bV SECTION
+ 8.91/
-39.41/
"-8IT4
WITH THE POWER
SEQUENCE PANEL
LAMP TEST JRESE
SII TCH PUSHEO
TO TEST
REPLACE CARD
A-B2S2
P-AIOI
THE LIGHT WilL
EITHER STAY ON
PEAMANENTL Y OR WI LL
TURN OFF AFTER 8 19
SECONDS
REPLACE CARD
\+INOICATQR TEST SWITCHI
P-A1BI
REPLACE
LAMP TEST
SWITCH
REPLACE
THE FOLLOWING
LEVELS SHOULD OCCUR
DURING THE LAST 0,7
SECOND OF THE TIME
DELAY
P-AIFI
J,
\.7
PWR 20
P-AIEI
PUSH THE CE
PANEL CLOCK
RESET ILAMP TEST
PUSH-BUTTON
REPLACE
P-AIOI
PWR 31
P-AIOI
I
SCOPE
{-K2 PICKEDI
MEASURE FOR THE
FOLLOW I NG LEVELS AT
E 'THER THE POWER
SEQUENC ,NG LOG' C BOARD
P-AI OR THE AI GATE.
Note 1: Logic Levels
For power sequence logic (P·A 1 Board YB pages) a plus (+)
level equals + 2 to + 12V dc. A minus level equals ground
to +O.29V dc. Any exceptions to this will be indicated in
the flowchart decision block.
REPLACE
YOU MAY HAVE TO WA IT
INt TI ALLY POWER ING ON
TO SEE 'F THE OES' REO
LEVEL HAS OCCURRED.
P-A I C2
P-AIDI
(SENSOR REF
IIOL T "GE .. 5 • ql/ OC)
FOR
Note 2: When operating normally; this line will be minus (gnd) with
power off. On pushing power on and when K8 is heard
picking, the line will go plus for an instant and then go minus
to turn on the power supply. When power off is pushed, the
line will go plus until K8 is heard dropping, at that time the
line will slowly decay to a minus (gnd) level over approximately a five (5) second period,
(+TURN ON +bV
110 CHL INTE.F-........- - ' ' -_ _- ,
REPLACE CARO
REPLACE CARD
P-A1DI
P-AIBI
19 Dec 75
REPLACE
REPLACE
P-AIEI
P-AISI
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
3830-2
OPEN FROM
P,A1C2B03 TO PSG
EI2
YES
UP TO 20 SEC AFTER
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM IPART 1 OF 11
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
PWR 100
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
/'
1 0 0 0., 0 0 0
.
~
,'..
\.'-
-:-.=~-:-
rr)).
l.J
"-
"c~·1
0
0
0'" 0""
,
,
"
o
()
~~,
(,_J
',.
,,-r",,,
'-. j/
j/
\
)I
j'
'"'-_/
"--
j'
--"
-';
"
'-
,
"
(
.....
(~."
,/
"
C'·'
(- ( . .' C"
"
..
,
/
.,.:v·
./
'.
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 2 of 7)
3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE THEORY AND LOCATIONS
3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE
THEORY AND LOCATIONS
Controlled Delay in 6V
Supply
As long as the control unit is connected to the ac supply
source and circuit breakers are normal, 24V dc and 12V dc
are available at the power sequencing logic panel.
The 6V dc supply to the channel interface is turned
on only when: (1) bulk supply voltage outputs are normal,
PS 4 is up, and all thermals are normal; and (2) approxi·
mately 12 seconds delay has elapsed following initiation
of start sequence.
Two Step Process to Produce
Final Regulated Voltages
Power supply regulators PS 4, PS 5, PS 6, and PS 7 each
have terminals which are used for on-off control of the
individual supply. When these terminals are jumpered
together, normal output voltage is produced. When the
connection between the terminals is removed, output
voltage goes to zero. Voltage turn on of PS4 and PS 6 is
accomplished remotely by connecting the terminals
together with a relay driver-type circuit located in the
power sequencing logic area. Power supply regulator PS 3
differs from the other regulators in its method of turn
onlturn off. In this supply, a particular terminal must be
grounded to remove the output voltage. The supply is
remotely turned on by opening the ground connection to
the terminal with a relay driver-type circuit located in
the sequencing logic area.
Turn on terminals for power supply regulators PS 5 and
PS 7 are permanently jumpered at the supply itself.
The output ofthese supplies is dependent on the bulk
supplies, which are controlled by a contactor in the ac
line (K8).
Power Supply Seq~encing
for CU Control Storage
Contactor K8 applies ac to the inputs of the bulk supplies.
The output voltage of PS 7 begins to rise as its bulk
voltage input rises. When the voltage reaches a certain level,
a special voltage sensing circuit turns PS 6 on (-3/+1.25V dcl.
1447460
19Dec75
© Copyright
IBM Corporation 1975
PWR 105
P-A1A1
TabS-[
1-4
Conn 1
K2
The power supply area produces accurately controlled
voltages in a two step process. Bulk supplies 1 and 2
produce six partially regulated dc voltage outputs at
levels considerably higher than eventually required.
Several highly accurate voltage regulator units (referred
to in the diagrams as PS 3, PS 5, PS 6, etc.) produce
final regulated voltages from the bulk voltage outputs.
3830·2
c c c-(,
C'.",
c c
Timer Operation for Power-Up Sequence
Control and Automatic Verification
The principal events in the power up sequencing of the
control unit are controlled by a timer consisting of two
delay units in series. The timing action is initiated by
the closure of the K 1-1 points.
Kl0
K8
Kll
TBl
CP7"
The first output of the timer occurs after a delay of
approximately 12 seconds. This output allows turn on
of the 6V supply (which supplies the channel interface
area). The second output occurs approximately 0.7
seconds later. It tests for presence of all bulk supply
voltages and 6V dc. This test is even more comprehensive
in that the turn on of the 6V supply is contingent upon
proper output of other power supplies and thermal contact
conditions. The DC Ready (to control unit) light on the CE
panel is also turned on at this time if voltage output and
other conditions appear to be normal in the power area.
• ••
Conn 2
CP8
Tabs
15-18
23FD
AC Control
Board (Triad
Anti-Recycle Latch
R1
(early machines)
The anti·recycle flip-flop is set each time the system
power on stepper switch initiates a power on sequence.
It remains set until the stepper switch contacts open.
When K1 drops, it cannot be picked up again until the
anti-recycle flip-flop is reset. This reset occurs only when
the stepper switch contacts open.
Power Sequence Box
Voltage to be Expected at
the Output of a Relay Driver
The output of a relay driver circuit will measure: (1) ground
if the driver is in the "on" condition or the relay circuit
itself is open (therefore no 24Vl. or (2) 24V if the driver
is in the "off" condition and the relay circuit is complete
to the 24V source.
Test/Reset
Switch
T1-TB2 - - - - - "Not on late machines.
Relay
Functions
Kl
K2
K3A
Power up sequence pick relay
Power up sequence hold relay
Auxiliary power up sequencing complete
relay, (with two channel switch addition)
Facility power up sequencing complete relay
EPO control relay
MPL File dc relay
AC to cconvenlence outlet
Distribute ac to control unit
MPL file K11 controller relay
AC to MPL file
Use Meter controller (41 V ac to use met"rI
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
K10
K11
K13
Coil Logic
Page
Contact
Logic Page
Logic Card
Position
Function/Logic Page
YB120
YB120
YB12l
YB120
YB120
YB121
P-A1A1
P·A1B1
12V dc regulator (YB143)
12 and 12,7 second timers, 6V sensor (YB146)
YB120
YB120
YB120
YB120
YB120
YB120
YB120
YB121
YB120
YB120
YB121
YB101
YB100
YB100
YB120
YB121
P-A1C2
P-A1D1
P-A1E1
P·A1Fl
Memory power sequencing (YB144)
Power sequencing condition control (YB140and 141)
PLD sensor card (YB145)
Indicator driver card (YB142)
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
3830-2 POWER SEQUENCE THEORY AND LOCATIONS
PWR 105
.~.,--~---.----.-
-
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 3 of 7)
~ This diagram is intended lor instruction only.
VOLTAGE SEQUENCING LOGIC
~
~~w//////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
NOTES:
1. Cards shown on th is page are located
in Frame 01, Gate-P, Board Al
Q/////////////////////////////////////....0
Bulk 1 CP 12 +5.3V min to Sensor*
Jl0
A2B07Bulk 1 CP 13 +5.3V min to Sensor*
Jll
Logic
Page
Al
Bl
C2
Dl
El
Fl
YBI43
YBI46
YBI44
YBI40-YBI41
YB145
YB142
•
B02
X
J04
+5.9V
Ref
[
YB163*
YB165**
~
~lK*
1
o
D13
Tab 14
/.
+MPL PwrOn From CU (3V) Y8121
.....
A1BOa
,., I
12V Supply
PC
12V de
....
System Pwr-On
Relay(s)
(Points in Parallel)
K5
Gate "Mem Thermals
Conn 1-5 ~
CP Auxiliaries
Conn 1-7
Pwr Supply Thermals
Conn 1-3 ~
+K I Hold
-K2 Picked
Operation
Mode Switch
L....._-!-..
CE Panel
~
EC I-H
KI-l
Co:,~
Pwr-Off
.E_C_l_-_F+-----c(LJ.-...Ct--....._+-2-<-
PC 1-5
~Meter
r
~
EC4-G
Pwr-On
l
K5-2
L
AR101 B-A1E6D06'
F2D12YB149 P-A 1 F2D12* *
Panel
EC 4-F
o
A2DI2
A2D06
A2DI3
JIO -Turn On 23 FD
A(!DC
F2D02
X~D~0~7_ _ _~_ _ _ _~
Pulse Gen
r
PC 1-6
o
EC 3-H
***~
11
To System No.1
PC 1-4 Step Signal
System Pwr-On
Step Switches
(Points in Parallel)
K2-3
G07 -Pwr lherm Norm
P"'''-'---''.''-''-L~ AR
Allow K I Pick F2D04
X D07
CU
Controller
Ka
Tab 6 n-TB2-3
802
+3VDC
Ready to CU
23FD
Tob4 23FDKll AC
Contlol
23FDDC
Relay
A
A
F2D13
X __D~0~7_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- .
~-"""!-'~~
Control Circuit Board
Tab 17
Goa -Control Gnd
K6
K
II
8
Tab 13
YB121
I-=-=:.......:....:==-!.....:..::.-=--=---~~
YB120
A1B07 Note 1
DII
KI
Normal
YB131
F2811
A2813
8
~ P~C.~I_--:C--+I-_E-EC_I---B--~Y~8~10NO~~O
Tab I
Power-On Sequence Timer
~ ~M~--
Conn 1-12
~J~0~7_tT~u~rn~0~n~6~V~F~o~r-.~~~
I/O Ch Inlfe
F2Dl0
D07
['0-...,1
Conn
I-II
I-I
'----41-<
-K 1 Hold
Hold
Relo
A
*Only for early mancines (with CP7).
**Only for late machines (without CP7).
"'2 Channel additional only.
1800
I
.---------~~---~
Tab 7 Tl-TB2-4 n-TB2-3
PWR 120
Produces 2 sec Delay
In Drop of K2 *
KI-2
PWR~~
120
3830-2
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 3 of 71
Copyrrqht IHM
o o
C()IIIOIdIIOJl
()
..
'"
1975
o
o
o
("\
~I'
/"'"
"\
...
,.. j
"'':\
(''1
(
\.Y
~
0
!
.
(~
,-j
(-'"
"y
'1
(
~
/
'\
\~;i
/""",
i
1'-'
\,-_JI
",j
\""j
r '''\
~,
Meter
Panel
Tob 9
I
PWR 120
Note 1. To sequential starter card
connector 51-17 (TY 135)
K7
K2
r
"\
....1
()
,
\'-...1 J
-'"
ii-
.,
\.J
",~
.~
j
PWR 110
.
'),
1..1
i<'
""-
Icy
"
"'
l.... )
,<
.....
.'
"'"
t\
() C C
.... ,
(~
C (j
(J
(-
(~
(~
,/
C-' ('"
,\
,
"
c
C,'' ,,
PWR 110
VOLTAGE SEQUENCING LOGIC
PWR 110
I
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
in the power servicing area.
SAFETY cannot be overemphasIZed.
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
CAPACITORS are potentially
explosive devices.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
A Iter replacing any capacitor,
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
before powering up machine.
Conn 1-6
YB160
Conn 1-4
YBll0
PS6 +3.5V Sense
~
Fl007
~
~
~
~
~ This diagram is intended for instruction only.
N
G 12
24 V dc and 12V dc Power
Sequencing Voltage, AC to
SCRIDS
-Pwr Sup CP Normal
.-----++-+--~-+--~:O':~:.;;..I."'f::::JAIDII------4~I----lORp....-~--..J:::o.j
B~412~
]OR1~ ~
G04 ......
~
.....
~06
J02
A1B04
J09 01
"L....L...J"
J06 -Allow K2 Pick
B12"
ARp..::.:..::.--....:..:.::..:.:....~~:..:.:....---------------~
B1X _00_7________________F_2_00_6_ _ _ _-'
Kl
B02 ..... r - 805
A
807 ~RA
B04r-.J.
002 "-1C2
~
005
)
B03 -Turn On +3.5V PS6 YB 170
K8 (AC to CUI
j-..................
AC To Fans, Bulk Pwr Supplies, and
Pwr Regulators Bias Supplies
I
I
Bias Voltage, -36V Reg" PS 3, . 3V 1+ 1.25V Reg
(Logic) PS 5, PS 7
I
+3.5V Reg (Memory) PS 6
\------1
I
I
PS 7
I
A2004
~12 sec---;.~• • • • • • • •_
+6V Reg PS 3 (Channel Interface)
I
................
'.~
K2
-Sensed +3.5V PS6
-K 2 Picked
tSensed t6V Normal
-K 1 Hold
K7 Convenience Outlet
System Power On Step Switch
B12 C2j-:::~--.J +Memory Power On
B12
~'
~
K5 Control Unit EPO Relay
OR 009
B13
....................
..
.......................
System EPO Relay
01~------~~~4-+-~rS~e~ns~e~d~6~V~N~o~rm~a~I~4-----------+-~
24V
J13 CV
01
YB185
Normal Power Up
-~
-Sensed t2V Normal PS 6
LB 3-4
~
~ Use machine logics for troubleshooting and scoping. ~
~
1
K4 Sequence Complete, DC Ready
to Control Unit and Sequential Status Card
I_
12.7 s e c - -....~I
Test For All Bulk Voltages Present and
6V dc Supply Up
rA ~
010
-Allow K2 Pick
_ l
~
~
N
o-----~~~--~~~~
C2
LB3-6
YB185
F2B05
PS 7 +1.25V Sense
PWR 120
T
F2002
~
G02
A2007
(
Relay Oriver Ground Return
~
A1805
-Spare
'
~
J06
«tGate/Mem Thermals Norm
,
K
~
~/////////////////////////////////////~
«-:, rPwr Supply CP Normal
c'~·
1"",'1
"'~.
"
PWR 110
PWR 110
~~////////////////////////////////////~
:::i:
C,"\ C'
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 4 of 7)
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 4 of 7)
~ DANGER
~,'
~/
;'
F2B07
PS 7 -3V Sense -2.3V Min 012 po..
LB 3-2
YB185
C2
F2B08
L..-
Indicator Storage
Normal Power Down
Reg
-Indicator Reset
Hndicalor Reset Switch
809;::
Gl
009 R
o-~~~~~~~----------------4-+-~--------------------~~R
F2B 13
I
YB121
-Pwr Supply CP Normal
j'lndicalor Test Switch
F21l 12
-Gate/Mem Thermals Normal
Fr
803
006
YB121 .
S
F2B02
012 -Gate/Mem Therm Fai lind
FL
«
rPS Thermals Normal
Conn 1-2
YBll0
A1B03
"'
Kl
DC Ready to Control Unit
S
G08 Np..:G~04~~___-_P~S_T_he~rm
__
al~s_N~o_rm_a_I________~~00~5.
01
lS FL
f\
'{:V
F2B03~
002 -PS Thermal Failure Ind
F2B04
20 ms
••••I-\----t- 2 "'C'
6V Reg PS 3 (Channel Interface),
PS 4, j 3.5V Reg (Memory) PS 6
B12 lS
006
.......
Power Off Signal
·24V
,----0 F2B 11
YB121
K6,Kl0.Kl1 (,f up)
, .• • • • • •~·. .·11--40mS
K2
K4, K8
AC to Fans, Bul k Pwr Supplies, and
Pwr Reg Bias Supplies
Bias Voltage, -36V Reg' PS 3, -3V/+l.25V
Reg (Logic) PS 5, PS 7
006 S
·Only for early machines (with CP7)
3830-2
447460
1
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (Part 4 of 7)
PWR 120
"
-..,~
"
"~j
'", .."Y
"
"-
>'
,,- __ ,~_Ji,:'
,
..,
!~\,
'",,---J
,1'
..r~..
F~,
'<,
y
'1>.
)I
"
,j
j
-""
t[
"
"
~
-.
~~-.
(-
(~.
("
(
('
(-.
c-
(-
(~
',.,.../
(~
-~.~---.-
c c
("
(~'
(.
C':
(:
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
in the power servicing area.
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized.
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
CAPACITORS are potentially
explosive devices,
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
After replacing any capacitor,
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
before powering up machine.
c:-
C (:
,
..
':
C C' C C C
PWR 130
....
~ ,
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~
./
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM IPART 5 OF 7)
POWER SEQUENCE PROBLEM (PART 5 OF 7)
~ DANGER
('~.
~.
PUSH CE
~
POWER ON
SWITCH
CHECK
~
THE INI T I AL CONOI T IONS
OF RELAYS Kl AND K2
VISUALLY IMMEDIATELY
~
~
~
AFTER PUSH I NG PO.ER
ON. I CoNORE THE
NO
POSSIBILITY
MA Y DROP
~
our
THAT THEy
"Co" I N
AFTER 8- 19 SECONDS.
~
~
~
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
• SEe PWA 105 FOR COMPONENT
CHECK FOR LOSS OF ·2411
DC THROUGH THE POWER ON
PUSH THE POWER
ON SWITCH. Kr
SHOULD PICK
IMMEDI ATELY.
i~A6B8H ~~~Npb~~~Eg~F
I
sw I TCH
PUSHED
1.
I
WHEN NOT
AND
THROUGH
THE CONTACTS OF
AND TERMINAL LOCATIONS.
• PARENTHETICAL INFORMATION
rFN\,,~Il!.rECISION BLOCK IS
THE
LOCAL IREMOTE MODE'
sw ITCH
LOCATE AND
REPAIR OPEN
SW.
FOR LOSS OF THREE
PHASE PWR THROUGH
CB 2 OR K8.
THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS OF K2
MUST BE OBSERvED
WHILE KI IS STILL
PICKED
IN PATH
p~~ ~;F H~~~ T~~ ~ -
tt
CONNECTIONS,
ETC)
REPA fR
PROBLEM FOUND
RELAY Kr
2. CLEAN AND I OR
FORM THE K5-3
CONTACTS. IF
IF UNABLE
REP A IR. THEN
REPLACE K5.
FAltl.. TY
COMPONENT OR LOOSE
CONNEC T IONS
GO
TO
P.R 20
PWR 20
YES
CHECK
CLEAN ANDIOR FORM
THE K2-3 CONTACTS.
I F UNABLE TO
R~~~~ :CE T~~N
SYSTEM 370 LOGIC TO TROUBLE·
SHOOT FOR A BAD SYSTEM EPO
~~~J,A~~~'IHobOKG~'b~AT
-
TR I PP I NG
yES
Q
•
tRIP
DANGER
NO
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
I
I
I
I
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L_
YES
DANGER
POWER UP UN IT
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
PWR 142
1
,
SHORT S BETWEEN
3 TERMINALS
I
CHECK
l
FOR SHORTED 1M I R tNG
IN CONVEN I ENCE
OUTLET BOX
.r§
FOR FRAYED WfR INC;;
IN PRIMARY SIDE OF
T3 IWIRES ....JUST
D I SCDNNECTED I
~'"
.. IRING FRAYED
YES
TO
PWR 20
IF LOGIC PAGE
YA I 0 1 INDICATES
EC 421442 HAS BEEN
INS T ALLEO, DO NOT
DISCONNECT LEADS FROM
T8 2. INS TEAD, OPEN
CP'S b, 9, AND 10.
E
REPAIR
WIRING. RECONNECT
ALL LEADS TO T 1 -T8
1- I
AND T8
PIR 1
I - 3
~
TR IPPED
CPI
THEN DISCONNECT
ONLY T3 TNPUT LEADS
FROM Tl-TB 1
CP 2 AND T2-T8
I
1
CHECK
REPLACE
LABEL
REPA IR
DOWN
YES
I
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CPI
I
I
THEN 01 SCONNECT
ALL LEADS AT Tl-T8
1. SEE PWR 1 40
REPLACE
I
I
POWER UP UN I T
CP 2 ST I LL
TR I PPED
1
HOW
POWER MUST BE
ALL LEADS
.~
RECONNECT ALL LEADS
PREY I OUSLY
CALL
DANGER
PREll I DUSl y
DISCONNECTED
REPA IR
DANGER
I
REPA I R
I
I
VOLTAGE DISTRISUTION
POWER MUST BE
DOliN
TROUBLE IN
USAGE METER
DOWN
TR IPPED
SEE PWR
YES
CONI/EN I ENCE OUTLET
J
•
PWR 135
PWR 30, 280
~
~
~
DANGER
CP10R CP2 TRIPS.(PART t OF 41
I
1
~
TO
POWER UP UNIT
PWR 20
POWER-UP UN I T
CP 2 ST I LL
TR IPS
~
REPA I R
YES
REPLACE
T2
<$.>'"
TRIPPING
NO
SHORT
YES
CP 2 ST I LL
NO
TR IPS
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
1
YES
1
RECONNECT
RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
PRE" IOUSLY
D I SCQNNECTED
REPLACE CP 2
-
I
ALL LEA-OS
PREY I OUSL.. Y
DISCONNECTED ON
T t-TB 1
1
c$J
Q
TO
B
PWR 20
PWR 142
3830-2
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 4)
(c)
PWR 135
Copyright IBM Corporilctlon 1972. 1973
:)000
o
o o
o
0·'
,:..
.
o
o
0000 0
r'"
",-y
,~
V
~\
',Y
00
o o
1'- . -".
"'--;/
'"
'.'-~J-I
"
'\
-
jI
~
'",
(-
(\
(~'
(C, ("
(~':
JI;:;Y
C: C
. ., j
(~.
(-
(
,"."
24V dc DISTRIBUTION
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (Part 2 of 4)
YB101
24V de DISTRIBUTION
K13-1
+24V de Supply
T3
common
_\
_ _ _ Located on the cover
of sequence box
Located in power sequence box)
II ~_-------------TO-b-4--<:~~---
~~:-;~OV oc ~
~
....-_......._2_08_-_2_20_V_o_c_4o --<
nOVac
I
PWR 140
41V ac (to Use Meter)
I
~~~--o------e~--~~~~~--~'-~'~------~~
I I
I I
2
Tab 3 .
~~--~I~I------~~
I
5
I
I...
_________..J.'
.,I ____
ac GIld 1·5 IY811S)
Use
~~Meler
Usage Meter
~--Iu..l-,....J Control
Tab 23
TB 11-8 +6V IPS 311Y8163 or YBl651
~A~1~D08~~G~nd~(Y~8~1~48~)_____________________~~~Kr.
__________________________
B-A1E6-D06 (AR10l)
P-A 1F2D12
(in power board)
~~P~-~A~IF~2~D~08L-~------------~~B~-A~1~E~6~-D~0~8~(A~R~10~1)
(i n power board)
...----------......J. +6V SCAlD Input
Test
Point
A \
I nput to each lamp
dri ver from logi c
(SM951)
."
6
T1
6
FROMCB2
AC Input
5
YB100
7 .25V oc
common
TJ-TB 1-7
7.25Voc
~
CE-ECI-C
•..•••• CE-ECl-D
CE-EC2-A
L--_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---\,
FROM CB2
Gnd (nornlal) CE - EC2 - D
(to LB 1-2)
CE - EC2 - C
(t LB 1 7)
8 _ _ _-~~te~s~t
)_ _ _ _~~_o_ _-_
3V (
CEPnICheckRe~to~
Lamp Test Switch
~
TI-TB 1-5
T1-TB 1-6
7
Input to each lamp driver
from logic (SM951)
CE-EC2-B
+6V SCRID Input
CE-EC3-B
Note 2
,r-------------------------To system 2 (CPU) 2-EPO-l (YBI31)
,
To stem 1 (CPU) l-EPO-l (YB131
To +12V reg (YB120)
Tab 5
R2
To TB 10-7 (VB200) Note 1. or TBll-4 (VB115) Note 2
To Tab 6 (YBI20) Gnd for pwr seq main circuit board
To Tab 7 YB120 OV for EPO cntl rela
TJ-TB 2-4
To Tab 30 (YBI21) IGnd for Jl-23FD)
To connector 51-15 (VB135) dc common for sequential start card.
Notes:
VB200
1.
Only for early machines
(with Cpl).
2.
Only for late machines
(without CP1).
3.
60-Hz only. See YB101
for 50-Hz.
230~B 3-1
T2
(Note 3)
20- -<:~=: = ~~_ _ _ _ _--I? ~ ~ I
L-K7---t--_ _ _
+6V pin
115Vac
lOA
(Note 31
D02 B02
SCRIDCard
(drives 20 lamps)
7.25V ac Return
Test Point A
Component Side
D02802
Ref: 5M951
common
\447460
3830-2
19Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation
1975
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
Input
pins . Module
Located in CE pnl opposite
end from hinge
24V de DISTRIBUTION
PWR 140
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PAIH 3 OF 4)
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 4)
~~W//////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~,
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
'
-"~'
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
elCplosi,ve devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
.
~.
AC liAS
MISSING OR
OUT OF
SPEC
NO
X
VES
PUSH CE PANEL
CHECK
RESET iLAMP TEST
PWR141
OPEN CP'S 6, 9,
AND 10
(SEE NOTE 1.)
2
PWR 280
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
YES
~//////////////////////////////",//////.a
MEASURE ACROSS
Tl·T8 1·5 TO T8
17 FOR 6.5 TO
80VAC
1
ALL LAMPS
LI GHT EXCEPT
OC REAOY
MEASURE ACROSS
Tl-T8 2-3 (-I AND
COMMON SIDE OF cpos
b. 9. AND 1 a FOR
21.6 TO 2b.4V
LABEL
NO
THEN 01 SCONNECT
OUTPUT LEAOS AT
• SEE PWR 140 FOR
VOLTAG~ DISTRIBUTION.
TI-T~~-~1lI T~7~-.'
HOW MANY
LAMPS WERE
OFF
ALL
CHECK
-3'
<8>"- ~"'
MISS ING
NO
CHECK
MEASURE VOLTAGE
FOR MISSING VOL TAGES'
+6V DC AT CE-EC2-A,
7.25V AC AT CE-EC1-C AND
EC3-B. -3V OC AT
CE-EC2-C.
FOR
OC AT
CE-ECZ-C.
-3'
I
1
CHECK
SOMf:
LAMPS ON
PWR Z80
THAT THE +6V DC AND
7. Z5V RETURN I TEST
PO'I NT A I CONNECTORS ARE
PROPERL V SEATED ON
SCR I 0 CARDS I SEE PWR
140 I.
1-7
FO~ 6.5 TO
8.0V
~'"
~
MEASURES
CORRECTLY
NO
MEASURE PR I MARY
DANGER
VOLTAGES ON T1. COMPARE
TO T8 I TERMINAL
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
ASS I GNMENTS I SEE PWR
140 I. ALSO CHECK
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
MACHINE VOLTAGE RATING
TAG.
DEFECT! VE CE PANEL
CHECK RESET ILAMP TEST
SWITCH. ALSO CHECK FOR
DEFECTIvE WIRING ISEE·
PWR 140).
I
~'"
CONNECT IONS WERE
I N AGREEMENT
NO
DANGER
YES
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
~
I
SWAP
RESEAT
CONNECT IONS
L
I-
ISOLATE AND
REPAIR SHORT IN
SCR I 0 CARDS OR
FAULTY WIRING
I SEE PWR 140).
I
MEASURE VOL T AGE ON
PRIMARY OF TI":'T8 I
FOR PROPER LEVEL.
CHECK TERM I NAL 5 FOR
PROPER WIRING TO
AGREE WITH MACH I NE
TAG.
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
DANGER
~
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN
POWER UP UN I T
1
T1
POWER UP UNIT
REPLACE
YES
REPLACE
1
CORRECT WIRING.
REFER TO INS T
SECT I ON FO~ OTHER
POSSIBLE
TRANSFORMER
CONNECTION
PROBLEMS.
YES
MEASURE ACROSS
TI-T8 2-2 (+)
TO T8 2-3 1-)
FOR +21-.6 TO
+26.4v DC
CORRECT
CORRECT WIRING AND
SEE INST SECT ION
FOR OTHER POSS ISLE
TRANSFORMER
CONNECT ION PROBLEMS
POWER UP UNIT
~'"
142
LOAO PROBLEM
.,.n
NO
SEATED OK
LIGHT COMES
ON
(
PWR
NO
CHECK AND REPAIR
SCR 10 CARDS
'SEE PWR 140).·
MEASURE PROMARY
VOLTAGES ON TI. COMPARE
TO TB 1 TERM I NAL
ASS IGNMENTS I SEE PWR
140). ALSO CHECK
MACHINE VOLTAGE RAT ING
TAG.
MEASURE ACROSS
T1 T8 2·2 (+)
TO TB 2·31-\
FOR 21.6 TO
26.4V DC
WERE MISSING
~
<$1
T~T,~~- I~lnlll
CP
I
CHANGE TAPS.
REFER TO INS T
SECTION TO
CHECK OTHER
WIRING.
MEA SURE ACROS S
TI-T82-2 !+J
TO T8 2-3 I-I
FOR +21.6 TO
2b.4V DC
~~
TO
1
I
REPLACE
FAULTY SCR 10
CARD
YES
PWR 20
MEAsuRE OUTPUT
OF T1 FOR 65
NO
GO
TO
PIR 20
TO 80V
DANGER
r--
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REPAIR
F AUL TV CABLE OR
CONNECTOR
~
I
l
PWR
142
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
MEASURES
CORRECTLY
Note 1:
CP6 used in early ma.chines.
CP10 used in late machines.
YES
GO
TO
PWR 20
3830·2
I
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
19 Dec 75
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 4).
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
© COJIy,ighl
PWR 141
IBM Co,po,ation-1975.
:=)000
r
V\
,: .;)
0"
o o
0v
0"J 0
A
,,)I
V
0 0 0 0 "'.
(--"
le",,\
"'-.i/
\ . .--<.J.
1
~,
.'.,
J
0 0
r~
V
,~
,y
0
a
0 0
'...."
"-.J
--.--~--
"-.,
J
'>,
,.
\"--.J'
,-----
r-
~(
('
(
(
<-
- - - ...
------.----~.
(--
(
(~
----~,'
('
(
---- ---------
------_.
(-
(
(~
(
('
('
(-
(~
('-
(~
C
(-
(~
"/
(
(
"
.. >
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 4)
CP1 OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 4)
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
PWR
~'
~.~'w//////////////////////////////////~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized, ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor.
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
,~
141
PWR
135
PWR
~~
PS4 IS NOT SEQUENCED ON. THIS SUPPLY IS NOT USED.
IF PS14 TRIPS LOOK FOR A SHORT TO GROUN D BETWEEN
THE CPAND PS4.
RECONNECT
T3 LEADS TO
TI -T8 1
'''~
3 AND TAB 4 AT
POWER SEQUENCE
PRINTED CIRCUIT
BDARO
• SEE PWR 140 FOR
VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION,
REPLACE
BLOWN
CAPAC I TORS
I
TRIPS
PWR 142
DANGER
RECONNECT
DANGER
LEAD AT Tl-T8
I
:=~:
A~D +~
NO
POWER UP UNIT
CP
C'····
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
VENTS BLOWN
.-:1
A
CP ~6 ~ ~O~h~N~O 10
C 1 RCU IT LEVEL. SEE
PWR 140.
,SEE NOTE I)
OF BLOWN OUT VENTS
THEN 0 I SCONNECT TAB
C"'.'\
135
PWR
THERE I S A 24v DC
LOAD PROBLEM. USE
CHECK
~~bA§l T~~~ ~~ ID~~CE
l
14 t
G
LABEL
~/////////////////////////////////////~
c
(/
',""
LABEL
1 SOLATE AND
CORRECT PROBLEM
THEN DISCONNECT
RI AND R2 LEADS
TO C2 I AT C21.
POWER UP UN I T
YES
NO
NO
MEASURE ACROSS
R 1 AND R2 FOR
25 OHMS EACH
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
POWER UP UN I T
DOWN
DANCER
~
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CHECK FOR
IN T3 SECONDARY
TO TAB 3 AND
TAB 4
NO
I
I
TRIPS
YES
ONE S I DE OF EACH OF
THE FOLLOWING
CAPAC I TORS;
Cl, C2, AND C4.
TURN ON CP'S G
g, AND 10
YES
I
CP
MEASURES
CORRECTLY
FRAYED WIRING
RECONNECT
TAB 3 AND TAB 4
ON SEQUENCE
BOARD
CP
01 SCONNECT
MEASURE ACROSS THE
CAPACITORS WITH AN OHM
METER ON THE X 1 SCALE.
A NORMAL CAPAC I TOR WILL
TR I PS
(SFE NOTF 1
I
NO
I
~6~EoQE8A~~C! T A~~u~~ c~o
INFINITY IN BOTH
DIRECT IONS.
LABEL
THEN 0 I SCONNECT T A8
I AND TAB 2 ON
LABEL
GO
TO
THEN D I SCONNEC T
LEAD GOING TO TEST
POINT A ITPAI ON
SCR I 0 CARO I SEE PWR
REPLACE
YES
WIRING FRAYED
SEQUENCE BOARD
PWR 20
BAD RES I STOR
140 I
I
NO
POWER UP UNIT
l
REPLACE
REPAIR
WIRING.
T3
RECONNECT ALL
POWER UP UNI T
LEADS
<$>'"
CP
I
TR I PS
NO
REPLACE
USAGE METER
7
MEASURED 01\
UNBOLT OlaOES CR 1 AND
CR 2 FROM HEAT SINK
ASSEMBLY. MAKE SURE
ARE 0 I SCONNECTEO
FROM EACH OTHER I THERE
I S A JUMPER BETWEEN
THEMl.
o lODES
NO
-l
•
c;r"'0
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CP
POWER UP UNIT
1
BAD CAPAC I TOR
MEA SURE ACROS S
DIODES FOR
SHORTS AND
OPENS
REPLACE
'"~
YES
I
CHECK FOR SHORTS OR BAD
COMPONENTS BETWEEN TAB
I TO T A8 2 AND T A8 3 TO
TA8 4 I SEE PWR 1401.
CORRECT PROBLEM FOUND.
IF UNA8LE TO REPA I R,
REPLACE BOARD.
1 TR IPS
(
REPLACE
NO
CP
TR I PS
I
MEASURED OK
BAD DIODE
REPLACE
CP
I
YES
YES
REPLACE
CP
I
~.
TO
POWER UP UN I T
~
CP
I
TR IPS
DANGER
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
I
I
REPLACE
REPA I R
BAD SCR I 0 CARD
SHORT BETWEEN
T I AND SCRID
CARD
REPLACE
TI
NO
CP I TRIPPING
I NTERM 1 TTENTL Y
POWER UP UN I T
PWR 20
YES
",A.,
CP
Note 7:
GO
TO
CP6 used in early machines.
CP70 used in late machines.
3830-2
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
~
TO
PIR 20
1447460
1 TR I PS
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
CPt OR CP2 TRIPS (PART 4 OF 41
PWR 142
'
c
CP6, 9, OR 10 TRIPS (PART 1 OF
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
CPS, 9, OR 10 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 21
2T
PWR 30,280
PWR 30, 280
CP60RCP10
TRIPS
(SEE NOTE 1.1
CP 9 TRIPS
PWR 150
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
CP.~CPIO
~
DANGER
DEFER ED
I '",,""'
MAINTENANCE ----CALL
","",A,,,
CP 9 TRIPS
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
we,
~~~~----------------------------~
DOWN
DANGER
POWER MUS T BE
OOWN
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
1
TR I P CB 2 AND
REMOVE CARD P-A I A I.
RESET CB 2 AND
MEASURE FOR LESS
THAN I.OV ON TAB 19
1
y~~6-NO
LEADS ON
Tl-T82-1
r
~E~:o~HA~~~---------'l
I
,.______________________
CIRCUIT FOR SHORTS
OR GROUNDS USING
PWR 140 AND
APPROPRIATE LOGIC
PAGES.
1
ANY SHORTS OR
GROUNDS
J,
~.
PWR 20
DANGER
INSERT CARO P-AIAI
ANO MEASURE FOR
+ 12V DC BETWEEN T A8
19 1+) ANO TAB b
\ -\ t I , .4 TO 12.6\
CHECK
REPAIR
OPEN CP I AND C8
2. MEA SURE FOR A SHORT
OR LOW RES I STANCE (LESS
THAN 1 0 • 0 OHM I TO GROUND
AT TAB 19. (LOCATED AT
ON PWR SEQ PR I NTED
CIRCUIT SOARD.)
TO GROUND.
01 SCONNECT
DISCONNECT
LEAOS ON
TI-TB 2-2
I
NORMALL Y A,
L..<$>
__-'___
ADJ~~I Il ~v
PS
_'jSEE PWR 50
FOR
PROCEDURE
..J
LESS THAN
10.0 OHM
~
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REMOVE CARD
P-AIAI
1
~~Y~E.:S_-.,I
~
"'
~N~O~~~Y~E.:S----------__,
DISCONNECT LEADS ON
TAB 19. CHECK QI
FOR SHORT OF HEAT
SINK TO GROUND
REPLACE
01 AND REINSTALL
CAROS. RECONNECT
ALL LEADS,
PREVIOUSLY
DISCONNECTED.
CLOSE ALL CB' S
AND CP'S
J,
1
~.
MEASURE WITH A
CURRENT PROBE
FOR LESS THAN
1.0 AMP INTO
TAB 5
PWR 20
~
NO
CP 9STILL
TRIPPING
QI MAY NOW BE: 1
BAD AND HAVE
~M~CEO
--
YES
CORRECT SHORTED
HEAT SINK
J,
~-
REPLACE
NO
REMOVE THE P-AI-CARDS ONE AT A
TIME, LOOK INC FOR A
LOSS OF THE SHORT.
(REMOVE p- A I A I CARD
LAST .1
PWR 20
REGULATOR
CARDP-A1Al
(12V PSI AND ADJUST
MEASURE FOR
LESS THAN 1.0
AMP AT TAB 19
c
DANGER
~Y.:E.:S
LESS: :
THAN
;,A
r _ _. : . ; N
1.0 AMP
~
DANGER
DOWN
YES
REPLACE:
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
__- ,
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER IIU ST BE
DOWN
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
P-A1Al AND
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS PREVIQUSl Y
DISCONNECTED
AND ADJUST (PWR 501
OANGER
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
A~SE~~ ~S~\~6R~g,
CORRECT THE PROBLEM
FOUND, RECONNECT
ALL LEADS,
PREVIOUSLY
DISCONNECTED.
CHECK FOR A SHORTED 200
MFD CAPAC I TOR BETWEEN
TAB 6 AND TAB 19 (SEE
PWR 1551. IF CAPACITOR
NOT SHORTED t ISOLATE
LINE SHORT TO P-AI
BOARD.
REPLACE
F AUL TV CARD AND
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
REPLACE
CP 9
LOA;~~~i;~lEM
(SEE
55 TO
FIND
MI.
CORRE
BLEM
FUND.
Note 1:
CP6 used in early machines.
CP10 used in late machines.
10
,Y
-lJr
~
\;j
PWR 20
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation
CORRECT THE
PROBLEM FOUND.
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
~
~
\;j
447460
3830·2
REPLACE
REGULATOR CARD
P-A1Al, AND
ADJUST
CP6, 9, OR 10 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 21
UNTil MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
1975
o
()
o
.0.'"
'~
o o o
o
,r'" \
-',---.J!
o
C)
o o
PWR 150
(
(-.
(
('
(
(-
~'
(
....
"/
+ 12V de REGULATOR
Cpg TRIPS (Part 2 of 2)
PWR 155
12V de REGULATOR
Transistar ~eat sink
located back of Seq Box
Located; n,ide Seq Box
\"'WO,,'
\cated in,ide Seq Box
24V dc
Distribution
PWR 140
YB120
R3
40,25W
Tl-TB 1-3
For 208V ac Input Only
3 Phase {
AC Input
Tl-TB1-l
Tl-TB2-3
-------------------------------4~~
+24V de Supply
YB10l
YB101
Gnd
~_ _----."""
t-'-Ta;::b:...l;.;9_ _ _- - - - - - - - - - - ' + 1 2 V de reg output 01
Tab 5
:::.:n::::::t??l:I?IIi??ftj
Tabs are on
the power sequence
printed circuit
board. (See PWR 705)
to all P-A 1 cards B 11 pins
A1811
I
+12V de Adj Pot
200mfd
CAUTION
Turn off main power befolfl
IfIlTIOving this card. Otherwise.
07 may be damaged.
SLT Card 12V de Regulator P·A 1A 1
(pwr seq logic board YB143)
~~1*-lj&~H@ttttHtm~1r~}~~rr~~t~~It~jfrttfl~lm~mlff}~~~l\j~ftmtrmrrtrrr~::~tj~j~~/:~:;:·::'· .: : ~: : :;: .
Tab 6
gnd for power seouence board
Gnd YB148, YB149
Gnd
I
I
I~~~~~ ~~~:i ~~~~~
__
3830·2
~--~--~~
©
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972,1973
~
_ _ _ _- L_ _ _ _L __ _~_ _ _ _~
L81-1
(VB185)
+ 12V de REGULATOR
PWR 155
(
CP15/18 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
CP15/18 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
SOLID TRIP
PWR 160
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
1
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
before powering up machine.
_
DANGER
:--
PWR 30, 280
9
%
I
%
a;
NTERM I TTENTL Y
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
)
PROBLEMI
CP
LABEL
15 TRIPS
I
THc~A'b'~~NrW
SOL IDLY
B
lOR
---INORMALLY A
DEFERRED
MA I NTENANCE
CALL
CP 15 t+bV
ROBLEM)
WHICH CP
TRIPS
• SEE PWA 165 FOR
VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION.
,
0-
THEN DISCONNECT
LEAD PS 3, Ell
~~clg~~M16V
I NTERM I TTENTL Y
18 TRIPS
]:···-I"~~'
.
A
PWR
1
LABEL
170
(SEE NOTE 1.)
I
CP 15 STILL
TRIPPING
<$>'"
I
LABEL
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CHECK INPUT LEADS FROM
CP 15TO PS3, El AND
BWj~ ~~8'Fl'T1°c"Jlc~3
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
ISEE NOTE 1.1
BETWEEN LEADS, AND CP
15 LEAD TO GROUND,
I
DANGER
1
CHECK I NPUT LEADS
FROM CP 18 TO PS 3,
El+0A~~ ~~L~32FO=?
1
SHORTS. CHECK
BETWEEN LEADS I AND
CP 1 8 TO GROUND.
YES
CP
15 TRIPS
RECONNECT
RECONNECT
REPA IR
LEADATPS3 El~.
lOR:', 9..9,I~N~.t;\ORS
REMOVE PS
REGULATOR CAROlS).
OR REPLACE AS
NECESSARY. IF NO
PROBLEM FOUND.
REPLACE CP 15.
3
LEAD R:~Oe~ ~~ ~ 1 1 •
REGULATOR CARD (S) •
NO
,
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
DOWN
DANGER
POWE R UP UN IT
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
THEN DISCONNECT
LEAD AT PS 3.
E4
POWER MUST BE
1
DANGER
I
NO
l
DANGER
YES
NO
TRIPPING
170
~J.c,pNNDN~j:.)ORS
POWE R UP UN IT
THEN 0 I SCONNECT
LEAD AT PS 3.
E2
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
PWR
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
DEFERRED
MA I NTENANCE
CALL
SOLIDLY
DANGER
I
!
LABEL
CP
DOWN
DANGER
,---.
Ct~ijJsO,~..f~Jr
¥/////////////////////////////////////~
POWER MUST BE
I
REPA IR
OR REPLACE AS
NECESSARY. IF NO
PROBLEM FOUND.
REPLACE CP 18.
THERE I S A LOAD
PROBLEM IN +bV
OUTPUT LINE
RECONNECT
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
ALL LEADS
POWER UP UNIT
ISEE NOTE 1.1
1
YES
CP 18 STILL
TRIPPING
~
NO
RECONNECT
TRIPS
THERE I S A LOAD
PROBLEM IN -36V
OUTPUT LINE
I SOLATE LOAD PROBLEM:
I. AI. Bl BOARD CARD
_ISEE PWR 165
AREA.
2. I/O ITAIL) GATE CARD ---- b?~TRIBUTION
AREA.
3. CE PANEL.
... PWR SEQ PR I NT ED
C 1 RCU IT BOARD.
ALL LEADS.
DANGER
POW"oR MUST BE
DOWN
CP 15 STILL
TRIPS
I
1
REGULATOR
CARD(SI.
I
t
ALL LEADS
REPLACE
PS 3
1
RECONNECT
REPLACE
ALL LEADS
REGULATOR
CARD t SI
,
.~
RECONNECT
CORRECT PROBLEM
FOUND
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
PS 3
REPLACE
I
DANGER
CORREC T PROBLEM
FOUND.
REPLACE
J
I
---I;SEE PWR 165 FOR
VOLTAGE
DISTRIBUTION
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
I
DANGER
ISOLATE LOAD PROBLEM TO:
10 SHORTED 50 MFD
CAPACITOR BETWEEN LB
1-8 AND LB1-90
2. A 1 BOARD CARD AREA
3. PWR SEa PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD AND
RELATED LOGIC CARDS
1
DANGER
NO
NO
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
YES
I
RECONNECT
TO
ALL LEADS
PWR 20
1
RECONNECT
PS 3 OUTPUTS
Note 1:
The unit will not power up normally at this p oint,
but you are looking for a CP trip condition on Iy.
'Only for early machines (with CP1).
"Only for late machines (without CP1).
I
ADJUST
ALL LEADS
~.
ADJUST
--- r:SEE PWR 50
FOR
PROCEDURE
PS 3 OUTPUTS
--[tEE PWR 50
FOR
PROCEDURE
1
~
TO
TO
PWR 20
CSJ
TO
PWR 20
PWR 20
3830·2
CP15/18 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
©
J 0 0
PWR 160
Copyright IBM Corporation 197Z, 1973
/)
~\
0
~j
0 0
("j
0
,
,
~
.
,0
'v.._Y
(~
\
V'
r) 0
(
~.
0
"'y
A"~"
\,-y
I
0 0
.~
~}
0
~y
".
--
'~
,c~\
,.1
F'J! 0
r-'"i.J
"-
jI
r~
~j/
"
0\
._/,)
r~
~J
1')
r)
(11
~ __ ".
,j
~
0
\,__i
'."
.-,
.j!
.t
o _
O
-.,..
~j
-
p
L
(~
(~
(~
(
.'
(
(~
(~-
(.
(-
('.. (
(
(-
(
(~
(' (:
(.
(~
(
/
--~-".------~-~
(.
(~'
+6V DC
Pwr Seq Printed Circuit Baard
PS3 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Test +6V dc
Note: Bulk 2 and the -36V section of PS 3 are used
only in early machines (with CP7).
Input Pins:
10IA-BIB2
10IA-BIC2
0IA-BIB4
10IA-BIC4
,0IA-B1T4
BOa,
BOB,
BOS,
Boa,
BOB,
Input Pins:
01A-AI02
01A-AI04
0IA-AIE2
0IA-AIE4
OIA-AI F2
01 A-AI F4
01A-A1G2
0IA-AIG4
0IA-AIH2
01 A-AI H4
Boa. Goa
BOS, GOB
BOa,GOa
BOS, Goa
BOS, GOB
BOS, GOB
BOS, GOB
BOB,GOB
BOS, GOB
BOS, Goa
,
(ZA0031
I
Goa
GOB
GOB
GOB
GOB
I (YBI21)
(YBI21)
P-AIBIBI3
(YBI46)
P-AIA2BI3
(YBI4S)
I
I Cards:
Cards:
! OV
6V
--;:
+6V DC to 01 A-AI and BI Boards
CE EC 2-A
(YB131)
(. ("'
Input Pins: Cards:
,For the power line disIturbonce sensor card
01 B-A lD2
01 B-A 1F2
0IB-AIC2
01 B-A I E2
B08,
B08,
B08,
608,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
Pwr Seq
Logic Gnd*
I
P-A 1EI B08
(YBI45)
P-A IA2DO~
(YBI48)
i
-36V* P-A IA2D09
(YBI48)
G08
G08
G08
G08
Special
Voltage Cable
I~ab 6
Special Vol tage Cable .
LB 2
I
I 0IB-AID4
01 B-A I F4
I 01 B-A 1F6
I 01 B-A I E6
B08,
B08,
B08,
B08,
B08,
B08,
Special
Voltage Cable
•
I
I
(ZAOO4I
I 01 B-A I E4
(ZAOOI)
2
r-----+----+----~--4_--------+_------------4_----------------J+6V
I
PWR 165
Input Pins:
I 0IB-AIC4
I
(ZAOOI)
I~
!~
II'Tab 25
(YB121)
I
Cards:
,
I
(~
(tail) GateOlB-AI Baard
: OV
I
To
23FD
1/0
1-36V Reference
I
_ I
I
I
I
(.
PS3 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
CP15/18 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3)
+6V CE Pnl
(-.
(~
3
Gnd
"'4
G08
G08
G08
G08
I
Located on
1/0
(Tall) Gate
50uF
\
f.>A,+6V
-'~
1
"'2
YB185l
I
IGnd
I~
ILB 1
I"
~
_ _ _ _ _ _--J
YB185
'-----t-'---......::..---'
No Laminar Bus
No Laminar Bus Voltage
Connections ta OIA-A 1 and BI Baards
Voltage ConnectionSL.-------""\
Located on Hinge end of OIA Gate
ta OlA-B2 Baard.
Located on Hinge
r---''rl-\---t----+_---+----...."..,-:--4_-------------+----------------..,
End of OIA Gate
TB 11
ov
f -36~
YB1631
7 +6V :.I S
6
5
4
3
2
I
I
~--+_------_+------~~--+-----------_4----~--------~
Located on Backside of Wall that
Mounts All Power
Supplies
PS3
300n*
V'
lOW
E19
u9
0
,.-
E5
E6 ' 9
E7
E8
E9
EIO ,
Ell'
E12 ,
E13 ,
E14 ,
:&
,
0
E39
~
Ell
~
e
~
!g
~
100 uF
Remote Turn On Controlled by Power Logic
Conn 1-12 (YBI21)
o
+ Turn On 6V for I/O
Channel Interface
(YBI46J
P-A 1F2DIO (YBI49AJ2)
P-A I BlJ07 (YBI46BJ4)
See PWR 50 for adjustment
procedure
• Only for early machines (with CP71
··Only for later machines (without CP7J
KI Hold Delayed
12 Seconds
YBI46
PWR
10
3830-2
PS3 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
©
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
PWR 165
(~
C
-
./
CP ·14 TRIPS (Part 1 of 3)
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
Z
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES .,e p,esent ~
in the power ..rvicing .r...
Z
SAFETY c.nnot be ov.r.mph.lized. ~
Con.ider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until mellured oth.rwi...
~
CAPACITORS .r' pot,nti.lly
~
•• pIOliv. dtvic...
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
Aft,r r.plKinl.ny Clpec:itor.
~
rein.tall atl SAFETY COVERS
~
befor, powerinl up mKhini.
~I
CP 14 TRIPS (Part 1 of 31
PS4 IS NOT SEQUENCED ON. THIS SUPPLY
IS NOT USED. IF CP14 TRIPS LOOK FOR A
SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN THE CP
AND PS4.
~~////////////////////////////////////~
POWER ..us T BE
DOWN.
~~mf6
c
(~
(
P(~·
L
PWR 180
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
A
"A I NTENANCE
CALL
~
Z
Z
'////H///////////////////////////////A;
LABEL THEN
TURN OF~ PS 4
ELECTRON I CALL Y
01 SCONNECT
BULK , INPUT LEAD
AT PS 4. E I
~&':Irmgs ;~
4 t EI2
~s
I ~o
"OWER U" UN IT
--
UNIT WILL NOT POWER UP
=e~"¢hl/ A~t ~:u ~ PO I NT ,
LOOK INC ~OR A C" 14
TRIP CONDITION.
POWER UP UN I T
i~C~ob~ ~~~t ~~~ED
VOLT AGES f ROM L83~8 AND
LI3-U ARE SUPPLIED TO MST
CIRCUITS THAT HAVE VERY
LOW RESISTANCE (OfTEN
LESS THAN 1 OHMI. TO MEASURE WITHOUT CARD CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE. ALL CARDS ON
BOARD A-83 MUST 8E REMOVED fROM CONTACT WITH
BOARD PINS_ WHEN THIS IS
DONE. THE RESISTANCE
SHOULD READ OPEN
YES
I"'" 1151 • ..uST HAVE
CONTINUITY BETWEEN.
___
ALL CARDS.
CORRECT PI"lIILE"
I SEE PWR 1.5 1
I. L83-1 TO PS 4, £14
Z. LB3-. TO "S 4, EI3
=~f~I~. NO
"OWER ..us T BE
DOWN.
SHORTS
LB3-1 TO LB3-.
DANCER
AL..SO CHECK FOR HEAT
DA.. ACE AT THE ABOVE
POWER "UST BE
DOWN.
MEA9JRE THE BULK 1
INPUT VOLTAGE TO PS 4.
AT PS ~ EII+I TO
E?bl'4~e 3
CAUTION: SEE NOTE 1.
5~~t:~NFO~~D~~~LACE
THE A""RO"R I ATE CABLE
OR TER"I NAL CONNECTOR.
6::
RECONNECT LEADS
AT PS 4, EIZ
CHECK ~OR A
SHORT IN THE
CABLE FRO.. "S
4, EI
NO
TO
ep
14
POWER UP UN I T
NO
DANCER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
DANCER
OVERVOL TACE COND I T ION
PR lOR TO CU POWER I NG
OOWN.
14
.7'(-
,
LEAOS AT PS 4:
e.
EW~'r'l, ~1°~~ bg R
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS AT PS 4
SLIP-ON CONNECTORS
~r3.EIOI E12. AND
LEADS.
SUPPL Y TO PS 4 FROM
OV
SCREW ON CONNECTORS
EI t E2. E3. AND E4.
RECONNECT ALL
MEASURE THE BIAS
+7.0v AT P5 4. £4:
+1.Z83V
I QVERVOL T AGE I
TIGHTEN THE FOLLOWING
SHORT.
DOWN.
OUTPuTS TO DETECT AN
FOUND,RESET CP
A.
POWER MUST BE
USE SCOPE ON PS 4-
REPAIR LEAD
CAUTION: SEE NOTE 1.
POWER UP UN I T
ALSO CHECK FOR HEAT
OAMAGE AT THE ABOVE
CONNECTIONS. IF HEAT
DAMAGE IS FOUND.
o
REPLACE PS 4.
PWR 65
- SEE PWR 50
FOR PROCEDURE
NO
POWER UP UN I T
BE
ISOLATE POSSIBLE LOAD
PROBLEM:
A.
ISOLATE BY UNLOADING
BOARD B3 OF MS T
CA'!OS 20X AT A TIME.
DANCER
POWER SUPPL Y
MUST BE DOWN.
B. CHECK BOARD
DECDUPLI Nc; CAPS.
CHECK FOR SHORTS BETWEEN
HEAT SINK AND FRAME OR
AD.)ACENT PS' 5
I
I ALSO F'OR
LOOSE SCREWS, ETCI. IF
SHORT IS FOUND, REPAIR.
IF NO SHORT IS FOUND,
REPLACE PS 4.
IF REPLACINC PS 4 DOES
~~L~b~ ~~O~~r::M"ECONNECT
DANCER
ALL LEADS.
POWER MUS T BE
OOWN.
RECONNECT THE
REMAININC LOOSE
LEAD AT PS 4
SEE PWR 50
FOR PROCEDURE
PWR ZO
3830-2
447480
1-
19 Dec 75 _
C> Capyril/lt ItIM CQrporltion t871
Note 1:
Neither E1, E2; or PS 4's heat sink is at ffame ground.
Do not tie any measuring- instrument grounded leads
to these points.
PWR 80
PWR 20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UN1"IL MARCH 26. 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
CP 14 TRIPS (Pert 1 of 31
PWR 180
CP14 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3)
.PS4 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
PS4 IS NOT SEQUENCED ON. THIS SUPPL V IS NOT
USED. IF CP14 TRIPS, LOOK FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND BETWEEN THE CP AND PS4.
PS4 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
PWR 185
Pwr Seq logic Sense PS 4 +7V output.
(A course sensor, sensed output will be considered good
until the +7V output drops below 2. 5V de). There could
be memory problems before the sensor powers the system down
J.
(6K uF (block of 6 copocitors)
P-A1C2DI3
+7V de PS 4
YBI44
+
P-A1F2DOS
Gnd
YB149
P-A1F2B07
+7V de
YB149
LB 3
located verticolly
on hinge side of .
main gote
LB 3
VB185
(see LOC 161
Remote Sampling of Voltagefor Input to Memory Voltage
SeqUencing Logic.
Remote sampling of
voltage for feedback
to voltage regulator.
This provides
regulation of Power
PWR 120
P"-AtEI J06
(YBl45)
Supply Output
P-AIA2B09
t'-Alczoto
(YB14S)
P-AIA2-D05 (YBl48)
- Turn on PS 4 +7V de
YB144
Sense
Leads
(Remote turn-on control)
+7V
':::':.
"3
E12
E3
E14
U3
PS4
PS4
0
0
E9
El0
TB 2-1
TB 2-2
+7V de at 10A
VB170
El$
E2$
E3$
ES
E6
E7
E8
E9
El0
Ell
E12
E13
E14
$
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
'"ii
.
PS 15
18V de bias
YB165
~
0
::::.
~
•~
0
;;
•'8
n
~
E1S6) E4$
See PWR 50 for
adjustment procedure.
3830-2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
/447460
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
o
,J
0··.···
.
o
00000
PS4 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
r~
~y
o o
0 ()
o
00
\'<...~.;'
~I
O
'Y
o
()
PWR 185
o
I~.
I
f-Oll A MAXIMUM
HIPPLE OF- I ()V P P
CAUTI()N SFf NO!!
1
Neither £1, £2, nor PS4 heat sink is at frame ground.
Do not tie any measuring instrument grounded leads
to these points.
447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
©
Copyright I BM Corporation 1975
PWR
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
20
CP14 TRIPS (.Part 3 of 31
PWR 190
c
CP13 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
CP13 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
9~"~'·
?r~'W//////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
. ~ MI TTENT
~/////////////////////////////////////~
CHECK
13 TR I PS
THEN DISCONNECT
PS 5, El
FOR SHORT FROM HEAT
SINK AND FRAME ALSO TO
NEXT POWER SUPPL Y
I LOOSE SCREWS Erc I • IF
~OUND. FIX.
! F NO SHORT
FOUND, REPLACE
l
.~
Y CP 13 TR I PS
HOW
YES
r
A
ADJUST
~
NO
MEASURE BULK
INPUT AT PS 5,
D! 5CDNNECT LEAD
AT PS5 t E I I
I
ALL
LEADS
FOR SHORT IN CABLE
FROM PS5 TO CPI3
I SEE PWR 205)
p WR 210
PS~.
fHEN CP! 3.
RECONNECT
CP 13
STILL TRIPS
CHECK
SOLIDLY
• SEE PWR 205 FOR VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION.
>?
j
LABEL
CP
PWR 200
E11+) TO
I
E2(~)
PWR
,R 9.8 TO
15.QV DC
P55
i
1
65
C5J
TO
CAUTION
see NOTE
SEE PWR
SO'
1
PWR
20
REPA I R
SHORT. RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
CP 13
STILL TRIPS
1
YES
VOL T AGE
CORRECT
C5J
NO
l
TO
NO
PWR
THEN 0 I SCDNNECT
PS5. E3
20
Ell
I
I
CHECK (POWER MUST BE DOWN}
TERMINALS T85-4 TO T65-3 AND
T85-2 TO T85-1 ARE CONNECTED
TO MST CIRCUITS THAT HAVE
VERY LOW RESISTANCE IOFTEN
LESS THAN 1 OHMl. TO MEASURE
WITHOUT CARD CIRCUIT RESIS
TANCE. DISCONNECT LEADS AT
A-B1C2J03 AND A-B1C2G06. WHEN
THIS IS DONE. THE RESISTANCE
BETWEEN THE ABOVE TERMINALS
SHOULD READ OPEN
--
FOR OPEN, SHORTED. AND
LOOSE SENSE LEADS IPWR
205) . MUST HAVE
CONT I NU I T'( :
I. OIA-BIC2J03 TO PS5,
EI0
2. GROUND RA r L TO
POWER UP UNIT. USE
SCOPE ON OUTPUTS OF
PS5. LOOK I NG FOR AN
OVERVOL T AGE CONO [T [ON
PR I OR TO CU POWER I NG
DOWN.
A----· ,·
I.
MUS~S~E: ~S
SHORTS:
T85-4 TO T85-3
MUST HAVE CONT r NU I TY:
01 A-B I C2G06 TO PS5. E9
MUST BE NO SHORTS:
T85-2 TO T85- 1
+1 .25V
AT PS5.
0/
YE
CP 13
STILL TRIPS
I
NO
ISOLATE LOAD I SEE
POR 2051 PROBABLE
CAUSES ARE:
1 .MST CARDS I PULL
ONL y 201. AT A
T [MEl
2.DISCONNECT LEAD
AT LB I TO 110
GATE. 23FD, AND
CE SW ITCHES.
3.01A GATE
CAPAC I TORS IN
CARD POS r T [ONS
A2,A5,V2. AND V5.
4.MST BOARDS
YES
VOL T AGE
CORRECT
E4:
RECONNECT
LEADS
ALL
NO
26V
I QVERVOL
T AGE i
OV
2.
- 3V
AT PS5,E3:
-3.03V
(OVERVOL T AGE
I
6
REP A lR
SHORT FOUND
PWR
MATCHING
CARD I 5 1 r N P55
AND PS1 HAVE SAME
PART NUMBERS
REP A I R
NO
SHORT AND
RECONNECT ALL
LEAOS
~.
YES
80
TO
NO
QVERvOL T AGE
SWAP CARD'ISI
PWR
PS5 TO PS1
CP 13
YES
yES
MAKE SU RE ALL
CONNECTORS AND
TERMINALS ARE TIGHT
AND NOT HEAT DAMAGED
ALSO LB TERMINALS
HAVE SCREWS INSIDE
OF GATE
1
RECONNEC- ALL
LEAUS
V~: __
1
ANY
THERE IS A LOAD
PROBLEM IN 3v
SECTION
MEASURE BIAS AT
PS 5, E 14(+) TO
E7I-) FOR 166
TO 23.9V DC
CAUTION SEE NOTE 1.
RECONNECT LEAD
AT PS5,
j
LABEL
YES
20
I
CHECK
ADJUST
PSS
GO
TO
PWR
{SEE PWR
50 I
~0
20
AO..JUST
REPLACE
Neither side of leads can be grounded. Do not tie
to any instrument grounded lead. T he power
supply heat sink is also not grounded.
447460
19 Dec 75
I.
REGULATOR
CARDS
2. PS5
3. CP 13
NO
REPLACE
SAD CARD I 5 ~ AND
ADJUST PS5 I SEE
PWR 50 ~
I PS5
AND -, CAN S[ SWAPPED TO
DETERMINE IF ONE I S BAD.
THERE MAY NOT BE NORMAL
OPERAT I ON AFTER SWAPP I NG
S I NeE THE VOLTAGE ADJUS TMENT
LIM I TS ARE 0 I FFERENT BETWEEN
THE SUPPL I ES l SEE PWR 50. I
1
ADJUST
P55 IF
NECESSARy { SEE
PWR 50)
.1
GO
TO
~.
TO
PWR
PWR
3830-2
YE
AVAILABLE TROUBLE
LOG A.NO REPLACE
MOST LIKELy
COMPONENT NOT
ALREADY REPLACED '-
YES
PS5, REGULATOR
CARD AND ADJUST
(SEE PWR 50)
Note 1:
CPI3 STILL
TR IPS
I
20
20
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIEO THEREAFTER
o
CP13 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31
COPYright IBM Corporation 1975
('
",
PWR 200
(
(
f
(
(
(
{/ (
(
f
(
(
(
CP13 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3)
PS5 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
PWR 205
YB121
PS5 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
MPL File
Gnd SSOO9 -31/
-3V de
.J.~=:':"'--:~i=~ \ -
,=;;';';;"_~~:--\"
...
,1
J,F="---=:::tf::=-; \
Laminar
- -- -
Otannel A /
Twisted pair grounds
from Tabs 11 and 12
II
/
Chan~el B
.:=:::.::..----4+-----\\\ /
Bus
"'O:::.:.:......----+ot=-; \ JI
Pin connections for
I/O Gate
I I
~--~~---\jl
YB186
Multitog
SM953
SM954
CE Switches
SCRID Card - SM951,
PWR 140
S . . Note'
PS5
El$
ElS
E5
E6
E7
EB
E9
El0
Ell
E12
Ell
E14
...
.
!l
Gnd PS 9
J2
01A-B1C2(io8l.
Gnd Rail
J,
CD
~iii"
<
2-
S!
$
I S
I
I iil
I c:
I iii"
I
8E4 $E15
uS
S!CD
<
0
~
...or
..a. ..
CD
n
..a.
J,
J2
n
&
••••••••l1li1 Note 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E14
Ell
E12
Ell
El0
E9
E8
E7
E8
E5
SEl
SE2
E15Q E4$
n
a.
&
g 'fiI
a.
Q
SEI
TB 5-2
TB
0
TB 5-1
Autoturn an
jumper
PS7
PS 5 Dual Regulator
-3V/+1.25V de
P_er Supplies are ph)lSicolly inverted on left and right sides
at 70 amps
Not.:
1.
Overvol..... cerd not pr_nt If po_ luppll_ et
EC718230 or Ie.,.
2. This sensor is remote sampl ing of voltage for feedback to
PS regulator far regulating PS output only. Logic
does not sense this PS for normal conditions
3. TB 5-5 terminates on gnd rail at
B1C2J05
TB 2-3
TB 2-4
18V de bias
PS15
3830-2
PS& VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
@Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1976
·PWR 205
CP13 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3)
CP13 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 31
PWR 210
~~////////////////////////////////////1.:
~ DANGER
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
in the power servicing area.
SAFETY cannot be overemphaSlled
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
CAPACITORS are potentially
explosive devices.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
After replacing any capacitor,
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
before powering up machine.
~
MEASURE THE FOLLOW I NG
VOLTAGES:
A.. +1.24 TO .\.26Y DC
AT OIA-SIC2J03 TO
GROUND.
~ ~~====::-7.7::-:=::1
~ ~~LB~~~g~E~5~T~GM~XR~~X[
~ ~?:~u¥\' T~CV~UI~~~~=~D
8. -2.97 TO -3.03v DC
AT OIA-BIC2G06 TO
GROUND.
~ ~5~~u~CAUSE 01' A BAD
~
=:.:..::.:..:....------.. . -----'1.----...,
~
~
g~U~6~N~SE;'
....
DIGITAL
~ ~~~D~~trjRT~~+HL~AO.
~
_~
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
• SEE PWR 205 FOR
TH I S CHECKS PS 5
VOL T AGE OUT FOR A
POSSIBLE OI ....ERENCE AT
THE PO I NT WHERE
IT IS SENSED •
VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
MEASURE THE BIAS
SUPPLY INPUT TO PS
w
WH I LE POWER I NG UP
H
~~,5fo~'t6~6'
TO 23.9V DC.
~6
M:~H~NEE~A¢N~O~:R
CAUTION, SEE NOTE'
DANGER
DOWN OR TRIP CP
BIAS SUPPLY
INPUT
PSt~r ~6: ~i~p~~ £7
VOLTAGE OF O.9V PIP
CAUTION, SEE NOTE'
YES
ND
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CHECK I TI GHTEN
SENSE LEAO CONNECTIONS
~
REPLACE
1.25 V
A. 01 A·BIC2J03 AND
GROUND RAIL
B. A GATE TB5·3 AND TB
5-4IGROUND!.
REGULATOR
CARDISI IN PS 5
ISEE NOTE 11
PS 5
SCOPE
BULK I INPUT PS 5, EI
(+1 TO FRAME GROUND
H FOR A RIPPLE VOLTAGE OF 1.9V PIP
CAUTION· RFF NOTE?
CHECK I TIGHTEN
SENSE LEAD CONNECTIONS I
3V
A. 01 A·BIC2G06 AND
GROUND RAIL
B. A GATE TB 5·' AND TB
5·2IGROUNDI.
CHECK I TIGHTEN
A~AT~
L2
sEco..8lR Y~ • ~f~ PWR
205.
ISOLATE 018 GATE 23"D
CE SWITCHES BY LIFTING
LEADS AT LB I
TERIot I NALS, CHECK
DECOUPLING CAPACITORS
IA~6 ~: 3,
CHECK
~~ ~Mi~f6N~~'C~~KA~?A
REPAIR
OUTPUT CONNECT IONS
A.
CHECK
"OR LOAD PROBLEM PS
LOG FOR REPLACED
COMPONENTS. THE
FOLLOWING IS A LIST OF
FAILURE PROBABILITIES:
1. CPI3
2. REGULATOR CARD ( S I
3. PS 5
ANO 0 1B BOARDS ANO
RELATED CONNECTIONS.
PROBLEM AND
ADJUST PS 5.
B. tlo hAILI GATE TB
1-5. 6. Tlo~' 9, AND
CORRECT ANY
PROBLEMS FOUND
CHECK I TIGHTEN
REPLACE MOST
LIKELY
COMPONENTS NOT
ALREADY
REPLACED
PWR 20
NOTE 1:
SOME POWER SUPPLIES HAVE
TWO CARDS lONE REGULATOR.
THE OTHER OVER VOL T AGE I .
IF THERE ARE TWO CAADS IN
NO
ADJUST PS 5 IF
NECESSARY
:::~fMP2~~~. sy~P~~~ ~~~~~EIotENT
t~~~TW ~~~I ~TS:E~ I~CO~+~~StHE
SHORTED CARD
RE .. ERENCE DRAWl NG ON
PWR 205. USE DIGITAL
VOLTMETER TO ISOLATE
EXTRA VOLTAGE DROP IN
THE DC DISTRIBUTION.
CORRECT PROBLEM "OUND.
AD..JUST
PS 5 REGULATOR
NOTE 2,
SEE PWR 50
FOR
PROCEDURE
I S FOUND.
~AT~~R5~~'H~1t
S INK IS AT FRAME
GROUND. 00 NOT TIE
ANY MEASUR I NG
INSTRUMENT
GROUNDED LEADS TO
THESE POINTS.
PWR 20
SEE PWR 50
.. OR
PROCEDURE
PWR 20
3830·2
CP13 TRIPS (PART 3 OF
31
PWR 210
©CoPVright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973, 1976
() 0 0
o
0''.'
c.
'1.
. ----- .. --- ..
0
,~
'J
() 0 ()
0\
0
r~
',."'--j !
0V
--~
-----------
0 0
,.
~
-
-------
(~
\~jI
"""
\,,--)
I"'t\
0
,1""10
',,-Y
(ll
,->,
--- ------------------------'
o
('~
".y
("' ~(',
(:"
(-
{'-: (,
(
(t--
T
(
(.-
(
(
(-
<:
(-" (:.~
(,
(,'
('-
("
.
(-
('
(-"
(
(
.-'
('-"
CP11 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
(-'
(~/
(-
(""; (,- (;/
CP11 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31
.
"
C
PWR 220
~~W//////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~.
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
1
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
DANGER
NORMALLY
DEFERRED
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
AI
_1
1
~:~~:N::~J2NTL
~
~/////////////////////////////////////~
CP
I I
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
DANGER
CP ,", TRIPS 1.4
PS 6 PROBLEM)
LABEL
THEN DISCONNECT
BULK 1 I NPUT LEAD
AT PS b, E 1
TURN OFF PS &
ELECTRON I CALL Y
BY REMOV I NG THE
JUMPER LEAD AT
TR IPS
PS 6, EI2
A
SOLIDLY
• SEE PWR 225 FOR
VOLTAGE OISTRIBUTION
PWR 230' ....._ _ _
....I~
1
_ _ _..,
I
UNIT WILL NOT POWER
UP NORMALLY AT THIS!
POINT, BUT YOU ARE
ONLY LOOKING FOR A I
CP II TRIP CONDITIO~
LOOSE OR OPEN SENSE
LEADS ON PS 7 CAN
CAUSE AN OVERLOAD
OF PS 6 VIA MEMORY
AND TRIP CPI!.
R
POWER UP UN I T
POWER UP UNIT
__
THERE MAY BE A
PROBLEM I N THE
LOAD AREA OF PS
MEASURE THE BULK I
SUPPLY INPUT TO PS 6
~jl~t6~ltH8
6
IO.OV DC
CAUTION: SEE NOTE 1
NO
DANGER
,
POWER MUS T BE
OOWN.
NO
NO
DANGER
.A.
I.
B.
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
OANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
YES
01A-B3112GII
TO
1
RA IL
TO PS 1, E8
-3V
oIA-83M2G06 TO
PS 1, E9
CHECK
RECONNECT LEAD
AT PS 6, £12
MEASURE THE BIAS
SUPPL Y INPUT TO PS 6.
AT PS 6. E91>1 TO
EIOI-I FOR 16.6
TO 23.9VDC
CAUTION, SEE NOTE I
RECONNECT LEAD
AT PS 6. £12
ALL SHOULD HAVE
CONTINUITY.
FOR A SHORT IN THE
CABLE FROM PS b. E I
AND CP II
1
1
-
OR METER THE
~~~~GE C~~C~H~O~B~~: T
CONNECT IONS.
NO
NO
YES
REPAIR
SENSE LEAD
FOUND, RESET CP
II
IF HEAT
POWER UP UN I T
POWER UP UN 1T
NO
I
RECONNECT THE
REMAINING LOOSE
LEAD AT PS b.
EI
PS 6 REGULATOR
CARD I 5 I OR PS b
SUPPLY
QVERVOL lAGE
r:=I
PWR 20
447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
YES
ADJUST
PS b REGULATOR
y~
230
ll5.
SHORT.
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
-
ADJUST
SEE PWR
50 FOR
PS 6 REGULATOR
PROCEDURE
o
DANGER
GO
TO
POWER MUS T 8E
DOWN
PWR 20
REPLACE
'51.
Note 1: Neither E " E2 nor PS 6's heat sink is at frame ground.
Do not tie any measuring instrument grounded leads
to these points.
POWER SUPPL Y
MUST BE DOWN.
·2.0V AT PS 6, £4
TO GND AT PS 6. E2:
,Z.215 V
.
/ \ (QVERYOLTAGEI
OV
1
CP II STILL
TRIPPING
DANGER
POWER I NG DOWN.
REP" IRS.
1
~
YES
ON PS b OUTPUTS TO
DETECT AN QVERvOL T AGE
COND!TION PRIOR TO CU
POWER MUS T BE
DOWN.
PS 6.
B I AS SUPPLY'
INPUT MEASURES
WITHIN
SPECIFICATION
1
,
I
SCOPE
OANGER
~~~~~~E I ip~~~~~ IA TE
g~Bb~KE O~E~~~~:~~
POWER UP UN I T
OPEN OR
LOOSE LEAD
FOUND
A.ISOLATE BY UNLOADING
BOARD 0 I AB3 OF MS T
CARDS 201. AT A TIMe:.
S. CHECK OECOUPL I NG CAPS
OR THE BOARD ITSELF.
PWR
REPAIR
T I GHTEN t
FOLLOWING LEADS
IPWR ll51:
MUST HAVE CONTINUITY,
I. LB:i-6 TO PS 6. EI4
2. LB3·4 TO PS 6. EI3
MUST BE NO SHORTS,
LB3·6 TO LB3-4
CHECK SL I P-ON CONNECTOR
AT PS 6:
E9. E I O. E 12
ISOLATE POSSIBLE LOAD
PROBLEM:
CORRECT PROBLEM
AND RESEAT
C AROS. SEE PWR
CHECK,
VOLTAGES FROM LB3·6
ARE SUPI'LIEO TO MST CIRCUITS
THAT HAVE VERY LOW RESISTANCE
IOF TEN LESS THAN I OHMI TO
MEASURE WITHOUT CARD CIRCUIT
RESISTANCE. ALL CARDS ON
BOARD A-B3 MUST BE REMOVED
FROM CONTACT WITH BOARD PINS
WHEN THIS IS DONE. THE RESIS·
TANCE SHOULD READ OPEN.
TRIPS
+ I .25V
~: ~R05r:.8
DANGER
MUST BE DOWN
BULK 1
SUPPL Y MEASURES
WITHIN ITS
SPEC I FlED
VALUES
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
FOR OPEN OR LOOSE
SENSE LEAOS ON PS 7
IPWR 2451 •
II
YES
POWER SUPPL y
tlANGER
CHECK
CP
CHECK
FOR SHORTS BETWEEN
HEAT SINK AND FRAME
OR ADJACENT PS' S.
t ALSO FOR LOOSE
SCREWS. ETCI. IF
SHORT I 5 FOUND.
REPAIR. IF NO
SHORT I S FOUND.
REPLACE PS 6. IF
PS & DOES NOT FIX
PROBLEM. REPLACE CP
I I. RECONNECT ALL
LEADS.
_ \SEE PWR
--
50 FOR
PROCEDURE
~
REGULATOR
ADJUSTABLE TO
SPECS
YES
1
ADJUST
PS b REGULATOR
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
ISEE PWR 50 FOR
PROCEDURE
rJ-,
\7
PWR
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
- -
20
CP11 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31
PWR 220
(
' ....
.-----_.
- - - - ._---_
..
PS6 VOL TAGE DISTRIBUTION
CP11 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3)
PWR 225
PS6 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
-[
For Sensing OutFlut
Normal in Logic
P-A IF2D08
Pwr Seq Logic Sense PS 6 +3.5V (A course sensor, sensed output will be considered good until +3.5V output
drops below 2.05V de). There could be control storage problems before the sensor powers the facility down.
Gild
P-AIC2BI3
(YBI44 PS6+2Vdc)
YBI49
P-A I F2B05 (YB 149)
Remote sampling of voltage
for input to voltage
sequencing logic. PW.R 120
r
Located vertically
6k uF
.
on hinge ,ide of
main gate (See LOC 16)
LB 3
YB185
LB3
+1.25V from
PS 7 E4
Remote sampling of
voltage for input to
PS regulator only
GE4
$E15
o
r:;IO
III
e-
~
0
.:!..
0
•<<
0
.
'fil
;:;
.
n
Q.
$
StJ
0E7
SEl
-
Sense
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
E 14
E 13
E 12
Ell
El0
E9
E8
E7
E6
E5
o
Leads
Turn on swipe +3.5V PS6
P·A1A2D04
YB148
o
E3
i"\
i"\
E13
P·A1C2B03
YB144
E14
PS6
PS6
+2V de at 60A
Refer to PWR 50 for
adjustment procedure.
3830·2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
19 Dec 75
© CoII¥right IBM Corporation 1975
o o o
00
PS6 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
o
00
0,
';;'-y/
~
IJ
~
~y
·0
0
0 ()
iJ !"1I
V
~
/~
V
,~
"'-y
()
,0
\.. .II
I~
'J
0,
0
a
r",
0
~
\
,I
",-y
0 'J
,..
:
c~
.J
_.J
PWR 225
0,
\:.....)/
I~.
",-y
~
(---,."
'<-.. .Jj
''L..'';;
I
(>:'
P
L
C
..
{,/
(-"~
(/ (-
(-
("
(
(
(",
(-
<-
(,
(" (/
(""'
<,/
(
c
("
(,e_
(--
(-
(-
(
CP11 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3)
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
y"
('
('
c'~
..>
(~
.,.\
(~
c'
PWR 230
PWR 220
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
"~
ALL MEASUREMENTS MAY HAVE
TO BE MADE DURING A PARTIAL
TH I SCHECK S PS 6 VOLTAGE
OUT ,OR A POSSIBLE
DIF',ERENCE AT THE POINT
WHERE I TIS SENSED.
POWER UP I BE,ORE T I ME OUT I
I, YOU ENTERED HERE BECAUSE
OF" A BAD OUTPUT.
MEASURE WI TH DVM
,OR THE ,OLLOWI NG
VOLTACES AT PS 6.
£4 TO £14 ANO PS 6,
~/////////////////////////////////////..a
•
.-
CP11 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3)
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
(~
E3 TO E' 3 ,OR A MAX
EACH
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
SEE PWR l25 ,OR
VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
B
I
I
OF 195 MILLI VOLTS
DANGER
PW
CAUT ION.
DO NOT USE A DIGITAL
VOL TMETER WITH A GROUNDED
TEST LEAD
I
I
I
CHECK I TIGHTEN
I IN SPEC I
I
I
FOLLOWING TERMINALS
AND SLIP-ON CONNECTORS.
A. SENSE LEAD CONNEC T IONS ANO
OUTPUT CONNECT IONS
I. 2. 2V
IAI LB 3-6
IBI LB 3-4
B. PS 6 CONNECTiONS
~:! E~ll3AN~4~ I ~9, E' O.
ALSO CHiCK ,6R HEAT OAMAGE
OR LESSI
I
I
CHECK THE LOG ,OR
REPLACED COMPONENTS.
THE ,aLLOWING I S A
LISTING 0, ,AlLURE
PROBABIL IT IES:
I
____ ...JI
MEASURE WITH OVM
FOR THE FOLLOWING
VOLTAGE: 2.168 TO
2.305V OC 8ETWEEN
LB 3·8 AND L8 3-4.
aIMI~ g~~~~Tg~~~E51~~EL~Mt
CONNECT IONS. IF' OAMAGE IS
'OUND. REPLACE THE APPRQPR I ATE
TERM I NAL CONNECTOR OR CABLE.
OR IN THE CASE 0, A PS 6
CONNECTOR REPLACE PS 6.
I • REGULATOR CARD IS)
l. PS 6
3.
CP II
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REPLACE MOST LIKELY
COMPONENTS NOT ALREADY
REPLACED
LABEL
THEN 0 I SCONNECT
LEAD AT PS 6,
E4
YES
"Gl'
ADJUST PS • IF'
NECESSARY
LOW
VOL T
IS NOT
LIKELY TO
CAUSE CPI I
SEE PWR 50
FOR PROCEDURE
USE SCOPE TO LOOK
AT THE OUTPUT
PS
0,
TO TRIP
PO~~R~~~ ~~~L~THE
MACH I NE MA Y POWER
DOWN I MMED I ATEL Y OR
TRIP ITS CP)
MEASURE THE BIAS
SUPPLY INPUT TO PS 6.
~~&I~M9~'i6T~
TO 23.9V OC
CAUTION SEE NOTE 2
PWR 20
I SOLATE THE EXTRA
VOLTAGE DROP I N THE
DC DISTRIBUTION
ISEE PWR 2l51.
CORRECT PROBLEM
'OUND.
NO
POWER MUST BE
'DOWN
DANGER
YES
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
REPLACE
SEE PWR SO
FOR PROCEDURE
REGULATOR
CAROISI IN PS 6
ISEE NOTE 1.1
REPLACE
PS 6
MEASURE THE BULK'
INPUT VOLTAGE TO PS 6.
Mm~T ~aIi t8~8 ~~8=m I
BY UNLOAD I NG BOARD 0' AB3 MST CARDS lOX AT A
T I ME. CHECK OECOUPLI NG
CAPS ON THE BOARD IN
SEE PWR llS FOR
01 STR I BUTI ON
eg: I~g~sC~~K A~HE V~6ARD
n~~6~'tlf8
I
AND RELATED CONNECT IONS.
CORRECT PROBLEM FOUND.
'D.DV DC
CAUTION: SEE NOTE 2
AD~UST
PWR lO
PS 6
REGULATOR
SEE PWR 50 ,OR
PROCEDURE
SCOPE THE B I AS
SUPPL Y I NPUT TO
~~ ,'toAt I~~ -t'F~
A MAXIMUM RIPPLE
l~'-'-l'
ND
¥---~---
PWR lO
O.9Y
PIP
PWR lO
SCOPE THE BULK'
INPUT TO PS 6, AT
FRA~E6G~giJNWFOR
A MAXIMUM RIPPLE
VOLTAGE OF.
PWR 65
-l---",--r-
Note 1:
- ------~--19V
PIP
CAUTION
SEE NOTE 2
PWR 9l
3830-2
447460
447462
19 Dec 75
5 Nov 76
@Copyright IBM Corporation 1975, 1978
Nottl 2:
Some power supplies have two cards (one a regulator,
the other ollflrvoltagtlJ. If there are two cards in the
power supply rernOllfl them both. If the measurement
comes within specification" insert one at a time until
the shorted card is found.
Ntlither E1 nor PS 6's heat sink is at frame ground.
Do not tie any measuring instrument grounded leeds
to these points.
CP11 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3)
PWR 230
(
CP12 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 3)
CP12 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31
~~W//////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
PWR 240
PWR 30. 280
~
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_a!
LABEL
THEN DISCONNECT
PST EI
FOR SHORT FROM HEAT
5 1~~!flp~::=E!u~~~ TO
ILOOSE SCREWS ETCI. IF
FOUND, FIX. IF NO SHORT
FOUND tH~~"l:~T~ PS 1,
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
~/////////////////////////////////////~
AD.JUST
CHECK
PST
(SEE PWR
501
FOR SHORT I N CABLE
FROM PST TO CPI3
I SEE PWR 2451
• SEE PWR 245 FOR VOLTAGE D I STR I BUTI ON..
DISCONNECT LEAD
AT PS1, Ell
PWR 20
REPAIR
SHORT. RECONNECT
ALL LEADS
LABEL
THEN DISCONNECT
PWR 20
PST, E3
LEAD AT PST,
Ell
THERE I S A LOAD
PROBLEM IN -3V
SECTION
MEASURE BIAS AT
PS 7, E141+1 TO
E1H FOR 16.6
TO 23.9V DC
ISEE NOTE 1.1
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
ISOLATE LOAD (SEE
PWR 205) PROBABLE
CAUSES ARE'
I, MST CARDS IPULL
ONLY lD" .. AT A
TIME) OlA 82.83
BOARDS
2 LBl AND LB3
TERMINALS
3. OIA GATE
CAPACITORS IN
CARD POSITIONS
4. ~~lEfl:lnD'l;ND V5
POWER UP UNIT. USE
SCOPE ON OUTPUTS OF
SatAv6~~GC~~I~~ON
TERM~NALS
T86·4 TO T86-3 AND
TB6-2 TO TB6-1 ARE CONNECTED
TO CIRCUITS THAT HAVE VERY
LOW RESISTANCE ILESS THAN
I OHMI TO MEASURE WITHOUT
EXTERNAL CIRCUIT RESISTANCE.
DISCONNECT LEADS AT
A·B3A2Gll AND A·B3A2G06
WHEN THIS IS DONE. THE RESIS·
TANCE 8ETWEEN THE A80VE
TERMINALS SHOULD READ OPEN.
CHECK
FOR OPEN. SHORTED. AND
LOOSE SENSE LEADS CPWR
2451. MUST HAVE
CONTINUITY,
I. 0IA·B3A2GII TO PST.
EIO
2. GROUND RAIL TO
PS1. E8
MUST 8E NO SHORTS,
TB6-4 TO T86·3
MUST HAVE CONrlNUITY,
0IA·B3A2G06 TO PS1. E9
MUST BE NO SHORTS'
TB6-2 TO T86·1
PRIOR TO CU POWERING
OOWN.
1. "+1.25V AT PST, E4:
.I\
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
----+1.26 V
t OVERYOL T AGE I
MAKE SURE ALL CONNECTORS
AND TERMINALS ARE TIGHT
AND NOT HEAT DAMAGEO.
:e~~~~J~I~~'~ras,.~~VE
OV
2. -3Y AT PST, E31
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
""
' lrOY
_____ -3.03V
lOVERVOL TAGEI
SHORT AND
RECONNECT ALL
LEADS
REPAIR
NO
ANY SHOIIT FOUND
SWAP CARDISI
PWR 20
PS5 TO PST
CHECK
PST
AV A I LABLE TROUBLE
LOG AND REPLAtE
MOST LIKELY
I SEE PWR
SOl
PS5 AND T CAN BE SWAPPED TO
DETERMINE IF ONE IS BAD.
THERE MAY NOT BE NORMAL
OPERA Ti ON AFTER SWAPP I NG
5 I NCE THE VOLTAGE AD.JUSTMENT
1.IMITS ARE DIFFERENT BETWEEN
THE SUPPLIES (SEE PWR aO.1
~~~~~N~E~IcED
I. REGULATOR
CARDS
2. PS7
3. CPI2
REPLACE
BAD CARDISI AND
AD.JUS T PS T I SEE
PWR 501
AD.JUST
PST IF
NECESSARY CSEE
PWR 501
PST REGULATOR
CARD AND AD.JUST
Note 1:
3830-2
Caution
Neither side of leads may be grounded. Do not tie to
any instrument grounded lead. The power supply
heat sink is also not grounded.
447460
447462
19 Dec 75
5 Nov 76
PWR 20
PWR 20
CP12 TRIPS (PART 1 OF 31
(G) Copyrillht IBM Corporouon 11115, 1976
()
a
Ii ".
I,J)
O 0 ·'
,.,~"
fa;
',"
a o ()
0
,;r)','
0',.
,
,
() 0 ' 0"
;, ". ~
"f
o
C) 0
PWR 240
1"",\
\'If
",="""
'--.I
()
~(/
(~e
(-/ (C_
(e~ (~
(
("'.
(-
c'
(-
c' {
(-
CP12 TRIPS (Part 2 of 3)
PS7 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
PWR 245
PS7 VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
Pwr Seq Logic Sense PS 7 -3V Output
For sen51ng output { IA course sensor, sensed output will be considered good until
normal in logic
the -3V output rises above -1.2V del. There could be storage I
logic problems before the sensor powers the facility down
P-A1C2Dl2
(YB144 PS 7 -3V de)
Gnd
P-A 1F2D08
(YB149)
P-A1F2B08
(YB I 49)
YB185
2-5
2-8
2-7
':"
'+1.25V de Sense}
:',:
i::
TB 6-4
s. Note'
Remote sampling
of voltage for input
to PS regulator only
VB1.
TB 6-5
Note 2
PS5
El$
$E4 $E1S
E2$
E3$
ES
E6
El
EB
E9
El0
Ell
E12
E13
E14
$
I $
I
I i
I
I
I
!
J2
J,
I
!
2
If
@
~
,
I
n
~
1
f.. i2
An
•A-
J,
i'
•nA$
n
$
I E14
I E13
I E12
IE11
I El0
I E9
I EB
I El
I E6
I E5
$E7
E1S$ E4$
eEl
Note 1: Overvoltege card not pr_t If
po_lUppll. at EC716230 or
PS7
Ii'"
P-A1A2D08
Not. 2: TB 6-6 terminat.. on god rail at
B3M2GOB.
Power Supplies .,. physically i_ted on left and right
Rmr to PWR 50 for adjustmant procedure.
3830-2
I
~~~51
e Copyright IBM Col1lOration 1976. 1978
.:::
1_.
$E3
J2
PS7
Dual R..,lator
-3V/+1.25V de
at 70 amps
YB170
i
~~~~~61
_.....I_ _ _ _...L.._ _ _.....IL-_ _ _...L._ _ _ _L-_ _ _...J
Gnd
(YB148)
::Bulk 1
bias
PI7 VOL TME bllTRIBUTION
PWR 245
CP12 TRIPS (PART 3 OF 3)
CP12 TRIPS CPART 30F 31
PWR250
r~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
~
~
in the power servicing area.
Z
~' SAFETY cannot be overemphasiled. ~
~ Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
~ until measured otherwise.
~
~ CAPACITORS .re potentially
~
~ explosive devices.
~
~ WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
~ After repl.cing any capacitor,
~
~ reinst.1I all SAFETY COVERS
~
~
before pOl(V8ring up mechine.
_~
IEQUAL OR LESS I
PIA 245
MEASURE WITH DVM FOR
THE FOLLOWING VOL TAGE,
A. -1-1.26 TO +1.28 DC AT
01A-83M2GlI TO GROUND
~/////////////////////////////////////~
8. -2.9710 -3.03v DC AT
01A-B3M2G06 TO GROUND
REPLACE
REGULATOR
CARDISIIN PS 7
ISEE NOTE 2.1
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
CHECK
FOR REPLACED COMPONENTS
THE F"OLLOWINCi IS A
L.ISTING OF" FAILURE
PROBABILITIES,
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
I. CP 12
MISlllNGOR
.1
LTAGE NOT
TO CAUSE
OTRIP.
REPLACE
AD.JUST
PS T
PS T RECiULATOR
2. REGULATOR CARD t 5 I
3. PS T
LABEL,
THEN 0 I SCONNECT
MEASURE THE BIAS
SUPPLY INPUT TO PS 7.
POIlER MUST
DOlIN.
BE
LEADS AT PS T I
E3 AND E4
AT PS 7 E14(+1
TO +71-1 FOR 16.6
TO 23.9V DC.
CAUTION, SEE NOTE 3.
PWR 20
REPLACE
Io1OST LIKELY
COMPONENTS NOT
ALREADY REPLACED
CHECK
AND I OR TI GHTEN THE F"OLLOWI NG
TERMINALS AND SLIP-ON
Ca..ECTORS.
A. SENSE LEAD CONNECT IONS.
1. +l.2&V
IA) OIA-83C2Gll AND GND
RAIL
SCOPE
T~~l~~Lr-P~iE~IN~3
UP. ITHE MACHINE MAY
POWER DOWN I MMED I ATEL Y
OR TRIP ,ITS CPl.
AD~ST
2. -3V
SEE PWR 50
:-F"OR PROCEDURE!
tAl 0IA-8_ AND GND
RAIL,
III A GATE TB 6- I AND
TB 6-2 IGNDI.
PS T IF
NECESSARY
NO
B. OUTPUT Ca..ECTIONS.
~~I 2~5GAll ~!62-~, ~!T2A~
LB 2-1' AND LB
AND LB 3-3.
i- I.
LB 3-2
PWR 20
C. PS T Ca..ECTIONS.
I~:
Ua. EIII~4,b~Tl~·tI5.
ALSO CHECK F"OR HEAT DAMAGE AT
~~A~~~Ta:S tAal~EB"'AT
LOOSE Ca..ECT I ONS.
I I' DAMAGE
l~"'='? l T~'ri~5~ NItECONNECT
CHECK
CHECK
F"OR LOAD
PR08I.EM PS T
IPIR 2451
rp~9¥JcTl: ~~PLi~~Epr T.
REPAIR
Tt£ BIAS SUPPLY INPUT
T~I P~O Ttb~!1 P~~. AEI4
~~tXIMUil RIPPLE VOLTAGE
.9v
PIP
--~-=
'.9
M SEC
PROBLEM AND
AD.JUST PS T
A POTENTI AL LOAD
PRoa..EM. I SOLATE FOR
LOAD PROBLEM BY
UNLOADING 01A-B2 ANO B3
BOARD CARDS 2n AT A
TIME. CHECK DECOUPLING
CAPACITORS IN 01A-B2
AND B3 BOARD POS I TI ON
SEE PWit 245 FOR
DISTRIBUTION
a
~f.tc:5 I :~'2 A~ND Vii
BOARDS AND RELATED
CONNECT I ONS. CORRECT
PROBLEM FOUND.
NO
PIA 20
NotfJ 1:
00 not use a digitallioltmlltr1r with a groundtld
tftt lead.
'
NotfJ 2:
Som/I POWflr supplilll have two cards (one a
regulator, the othllr ol/llfl/Oltlll/flJ. If thare are
two cards in thll power supply remove them
both. If the _Ufem/lnt COflllll within lfJIICifi·
c.r;ofll. IMart Ontl at. r;_ unr;1 tM shortlld
card i, found.
NotfJ 3:
3830-2
Nllithar E1, E2 nor PS 7'1 hllat sink is at framll
ground. Do not till any measuring inltrumllnt
groundtld leads to thlllll points.
REFERENCE PIA 245
TO ISOLATE THE
EXTR. I~~'COROP
DISTRIBUTION.
CORRE~~OBLEM
AD.IUST
..:~=;::F"PIIIt=;;JI_L.PS_T_R_E
I,...UT TO PS
1f1.Act ~O\~HN~ I ATO
~~~~~_:~TAGE
PIA 20
.'.v--i-..:.=!r----
PIP
1.9 M SEC
..
GUI._A_T_OR",
447460
447461
19 Dec 75
12 Mar 76
e Copyright IBM Corpomion 1975, 1976
SCOPE ICAUTION, SEE NOTE 31
THE BULK I
CP12 TRIPS CPART 3 OF 31
PWR 250
(-
(
(:
CP3 TRIPS (FAN PROBLEM)
CP3 TRIPS (FAN PROBLEM)
~~'////////////////////////////////////~
~
~
LETHAL VOLTAGES a re present
in the power servicing ar ea.
~
~ SAFETY cannot be ave remphasized. ~
~ Consider ALL CIRCUIT S LIVE
~
~ until measured otherwis e.
~
~ CAPACITORS are paten tially
~
~ explosive devices.
~
~ WEAR SAFETY GLASS ES.
~
~
A Iter replacing any capa citor,
~
~
reinstall all SAFETY CO VERS
~
~ before powering up mac hine.
~
~/////////////////////////hV/////////h0
~
PWR 260
PIR 30
~
~
~
DANGER
c' c
(~
e
~
t
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN.
:3 TRIPS (FAN
NO
PROBLEM)
DISCONNECT
ALL FANS AT FAN
CONNECTOR.
---
ONE
FAN MOTOR
HOTTER THAN
OTHER
EXCESS CURRENT DRAWN
BY A FAN MOTOR IS
CONVERTED TO HEAT.
I 5 ONE HOTTER THAN
THE OTHER?
YES
REPEATEDLY
CP 3 TRIPS
DISCONNECT
HOTTER FAN MOTOR
AT FAN CONNECTOR
,
I NTERM I TTENTL Y- -- NORMALLY A DEFERRED
• SEE VBllO FOR CIRCUIT DRAWINGS
RESET CP 3
MA I NTENANCE CALL
NOTE' POWER SUPPLY FAN NO.2
NOT USED ON LATE MACHINES.
RESET CP 3
I
POWER UP THE
UNIT
YES~NO
1
POWER UP THE
UNIT
NO
ALL
FANS
DISCONNECTED
TRIPS
l
!
YES
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
OOWN
DANGER
POWER MUST 8E
DOWN
CHECK ALL FANS
FOR PROPER
OPERATION
,~
NO
NOT RUNNING
OR RUNNING AT
REDUCED
SPEED
RECONNECT
FANS ONE AT A TIME.
IF PROBLEM FAN NOT
YET ISOLATED,
POWER UP AFTER EACH
RECONNECTION UNTIL
CP 3 TRIPS AGAIN.
YES
I
CORRECT WIRING
PROBLEM FOUND.
IF NONE FOUND,
REPLACE CP 3.
REPLACE
FAN
ONE FAN
MOTOR HOTTER
THAN OTHER, OR
CP3 TRIPS WITHIN 3MIN
CHECK
208VAC INPUT WIRING
TO FANS. CHECK FOR
SHORTS BETWEEN
LINES AND TO
GROUND.
NO
,
REPLACE
FAN CAUSING CP
3 TO TRIP
-
IF NO ONE FAN
CAN BE IDENTIFIEO
AS TRIPPING
~~PCAC~H~~
3
1
CHECK
YES
I
DANGER
,
POWER MUST BE
FOR OPEN IN FAN
CONNECTOR.
I
DOWN.
DISCONNECT
THE FANS ONE AT
A TIME AT THE
FAN CONNECTOR.
caNT INUE THI S UNT IL CP 3
STOPS TRIPPING. RECONNECT
EACH PREVIOUS FAN AFTER
IT HAS BEEN DETERMINED
THAT FAN 15 NOT CAUSING
CP 3 TO TRIP.
POWER UP THE
UNIT
MEASURE EACH FAN FOR THE
FOLLOWING MAXIMUM .CURRENTS:
I.A1 GATE FAN-RUNNING CURRENT
1.03 AMPS AC PIP-STARTING
SURGE 2.69 AMPS AC PIP.
2.1/0 (TAILI GATE FAN-RUNNING
CURRENT 0.31 AMPS AC PIP
-STARTING SURGE 0.33 AMPS
AC PIP,
3.LEFT AND RIGHT PWR SUPPLY
TUB FANS-RUNNING CURRENT
1.03 AMPS AC PIP (EACHI
STARTING SURGE 2.0 AMPS
AC PIP (EACH).
TO MEASURE USE THE PROPER
CURRENT PROBE FOR THE SCOPE
YOU HAVE AVAILABLE.
-
REPLACE
FAN CAUS ING CP
3 TO TRIP
REPLACE
THE FAN DRAWING
EXCESSIVE CURRENT.
IF EXCESSIVE
CURRENT NOT FOUND,
REPLACE CP 3.
PWR 20
3830-2
CP3 TRIPS (FAN PROBLEM)
©
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
PWR 260
CP16 OR CP17 TRIPS
CP16 OR CP17 TRIPS
::y~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servicing area.
~
~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
until measured otherwise.
CAPACITORS are potentially
explosive devices.
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
After replacing any capacitor,
reinstall a" SAFETY COVERS
before powering up machine.
PWR 270
PWR 30
~
~
~
~. SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
.~
¥/////////////////////////////////////~
DC Common
Bus
TB 10
+11.5V dc Nominal
+10.6 to 12.4V dc
~~~~------------------~~__~~~--~~
DANGER
PWR 71;;:
DANGER
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
l---_o'}
POWER MUST BE
DOWN
CHECK THE FOLLOWING
AREAS FOR SHORTS,
1. T810-1
3 Phase /--___0 ::::;
AC Input I
'"
~I--_o'?
.;.::
CHECK THE rOLLOWI NG
AREAS FOR SHORTS,
I. TB 10-3 TERMINAL
AREA.
2. LOAD RESISTOR TB
10-3 TO TB 10-15.
3. CABLE FROM CP I T TO
TB 10-3.
TERMINAL AREA.
2. LOAD RESISTOR T8
10--1 TO TB 10-15.
3. CABLE FROM CP 16 TO
TB 10-1.
YB1j
Nom'."
::'"
K12-2
+24V dc
YB101 I~---T~~~~
YB202t;
~~;;;
I
.I.!!._
...............
-M.OV do
5Q
50W
PWR 140
0-:-0
-40.5 to -47.5V dc
'fJ-+-.L-----------I~
W9 ::;;;
5
1-"';"'-10
0=0
18
6
~~~~
YB200
CP
16
SHORT
CP IT
SHORT
J-
~
PWR 20
Note:
The bulk 2 supply valtages shown on this pagtI are not required
by the 3830-2. Tarminating resistors ara used to maintain
balanced loads required for proper operation of the bulk supply.
3830·2
ONLY FOR EARLY MACHINES Iwith CP 71
©
~
PW R 270
Copyright I BM Corporation 1972. 1973
o
o
0
0
V
0 0 0
'
.
()
0
() 0 ()
I~
~J
o
()
o o o
o
·~
O
,)
!'~,
I
.
~
(-
(~
3830-2 MISSING OR OUT-Of-SPEC VOLTAGES
(
c\
3830-2 MISSING OR OUT-OF-SPEC VOLTAGES
PWR 280
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~
~
~.
~
~
~
Z
~
~
~
~
~
PWR
PWR 10, 100, 130, 141
LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
in the power servlcmg area.
Z
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until measured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentially
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After replacing any capacitor.
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before pOl(YI!ring up machine.
_~
~ISSING
OF" SPEC
IF POWER
IS OROPP I NG. CHECK
THE VOLTAGE OUR I NG
THE THE PARTIAL
POWER UP CYCLE.
•
1
NOMINAL VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE LIMITS
I DO NOT ADJUST
AT THIS TIMe)
MEASURE AT
GND REF AT
r .25V
+
*+l.27V·
-3V
1
•
PS7
PS5
FILE
CHECK POWER SUPPLY
VOL T AGE. I F POWER
IS DROPPING. CHECK
THE VOLTAGE OUR I NG
THE THE PART I AL
POWER UP CYCLE.
CHECK POWER SUPPLY
POWER SUPPL Y
9
PS3
+ 12v REG
+bV
+ 12V
+24V SUPPLY
PSb
t3.5V
+24V
THE PART I AL POWER
UP CYCLE.
r NOT1-usro-'
I
PS4
PS7
1.02V
*+1.27V
PS3
II .40V MIN
22.IV MIN
+3.J8V MIN
6.e64V MIN
1 .251V MIN 2.995v MIN
1.262V MAX
3.030V MAX
1.265V MAX 3.055V MAX 6.180V MAX
12.60V MAX
25.9V MAX
+3.14V "'AX
1. 11S11 MAX
I .Z6SV MAX 3.0S5V MAX
SEQ BOARD
01A·B3
A2G04 1+)
01A-B3
N2Gll (+\
N2G061-\
N2J08 (+)
N2JOB 1-1
C2 JOB i+)
C2 J081-1
01A-B3
P-AI
LAMINAR BUS
LB 2-1, 2 1+' AI811
LB 2-8
L.-J,
,I
,
-\
A IJ08
i+)
TAB
\-)
TAB 1
1
THE PRESENCE OF PROPER
~A6M~~~R oS~
REMOTE TURN-ON.
INPUT. AND OUTPUT
G2J081 \
I
N2JOB 1-1
k
J
01A-B3
N2G06 1-)
N2JOB U)
5.820V MIN
1+)
TAB 33
1-)
I
I
+24V
2.970V MIN
6.180VMAX
TA832
OU_T_O_F~M~ _:_:_~_N_G ~ : :A:~:~:~:E:~t:~:5:~:~: :
T~~
+bV
+ 12v
•
,
+24V
AUTOMATIC TURN-ON
~UMPER tPS5,
£8
TO Ell)
REMOTE TURN-ON
IS OK IF GND AT
PS7,
Ell
REMOTE TURN-ON
IS OK IF +12V
AT El3
AUTO
TURN-ON
DES IGN
AUTO
TURN-ON
OESIGN
PS5
DISTRIBUTION
PS7
01 STR IBUT ION
PWR 245
PS3
01 STR I BUTI ON
P.R 165
PWR
PWR 140
155
___
~O
3.030V MAX
22.IVMIN
25.9V MAX
TOWER
P
SEQUENCE BOARD T A8 26
1
TAB 27
1-)
,+,
.1 T A8
29
1+)
ITAB 30
,-,
~.
OUT
O~'
""ll1!':","
•
"::
AT CU LOGIC TEST
POINTS
TO
+~At' ~~~U~,k +~G~~E GO
TO THE DES I REO LEVEL
BEFORE POWER I NG OFF.
WITH REFERENCED
OISTRIBUTION PAGE
iPS3,
01A-83
N2Gll (+)
L-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
TURN-ON JUMPERS CAN BE
CHECKED ANYTIME.
REMOTE TURN-ON LOG I C
LEVELS MUST BE CHECKED
I N8R
POWER UP CYCLE IPRIOR
CHECK REGULATORS
PS7
01A-B3
G2G09 1+)
-3V
~;U;';T""";O;"'F""";SP;"'E;;;c"-_ _ _:rO;;;U;"T""";0;;'F""";5;"'P::;E~(
Mls~sII~N~GG~
OR
MISSING
PWR 50
PWR 205
A2J08 \ )
I
MISSING
sr.
I-I
1
ADJUSTMENT
PROCEOURE
PS5
1+1
VOLTAGE
MISSING OR
OUT OF SPEC
OUT OF SPEC
J,
16
+24V SUPPLY
PS5
-3.02V
1.251V MIN 2.995V MIN 5.6Z0V MIN
OIA-BI
C2G06 1-)
BOARD WITH IMPL SWITCH
THE VOL T AGE OUR I NG
2.910V MIN
OIA-BI
MEASURE AT TABS ON
POWER SEOUENCE
- --
VOLTAGES
CHECK POWER SUPPL y
VOL T AGE. I F POWER
IS OROPP I NG. CHECK
1 .231V MIN
C2J031+)
I
OF SPEC NPL
OPERATED
~/////////////////////////////////////.a
* MUST
IF +1.21V IS ADJUSTED, PS6
BE CHECKED
10
tot I 55 I NG OR OUT
OR OUT
MEMOR Y
VOL lAGES
OGle VOLTAGES
VOLTAGE.
PWR
9
9
e,"SSING OR OUT
OF SPEC CU
• SEE PWR 300 FOR
VOLTAGE
01 STR IBUT ION.
'DO
10,
YES
PWR 50
1 PSb
AUTO TURN-ON.
JUMPER PS6
IEI2 TO £14)
PWR 225
JpS4
B
REMOTE TURN-ON
I S OK IF GROUND
AT PS4, E12.
PWR
PWR 45
185
~----I~--~----~I--~I
YES
G.) TO PERTINENT POWER
SUPPLY PAGE AND FOLLOW
THE "INTERMITTENT CP
TRIP" CHECK PATH. 00
NOT REPLACE A CP IF IT
IS CALLED OUT.
POWER
SEQUENCING
PROBLEM
9..
PS3PWR 160
~3~~~
PSIPWR
PS7PWR
+12V PWR
+24V PWR
447460
3830·2
19 Dec 75
220
240
150
135
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 21, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976
3830-2 MISSING OR OUT·OF·SPEC VOLTAGES
·PWR 280
-_ .. _.
__ __ . _ - .
~-
-.-~--.
----~
JOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO
__...
,,--".
(- F(
L'
("~
(
(/ ('
(-
(~
(,.
(~
(
(
('
(
("
(
(': (~
(,~
(,' (:-
--- -
(~
C'"
(
"
(~'
('~
(::
..
",; "
.JJ
----_ ..._-_._.-
("
t",:
e
DISTRIBUTION CONTROL UNIT AC AND DC
DISTRIBUTION, CONTROL UNIT AC AND DC
SEE ALSO LOGIC YB012
208V
jC 3 Phase
i
I
~ ~}
-_./
PWR 300
I
I
I
Filter (Note 3)
('~
CP's
Auxiliary
Po_r
Manilaring
Circuit r---±--+....;Co:;ntacts
I
~ ~~
(~
} '.
I
CP's have auxiliary points. Auxiliary points open,
I
when tha CP opens, to set the PS Failure latch.
I
Auxiliary points on YB201 and 202.
I
I
IL _ _ _ _ _ _ _I_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
CB2
Mainline
L..:.--;;-.:::....I Y B 100
1
K8
CU contoctor
YBIOO
1
CP1
Note 2
CP 8
CP 4
K7
c
,YB100
YBlOO
'-r- Y8100
VB101
I T1
T3
IIOOU •••TIOO
~
m
[J
~
YBIIO
1 Rectifier
Use
Meter
Logic Gate
I/O Gate
Power Supplies
-Turn on +3.5V PS6
I
r=-=-i-
PS 7
-3/+1. 25V
Reg
r.-
PS 4
+7
Reg
!I
L. ., L
:I
Turn on 7V PS 4 (Not Used) YBI70
•I
----,-----~---~~--~_4~1
LU~e~
Po'o.
I
I
r-
I
PS 6
+2.25V
Re
KII-I
P~3
PS 5
Resistor
Load
-3/+1.25V}j +6V
R e g / I Reg
L-r-ir----'
Resistor
Load
YB200
VI.•
I
I
I
I Not
PlD s",_
no
llT
B101
YB101
B101 I SC~IDS
~I ~~t~~ ..---'-~
24V dc
3830-2 Fans
~
CP 2
-}:-- Y
..
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
~
~
:~ 1000
I
-
L-----.-_...J
I'
CE Panel
r---'~~
YB101
"-r--
+12V
Reg
___ _
I YB120
_...J
To Sol~d Logic
Sequence Board
+3.5V
I+U5V' -3V
-36V
+6V
I ITERF ICE
LB 3
LB 3
LB
..
LB I
LB ,
LB 2
K6-2
Device
Power Seq
Control
YB135
IOL..IN·~ERFACE
MPL File DC
~ K6-3
AC
A
r------+6V
-3V.
YB101
YB121
~K6-1
+7V
CP6 !Note 1 )
CP'D'N... 21
YB131
YB121
-3V
YBIOI
I
3830-2
Power Seq
Control
t;ON
+1.25V/
YB101
+24V de
Sequence
_
CP9
TT2
MPL File DC
I
"Pc FILE
I
(YB I 85)
Note t:
Only for early machines (with CP1)
Note 2:
Only for late machines (without CP1)
Note 3:
Not used on late 6(}Hz machines
3830·2
447460
~~~~~____~J·~_19
1 __D_ec_7_5_L________L ___ - -_ _J ________L______~________L_____~
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
(YBI80)
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
DISTRIBUTION,CONTROL UNIT AC AND DC
PWR 300
c
(~
""i
DISTRIBUTION BY POWER TERMINALS (Part 1 of 2)
DISTRIBUTION BY POWER TERMINALS (Part 1 of 21
T1· TB1 (Note 1)
230V
-4
CP 1
-3
-1 .......
~'./
Note 5
3
)
4
5--->
TB3 (Note 1)
-1
CP2
-
Line Filter
(Note 61
(
Phase 1
B B
208/230 V ae 60 Hz
or
200/220/236/380/408V
Be 50 Hz
0
D D ,r}-t----;
50 Hz Neut
E E
~
- - - - -i
Note 2
Note 1
3830-2
1447460
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
(~).
, Power Seq Control
11
(
C}
YB101
W8
BTB2
H, CO"~."U ~"'.'
-
~-'
-3
6
7
7
L~~:o
1
I
I
I ....
~
,...
.....
.....
1
~
........
5
5
-6
~
CPS
3
~-5
0-
,.......
.....
2
,...
9
I
,...
-6
CP18
YB201
-
Bulk
1
,...
(
10
,....... CP4
,...
10
~
~
....
10 ........
MPL File~
Control
YB120
CP5
....
....,
)
........
"""
CP3
'1,J"
TB1
-2,.,.
CP14
CP15
(Note 5)
C12 (_)
3
5
6
7
8
9
)
'.
2
2
'C.J
f=!0
1-5
-6-0)
3
}
AC
(
-
'0 ..PL F;o,
YB180
05
--
4
5
)
6
7
-7G£
11
TB2
1
~
3
6
o
) W2
YB165
1
4
~
.... 1 ....
3
YB100
(
7
TB2
11
11
CP12
W4
....
"
2
CP13
(Note 11
5
"
~
--0
~
W9
W6
..(/)
....., -10
4
8
CP11
....
9
0-
"
"
6
W9
-6
..()
~I""
~
~
(
rO
CP17
-2
BTBl
-2
CP7 (Note 41
"""
-~
~~
1
-2
)W8
CP16
9
,-
YB202
1
2
3
TB1
)
)
YBl60
-10
T2
,
12
(
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
",-.
'"
Bulk 2 CP15
(Note 4)
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
I
"-".
• System EPO Control
v,0
OV
,
Notes:
1. For 50 Hz connections, refer to logic.
2. For ac gnd connections refer to logic page YB115.
3. All CB and CP points are shown in their non-tripped position.
4. Only for early machines (with CP7).
5. Only for late machines (without CP7).
6. Not used on late 600Hz machines.
(YBm»
9
t}_~'OM'~'
0
:..;Ph:.::a:::;
..~3=--_--1~'J C C
60 Hz Gnd
)
0
A A
Pha.. 2
YB100
-2
4J
+24V Sequencing
5
(
-'1
-3.0\
~
"5V,,
-2
-3
~
....
7.25V ae to SCRIDs
=D E- I
)
.)
~
Note 4
--
1
CP6
.,.,....
n
i C}
2
s To +12V Reg
.rO
~
n·TB2
)
C
~
....... .... CP10..0-
)
)
-2
CPS
....
,...,
)
208V
PWR 305
1-8
-9
~To
(
8
Fans
YB110
)
1
2
3
,
4
5
6
7
,
,
8
PS15
DISTRIBUTION BY POWER TERMINALS (Part 1 of 2)
,8
B
I
8
PWR 306
PWR 305
Ir" ""'\
i,,,j
POWER SEQUENCING FLOWCHART IPART 1 OF 21
POWER SEQUENCING FLOWCHART (PART 1 OF 2)
POWER UP SEQUENCE
PWR 310
~~////////////////////////////////////~
~ DANGER
~ LETHAL VOLTAGES are present
~
~'
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
in the power servicing area.
~
SAFETY cannot be overemphasized. ~
Consider ALL CIRCUITS LIVE
~
until meesured otherwise.
~
CAPACITORS are potentiany
~
explosive devices.
~
WEAR SAFETY GLASSES.
~
After. replacing any capacitor,
~
reinstall all SAFETY COVERS
~
before powering up machine.
_~
PICK K2
IHOLD RELAYI
~/////////////////////////////////////~
• see PWR 2 FOR WRITTEN
DESCRIPTION OF POWER SE~UENCE
SEE PWR 110 FOR VOLT AGE
SEOUENCE LOGIC
•
PICK KS
(AC TO CUI
TURN ON POWER
ON LIGHT
(METER PANELI
NO
YS100
YB140
AC TO BULK
YES
SUP~~:~Sill~~NS.
I
LOGIC
SEQUENCEr
VOLTAGE
DC READY TO CU
(READY LAMPI
+24V TO
SUPPLY
BRING UP
+24V POWER
SUPPLY
YS120
YB135
SEQUENTIAL
STARTER CARD
I
PICK K4
YB120
1_.._..;Y..:B~12:;a
SEOUENCE
COMPLETE TO CPU
AND SEOUENTIAL
STARTER CARD,
DROP KI
,
ALLOW NEXT
CONTROL UNIT
TO POWER UP
BRINGUP
+12V POWER
SUPPLY
PICKKI
(PICK RELAYI
ANTI· RECYCLE LATCH
PREVENTS RECYCLING
UNTIL POWER ON START
YB140
SIGNAL IS INTERRUPTED
RESET
,ANT I -RECYCLE
LATCH
YB146
START SEQUENCE
TIMER
RESET
ANT I-RECYCL.E
YS144
LA,TCH
AllOW
RECYCLE
PICK K5
(EPO INTLKI
RESET POWER
SUPPL Y F AUL T
INDICATORS
YB140-141
YB144
SET
ANT I-RECYCLE
LATCH
YB141
TuRN OFF PS4
1+
7v
I
YB120
PICK K7
(CON V OUTLET)
YB121
YB144
YB120
DROP K 13 IUSE
TURN OFF
PS11·31·1.25vl
METER I
OROP KZ
VB120
VB1]1
PICK KI3
METER I
(USE
TuRN OFF
POWER -ON LIGHT
ANO Z4V DC TO
ALLOW LOGIC TO
PICK K6, K 10,
K 11 123FD AC
AND DCI
SEQ S TART CARD
VB1lO
DROP
KI-
·Only for early machines (with CP 7J.
~460
19Dec 75
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Co
INTR 1
INTR
Feature Descriptions
INTR
05-07
Introduction to the IBM 3830 Storage Control, Model 2 .
General Description
IBM 3830 Storage Control, Model 2
Control Module
Satellite Modules
INTR
10
Disk Storage Subsystem Conceptual Units
INTR
20
Facility Error Collection
System
Storage Control Unit
Check 1 Errors
Check 2 Errors
Microprogram Detected Errors
Device
INTR
50
INTR
90
3830·2 Data Flow Introduction
Control Storage
Microprogram Controls
Register Data Flow
MPl File and Attachment
CE Panel Controls
Arithmetic logic Unit
Control Interface (CTl·l)
Channel Interface (CHl·l)
Read Data Path
Write Data Path
.................
3830·2 Data Flow
INTR
100
Control Storage, MPL File (23FDI, MI"L Attachment.
INTR
105
Storage Control Unit Controls
INTR
110
Registers, ALU Data Flow.
INTR
115
Control Interface (CTL·II .
INTR
120
Channel Interface (CHL·II .
INTR
140
3830·2
©
Copyright IBM CorporatIOn 1972. 1973. 1976
CONTENTS
INTR 1
(e
-----------------
)OOOC)OOO()() 0 0 0 0 0 0
(~
J
-----------
~~~~-
(0··
-;;
0.
,y
~~
~y
0··
\. ..
rr"
Y..._JJ
o·
...'
~-
~J.
I.:
0',,--jJ
t~
1
(.~
J\
~-,..,
~?
~-
.
__. ---~--------
r
1'(
(/
L/
(
(
(
(-
(-
(~
(-
(
(
(
'
f-
(-'> (,
(-
(-- (-
(
('"
(-
(
(-
L
FACILITY ERROR COLLECTION
FACI LITY ERROR COLLECTION
•
•
This page gives a summary of the various error collection
methods and where more information can be found in the
MLM.
Facility error information is collected on three levels;
system, storage control unit, and device.
SYSTEM
Performance Data Collection
Console Error Message Analysis
EREP Descriptions
OL T Descriptions
MSG
MSG
MSG
OL T
INTR 50
DEVICE
For details of device errors see the device MLM.
Check·2 Error Collection
(Controller Error}
Sense Summary
Control Storage Contents
(Device Error Logging In)
PANEL 50
SENSE 1
CTR L 650, 652
10
20
30-40
1
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT
Status Information
CMD 180. 181
Sense Information
SENSE 1
Error Symptom Code
FSI 5
Control Storage Contents
CTR L 650. 652
CE Panel
PANEL 10
Check 1 Error Collection
PANEL 40, 41
Check 2 Error Collection
PANEL 50, 51
Error Collection Diagrams (ECD) for each error are located in
machine section (CHL-I, CTRL, MPL, CTL-I),
Microdiagnostic Routine Summary MICRO 10
Mlcroword Formats
MIC 10-18
Command Retry
CMD 210
Check 1 Errors
Check 1 errors are errors that prevent the microprogram
from operating correctly. therefore. operation of the
SCU is stopped.
Check 2 Errors
Check 2 errors are errors that are detected by circuits IJl
the device or attachment areas of the SCU. These errors do
not affect the operation of the microprogram. The microprogram collects. decodes, and transfers this information
to the CPU as status and sense data.
Microprogram Detected Errors
The microprogram monitors Check 2 errors while using
,my of the attachments of the SCU. The microprogram
dho can detect other errors that are not of a circuit failure
typ., (end of file, command reject, etc.). The microprogram
logs errors in control storage, decodes them into sense
datd. and tlansfers them to the CPU on a Sense command.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
©
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973.1975
FACILITY ERROR COLLECTION
INTR 50
3830-2 DATA FLOW INTRODUCTION
3830-2 DATA FLOW INTRODUCTION
•
o
INTR 105 - 140 show the basic data flow oaths and
functional components of the storage conti 01 unit.
References are given to other diagrams for nore
information.
CONTROL
STORAGE
CONTROL STORAGE
o
o
•
o
o
•
o
•
o
•
MICRO
PROGRAM
CONTROLS
CE
PANEL
CONTROLS
IAR addresses control storage during instruction cycles.
DAR addresses control storage during data cycles
(s tore/fetch).
Backup address (BAR) register holds address on errors.
Error register holds check-1 errors (CU).
SA-SD registers, error register, or BAR puts data on the
write bus to control storage.
Microprogram decodes control the CU operations.
ST (status) register and B R (branch) register control
microprogram branching.
•
•
•
-
CONTROL
INTERFACE
•
•
INTR 120
Four Registers, SA, SB, SC, SD are used as entry from and
exit to control storage.
Two Registers, ST and BR are used for microprogram branching.
Fifteen Registers have exits to the A bus and A register input
to ALU.
All GP registers have exits to the B bus and B register input
to ALU.
Selected registers have entry and/or exits to the channel
interface or control interface to the control module.
~BuOioo Seq 2~!..?
©
2347"91- 1
Part No. (8) !
[437402A
15 Ma~.....J.._ _ _ _
WRITE DATA PATH
CE panel and controls provide data entry, read out, and
operation controls for maintenance.
Clock and cycle controls provide the basic timing of
control unit operations.
Data from the channel enters the channel interface buffer
trom channel bus out and is transferred to the NA register.
The microprogram transfers the byte from NA to the B bus,
through the ALU and D bus to the TA register. The byte is
transferred to the CTL .. I buffer and onto the CTL .. I bus out
lines.
Perform logical AND, OR, Add, Subtract, and Exclusive
OR operations.
Only path for register-to-register transfers.
CONTROL INTERFACE (CTL-I)
F Registers are used as general purpose registers or as temporary,
automatic incrementing storage buffers. Automatic mode is
microprogram controlled using Special op (code) 12, and bits
set in the TF-register.
3830·2
Functional or diagnostic microprograms on 23FD disk.
On IMPL (initial microprogram load) operations, the
attachment circuitry controls reading of data from the disk
through the D bus to the S registers. The data is then transferred via the write bus to control storage.
Microprogram, through the attachment, controls reading
after the first record.
ARITHMETIC LOGIC UNIT
ALU
INTR 115
•
•
Data from the device enters the CTL-I Buffer from CTL .. I bus
in and is transferred to the MA register. The microprogram
transfers the byte from MA to B bus through the ALU and D
bus to the MD register. The byte is transferred to the channel
interface buffer and onto the channel bus in lines.
•
REGISTER
DATA
FLOW
General purpose (GP) registers store data for the use of the
microprogram.
•
•
•
CE PANEL CONTROLS
INTR 110
•
•
•
READ DATA PATH
o
REGISTER DATA FLOW
•
MPL FILE AND ATTACHMENT
INTR 105
4,096-byte writable control store.
2,048 or 4,096 byte control store extension feature.
Four-byte read/write control storage transfEr.
Addressed by the address bus.
Output of instructions or data is on the reac bus.
MICROPROGRAM CONTROLS
o
MPL
FILE
INTR 90
Provides a data path to and from the control Illodule(s)
attached.
Provides communication between the microprogram and
the control module(s) for control of deVice opt!rations.
CHANNEL INTERFACE (CHL-I)
CHANNEL
INTERFACE
•
•
o
INTR 140
Provides communication between the channel and the CU
microprogram.
Provides a data path to and from the channel.
May be single channel, two channel, or four channel interface.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
J _ _ _ _- ' -_ _ _ _L..-_ _ _- ' -_ _ _--'L...-_ _ _...J
3830-2 DATA FLOW INTRODUCTION
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
INTR 90
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1975
:)000000000
o o o
0 ,' 0 0"," 0,,, 0';' 0:' '0 0
,
"
,."
"
':
'.'.'
,
,
o
r,
['J
o o o
o o
()
(~: p
L
(~
(-
(:~
(~: (
(- (-
('
(
("
('
(
(~\
(-"
(-
() (
(~-
3830-2 DATA FLOW
_c>(
.
,
(
(J
(:
3130-2 DATA FLOW
I NTR 100
3130-2 DATA FLOW
I NTR 100
Refer to INTR 20 for description of conceptual units.
~~------------------------~
INTR 105 through
INTR 140 provide
more details of the
3830·2 circuits.
CONTROL STORAGE
MICROPROGRAM LOAD (MPL) FILE
INTR 105
Refer to referrenced
sections for descriptions
of circuit operations,
and CMD section
for 38»2 operations.
INTR 105
Reod Doto
••
Con~rols
MICROPROGRAM LOAD ATTACHMENT
Address Bus MPL
INTR 105
•
••
•
••
~
WRITE BUS
./)
CE PANEL
INTR 110, PANEL 10
CONTROL STORAGE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
CE Controls
CE CONTROLS
•
For ced Address Bus
INTR 110
Status
Register
tt•••
4 Byte,
{
~ To SA, SB, SC, SD
•
Registers
Branch
Register
Register
Gates
B Bu,
L_. . . . . . . ..
From SA, SB, SC,
,r
SO Registers
To
INTR 110
SA, SB, SC,
>---+..M.P.L.R.ea.diiDoiiiilo. .O.n.e.B.t.e)_ _ _....
SO Registers
MPL Dr;ve Controls
MICROPROGRAM DATA
FLOW CONTROLS
To
CE Dota Bus
D Bus
TO Register Bits
CTL-l Controls (TCi;, 7) (TB0-2)
CTL-I Register to MA Regin« ts
Byte 0
To A Register
INTR 115
Dalo From
MD, TC,
C
TG
Dola To
NA, And
Branch
Registers
Controls
CJIllElIEI_--.
ST4-lndex
Controls to Control Module
1[:=)111.111• • • • INTERFACE
CHANNEL
N
N
~e=lDmmu........
To ST Reg;,ter
INTR 140
T
CONTROL
INTERFACE
INTR 120
,
Bus
Controls From Control Module
I
I
I
L _____ J
3830·2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
c
..
~~.----~--.~~~~
CONTROL STORAGE, MPL FILE, MPL ATTACHMENT
INTR 105
Disk Cartridge
Guide
WRITE BUS
Write Error
Bytes 0-2
Bytes 1-3
WRITE BUS
WRITE BUS
WRITE BUS
CHECK BIT
GENERATOR
PANEL 40
Address
Check
CTRL 200
Timing
Control
P 0/2
31
P 1/3 0
Read
Bytes
0/2
1/3
PANEL
40
Read
File Data
DATA
DATA
SEPARATION Bit
AND
DETECTION Counter
AC
SUPPl Y
Error Count 182
PANEL
40
MPL 245
MPl
BYTE
ASSEMBl Y
2
Bit 7
o
o
....'!-..-t
I'"
7
p
Halt
IMPl
TG
0-3
LA305
TRACK
SEC TOR
NOT
ZERO
LA306
IMPl Error
M
6
CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACE CONTROL STORAGE INTERFACl:
r,Jl...w-.....
--.--~""
••
•
3830·2
o
I
I•
INTR
115
IBM CONFI.OENTIAL
447460
1 19 Dec 75
© CoPvright IBM Corporation
MPL INTR
270 110
CONTROL STORAGE, MPL FILE, MPL ATTACHMENT
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
INTR 105
1975
o o o
o
'0'-'.
.. ·
0·.--'
o
00
,/'~
~y
()
r
\
.j
o o
o
'·····
0
.J
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CONTROLS
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CONTROLS
•
,
a
IMPL Addr Bits 8-13, P
Forced Address Bih B-13,P
Forced Address Bih 1-7,P/8-13,P
1-<
TAR Bits 1-7,P
....
Byte
a
L
Bits 1-7
~
~:'
I
r--Forced --..
Address
~
Bits 1-7, P
IAR Bits 1-7, P
~*
7
~
BCBu. Bits 0-5
....
.. .,.;, ""-, I
ri;
13
~
....
Byte
.IID~
-
a B~h 0~3,P
~
'gl
By'e I Bi'~ 4~;>, ~
~
~
8 :
,
....
If
Bi'. 0-7, P
'"
lsi
Byte 0 Bits D-7,P
....
IS
P
L--
~ors
PANEL 40
Bits I, 2,
5
3'i
I~J~'b<6E'S
ERROR
CONTROLS
RL202
DE502
DE103
DE302
DE304
DE201
Format
RL105
Byte 3 Bih 0-7,P
RL207
Operation RA303
- Special Op DE402
....
"
I
SAO-7,P
Byte I Bits 0-7, P CA
CB
CD
CH
Byte 2 8it. D-7,P CL
CS
l1li..
Bits 1-7" P/ 8-15, P
RL302
SB 0-7, P
ERROR
r--
0
W
PANEL
40
".
W
,',
STATUS REGISTER
SET CONTROLS
D -Bu.
'RC1I
~
~
.3830-2
,....
,nd,t,on,1
15
P
"
Gate Error 1 Reg To Write
Error Stop to Clock
BU0600
Seq 1 of 2
Lo Bits
O-~
,
.
"
...
CE PANEL
PANEL 10
~
I'~-
~
I~
By'e 2 Bits 0-7,P ...,
[J
~
lOR
rrJ
t
RESET CONTROLS
Byte 3 Bits 0-7, P
>-
0
,}
0
KK3031
L-
RL303
RL403
0
0
Reset from Channel
0
Resets
~
Error Stop to Clock
g
1
~
j'"
000"
Conditions
5
'0.«
j ___
CLOCK
AND CYCLE
CONTROLS
CTRL
300
KK201 -KK205
KK301-KK302
,- BUS
r
PANFl 1 0 .
BRANCH
CONTROLS
DE302.
DE304 II
,~~,nO~7~~g
'f
""
0
, 11
'"
V
'"
'"
«-
Part No. (B)
I
Byte 1 Bits 0-7, P
~
~
Byte 2 Bits 0-7. P
Byte 3 Bits 0-7, P' "-
,OR
,le1i. 7'1 B- Bu. 0-7,P
Assembl, RllIa Bu. Bits 0-7, P
I
I
~
RS302
RS302
BAR Bits D-7.P/D-7.P
Addr Bu. 0-;, P/B-I 5
E,
Bits 0-7,P!8-15 (
Inl Comp Addr Reg
Biha-7,p!8-1
P
Address Reg Di.p B;t. 0-7,P '8-IS,P
lOR
"-
" RL305
RL405
",,-
'"
437402A
437404
437405
15 Mar 72
23 Jun 72
15 Aug 72
Cl Copyri"'t 11M Corpomion 1172, 1173, 1176
-
r
~-JV
j
I
\2347193
t
CTRL 200
Statu. Reg Bit, 0-7, P
~
1r
KK201
Bits 0-7,P and
External Display 0-7, P r -
';~n~~ C~~d~'~ons
INTR
140
L- r -
C E Address Hi
I--
~"B1"
DE201 I,~,,",u.-'.'
Check 2
I"~
CTRL
CLOCK
300
STOP
~CKTS
lOR
J
SD 0-7,P
...,
Byte 0 Bits 0-7 , p
I.
,ft'
PANEL 40
Bi' I
Inl Comp
Addr Reg
Bih O-IS,P
Byte I Bih D-7,P ...,
0
".
Error Reg 8-15, P
~
Late
Errors
Compare Equal
RL407
lOR
LJ
SC a-7,p
a Bih 0-7,P
lOR
LJ
Error Reg 0-7. P
8
Byte
J'
j
'---
7
P
Byte 0 Bits 4-7
INTR
.
115
(!!"Isce"an~~us
Eorly
;
.
r--
BAR Bits 0-7,P
iI'"
RL104
RL205
IiII..
~
COMPARE
"
a
Storage Address Bus
Check
SB 0-7,P
"--- P
RL304
RL404
nBAR Bits 1-7,P
I~ :
1r""-- a
" ...
I.'
~~
5j
Bits 0-2, P
By'e I
Bit.I-7,P/B-13,P
7
P
BACKUP
ADDRESS
REGISTER
41,
....
I--
SA 0-7,P
,,-
CTRL 220
I
-',
Forced Address
L-
CH ond CL
I Branch
RL
,
INTR 110
,
,
"
ADDR
COMP
a
RL200
13
P
I.....-
(
(
I
437408
16 Oct 72
I
437414
4 Jun 73
I
447460
19 Dec 75
•
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIEO THEREAFTER
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT CONTROLS
IN TR 110
REGISTERS. ALU DATA FLOW
REGISTERS, ALU DATA FLOW
•
INTR 115
1
~
I
Read Byte O. Bits 0-7, P
Read Byte O. B,tS 0-7 P
(To Write Bus)
B-BUS
01
0>0..
aiD..
&: ,,50
."
CI:_
..c:~
uo
-VI
c: ..
ci5iii
CD CD
"
Byte O.
... Bits 0-7. P
CD
"0
'"
I ••.IB
0>
a:
}
Byte 1.
~Bits 0-7. P
.;
Byte 2.
... Bits 0-7. P
1
~
..,.. ..
~
Byte 3.
.... Bits 0-7. P
PANEL 40
Bit 6
r---
I- SA I-
~
.....
r- ....
Byte I,
Iilll..Blts 0-7 P
.
~
I-
~~
,.........
l-
..
!-•
...
,
~
r--
ST
jill
I-
..
GA
L....-
~
..--
~
.
BR
I-
•
NA
,.....--
,..
By'" 3.
.....Blts ()-LI'
iii
... .
........
J
....
•
•
TB
~
- -•
MA
..
l1li
•
.
I-
~
~
r
I-
*
.
•
III
••
-'
TC
-
~
,.....--
-
MC
~
-..
l: U
*
•
-..
b'
RA201
RA301
ME
PANEL 40
BIt 4
'---
!
S.. " RA30~
ARITH
LOGIC
UNIT
(ALUI
tOt ga1lo9 of
MPL and CE
data onto
D-Bus.
d
RG601
.. •
po---
MF
*
-
'---
~
RG602
III!..
III!..
lam
•
PANEL 40
Bit 5
PANEL 40
B,,6
B-R~ISTER,
I)
J
J
A-~ER
'---
RG603
TF
r--
III
I-
lID
"-
R"G5cii
MO
LV
INTR
RA303
r----
TE
III-
r--
ICarry Out Lat~
~llltoALU
- -
I-
RG4Oi'
INTH
110
lREG
TO
R"G3oi
-0
INTR 110
\,.
~
~
PANEL 40
B,t 6
NF ~
RG503
,
D-Bus Elfu,,1 Zero
.---
I---
~
•
PANE;l40
13,,6
'---
NE ~
*
NO
~
.--GF ~
RG604
-..
iG403
III!..
Il
J
NC
~
III!..
l
,..
r--
\...
,.....--
MB
GE ~
RG504
RG404
iG3O:
R"GToi
-
III!..
•
-..
ffii'Oi
~I-~
,..
TA
r----
I---
RG'304
NB
" .-
-
T
TG
R~
RS
io-
~
..
GO
I-
~
\...
A
. . SC·
GC
tG203l-
:GT1i3
r--
~
RG204
INTR
Bvte 2,
IIt.futs 0 -J. P
GB
R~
~
r--
~
~
~
~
~
R"sToi
~
J
~ .~
10-
REG
RAi"Oi
RA201
RA301
I
li
RA203
RA301
Sequentially gated
. to SA. SB. SC. SD
I
...
Bus Out and
"C::PIPr •..n
14
~
'-
• Two Channel Switch. Additional. on Iv.
B
To/From
Channel Controls
INTR 140
~
~
S
C
---~
1
TO/From
CTL-I
INTR 120
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
REGISTERS. ALU DATA FLOW
UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
INTR 115
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1975
o
C) 00
o
()
o o
(.).
'-,
().
",-.
o
C)
o
o o o
~~~~---~-----
(
~ (/
(
(--
(-
(
(
(-
(-
(-
(-
("'\
(".
(---~.
(~
j
CONTROL INTERFACE (CTL-I)
CONTROL INTERFACE (CTl-1l
INTR 120
Refer to CTL-I section for details
To/From
INTR 115
g
Cl
Z
..J
W
"tl
t::
w
IX!
I-
-
...
iii
.,
c:'"
IX!
I-
<>-
".
•
M
•
N
o
Z
co
o
..J
I
o
Co
1Il~
gc
c:
Z
______________~
~
I-
u
iii
Cl
IX!
~
o
o
Co
~
r---....,W
o
-
"0
J:
..,"
I
Qj
III
0"
. .J
~
,
tJ
iii
Cl
8
o
..t:
....,
~. .J
tJ
.,
~
8.
:G
c:
:3
~c
(;
Ji
8
E
.g
.,x
~
~
...c
8
'E
.,
>
l
..
c
::!:
::l
IX!
l!l
Controller
J
B
~
~ " ~ \. ~ ~ ; "
-=CoN.:.:.NT~R.:.;:O:.:l:..:.I.:.:.NT.:.:E:.:.R:.:..F:.:.AC::.:E~(c:::.CT.:.:l::..:.I.!..)...::C~O:!.!N..!.;TR:.!.:O:::.!:l:.!I.!.!NT.!..!E::.!.R!!.F~A~CE::...!!::(C:.!.T::l-!.!..1)....;C~O~N!.!.T.!:.!.RO~l I NTE R FACE
(CTl-1)
~e
r--
:;
~
~~
~~
al-
-2
GJ
~L'
~
\ i ,,!
CONTROL I NTE RFACE (CTl-1) CQNTROl INTE R FACE (C.Ih:1)
Set Buffer
f
CONTROL I NTE RFACE~
(CT·;-;;-IL-Ill)-:C~ON-:-;;:::TRI-:::-:-IOL:7111N;-:;:T-:;:"E_IR~:IF~
AC:;:"E"
((IC:::;-T=-:-·l";-;-III)-:=
CON=T-IR:"::-:-OL-:-:IN~TE:=
IRI=IF:,A-=-=-=CE:-7'C=TL_-:-II:--:
IIC'-:::-:-:'ONT=
RIIO::-:-:"LI-:-=
NTE:--:IR--:
IF--:-ACE-(,.-(IC-T-Il.• -'I:).....
To/From
Control Module/
Devices
3830-2
CONTROL INTERFACE (CTl-1l
INTR 120
c
CHANNEL INTERFACE ~CHL-I)
CHANNEL INTERFACE (CHL-II
I NT R 140
In and Enabled A
Buffer
Controls
Channel
Transfer
Buffers
Buffer Parity Chk
Check 2 { Interface Chk
Transfer Chk
Multi Connect
!..
I
In and Enabled
Buffer
Controls
Bit 0 • Chan Write
In and Enabled C
In and Enabled
In and Enabled D
See
CHL·I 165
CHL·I 360
CHL·I 380
A
50
Channel
Transfer
Control
B
~-----t
Bus Out
Parity
Ch A Bus Out Parity Error
Tag In
Controls
Ch B Bus Out Parity Error
Ch C Bus Out Parity Error
Ch D Bus Out Parity Error
Seltd Service Out
KA10l-l08
KB10l-l0B
KC10l-l08
KD10l-l0B
GK701-003
KA103
KB103
KC103
KD103
BFRDY/CUEND (CL 14)
See
CHL-I 140.
CHL-I 145
See
CHL·I 155
GK601-605
NE201-203
Two
Channel
Switch.
Additional,
Controls
GK501-507
NE103
Two Channel Switch Additional Control
See
CHL·I 475
Two Channel Switch. Additional,
Control
From TB. TC.
TE, TG Registers
..1.
Cl
From Special
Operation Decodes
INTR 110
To Branch Controls
INTR 110
3830·2
CHANNEL INTERFACE (CHL-II
o
o
o o ()
o o oo o o o
10
o
10'
',";
C)
o
INTR 140
00
o o o c
f
(
(.~-
(
--------------
- - - - - - - - - - - --
--.---.-~"-
-,
(
('\ (
(-
(
(--'
(
PREFACE TO CMD SECTION
The CMD section describes operations that are controlled by the functional microcode.
Although the diagrams combine information pertaining to the 3330 attachment, 3340
attachment, 3340/3340·B2 attachment, 3330/3340 Intermix, and 3330/3340/3350
Intermix, only orw of these features and its related microcode will be supplied on the SCU.
The diagrams also combine versions of the microcode pertaining to the various
special features available for the SCU and device strings. These features. which
mayor may not be installed. include the following:
(~
(
(-
-----~
(~~
(-
(
(~/
("
(~
(- (' (-
f'
('---
f
(
(-
(-'
-,
CMD
Command Summary
Control Commands
Sense Commands
Read Commands
Write Commands
Search Commands
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . .
.
.
. .
.
.
CMD 2
Control Commands-Descriptions
CMD 5
Device Control Operation.
CMD10
Two Channel Switch
Two Chanflel Switch. Additional
32 Drive Expansion (provision for four device strings per CU path)
String Switch (provision for two SCUs per device string; always included in 3340 SCU
microcode)
Control Commands-Objectives
CMD15
Control Commands-Flowcharts.
CMD 20
3830-2/Controllnterface Operation
CMD35
Refer to MIC section for microblock and instruction format information.
Search Commands-Descriptions
CMD 50
Search Commands -Objectives-Flowcharts.
CMD55
Write Commands-Descriptions
CMD 70
Write Operation .
.
CMD 75
Write Commands-Objectives·
CMD 71
Write Commands-Flowcharts
CMD80
Write Data Transfer·
CMD90
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Read Commands-Descriptions
CMD 100
Read Operation .
.
CMD 105
Read Commands-Objectives .
CMD 107
Read Commands-Flowcharts
CMD 110
Read Data Transfer'
CMD 130
. .
.
Command Decode
CMD 183
Ending Sequence.
CMD 190
Disconnected Command Chaining
CMD 200
Command Retry (3330 and 3350)
Seek Malfunctions
Data or Command Overrun
Defective or Alternate Track
Data Error
Correctable Data Error Not in Data Fields
Uncorrectable Data Errors
Correctable Data Errors in Data Field
CMD 210
.
CMD 220
Defect Skipping Examples (3340, 3340-82, and 3350)
CMD 230
Resets . . . _ .
Power·On
Push Button (Manual)
Selective
System
CMD 250
Command Retry Reorientation-CKD.
Rotational Position Sensing .
Read Sector
Set Sector
Read/Set Sector Operation
Disk layout
Track Layout
.
.
. . .
.
.
.
.
.
. CMD 300
CMD 305
_ .
.
. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. CMD 400
.
.
.
. CMD 430 .
Sense Commands-Objectives' .
Sense Commands-Flowcharts .
CMD 142
Multiple Track (MIT) Operation, End of File, Orientation.
Transfer Inline Diagnostics to Control Unit
CMD 165
Read Diagnostic to System
. .
CMD 165
Polling Idle Loop and Initial Selection.
CMD 170
Status Information
Status Modifier
Control Unit End
Busy
Channel End
Device End
Unit Check
Unit Exception'
Initial Status Byte • • • • . • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Pending Status Conditions
:Jtatus Pending in the Control Unit
Address Associated with Pending Status
Status Pending in the Device
Priority of Pending Status Conditions
CMD 180
.
.
.
CMD 140
.
.
.
. .
Sense Commands-Descriptions .
.
.
.
.
Overflow Record.
Formatting
Processing
. .
.
.
.
CMD 145
CMD 181
3830-2
PREFACE TO CMD SECTIOIII, CONTENTS
()Copyrlghl IBM Corpo..lion 1872, 1873,1874, 1875, 1878
(~
CMD1
PREFACE TO CMD SECTION. CONTENTS
CONTENTS
(
CMD1
(
COMMANpSUMMARY
COMMANO SUMMARY
CMD2
The charts and flowcharts in this section summarize the Storage Control Unit (SCU)
commands used by the facility. They describe what the commands do and how they
are controlled by the SCU.
CONTROL COMMANDS
Control commands are used to start operations not involving data recorded (or to be
recorded) on the pack. These operations include positioning the access mechanism
and selecting the head.
I":
For most control functions, the entire operation is specified by the command
code. If the command code does not specify the entire control function, the data
address field of the CCW designates a main storage location contain'ing the additional
information.
Command Summary
Hex Code
Multi·
Track
Command
Objective
Command
Flowchart
No Operation
Seek
Seek Cylinder'
Seek Head
Space Count
Recal ibrate
Restore
Set File Mask
Set Sector
Diagnostic Load
Diagnostic Write
03
07
OB
lB
OF
13
CMD 16
CMD 15
CMD 15
CMD15
CMD16
CMD 15
CMD 16
CMD 15
CMD 15
CMD 16
CMD16
CMD25
CMD20
CMD 20
CMD 20
CMD 30
CMD20
CMD25
CMD20
CMD25
CMD 25
CMD30
Test 110
Sense I/O
Read and Reset Buffered Log
Read Diagnostic Status 1
Device Release
Device Reserve
Sense I/O Type"
Unconditional Reserve"·
00
04
A4
44
94
B4
-
r.MD 142
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
CMD
Read Data
Read Key, Data
Read Count, Key, Data
Read RO
Read Count
Read Home Address
Read IPL
Read Sector
Read Multiple Count Key Data"
06
OE
lE
16
12
lA
02
22
5E
Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Write
Erase
05
00
10
01
15
19
11
Type
Command Name
Control
SENSE COMMANDS
Two sense commands .. Sense 1/0, and Read and Reset Buffered Log .. transfer sense
bytes of usagelerror log information from the facility to the using system.
Sense 1/0 Type transfers device type information to the using system.
Test 1/0, which is a programmed instruction and not a channel command word
(CCWI,causes the status byte to be sent to the channel in the initial selection
sequence.
Sense
•
READ COMMANDS
Read commands transfer information from the subsystem to main' storage of the
using system. On all Read commands, the device checks (by means of correction
code bytes) the validity of each area of a record as the record is read from a track.
A parity bit is added to each byte as it is sent to the channel. All Read commands
can operate on overflow records and, except for Read IPL, Read Sector and Read
Multiple Count Key Data (CKD), can operate in multitrack mode.
Read
Write
WRITE COMMANDS
Write commands transfer data from main storage to the device for recording on the
disk pack. While writing data on the disk pack, the device appends the appropriate
correction code bytes to each count, key, and data field as they are written.
Write commands can be grouped into: (1) format Write commands, used to
establish records, and (2) nonformat Write commands, used to update previously
written records.
Search
Page
Single
Track
17
lF
23
53
73
Data
Key, Data
Count, Key, Data
Spec Count, Key, Data
RO
Home Address
Search
Search
Search
Search
Search
Search
Search
Home Address
Equal 10
High 10
High, Equal 10
Equal Key
High Key
High, Equal Key
~:
39
31
51
71
29
49
69
86
8E
9E
96
92
9A
CMD 107
-
-
---'
-
CMD77
-
B9
Bl
01
Fl
A9
Command
Example
CMD 35
.
g~g ~:~
CMD5
-
145
150
150
150
145
150
CMD 120
CMD 120
CMD 120
CMD 110
CMD 110
CMD 110
CMD 125
CMD 125
CMD 125
CMD 125
CMD85
CMD85
CMD85
CMD85
CMD80
CMD80
CMD85
--
Command
Oescription
CMD 140
-
-
-
CMD 130
CMD 100
CMD90
CM070
CMD55
-
CM055
CMD50
-
C9
E9
SEARCH COMMANDS
Search commands transfer a specific number of bytes from main storage to the SCU.
The SCU compares these bytes with data read from a track record. When the condition
specified in the search command is satisfied, the status modifier bit is set. The status
bytes hold the condition of the status modifier bit until that bit is rt"set.
• Supported only in 3330/3340/3350 intermix and 3340/3344 microcode loads.
• "Supported only in 3330/3340/3350 intermix microcode loads.
3830·2
COMMAND SUMMARY
t>CopyrighllBM Corpor.lion 1972, 11173. 1974, 1975, 111711
()
;Fl
0 0 'J
0
\~
(1l
]
(1,
"" ..Y
If~
'0
0
10
v...J
0 0 0
0
\.Y
0
~,
'V
~
/'~
'r
''i...JI
0
.c
0
IJ
n
V
0 0 0 0
t').
~,
,0
~y
CMD2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
~
.
('-
()
(~\
(-'
-(
(
CONTROL COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
CONTROL COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
CMD5
ERROR CONDITIONS
COMMAND
Dn.,\IL DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
CODE
DATA TRANSFERRED
ACROSS CHANNEL
ERROR TYPE
COMMAND
EXECUTED
SENSE BIT SET
PRESENTED DURING
ENDING STATUS
PRESENTED DURING
INITIAL STATUS
Six address bytes
Seek
07
1. Move the access to the cylinder specified by the
seek address.
2. Select the head specified by the seek address.
CMD 20
Seek Cylinder
OB
Seek Head
1B
Select the head specified by the seek address
No Operation
03
No action. Channel End and Device End
during initial status.
Recalibrate
13
Move the access to cyli nder zero and select head zero
Restore
17
No action. Zero initial status IS followed by final status
of Channel End and Device End.
CMD 25
Set File Mask
1F
Set file mask to indicate permitted Write and Seek
commands
CMD 20
Space Count
OF
~re
presented
When chained from a Read, Search, Write, or Space
Count command this command locates the start of the
next count field (including RO), spaces over the count
field, and ends with Channel End and Device End in the
gap before the Key field.
23
Used on disconnected command chaining channels to
eliminate the need for the channel to maintain
connection with the control unit while waiting for
the selected record to reach the head,
Diagnostic
Load
53
Diagnostic
Write
73
Fewer than six address bytes
transferred.
Command Reject.
Address validity.
Bus Out Parity.
CMD 20
One byte of file mask data
More than one Set File Mask
command issued in a chain
of CCWs
No
Command Reject
Index point occurs before an
address marker is read,
CMD 30
Three bytes used as key length
(one byte) and data length (two
bytes) for the next command
Angular position specified is
greater than 127 (3330 and 3350
series drives) or 63 (3340 series
drives) and less than 255
Transfer the specified 512-byte block from the 23FD
to the control storage buffer
CMD 25
One byte of control information
addresses one sector on the 23F D
Invalid 23F D address
Transfer an inline test from main storage to the CU and
executes the test
CMD 30
A maximum of 512 bytes of inline
diagnostic microprogram
Fewer than 400 bytes
Invalid
Track Format.
Unit Check.
Channel End.
Device End,
Command Reject
Unit Check.
Channel End.
Device End.
No
Command Reject
Unit Check.
Channel End.
Device End.
No
Command Reject
No
-
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
Unit Check
No Record Found.
Index pc-int sensed while
spacing a cou nt area.
CMD 25
Copyright IBM Corporation 1912, 1913,1915
Unit Check.
Channel End.
Device End.
None
UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976, UNCLASSIFIEP THEREAFTER
©
Command Reject.
Bus out parity.
One byte specifies angular track
position (0-127 for 3330 and 3350
series drives, or 0-63 for 3340 series
drives)
3830-2
No
CMD 25
When not chained, Space Count searches for index,
spaces over gap 1, home address, gap 2, and RO count.
End operation in gap following RO count with Channel
End and Device End.
Set Sector
(Feature on
3340 series drives)
Six address bytes. For 3330 and
3350 series drives, only the five
low·order bits of the sixth byte
al'e used for the seek address.
For 3340 series drives, only the
four low-order bits of the sixth
byte are used.
Unit Check.
Channel End.
Device End.
CONTROL COMMANDS-DESCRtPTlONS
CMD5
DEVICE CONTROL OPERATION
DEVICE CONTROL OPERATION
•
Moves the heads to a location selected by
the using system.
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT
II
•
•
II
CHANNEL
SYSTEM
Start 1/0
• Executes
instruction. which
addresses a
channal command
word (CCW)
containing Seek
command.
Executes CCW to transfer
• the
Seek command to the
•
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Decode the Seek command and control the
transfer of seek address information to the CU.
• Check status of the module and transfer
status to the channel.
storage control unit (SCU).
• Control timing of the
transfer of data between
the channel and CU.
Transfers the seek address
data to the control unit.
• Check parity of data
transferred to the CU.
Disconnects from control
• unit
until CU signals
•
Transfer control and address information to
the module.
•
Select the addressed module.
•
Set up conditions to check for Device End
from the module.
•
Perform intermediate operations until device
status is received.
•
Transfer status to the channel when module
arrives at the selected track and signal
Device End.
device end status.
CHANNEl
Device
Status
Inform·
ation
a
m
. . DEVICE
all INTERFACE
HEAD POSITIONING
. . CONTROLS AND ADDRESSING
SERVO
. . DISK
•
•
Control direction and amount of
movement of the access mechanism
(if required).
•
•
Signal Device End to the CU when
new location is reached.
Transfers control. address •
and status information.
':::'
.,::'
Seek
Control
Inform·
ation
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
DEVICE
INTERFACE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
CHL·I
CTRL
DEV·I
Seek Micro·
program
Provides signal
for each track
passed from the
servo disk.
• Maintain head position over the
selected track.
Seek
Control
Inform·
ation
SYSTEM
DEVICE
CONTROL MODULE
• Calculate difference between present head
location and the new address from the system.
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
CMD 10
Device
Status
Inform·
ation
Mechanical
Motion
HEAD
POSITIONING
CONTROLS
HEAD ACCESS
MECHANISM
DRV
DRV
Track
DISK
Log
Data
CONTROL STORAGE
CTRL 600
II
•
III
Provides mechanical movement
of the head assembly.
CONTROL INTERFACE
•
Tranfers control. address. and
status information.
•
Selects control module
and device.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830·2
HEAD ACCESS MECHANISM
UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
DEVICE CONTROL OPERATION
CMD 10
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973,1975
()
('\
\
;J
~
()
o
o o o
C)
o o
o o
O
..
i
c
~
1'(. . .
L
(-
..
CONTROL COMMANDS -
(~
(
(~
(.:
(
-
~
-
(~
~-.--~-
(~
.. ---
(
(~
(
(-
(
(
{y ("
(~~
('~
OBJECTIVES (Part 1 of 2)
SEEK (07)
SEEK CYLINDER (OB)
SEEK HEAD (lB)
(:"
(
",.
CONTROL COMMANDS ~ OBJECTIVES (Part I of 2)·
eM D 15
RECALIBRATE (13)
SET FILE MASK (IF)
SET SECTOR (23)
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 20 for flowcharts and CAS references.
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 20 for flowcharts and CAS references.
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 20 for flowcharts and CAS references.
•
Check for valid command.
•
Check for valid command.
•
Check for valid command.
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used.
Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references.
Refer to CMD 300 and 305 for descriptions of rotational position sensing.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
Check for Set File Mask limitations. (See CMD 20.)
•
•
Check for Set File Mask limitations. (See CMD 20.)
•
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set command reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set command reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
Check for previous SFM in the same chain of commands.
•
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer six-byte address from the channel.
Send control data across CTL-I to cause the selected
controller/device to return the access to cylinder 0
and select head O.
•
Transfer one byte of data from channel to the control
unit. (See CMD 20 and CTRL 650.)
•
Check for transfer errors (Check 2).
1. If CCW
> six, transfer only six bytes.
2. If CCW < six, do not execute command; present
Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Command Reject in sense data.
1. If CTL-I or controller errors (Check 2) are detected, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device
End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in
sense data.
3. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit
Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending
status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data.
2. Start access motion and present only Channel End
in status to the channel.
•
Check address for Validity. If invalid, present Unit
Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Command Reject in sense data.
•
Check device status and position.
1. If not at requested address, control transfer of
seek address information to the selected
controller/device.
2. If at requested address, present Channel End and
Device End in ending status.
3. If CTL-I or controller errors (check 2) are detected,
present Unit Check, Channel End, and device end
in ending status. Set Equipment Check in sense
data.
4. Start access motion and present only Channel End
in status to the channel.
Channel can disconnect while wailing for Seek
operation to complete.
Note:
5. Receive Seek Complete indication from controller/
device and present Device End to the channel.
6. If Seek Incomplete and/or Check 2 occurs:
3330 and 3350: Do not present Device End to the
channel; go into retry mode. (See CMD 210 and
Note 1.)
3340: Present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device
End in ending status. Set Equipment Check in
sense data.
Channel can disconnect while waiting for Seek
operation to complete.
Note:
3. Receive Seek Complete indication from controller/
device and present Device End to the channel.
4. If no Seek Complete occurs or Seek is to an
address other than cylinder 0, head 0:
3330 and 3350: Do not present Device End to the
channel; go into retry mode. (See CMD 210 and
Note I.)
3340: Present Unit Check, Channel End, and
Device End in ending status. Set Equipment Check
in sense data.
Note 1: Correct access position is verified on the
next Read or Search command to this deYice. If
the access position is incorrect, the control unit
suspends the Read or Search command and starts
a retry (CMD 210). The control unit performs a
Seek to the last seek address for this deyice.
When Seek Complete is received from the deYice,
the control unit continues with the original Read or
Search command. This sequence repeats until the
correct position is achieved or a retry count of 10;s
reached. If retry is unsuccessful, Unit Check,
Channel End, and Deyice End are presented "·to the
channel. Seek E"or, with permanent bit on, is set
in the sense data.
1. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit
Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending
status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. (See SENSE I and CTRL
650.)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer the relative angular track position byte from
the channel to the control unit. If a Bus Out Parity
Error is detected, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity
in sense data.
•
Check byte for validity: If more than t 27 and less
than 255 on 3330 and 3350 (or more than 63 and
less than 255 on 3340), present Unit check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set
command reject in sense data. If the RPS feature
is not installed on the 3340, present Channel End
and Device End in ending status. A No Operation
command is performed, and track orientation is lost.
•
If byte is 255, present Channel End and Device End
to the channel. Track orientation (see CMD 430) is
reset.
•
Present Channel End to the channel. The channel
should indicate chaining and disconnect.
•
If byte is zero, transfer control information to the
controller/device to cause reselection of the channel
(by request in line) before index point.
•
If byte is 1 to 127 for 3330 (63 for 3340), adjust the
sector number to compensate for channel reconnection delay. Also, transfer control information to the
controller/device to cause reselection before the requested sector.
•
If reselection is not accepted by the channel; Request
In is dropped and is raised again on the next revolution.
•
If Check 2 is indicated in CTL-I or controller/device,
present Unit Check and Device End in ending status.
Set Equipment Check in sense data.
•
If operation is completed correctly, present Device
End in ending status.
2. If no error occurs, present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
•
Use file mask byte data to control later Write and
Seek commands. (See CMD 20.)
3830-2
CONTROL COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Part 1 of 2)
C> CallYritllt 11M Cotpor8tion 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976
eM D 15
CONTROL COMMANDS -
CONTROL COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Part 2 of 2)
OBJECTIVES (Part 2 of 2)
eM D 16
RESTORE (17)
DIAGNOSTIC LOAD (53)
DIAGNOSTIC WRITE (73)
SPACE COUNT (OF)
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used.
Refer to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references.
Refer'to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to
CMD 165 for description of the use of this command.
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to
CMD 160 for description of the use of this command.
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references.
•
Check for valid command.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
Check SFM (see CMD 20) 'to see if command is allowed.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject or
File Protected in sense data (see SENSE 1 and CTRL
650).
•
•
•
•
Check for valid command.
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
If no errors occur, return zero status to the
channel.
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
A No Op is performed.
•
•
Present Channel End and Device End in ending
status.
Transfer one byte of control data from the channel to
the control unit. This byte identifies the 23FD track
address and sector for the selected diagnostic test. If
a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit
Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data.
NO OPERATION (03)
Refer to CMD 10 for subsystem components used. Refer
to CMD 25 for flowcharts and CAS references.
Control reading of selected test to buffer area of control storage. (See CTRL 650.)
If MPL errors occur (see MPL 290 and 295), present
Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending
status. Set Equipment Check in sense data.
3. If a Bus Out Parity Error is detected, present Unit
Check, Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set Bus Out Parity in sense data.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
•
If errors occur, present Channel End and Device End
in initial status.
•
May cause records or parts of records to be skipped.
If transfer is correct, present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
•
Initiate the diagnostic test.
•
Store 16-byte error code in control storage. (See
CTRL650.)
•
Present Channel End and Device End in ending status.
Check for valid command.
•
Present Unit check, Channel End, and Device End in
initial status (see SENSE 1 and CTRL 650) under any
of the following conditions:
1. Command is chained from any format Write or
Erase command.
2. Command is chained to any format Write, Erase, or
Set File Mask command.
3. Index is detected before end of the Space Count
operation.
1. If CCW count> 512, transfer only 512 bytes.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
Transfer a diagnostic test from the system storage to
the control unit control storage buffer area. (See
CTRL650.)
2. If CCW count < 512, transfer count specified but
do not execute command; present Unit Check,
Channel End, and Device End in ending status. Set
Command Reject in sense data.
•
Reset track orientation. (See CMD 430.)
•
Control movement of 23FD head to the selected
track.
Check for valid command.
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
•
•
•
•
•
If no errors occur, return zero initial status to the
channel.
•
Space Count command sequence v'aries depending on
preceding conditions:
If not chained from a Read, Search, Write, or Space
Count command;
a. Wait for index point.
b. Clock over G I, home address field, and G2.
1.
2. If chained from a Read, Search, Write, or Space
Count command, locate next count field (including
RO count).
3. Space over count field located and receive three
bytes of data (key length, and two bytes of data
length) from the channel.
If channel sends fewer than three bytes, use
zeros for remaining bytes.
Note:
4. Set end of count field orientation in control storage.
(See CMD 430.)
•
If check 2 errors occur (from channel interface, CTLI, or controller/device), present Unit Check, Channel
End, and Device End in ending status. Set Equipment
Check in sense data.
•
If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
3830·2
CONTROL COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Part 2 of 2)
eM D 16
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976
,,~
'J 0 0 v 0
"
'
-.----------
()
0 () 0 C} 0
"
0V
f}
"'-
0 0 0 0 () 0
"
'I
,
'
'"
(\\
0
I)
\t_'
17',
\...y
If"''~
\fJ,,~JI
? \:,
'J
()
-
!(-\ (J (j
"j
-U"-r')
. 'tf"J-O-O
\;)"
"C
...
,
"
,:,
'-.--'
~'
'
"--
',:'
"
,':
('"
F
L
('"
("': ('
(': ('
("
(~
(C'
c
c
('
CMD 20
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Parts 1 of 31
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 3)
Refer to CMD 15, 16 for command objectives.
Refer to CMD 10 for command operation diagram.
CMD 183
l:MU HIJ
r-__~""''''''''''i16C
FETCH CURRENT
LOGICAL CYLINDER
ADDRESS AND USE IT
ANO THE NE. HEAD
YES
ADDRESS TO FORM NEW
SEEK ADDRESS
COIlPUTE
D II'I'ERENCE
BETWEEN OLD AND
NE. CYLINDER
ADDRESS
2-QS060
-
YES
1,3,4-QP050
1,3,4-QP070
3,4-QP075
0
090
IN
't
>=3;.:3;.:3.:.0_ _ _ _ _- . 1 ,3, 4-QPO 1 0
1,3,4-QP02D
1,3,4-QPIOO
1,3,4-QPoeo
-
-
010,...._ _ _ _.....___..........,
STOP PLO FAST
LOCK IN IF
RESET R/. II'
NECESSARY
NECESSARY
RESET
READ/IIRITE
CONVERT SEEK ADORES S
I'ROM LOG I CAL TO
PHYS I CAL ADDRESS I'OR
THE DEVICE. THIS
DEPENDS ON DEY I CE TYPE I
IIOOE LOGICAL DEv ICE
ADDR ~hEg~T~T~E
-
t
-
015
FETCH CURRENT
ACCESS POSITION
AND ZERO SEEK
ADDRESS IN
CONTROL STORAGE
CM[) 190
OTS
CTRL 650
SEND REZERO TO
IIODULE
010
RESET SEEK
RETRY COUNT II'
APPLICABLE
I'ETCH CURRENT
ACCESS PDSITION
AND ZERO SEEK
ADDRESS IN
CONTROL STORAGE
YES
CONVERT LOG I CAL
HEAD AND CYLINDER
2,4·QP212
2,5·QP215
5·OP313
ADDRESS TO
APPROPRIATE
PHYS I CAL I'IIED HEAD
AND SET UP HAR
r-__..&.I......o&oIJ5 -QP030
Data Address
78
Flags
000
5·QP218
(0000000000000001 )
2.5-QPIOO
-
4-OP3,8
REQUEST STATUS
0
SEND REZERO TO
THE IIDDULE
Specifies CPU Storage
Location of the Mask
Byte.
2.5-QPI30
SET CHA_L END
AND OEV I CE END
STATUS
>=____.;..1:.;,2;;,3,4.5-QP205
1,3.4-CIF'I60
o
1,2,3,4·QP212
1,2,3-QP216
1, S-OP313
SET AND READ
BACK ICHECK
CAR)
RESET INTERRUPT
Decimal
Hexadecimal
31
1F
~--~---.,tml~
4·QP318
RAISE STATUS
I NTO CHANNEL
Binary
;:;,.;::::::::.;::=- For the SCU, bits 2, and 6
SET CHA_L
END, DEY I CE END
STATUS
.A I T I'OR REZERD
TO COMPLETE
I-.,.....,...-r-r"';.....,r-r-I
SET CHA_L END
STATUS
L....L....L.,;;".L...........&.....JL,.;,.L..I
4-QP020
ClIO 190
GO TO SEEK
RETUIIN
Not Program control
interrupt (Pell from CCW
PCI Mode, Used on
Command Retry Operation
Set File Mask Command Code
CHECK VALIDITY
01' SEEK ADDRESS
SET AND READ
BACK I CHECK HAR
AND D II'I'ERENCE
COUNTERS)
Count
63
36
31 32
RESET INTERRUPT
~--~---.,~g;m
SET UP I'OR
EXPECTED DEV I CE
END INTERRUPT
Set File Mask
o
\
SET UP ARGUMENTS TD
SEEK TO THE LOG I CAL
CYL INOER 0 I'OR THE
LOG I CAL EMULATED
OEV I CE SELECTED
of the mask must be zero,
If these bits are not zero, the
mask is considered to be invalid
and a unit check signal is gen,
erated A subsequent Sense
command indicates Co mmand
Reject.
••••••
B5
NOTES
.1
I. TH I S I'LOWCHART I S USED
TH THE MULTIPLE
IIICROCODE VERSIONS. THE I'OLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TD I DENT II'Y THE III CROCODE AND
CORRESPOND I NG CAS PAGE REl'ERENCES I
: ~Ug 8It~ : ~l~ IU:m· ~~:m~' 2348m
~ : ~Ugm:gd~W'Y~~Eiill~~A _2~1~8tfhm899T
S - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168116
~
3830-2
REGISTER
OSCILLATOR
4. I'OR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAII, THE
ACTUAL PAGE . . - R MAY DEPEND ON THE
DEV I CE TYPE SELECTED.
BO
Bl
Permit Write Commands
0
0
All except Write Home Address
and Write Record RO
0
1
1
1
0
None
Write Data or Writa Key .. Data
t-
Ali
B3
B4
Permit Seek Commands
0
0
All
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
Seek Cylinder or Seek Head
Seek Head
Nona 'also no head switching
1
Inhibit Diagnostic
Write command
and 3340/3350
seeks to CE track
Permit Diagnostic
Write command
and 3340/3350
seeks to CE
tracks· only
447461
12 Mar 76
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Parts 1 of 3)
CMD 20
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 3)
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 3)
CMD25
CMD 183
CMD 183
CMD 183
CMD 183
r-_ _...I.l",",_~5-QP030
RECEIVE ANGULAR
TRACK POSITION
BYTE FROM
------------CHANNEL
r-__~u-~~~'5-QW200
C4
I-QP050
2,5-QP090
REGISTER
INITI ALI ZAT ION
FOR UNTI MED END
4-QR030
, ,2,3,4,S·as06O
1_.2.,.3.4.~=
r---------------------~I,2,~:~:~:g~l~g
r-____.........__
1,2,3,4,~:g~gtg
CHL-I 380
PRESENT CHANNEL
END AND DEV I CE
END TO THE
CHANNEL
SET CHANNEL AND
DEVICE END IN
STATUS BYTE. GO
TO END
PROCEDURE.
RECEIVE CONTROL
BYTE FROM
CHANNEL
r-____~~~~~:5-QS090
PRESENT CHANNEL
AND DEVICE END
TO CHANNEL
r-__~~~~~'5-QW220
MOVE 23FD
ACCESS TO THE
SELECTED TRACK
MPL 245
2,5-QP090
1.2.3.4.5-QW200
l:~:::g~~~g
r-----.,
4-QP410
AD~UST VALUE
AND SEND SECTOR
NUl&:R TO
MODULE AND READ
BACK TO CHECK
U!lO
EMULATION MODES
CND 190
1.2,3,4,5:g~gtg
::g::ng
I ,3,
1,3,4-QP110
090
r-__.....u-. . . .~,5-QW220
2,5-QS030
4-QP120
4-QP390
REJECT COMMAND. SET
~T ~~C~tv~~:~
IN ~TATUS BYTE. GO
TO END PROCEDURE
DELAY.
1,2,3,.,5-QS060
r-_ _~u-~~~5-QS080
NOTES
PRESENT CHANNEL
AND DEVICE END
TO CHANNEL
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING
DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE
THE MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING
CAS PAGE REFERENCES.
MULTlPL Y SECTOR
VAlue BY 2/3.
ADJUST VAlue FOR
CHANNEL
RECONNECTION
CONVERT SECTOR VALUE
RECEIVED FROM CHANNEL
TO ONE OF 128 PHYSICAL
SECTORS DEPENDING ON
LOGICAL HEAD ADDRESS.
AD~UST VALUE FOR
CHANNEL RESELECTION
DELAY
YES
r-____
4·OP315
4·QP3IS
1.2,3,4·QP212
1.2.3·QP215
5-OP2IS
...;I,.5-OP313
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348186, 2348181
2 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348151, 2348996
~ : ~~~g:~~:g/~~~aR~~~ERM~'N-2~1~8~~68~148991
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816
2,5-QP130
1,3,4-QP160
~~~~~5-QP205
SET UP FDR
EXPECTED
INTERRUPTS
CMD 190
2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE ACTUAL
PAGE NUMBER MAY OEPENO ON THE DEVICE TYPE
SELECTED.
RESET INTERRUPT
r-____.........___
SEND SECTOR
NUMBER TO
MODULE AND READ
BACK TO CHECK
READ 512 BYTES
FROM SELECTED
SECTOR TO THE
CONTROL STORAGE
ABBREVIATIONS
r-______
RPS = ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING
..
~~
~5-QPI60
SET UP CHANNEL
AND DEVICE END
_----.....J.oI.ooj......I.o.:I..,5-QP 16Q1,.___.....,I""""_ _...
SET UP CHANNEL
END
I.
1,2,3,4,5-QS060
r-_____~~. .~5-QS090
RAISE STATUS IN
TO CHANNEL
3340 VALUES AREI
IN PARENTHESIS
------------------CND 190
3830-2
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHART& (Part 2 of 3)
CMD25
C> Copyright 11M Corporetion 1812, 1173, 1974, 19711, 18,.
00
10
,y
,0"",
o
o
"~
. I
"-.J'
o o o o
00
\ './r:
0
·
'-
o o o o
{) 00
o
\~)
(-
(
CONTROL
COMMANDS~FLOWCHARTS
(Part 3 of 3)
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 3)
NO
CMD 30
YES
1,3,4-QFOIO
1,3,4-QF02O
1.3,4·QF02Ii
2,&.QFD27
3,4.QEOIO
3,4-QF028
3,4·01010
:J.QF327
1,3,4,5-QF050
1,2,5-QF010
1,3,4,5-QG010
1,3,4,5:=g,g
LOCATE STAI'T OF
NEXT COUNT
FIELD
(INCLUDING ROI
YES
SET CHAMIEL END
DEVICE END AND UNIT
CHECK IN STATUS
8Y1£. SET COMMAND
I'E~TOEND
4_
1,2,3,4,5-0M020
E.
1,2,~
:J.QM3IO
S~ACE
OVEI'
COUNT FIELD.
RECEIVE 3 BY1£S
OF OATA .....OM
THE CHAMIEL
CHL-I
~
1'~:::=~1g
3,4-QI(315
311
SET END OF
COUNT FIELO
ORIENTATION FOR
USE 11TH NEXT
COMMANO
NOTES
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED .ITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VEI'SIONS. THE FOLLWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICI'OCODE
ANO CORI'ES~ING CAS ~AGE I'EFEI'ENCES.
: nu
2.
I ,2,3,4'I:rsb~g
....ESENT CHAMIEL
END AND DEv I CE
END TO THE
PRESENT CHAMIEL
END AND DEV I CE
END STATUS TO
THE CHAMIEL
:
~
8rt~ ~~= ~U:,g~', ~un:t' 2341111
3 - 3330/3340 IN1£RMIX - ~/~ 2341102, 2341991
4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTPMIX - PIN 41.1".1
5 - 3340/3344 - ~/N 4161116
~~A~= B'A~~~.~,Nr:"~~I~~T¢~UAL
SELEC1£D.
ABBltEVI AT IONS
G I • GAP BETEEN I NOEX PO I NT AND RO
G2 • GAP BETEEN COUNT AI'EA AND KEY AREA
CHAMIEL
CHL-I
CIII) 190
3830-2
CONTROL COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 3)
c Ca!IvrWIt 11M c:o.,cnt;on UI72, '173, 1174, '171, '976
CMD30
fl'.
0
(4~1
"
r'''t\
/'''1
\,-~/
iGC CARRIY
ST7
RSPON
INCREMENT
HAS RSPON.
TIMER. WAIT
INCREMENT EXIT
FOR EXPIRATIOl\ POINTER.
(4.4 MSEC) OR
2B44
XOl
RSPON.
I--
SET UP TIMER
2CBC
2C5C
~---=';:::::A:':;
f-- K=10000111 I--
Q-+ST5
K=64
K!lTB+T8
-
A
RAISE TAG
GATE
K=4
K+GC->GC
ST7
H
~
Check CAR;
request HAR Contents:
H
-.
. - v~ ....
"!'RE RCVD
AND XMITTED
CAR
II-.
Check I-IAR;
request diff
cntr contents
2CEO
K+~8
~
...........r.() MP 4f1E RCVD
2CCc
A
K~TA
XXl
II
~l~
2cce
A
O-'ST
Place 5 (request address)
on CTL-I tag bus.
The content of CAR is
placed on CTL-I bus in and
read out to the NO
register (lNTR 115)
. . . . . when Tag Gate comes up.
Place 16 (read difference)
....... on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120)
GXXO
2CBC
A
K=10001001 '---
K=16
K+~TA
o
L......-
l-+5TO
CD-
2C80
8
O+SC-+5B
2C24
STORE NEW SEEK
ARGUMENT AND GO TO SEEK START
SET CONTROL 1 SET SEEK START DECODE
TAG DECODE
ON BUS OUT
Branch to entry for next
part of operation (I NTR 1101.
Note: Numbers indicate
sequence of branches for
this operation:
2A3C
CD_
II.
2A1CfJ
2CCA.
2A28 •
2A30
2A34
II
II
fJ
Place 9 (transmit control 1)
..-0 on CTL-I tag bus (lNTR 120)
HAR ERROR
.xXO
2C88
8
0+S0-+58
End of sequence)
GO TO EXIT DECISIONS
GC~IAL
GO TO NEXT
ROUTINE
2A2C
K=OOO10000 I--
K+~TA
2AFC
E
CAR ERROR
A
0=0
End
~Ci)
XXO
2C84
K+~TD
COMPARE RCVD
AND XMITTED DIFF
2A34
" - - CHK-2 ERROR EXIT
A
K=OOOO1000 1---4
XXl
MAVSD~
RESET TAG
GATE AND
ERROR ALERT
GATE
TURN ON CTL-I
ERROR ALERT
X1X
2B9C
GATE. ST6
F
ON SAYS CHECK
PARITY.
LSPEC: OF
SET REO DIFF
ON 8US OUT
AND XMITTED
HAR
2A30
A
Check
difference;
set seek
start
XXi
A
MAVSC~ I - - K=OOO10111 H
Kn~
SET CTL-I BUS-IN
PARITY ERROR
0=0
SET REO HAR SET UP NB
WITH PROPER
ON 8USOUT
FMT/MSG
IN CASE OF ERROR
2A2C
A
H..-
CHK-2
K+~TD
K+~B
iii
SET XFER -OW
DIFF TAG
DECODE
K=1000010~1_·-........
---=----------------_.
'-SET REqC)'L_
SET REOADDR
ADDR ON BUS
TAG DECODE
OUT
2CCO
2A28
A
A
..
MAVsB~ I-- K=OOO10110 H
MA=CAR contents,
SB=CAR input,
should be eq~
MA=HAR contents,
SC=HAR input,
should be equal
2C51 - '
Ii.
<>-+MA
rI'
SET XMITCYL
ADDR TAG DECODE
la
Request CAR contents
6)---
K+~TD
2C7(
2CC4
Place 8 (read HAR)
on CTL-I bus out
(lNTR 120)
K=10000110 1-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.....----1
A
A
2B!8
HAS RSPON.
SET UP RETURN SET HAR ON
SET XMIT
SAVE HAR
INCREMENT EXIT
POINTER.
ADDRESS
BUS OUT
HEAD ADDR
XOO
2BFO
XOX
2B94
2BB4
2C31
~_ _=2CB::;C
TAG DECODE
L~~---!.!~-~~~~!.......---~~e-:lX=01--2==BIF:-:--~-----:-2=B3~~
A
A
A
A
A
r - - - - -A
":""1
A
A
TA+Q-+SD I-- K=100010001-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _---a
K=32
K 0011111
GA+~TA I - K+~TD
K!lT8+TB
1--4
r
=1
I-~
Set difference
Place bit 5 (read CAR)
on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120)
f--
28CC
2814
...:2:..:;8'-='0,C
Xl0
GO TO SET
HAR
2A1C
Send seek start to drive to begin seek operation in
the drive.
.....
.-
..0 .--__
A
f-- K=OOO11000 f--
O+SA~TA
ST7 ON DISABLES CHK 2 TEST- \
Place 7 (transmit head address
on CTL-I bus tag
(lNTR 120)
2C48
A
8
D
Set head address;
set high-order CAR;
set reverse bi t
~"Y " HA~
'0
2C4C
START OF CTRL
OR CYL SEEK.
SET CAR ON
8US OUT. 2A3(
Set difference of old and new cylinder addresses
in the difference counter.
..,
This example is for instruction
only. Use machina CAS logics
for troubleshooting. .
\
2E1C
A
II
Transfer high-order cylinder address bit, reverse
Place high order CAR bit,
reverse bit, and head address
on CTL-I bus out (lNTR 120)
Place 6 (transmit
cylinder address)
on CTL-I tag bus
UNTR 120)
Place low-order cylinder
address on CTL-I bus
out (I NTR 120) for .
entry to CAR
Assume: Initial selection complete
CMD35
3830-2/CONTROL INTERFACE OPERATION
1
DIFF ERROR
--cD
Place 16 (seek start! on CTL-I
bus out IINTR 120). When
the Tag Gate comes up, the
tag bus is decoded, and CTL-I
bus out is decoded as Seek
Start. This line starts·the
servo circuits responding
to the new address in CAR,
HAR, and the difference
counter to move the heads
to a new track.
3830-2
3830-2/CONTROL INTERFACE OPERATION
CMD35
SEARCH COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
SEARCH COMMANDS.,.-DESCRIPTIONS
CMD50
• Status byte bit 1, modifier, is set when a search is successful.
•
If a Search command is unsuccessful, the search command must be reissued
to continue the search.
•
Multi-Track bit not on -search until successful or index is passed twice.
•
Multi-Track bit on-head switches to the next track at index.
COMMAND
CODE
Search Home
Address Equal
39
B9
Locate a home address field selected by the system
CMO 55
Four bytes (CCHHI of home address
field from the selected drive and
track. with CCHH from the system
Search 10 Equal
31
B1
Locate a count field selected by the system
CMO 55
Five bytes (CCHHRI of the next
cou nt field from the selected drive
and track, with CCHHR from the
system
Search 10 High
51
01
Locate a count field selected by the system
CMO 55
Five bytes (CCHHRI of the next
count field from the selected drive
and track, with CCHHR from the
system
Search 10 Equal
or High
71
F1
Locate a count field selected by the system
CM055
Five bytes (CCHHRI of the next
count field from the selected drive
and track, with CCHHR from the
system
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Overrun.
. End of Cylinder.
No Record Found.
Data Check.
Locates the 10 from the track that is
equal to, or any 10 that is higher, than the
10 from the system.
Search Key
Equal
29
A9
Locate a key field selected by the system
CM055
Search Key High
49
C9
Locate a key field selected by the system
CM055
The key field bytes from the selected
drive and track, with key from the
system
Search Key
Equal or High
69
E9
!-ocate a key field selected by the system
CM055
The key field bytes from the selected
drive and track, with key from the
system
,
COMMENTS
Locates any ID from the track that is
higher than the 10 from the system
The key field bytes from the selected
drive and track, with key from the
system
The key field compared is key field of the
next record (excluding ROI, unless
chained from a Read Count or Search 10
command. If chained from a count
operation the key field searched is in
the same record.
Same as Search Key Equal, except the
key field located is any key field on the
track that is higher than the key from the
system
Same as Search Key Equal, except the key
field located is equal to or higher than
the key from the system.
p~r~::~r91
!"
SEARCH COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
CMD 50
Copyng'ht IBM Corporation 1972, 1973
:J 0 0 0
"
ERRORS
Set Unit Check, Channel
End, Device End
MultiTrack
©
''--
DATA COMPARED
DETAIL
DESCRIPTION
Single
Track
3830-2
'
FUNCTION
1""'")
0
0 0 0 0 0
..
-.---_.
0 0 0 0
(f""~1
"-Y
0
~
()
(~
J
0
i"'''"~
o
r'" tf")
"'", )J
I
'
r~
"']
a
,.
'::
('~
,_.)1
0" 0 0
.
n,
V
..
- - - _ ....- - -
(0
('
(
('
(-
(-" (
_.
_-
._ ..
--'"
f-" (--- C-
(-~
.,,/
. c,. . /
(:. (
./
(
,.
(-
<-
---
----
(C"' (-
(-
(
SEARCH COMMANDS
SEARCH COMMANDS
OBJECTIVES
CMD 183
FLOWCHARTS
SEARCH HOME ADDRESS EQUAL (39 or .9)
SEARCH m EQUAL (31 or.t)
SEARCH 10 HIGH (51 or Dt)
SEARCH m EQUAL OR HIGH (71 or Fl)
SEARCH BY EQUAL (29 or A9)
SEARCH BY HIGH (..9 or 0)
SEARCH BY EQUAL OR HIGH (69 or E9)
2.3.4.6-QG040
1,2,3,4,5-QG050
, .2,3 .... S ... QG030
I,Z,3,".5-QHOIO
;:1:1:::I:J398
Refer to CMD 75. CMD 90. CMD 105. and CMD 130
for sublyttem components used (channel in write mode.
CTL-I read mode).
•
CMD55
1,2,3,4'1:=813
IIEAD SYNC BYTE
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for precedinl CCWs.
•
If erron occur. present Unit Check. Channel End.
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
•
If no erron occur. return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer number of bytes called for by the command
(HA-4.1D-5. key-O to 256) from the channel to
the control unit. Read the same number of bytes
from the selected controller/ device.
_---II..........~-QH030
1,2,f5-QG050
r----II......io.I.ol.....
2, ::=g~g
IIEAD CCN« OF
CDUNT AllEA
__
-J:.&..iIi.oio~
-QHOSO
_--Ju..i:...a.~-QI(IIO
•
Byte by byte. make comparison called for by the command.
1. Compare data from device with data from the channel. For ellample. 5 from the device and 3 from the
channel constitute a hip condition.
" .... , :IAA8
~CCDUNT
BYTES 1'l1li
I'IELD
D
CHECK ECC
2. If the CCW count is less than the field lenlth. comparison is on the CCW count bytes only.
. . - _ - J......i.oioa.r·-QSO• O
NOTES
4. If search condition is satisfied. set status modifier
bit in the status byte.
r-_-J:.&..iI:...a.~-QI( 110
I. :it~T IS USED 81TH .... TI~E
III
VPSIIINS. THE I'OLLDIIING DIGITS
U
5. If CCW count is less than field lenlth. read balance
of field to check for erron.
•
If erron from channel interface. CTL-I. or controller/
device are found. present Unit Check. Channel End.
and Device End in endinl status. 3330 only: 10 to
retry mode (see CMD 210); set appropriate bits in
sense data.
~
•
If multitrack bit is off in the command. the search
loop continues until satisfied or until two indell points
have been sensed. If two indelles are sensed fint.
present Unit Check. Channel End. and Device End in
endinl status. Set No Record Found indication in
sense data.
•
If multitrack bit is on in the command. the search loop
2. Search condition is not satisfied. present Channel
End and device end in endinl status. Channel program should ellecute the nellt CCW (T1C·-8) and
branch back to repeat the Search command.
continues until satisfied or until index is sensed. If
index is sensed fint. the head address is stepped + 1
and the loop continues. If the head address is advanced past the last track in a cylinder. present Unit
Check, Channel End. and Device End in endinl status. Set End of Cylinder indication in the sense data.
~1~ls~C:I~:~
: IIJI i~ : ~I= 1I::m· IUU8t·
214m,
• / ••0 INTERIlIX - P/f. 114•• 01, 214 ••• '
/ 40/1110 INTlIIIIIX - P'N 41 •• 11
40/1144 - PIN . . . . . 1.
I 4 1 -
CIllO 1.0
If no erron are found and:
I. Search condition is satisfied, present Status Modifier. Channel End. and Device End in endinl status.
Channel program should skip the nellt CCW (TlC·8) and eucute the foUowinl CCW.
--------
NIl
3. The fint unequal condition (hiP or low) encountered sets the condition for the field.
•
AND C'-CII
_VIATIIINS
&.TL -I :
ECC
~~
&m"f'fNI.~TEIU' ACE
• -lm"ECT I lIN CODE
:
~~NT~~
3830-2
SEARCH COMMANDS
OCopy'ilht IBM Corpo,etion 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1978
CMD55
WR ITE COMMANDS..,.DESCRIPTI,ONS
CODE
COMMAND
Single
Track
DATA WRITTEN
DETAIL DESCRIPTION
FUNCTION
MultiTrack
ERROR
Count, key, and data fieldS of next
record on the track. Data for the
fields comes from the system. The
count field flag byte, ECC, and gap
data come from the SCU.
10
-
Write one complete record on the selected drive and
track
CMD85
Write Special
Count, Key, Data
01
-
Same as Write Count, Key, Data command except a 1
is written in bit 4 of the flag byte to indicate a record
overflow segment
CMD85
Same as that of Write Count,
Key, Data command
11
-
Erase remainder of track
CMD85
Zeros
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Overrun.
Invalid Track Format.
19
Write Record (ROI
15
Write Data
Write Key-Data
05
00
-
-
-
-
3330 and 3350 Compatibility Modes":
Write the five·byte (FCCHHI home address fieldon
the selected drive and track.
3340:
Write the seven-byte (SO SO F CC HHI
home address field on the selected drive and track.
3350-Native Mode:
Write the 9-byte home address field (SO SO SO SO
FCC H HI on the selected drive and track.
CMD80
Write count, key, data of RO.
Change ,the data field of a record
3330 and 3350 Compatibility Modes':
Five-byte (FCCHHI home address
field transferred from the system.
3340:
Seven-byte (SO SO F CC HHI
home address field
transferred from the system.
3350-Native Mode:
Nine-byte (SO SO SO SO FCC H HI
home address field transferred
from the system.
The CU skips writing an address marker,
sync byte, or ECC.
3340 and 3350-Native Mode:
Must be chained from a satisfied Search
Home Address command (with a CCW
count of 4 or morel. If not, bit 6 of the
flag byte must be set to 1 to indicate
a defective track. If it is not, the
command is rejected.
CMD80
Flag byte from HA field.
CCHHRK L DL DL from system written
in count field.
Key and data from system.
Same as Write Count, Key, Data except
must be chained from a write HA or a
successful Search HA Equal command
CMD85
Data from the system. Write the
number of bytes specified by the
DL DL bytes of the count field of
the same record.
If file mask is violated, set Command
Reject. Must be chained from a
successful Search Equal 10 or Search
Equal Key command.
CMD85
Change the key and data f.ields of a record
If file mask is violated, set Command
Reject. Must be chained from Write
RO; Write Count, Key, Data; Erase; or
a successful Search Equal 10 or
Search Equal Key command.
After last Count, Key, Data command
on a track, write O's to index.
Same as Write Count, Key, Data. Not used
for last segment of an overflow record.
(Format Write commandsl
Write Home
Address (HAl
COMMENTS
Set Unit Check-Channel and
Device End
Write Count,
Key, Data
Erase
CMD70
WRITE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
Data from the system. Write the
number of bytes specified by the
KL and DL DL bytes of the count
field of the same record.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Overrun.
If file mask is violated, set Command
Reject. Must be chained from a
successful Search Equal 10 command.
If KL = 0, operation is the same as
Write Data.
"Note: For 3350 in compatibility modes, the HA is
first readinternally by the storage control to save the
SO bytes.. Then the SO bytes, along with the 5 bytes
(F C C H H) transferred from the system, are written
on the treck.
I~ I~~~5
3830-2
History
© Copyright IBM Corporation
447461
12 Mar 76
CMD70
WRITE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976
00000
o
t4",
\"
I>j
~
0000
o o o o
o o o
()
o o
0',:'
"j,
o
()
o
(
'
(
(
'-'"
.....
-'
..
(
~'
(
Write data from the using system on a pack selected
by the system.
•
•
•
•
Executes Stlrt
I/O inltruction,
which Iddresses
a channel com·
m.nd word ICCWI
cont.ining • Write
comm.nd.
•
•
CHANNEL
Executes the
CCW to trlnlfer
the write commlnd
to the SCU.
Tr.nlfers the
Iddre.. where
d.t. is to be
storld, to the
storage control
unit.
•
•
•
II
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Decode the Write command.
Select the addressed module
• and
head.
the status of the mod• Check
ule and transfer the status to
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
the channel.
Control timing
of transfer of
data between the
channel and the
CU.
Set up the write controls in
• the
module.
the byte-by-byte
• Control
transfer of write data from
Check plrity
of dlta trlnsfered
to the CU.
the channel interface to the
controller circuits.
•
•
•
Trlnsfers data
from the system
to the storage
control unit.
•
('
",,'/
'
.'".
('
CMD75
DEVICE
CONTROL MODULE
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT
II
SYSTEM
(0',
WRITE OPERATION
WRITE OPERATION
•
("
(
(
SERDES
•
Receives data serial·by-byte from the
CU.
•
Changes byte of data to serial-by-bit
data.
•
Sends ECC data to module.
•
Sends modified frequency modulation
(MFM) data to the module.
•
Uses phase-locked oscillator IPLO)
pulses to control write timing.
•
Controls gap configurations.
•
333().1 ndicate retry status to
channel If error is a type
that can be retried, and set
up to relocate record.
GAP CONTROL
SERIALIZER/
DESERIALIZER ~. . .
(SERDES)
Control gap types.
•
Set up the
module to
write on the
disk.
•
Change data
pulses from SERDES
to currents for the
write head.
•
Provide the CU
with status of the
module.
•
Index pulse
generated from
servo data and
sent t.o CU.
Checks subsystem for errors.
Transfers ending status to the
channel.
•
WRITE
CONTROLS
•
READ/WRITE
HEAD
•
Changes currents
in write windings
to magnetic flux.
head
• Selected
accepts data.
head
• Servo
provides PLO
DISK
SURFACES
Receive and
store bits of
information on
the magnetic
coating of the
disk.
pulses.
•
Servo head and
circuits hold
access at selected
track.
ECC CIRCUITS
Write
Control
Info
SYSTEM
Device
Status
Info
CHANNEL
Write
Data
CTL-I ",_...lo_ _"
Write
Data
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
WRITE
CONTROLS
CONTROL CIRCUITS
CTL-I
CTRL 1
CHL-Il
1
. .-
~--~-----------w~--~
Seek
Micro-
. . ._ - -....
DEVICE
INTERFACE
READ/WRITE
HEAD
DISK
SURFACES
Servo
Track
Data
program
iii
IJ
CONTROL INTERFACE
•
Transfers write control information
to the control circuits.
•
Transfers status of the control
cuits and device to the SCU_
•
Transfers the byte·by·byte
data to the control circuits.
cir-
DEVICE INTERFACE
•
Transfers write control information to the control circuits_
•
Transfers status of the control
circuits and device to the SCU.
•
Transfers the byte-by-byte
data to the control circuits.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
© Copyright IBM Corporation
1972. 1973. 1974. 1975
WRITE OPERATION
CMD75
(
.~-----
WRITE COMMANDS -
-~~~~~-
- --_._---------
~~~~~~--~~~~~~.----~----
-
._--------
~-.
OBJECTIVES
WRITE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES
WRITE HOME ADDRESS (19)
~
WRITE RECORD ZERO (15)
Format Write
ERASE (11)
WRITE COUNT KEY DATA (10)
Commands
WRITE SPECIAL COUNT KEY DATA (01)
WRITE KEY DATA (OD)
WRITE DATA (05)
SD information is not provided by the system. The
storage control internally reads the home address
field to obtain the existing SD bytes before the Write
HA is executed.
2. Write RO: Start writing in gap before RO count;
write flag byte, count field, gap, key field (if required), gap, data field (if required), and start of
next gap.
Refer to CMD 75 and CMD 90 for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 80 and 85 for flowcharts and
CAS references.
•
Check for valid command.
•
Check for chaining prerequisites. These depend on
the command:
1. If the command is Write CKD, Write Special CKD,
or Erase, it must be chained from one of the following:
a. Write RO.
b. Write CKD.
c. Successful Search Equal ID or Key. (A Read Data
or Key Data may be between Search and Write.)
Check for Set File Mask limitations. (See CMD 20.)
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE I and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
Write data, transferred from the channel, on the track
selected by the system (plus correction code bytes at
end of each field). The commands and their effects
are:
•
If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
1. Write Key Data: Start writing in gap; write key
field (if required) and start of next gap.
2. Write Data: Locate gap before next data field; start
writing in gap; write data field (if required) and
start of next gap.
3. Erase: Operates as a Write CKD command, except:
a. The data transferred from the .channel is not written
on the track; and
b. Zeros are written in place of the data and to the end
of the track.
•
Format Write commands change the balance of the
track:
1. After last format Write command in a chain, release
the channel, write to the next index point, and reconnect after index.
5. If the command is Write HA (3340 only), it must
meet either of the following requirements:
a. It must be chained from a satisifed Search HA with
a CCW count of 4 or more.
b. Bit 6 of the flag byte, transferred from the channel,
must be I, indicating a defective track.
•
4. If data overrun is detected, present Unit Check,
Channel End, and Device End in ending status.
(3330 only: go into retry mode; see CMD 2lO.)
Note: In Write Special CKD, set flag byte
bit 4 to 1.
b. Successful Search HA.
3. If the command is Write Data, it must be chained from a
successful Search Equal ID or Key. Furthermore, the
search must be on the full field from the disk.
4. If the command is Write Key Data, it must be
chained from a successful Search EquallD (all five
bytes).
2. Detection of Bus Out Parity Error causes presentation of Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End
at end of field.
3. Detection of a data overrun causes presentation of
Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End at the
normal ending point of the operation, and causes Os
to be written after error is detected.
•
Nonformat Write commands update existing records.
1. These commands change only data or key and data
fields.
2. Each new record must be the same size as old record. (If CCW count is small, fill balance of field
with Os.)
Write HA: Locate index; write gap and control
bytes (called for by the device type), bytes of data
from the channel (five for 3330, seven for 3340),
and start of following gap. In 3350 compatibility mode,
3. These commands can be used to update overflow
records. (See CMD 400.)
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830·2
0 0 0 r0 0
t*')
i
"--.
.,
----~-.--
WRITE COMMANDS-OBJECTIVES
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975
._ .. ------_._----_.-
.. -
_...
~)
0 0 ,"
CM 0 77
3. Write CKD and Write Special CKD: Locate gap
before next count field; start writing in gap; write
count field (flag is same as HA flag byte), gap, key
field (if required), and start of next gap.
2. If the command is a Write RO, it must be chained
from one of the following:
a. Write HA.
I.
-----.---~-~-.
-_ ..... _-~
\"..y
CM D 77
-
() (1h
'J
.,
.
0
0
V
0 t"""
~J!
0 0 0
t
~
0
'\
("~
,y
0-'
A
v
(,""'''t'\
",-y
/1"~
'",;
0
",--j
:()
0
a
,0
v
(
'
'-..Jl
0 0
r
""~
--.--------~
-~-~---~--~-
(
(
(
(
(
(-
-
(
f
(--
(-
(
(
(~-- ('
WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2)
(' (
(-
(
(
---'--
( ---
--
( '"
WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2)
j
CMD80
Refer to CMD 75 for subsystem components used.
Refer to CMD 77 for command objectives.
•
Write commands store data from the system on the disk
pack of a selected module.
•
Format Write commands - Write Home Address, Write
RO, Write Count, Key, Data, and Erase - cause the balance
of the track to be changed.
•
•
Write Data and Write Key, Data commands change only
the key and/or data fields of a record to be changed.
(Field length stays the same.)
WRITE RECORD
ZERO 115)
YES
'·OF325
1.3·0FD50
2.3.5·0FD25
r------t
CHECK IF HA
OPERATION
1.2.3.'.5-0F030
1.2.3.'.5-0F010
1.2.3.'.5-0G010
3·0G31O
1.2.3.'.5-0G03O
J.OG330
SEPARATE WRITE
Gap configurations may vary with device type; refer to
device MLM.
SEA~~~Dt~~NDS
AND CLOCK
OPERATIONS
1.2.3.5·0G010
3.4·QG370
FETCH DEVICE
ADDRESS AND
PARAMETERS
1.3.'-OM010
1.2.3.'.5·0M02O
LOCATED IN GAP
AFTER HOME ADDRESS
FIELD. (SEE COMMAND
77). TREAT AS WRITE
CKD
3350
COMPATIBILITY
MODES
4-QN52D
SET UP BRANCH TO
CLOCK HA AND RO
OPERATION. SET UP
RETURN ADDRESS
AFTER CLK RO
'-OEOB5
'·OM023
2.5·OM020
3.4-QM320
SET UP TO MOVE
HA BY WRITING
LONG GAP
1.2.3.4.5·0M030
3·0M33D
1.3.'·OM040
1.3.'·OM05O
4·QF025
RETURN AFTER CLK HA
AND RO. IF DEFECT
IN HA AREA, SET UP
TO MOVE HA BY
WRITING LONG GAP.
CMD 85
WRITE ZEROS
2.5-0FD21
2.5·0FD30
3·0F321
3-0F330
YES
BY~~its~~[:gL
BYTE, AND CCHH
BYTES
DEVICE
'·OM055
1.2.3.'.5-0MOBO
3·0M355
NOTES
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES,
2.3.'.5-0MOBO
1.2.3.'.5·0M010
1.2.3.'.5-0KI20
I
2
3
4
5
-
3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 234878&, 2348787
3340 ONLY - PIN 2348757, 234899&
3330/3340 INTERMIX - PIN 2348802, 2348997
3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 41&8811
3340/3344 - PIN 41&881&
RAISE STATUS IN
TO CHANNEL
CND 190
3830-2
WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2)
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974, 1975. 1976
CMD80
WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21
WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 2)
CMD85
CMD 183
WR I TE SPEC 1AL.
COUNT, (~n' DATA
(SEE NOTE 41
1,2,3,4,5-00010
,....._ _ _....., 1,2.3,4,~ggm
4·QM023
1,2,3,4,5-OM02O
3-OM320
3,00330
SEPARATE WRITE,
~~l,..g~A~f.!l
CL.OCK
OPERATIONS
WR I TE FL.AG BYTE
PROPAGATED FROM
PREVIOUS RECORD
FL.AG
TURN ON WR I TE
GATE. SET UP
THE SEL.ECTED
MOOUL.E TO WRITE
(SEE NOTE 51
CTL.-I 200
PREPARE TO
WRITE KEY FIEL.D
CTRL. 650
4·0MD23
1,3,4·QMOIO
1,2,3·QM02O
4,5-QM02O
3·QM320
4-QM023
1,3,4·OM010
'-------1 ',2,3,4,~:g:g~
4·0M023
1,2,3·OM03O
W~~~T~CH~ ~;~
2,4,~g::l
FETCH DEVICE
ADORESS AND
PARAMETERS
WRITE ZEROS IN
GAP
(SEE NOTE 51
DEVICE
YES
2,5-QFOIiO
2,5-0FOII6
2,4,5-0F070
3,4.QF3tiO
3,4·0F356
3,OF370
SET UP TO WRITE
A GAP 4 BEFORE
WR I TI NG NORMAL.
GAP3
CHECK FOR FIRST
BYTE. WA I T FOR
SYNC-IN
1,2,3,4,5.QM02O
4.QM023
3.QM320
4.QM023
1,3,4·OM04O
2,5-QM020
3-OM320
3830-2
CMO 190
1,2,3,4,5-0M030
3·OM330
1,3,4-0M040
WRITE DATA FIEL.D
DA'fA AS TRANSFERRED
FROM THE CHANNEL.
(SEE NOTE 71
1,3,4·OMOIiO
1,3,4·OMOIiO
2,4,5-OM04O
3·OM34D
CHl.380
ENO OF COUNT
DEFECT SKIP
CAL.CULATI ONS
WRITE 7 ECC
BYTES
0
WRITE 7 ECC
BYTES
DEVICE
ECC • ERROR CORRECTION CODE
SO
• SKIP DEFECT
END OF FIEL.D
PROCESSING
REWR I TE COUNT
FIEL.O FROM
CONT:~Fi~ORAGE
ABBREV lATIONS
START WRITING
ZEROS FOR GAP 3
OR 4
(SEE NOTE 51
CAL.CULATE SO
BYTES FOR NEXT
COUNT FIEL.D
SET CHANNEL. END AND
DEVICE END IN
R~T~tU~T~l~~'!~~O
THE CHANNEL.
PREPARE TO
WRITE DATA
FIEL.D
6. 3340. FIEL.D MAY BE WRITTEN IN TWO
~~~~T5FT~I~~fPs~~~~~T. NO ECC IS WRITTEN
7. 3~~~~f~L.~OM~~I~AS&k~tcf~TO TWO
8.
~gvU:L.G~:~ =RI~A~~~~aN
TYPE SEL.ECTED.
HI
CWO
DEVICE
190
447461
I See
EC History 1 447460
19 D.ec 75 1 12 Mar 76
@Copvright
/~)
WRITE SYNC AND
ID BYTES
(SEE NOTE 51
REORIENT
~T~OL~E~~DT~~~IE~~~llDA~ ~~A~Y~EM.
5t~~~~~MGQ:IT~~~S~E~~t ~~·6ATA.
190
WR ITE KEY F I EL.D
DATA AS TRANSFERRED
FROM THE CHANNEL.
ISEE NOTE 61
2,3-Q.J070
-
CWO
4·CM023
1,3,4.QM04O
2,5·OM010
2,5-OM02O
2,4,5-OMD30
3-OM320
3-OM33O
WRITE COUNT-KEY-DATA
MUST BE CHAINED FROM
~ 'H~c=OlgQ~C~i~F~~~r:~H EQUAL. I D,
4. THE WRITE SPECIAL. COUNT-KEY-DATA
COMMAND IS THE SAME AS A WRITE COUNT-KEYDATA COMMAND EXCEPT THAT THE FL.AG BYTE
BIT 4 IS SET TO I. THIS INDICATES
THAT THIS RECORD IS SEGMENT OF OVERFL.OW
RECORD. THIS COMMAND IS USED FOR AL.L.
SEGMENTS OF AN OVERFL.OW RECORD EXCEPT
THE L.AST.
5. 3340. CONTRDL.L.ER AUTOMATICAL.L.Y SEQUENCES
S I GNAL.S TO THE OR I VE TO TURN ON WR I TE
WRITE SYNC AND
ID BYTES
ISEE NOTE 51
CAL.CULATE
PROPER FL.AG AND
SD BYTES TO
INOICATE SPLIT
OR MOVED F I EL.DS
WR I TE CONTROL.
BYTES AS CAL.L.ED
FOR BY DEV ICE
TYPE
:
4·0M023
1,3,4-0M03O
2,5·0M020
3·0M3
1.QM030
2,3,4,5-Q.J020
2,3,4,5-Q.J030
2,3,4,5-Q.J040
2,3,4,5-Q.J050
2,3,4,5-Q.J060
4.QM023
1,3,4.QM0Ii0
2,5-QM02O
3.QM320
1 : ~~:g s=t~
~~= ~~::,g" ~~::~=t, 2348787
~ - 3330/3340 INTERMIX - P/~ 2341102, 2348997
4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 4101811
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161.16
2. 7HE ERASE COMMAND I S THE SAME AS A
WRITE COUNT-KEY-DA7A
COMMAND EXCEPT THAT
THE DATA TRANSFERRED FROM THE SYSTEM IS
NOT WR I TTEN. THE BAL.ANCE OF THE TRACK
I~, INSTEAD, FIL.L.ED WITH ZEROS.
3. THE WRITE COUNT-KEY-DATA
COMMAND
4·QM023
WRITE 7 ECC
BYTES
WR ITE 12 BYTES
OF ZEROS
(SEE NOTE 51
THIS FL.OWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FDL.L.DWING DIGITS
ARE USED TD I DENT I FY THE MI CROCDDE AND
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES.
WRITE 47 BYTES
OF ZEROS
(SEE NOTE 51
2,5·OM020
3·0M320
4·QM023
1,3,4·OM04O
2,5·OM02O
3-QM320
NOTES
SET UN IT CHECK
BIT IN STATUS
BYTE, AND
COMMANO RE.JECT
BITS IN SENSE
WRITE 47 BYTES
OF ZEROS
(SEE NOTE 51
CHI.-I 380
WRITE 3 BYTE
ADORESS MARK
GAP (NO CL.OCK
OR DATA PUL.SESI
(SEE NOTE 51
CL.OCK PART OF
GAP UNTIL. WRITE
GATE TURN-ON
POINT
(SEE NOTE 51
I.
DATA L.EN6TH BYTES
AS TRANSFERRED FR6M
THE CHANNEL.
SET UNIT CHECK BIT
IN STATUS BYTE ANO
COMMAND RE.JECT BITS
IN SENSE BYTE
CMD85
WRITE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21
IBM Corporation 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975, 1976
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
.0
\J
A
J
0 0
f)
'"
.
(~
'4..Y
0
n
0 "-J
/~
\V
r"'.
~y
r""
~Ji
0
\.3
0:
r"
~y
pr_"",
~.Y
r",
~j
rr~
V'
.
.
i~
i~y
0
n jJ
I
'''---
.~
~y
(~)
r:)
"<- .'
~ ..
~"
••• ]1'
(-
(
WRITE DATA TRANSFER
.
•
Thll exemple II for Inltructlon
only. U.. machine CAS loglCl
for troublelhootlnll.
X'III bllnch 11III1cIJ1eI tllat the ch.n""
IntIrfM. h. plececl ...... byteln tlla
NA 1II11t...
• TRANSFER DATA FROM THE SYSTEM AND
WRITE IT ON THE DISK SURFACE.
CMD90
WRITE DATA TRANSFER
T"nal.. bytel,om tlla cllannel
Int"'.ce Cplececlln NAI to the
T A ".IIt.. 10, ullby &ERDEI.
r----~-------,~----------------~~~=---------~~::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::~-----------------------------------Q"'OSO----CDE
xxooo 1001
(XXIOO)
I
r-----------------T IT4
T Mel
XFER
C2-X"on-cl
Me7
Cl-X"OO-C
11III1a.1eI!h1t
.... IIIIn
lIicen. ' b j t e
II
1T4 II automatically
~
~~----------~
ED
EF
•
XrER
x··OO- aB
05 -xXI00 -
XOOOO - - 1£20
THE BYTE I N THE
5E~5 _FER
IS
ACED IN
T
SHIFT
REGISTER
I .-01000000-0.
I
A KOTC..aIJ'C
kl000
byt. 0I111d out in tho count lield IKL
DL DL ' or I bytil 10' e count ".'d.
o£
TURN ON LAST
IYTE REQUEST
--IE38
A
I
IXllnn_lE!Cr--'
xXl00 --lE'5e
K-255
A
A
A T1t.+O-SC
1(+\1C~C
A
~A+O"T1\
QIIII040--JIII:
(XOXOO)
B
SERVICE OUT/DATA
OUT FROM THE
CHANNEL SIGNAL S THE
CHANNEL I NTERF ACE
THAT A BYTE I S ON
BUS OUT
3330 ONLY- DATA
xlOOO --lEIS
~a~T=~cA~llIm8N
INTERFACE
PLACES THE BYTE
I N THE CHANNEL
BUFFER REG I STER
WR ITE DATA
PULSES ARE SENT
TO THE DRIVE
JD
XIOOO --lEU
A .....C
I
B COMMa
I
J4 -
X1100 --lE2C
I .-01000000-10
A J(Q:SR...aR
B MC6
BRl
LI-X"OO- LA
THE CHANNEL.
XUDO -
I .-00110001-10
A
AS IT GOES THROUGH
THE SHIFT REGI STER
(XI000,X1100)
L2 -
x1100 -
LB
I
S'rJC
XX·OO -
JD
>cOOOO -
JB -
JE
XO:C0100 --1[34
'-255
A
A
arRO"
MC7
I
L3 -X"OO-LC
L4 -
xoooo -
r,D
IIR I TE cca
BYTES
AS PROVIDED BY
ECC CIRCUITS
>C0100 --lE24
A
I
xxon
XOloo --lF44
--lE'58
'-255
A
A
A J(+"cnooo -
Thil it • migoproerem controlled, two ~
byt., counter to write thl number 4Jf
• IT4
QM020.LH£
CCB
PLO
VFO
E6 -
...
J2 -
PROCESS CONTROL
BYTES AS
REQUiRED BY
DEVICE TYPE
XXIOO -IE54
'-255
A
A
I
P'REFtELO ANALYSIS
,. SET uP APPROPRIATE
OA TA COUNTS.
Z. PUT CHANNEL I N WR I TE
MODE.
J. WA I T FOR RESPONSE
FROM CONTROLLER.
I
" K+Mc--MC
XOIOO - l E U
A2 -
PRESENT INITIAL.
STATUS IF NOT
ALREADY DONE
C\-xoooo-c.
STlC
F.. _XX.OO _
P_NO_"_rUII....,~I_G_L_s_tP_T 1!t'
OP GENERATE
,. DETERMINE WHICH
GAP TO BE
PROCESSED.
Z. SEND WRITE
DECODE TO THE
CONTROLLER.
INDEX
I
f
_10' ntot byte.
..
•
C4 -XX'OO-CD
DECREMENT LOW
BYTE COUNTER
XllOO !OlC
DECREMENT HIGH
I
A
BYTE COUNTER
A TA+0.58
!
M¥VIL
~
A. K+M8+00eMBC
crx~::~u-------------6---l
T!JIIKn
.-255
regi".r. Mllnt'lns sync:
with the channe..
This example 15
for instructional
purposes only.
13
Devic.
4.__
.
-F-r~o-m~~~t~.m~~.~I~
.
______
C_h_en_n_·____
..
~I~----~~L-___________1____~~~~~_,
IntirflCl
HellCl il ..lectllCl, and write
circuits place data on the
di.k lurface.
SERDES
D Tr.nsfers fullIIflnais from
'0
microprogram
byte
CU
buffer
r. .stlr and
with
ST4 bit. Drives write circuits with PLO
pul ... to .ync cIotl to di.k •.,-. Send.
serial writ. ct.tl to the drive.
3830·2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
© Copyright IBM Corpa,.tion 1972. 1973, 1974.1975
UNTIL MARCH 26,1978, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
WRITE DATA TRANSFER
CMD90
READ COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
CODE
COMMAND
READ COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
DETAIL
FUNCTION
OATA READ
DESCRIPTION
ERRORS (3330 and 33501
Set Unit Cheek·Channel End
Device End
CMD 100
COMMENTS
Data Check
Read Data
Single
Track
MultiTrack
06
86
Transfer data area of a record from drive to main
storage
Data
Overrun
Correc·
table
Un correetable
CMD 120
First data area after address marker
or the data area of the record that
was chained from the count or key
area of the same record
Yes
Use
ECC
Use
Command
Retry
CMD 120
First key, data area after address
mar ker or the key, data area that
was command-chained from the
count area of the same record
Yes
Data
field.
Use
ECC.
Use
Command
Retry
CMD 120
Next record or first record after RO
Yes
Data
field.
Use
ECC.
Use
Command
Retry
Data
field.
Use
ECC.
Use
Command
Retry
Read Key Data
OE
8E
Transfer key and data areas of a record from drive
to main storage
Read Count
Key Data
1E
9E
Transfer count, key, and data areas of a record from
drive to main storage
CMD 110
RO
Yes
CMD 110
Next record count field or first
count field after RO
Yes
Use
Command
Retry
Transfer five bytes {FCCHHI to channel
CMD 110
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Yes
Use
Command
Retry
First data area after RO
Read Record
Zero (RO)
16
96
Transfer RO (count, key and data) from the drive to
main storage
Read Count
12
92
Transfer next count field (eight bytesl from the drive
to main storage
Read Home
Address
1A
9A
Read Initial
Program Load
02
-
Recalibrate to cylinder 0 and head 0, search for index
point, and read R 1 data from the drive to main
storage
CMD 125
Provide one byte of angular position information,
which is used by a subsequent Set Sector command.
When not chained from a Read, Write, or Search
CCW, the byte transferred is the angular position
required to access the last record processed on the drive.
When chained, the byte transferred is the angular pOSition
of the record used in the previous CCW.
CMD 125
Transfer count, key, and data areas of the remaining
records of the track from drive to main storage.
CMD 125
Read Sector
22
-
Read Multiple
CKD
5E
-
0 ~ Flag.
1 . Cylinder address.
2 = Cylinder address.
3 = O.
4 = Head address.
Data
field.
Use
ECC.
Yes
Use
Command
Retry
If the KL equals 0 the command is
executed the same as a Read Data
command
When chained from a Search HA or
Read HA command, the Read RO
command is executed immediately
and does not initiate a search for
index point
A Read IPL command cannot be
preceeded by a Set File Mask
command in the same chain
Causes loss of orientation
Start next record until end of
track (excludi ng RO)
Use
ECC
Yes
Yes
23FD Disk PINs 4168811 and
4168816 only
ERRORS (33401
Set Channel End,
Device End, and Unit
Check in status.
Data overrun,
correctable data
check (data field
only I. or uncorrectabhl
data check in
sense data. For
correctable data
check. retry status
is presented. When
the command is
reissued. unit
check is presented.
which breaks the
command chain.
3830-2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973, 1974, 1975
) 0
() ()
READ COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
CMD 100
UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
C)
o
o o
O
,,:.
.~
\J
r~
"j!
o a o o
000
o
0'·
""
'
o o
(-
F(-'
L -
(' (
(': (
'"
/
READ OPERATION
READ OPERATION
Reads data, selected by the system, from the disk surface
and transfers it to the system.
II
•
B
SYSTEM
Executes Start
I/O instruction,
which addresses
a channel com·
mand word (CCW)
containing a Read
command.
•
.:II
&I
CHANNEL
Executes the
CCW to transfer
the Read com·
mand to the CU.
•
Transfers the
• addr'c!ss
of the
selected data to
the CU.
',:
.:.
,':'
•
Trilnsfers data
• from
the CU to
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
Controls the
timing of the trans·
fer of data and
control information between the
channel and the
CU.
Checks parity
uf data transferred
to the CU.
II
CONTROL CIRCUITS
I
DEVICE
I
I
I
SERDES
I
•
Decode the Read command.
•
•
Select the addressed module
and head.
Receives the modified frequence modu·
lation (MFM) data from the module.
•
Recognizes gaps and synchronizes to the
data.
I
•
Changes serial·by·bit drive data to
serial-by·byte data.
I
•
Sends data to the CU and ECC.
I
•
Uses phase·locked oscillator (PLO) pulses
to maintain synchronization when not
reading.
I
•
Uses ECC bytes to check for errors.
•
D
CONTROL MODULE
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT
Check the status of the
module and transfer the status
to the channel.
•
Set up the read controls in
the module.
•
Control the serial-by-byte
transfer of read data from the
control circuits to the channel
interface.
•
Check subsystem for errors.
•
Gap Control
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SERIALIZER/
Read Data
DESERIALIZER 100IIII.... (Serial)
1m ~~SR~ACES
I
: II
I
I
I
READ CONTROLS
•
•
Set up the module to read data
from the disk.
•
Change currents from the read
head into data pulses to SERDES.
•
Provide the CU with status of
the module.
I
to the channel if error occurs
and is a type that can be
retried, and set up tf) reo
locate record.
the system.
I
I
I
I
I
Transfer ending status to the
the channel.
• 3330 - Indicate retry status
CMD 105
Contain bits of
information on
the magnetic
disk coating.
I
I
ECC CIRCUITS
I
I
CTL·I ~-oi-'"
PLO
SYSTEM
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
CHANNEL
Servo
CONTROL CI RCUITS
CTRL 1
Track
Pulses
DISK
SURFACES
Read
Data
DEVICE
INTERFACE
CTL·I
CHL-I 1
READ/WRITE
HEAD
READ
CONTROLS
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTROL STORAGE
I
I
I
II
I
I
•
Transfers read control information I
to the selected modlile.
I
Changes magnetic flux from pack to
read current signals.
•
Selected head provides data
I
•
Servo head provides PLO pulses .
I
I
•
Servo head and cirCUits hold access at
selected track.
IJ
EI'SC/CONTROL INTERFACE
•
•
•
437415
3830-2
1 2 Nov 73
© Copyrigh.IBM Corpora. Ion
1973.1975
447460
19 Dec 75
I
Transfers read control inform·
ation to the control circuits.
Transfers control/drive status
to the CU.
•
•
DEVICE INTERFACE
Transfers status of the selected
module to the CU.
I
READ/WRITE HEAD
pulse~
I
Transfers byte·by·byte data
from the control module to the
CU.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
READ OPERATION
CMD 105
~
''''---;
READ COMMANDS OBJECTIVES
READ COM\1ANDS OBJECTIVES
READ MULTIPLE COUNT KEY DATA (SE)
READ HOME ADDRESS (lA or 9A)
READ RECORD ZERO (16 or 96)
READ COUNT (11 or 92)
READ COUNT KEY DATA (IE or 9E)
READ KEY DATA (OE or 8E)
READ DATA (06 or 86)
READ INITIAL PROGRAM LOAD (02)
6.
Read data: Clock through all fields and gaps
(including RO data) to the next data field; read data
field; end in gap.
7.
Read IPL: Seek to track 0 and select head 0: wait
for index; clock all gaps and fields to the data field
of record ); read data field; end in gap.
If Check 2 errors are indicated, end operation and
present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device End in
ending status. Set appropriate sense data in control
storage.
•
Refer to CMD 105 and CMD 130 .for subsystem components used. Refer to CMD 110 through CMD 125 for
flowcharts and CAS references. Refer to CMD 400 for
Read overflow operations. Read to CMD 430 for Read
multitrack operations.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs except that no
Set File Mask command may precede a Read IPL in
the same chain.
•
If errors occur, 'present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE) and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer data, from the disk track selected by the
system, through the control unit to the channel.
2.
•
gaps until a count field is located (excluding RO
count). read the count field data. clock gap and
read key data (if required): clock gap; read data
field (if required): repeat the Read operation
until index.
If Data Overrun or Data check is indicated. present
Unit Check. Channel End. and Device End in
ending status. Set Data Check or Data Overrun in
sense data.
READ SECTOR (21)
Refer to CMD 105 for subsystem components used.
Refer to CMD 300 and CMD 305 for use of the command.
Read RO:If not in gap after HA, wait for index;
clock gap, control bytes, HA field, and gap. Balance of operation is the same as Read CKD operation.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End.
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE I and CTRL 650.)
4.
Read CKD: Clock through all fields and gaps until a
count field is located (excluding RO count); read the
count field data; clock gap and read key data (if
required); clock gap; read data field (if required);
end in gap.
•
If no errors occur. return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer angular position information from
controller / device to the control unit, and send one
byt!' to the channel.
Read Key Data: Clock through all fields and gaps
(including RO key) to the next key field; read key
field; dock gap; read data field; end in gap. If key
CCW count = 0, this command is the same as a
Read Data command.
I.
Normally this information is the angular position
required to reprocess the last record processed on
the device selected.
I~
3830-2
[) COPVrlght IBM CQrporatlon 1973,1915
1
"
If no errors occur. present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
8. Read Multiple CKD: Clock through all fields and
Read Home Address:Wait for index; clock gap and
control bytes; read five bytes (FCCHH); end in
gap.
0 ·0'" 00
•
If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
Read count: Clock through all fields and gaps until
a count field is located (excluding RO count); read
eight bytes of data (CCHHRKDD); end in gap.
Or'"
.'
If Check 2 errors are indicated, present Unit Check..
Channel End, and ,Device End in ending status. Set
appropriate sense data in control storage.
2. If 3340: Present Unit Check, Channel End, and
Device End in ending status. Set Data Check or
Data Overrun in sense data.
3.
S.
•
If 3330 or 3350: Entry retry mode.
Note: Correction code bytes for each field are read and
checked. HA. count. and key fIelds are stored in control
storage for use in error correction (3330 only: retry and
correct in control storage.) The commands and their
e/j'ects fire:
I.
For 3330: if a Seek or Set Sector command has been
executed. or if a device power-on or system reset has
occurred, the byte is zero.
If Data Overrun or Data Check is indicated. do
one of the following:
I.
•
2.
CMD 107
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
RIAl) COMMANDS OBJlOCII\ I"
eM 0 107
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
o
('\
(J
()
o o
(~
v
f~
"y
o
0'.'
"
o
()
o
()
o o
()
-.~-~-
(
~(C
(
(
--_..
----~
(
(
(
~-----
(
(
-~
- -------
~
-
(
(
(-
-----",_..
---"------~
--.-----~~~--.---
(
(
(
(
-- -
(
(
(-
(--~
(
(
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 4)
(-
(
(~
(
(
(
(-
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 41
(-
(-
('
CMD 110
Refer to CMD 107 for command objectives.
Read commands transfer data from a selected disk
storage module to the system.
READ COUNT (I 2
OR 92)
II~g/~~ IN~~~Mf~4~1=JA ~I:::~~l.
IA I T ~OA SYNC
IN. READ 10
BYTE
CLOCK THROUGH
HOME ADDRESS
AREA.
4-QH025
't~=
3.4.5-0H030
READ AND SEND
BYTES TO
CHANNEL ~ROM
~CCHH
~ILE
1,3,4-QG050
1,3,4-QG060
- 010
IAIT ~OR
SYNC-IN. READ
BYTES.
---------
__
~~5-QH090
1,2,5-QKOIO
1,2.5-QK020
I:::=~U
IAIT ~OR
SYNC-IN
READ AND
TRANS~ER
COUNT
DEVICE
CHL-I 310
'.2,3,4.5-QK050
r-----~~----~:~:=~gg
END ~ ~IELD.
CHECK ~OR
ERRORS.
I-QKOIO
2,5-QK050
00
READ AND CHECK
T2DATA
C~:~k~~~'A~
LENGTH BYTES
~ROM
3,4-QK040
1,2,5-QK010
READ AND
TRANS~ER DATA
TO CHANNEL.
4·OH025
1.2.3.4.5-QH02O
7 ECCBYTES.
16 FOR 3340133601
~IELD
SEND CHANNEL
END AND OEV I CE
END TO CHANNEL.
CHL-I 360
DEVICE
CHL-I
I-QKOIO
2,5-QK050
1,3,4-QK010
1,3,4-QK100
1,3,4-QK120
I ,3, 4-QS050
2,5-QH010
2,5-QH090
- 010
I,~:::g::~~g
1,2,3,4,5-QH030
~~
READ AND
TRANS~ER COUNT
DATA TO CHANNEL
DEVICE
3340J33S0 • IF HI.
WAS MOVED DUE TO
DEFECT SKIPPING
THE CONTROLLER
AUTOMATICALLY LOOKS
FOR THE SYNC BYTE IN
THE NEW POSITION
1.2.3.4·tg:~
DL • DATA LENGTH
ECC • ERROR CORRECTION CODE
KL • KEY LENGTH
r-____
LOAD DATA
LENGTH COUNTER.
2341991
4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 41 1811
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161116
2. ~OR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE
DEVICE TYPE SELECTED.
ABBREVIATIONS
-
0
READ AND CHECK
7 ECC BYTES
18 FOR 3340J33501
CND
190
DEVICE
SEND CHANNEL
END AND DEVICE
END TO CHANNEL.
CHL-I
1,2,3,4,5-QG050
1,2,3,4,5-QG060
1,3,4-Q~030
1,3,4-~010
1,2,3,4,5-QG010
r-----~--~~~4:~:ggg~g
,5-QG060
,4-QG310
,4-QG330
,4-QG350
3.4.QH32O
:
'-t~J~8
J.4·QFJ30
4·QF010
r-____~~~~~5-QH010
NOTES
~
r--_....J~--...,
SEPARATE IRITE,
READA SEARCH
COMMc~oli\ AND
OPERATIONS.
CORRECTABLE
ERRORS ARE HANDLED
BY ECC AND SYSTEM
EREP·S. 3330/3350·
UNCORRECTABLE ERRORS
ARE HANDLED BY
COMMAND RETRY
With 3330 device selected, if a data check is detected
during a Read command, the CU uses ECC to correct
the error, if correctable, or command retry if not.
With 3340 or 3350 device selected, if a data check is
detected during a Read command, the CU uses ECC
to correct the error, if correctable and in the data
field (there is no correction capability on HA, count
or key fields). The 3350 uses command retry if the
error is not correctable.
I. THIS ~LOICHART IS USED 11TH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE ~OI..LOIING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTI~Y THE MICROCODE ANO
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE RE~ERENCESI
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341105, 2341116, 2341111
1.2.5·0F05O
2.5·QF06O
3.4·QF350
J.4·QFJ55
3.4·QF370
1.2.5·QF070
1.2.J.4.5·QG010
INDEX
PROCESSING AND
HEAD SIITCHING
Read Count.Kev. Data; Read Kev. Data; and Read
Data commands can operate on overflow records.
Overflow records allow data records of more than one
track in length. Overflow operations indicated
bV a bit in theflag byte.
CHL-I 420
CND 190
CND 190
3830-2
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 41
©Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976
('-
.~
Refer to CMD 105 for sub-system components used.
Read commands can operate in multi-track mode.
Multi-track operations (high order bit of command
on) allow the CU to cause automatic head switching
at index time without a Seek Head command.
(.-.
CMD 110
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 4)
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS IP8" 2 of 41
CMD 183
CMD 120
CMD 183
A
I,. ,5-QKOIO
3,4-QK310
1.2,3 .... 5-QK030
1,2.3,4.5-QK04Q
1.2,3,4,5-QK050
BII
..
3.4-QK350
I.i,!") "QK090
r----~-~
READ DATA 106
OR 1161
1.2.5-QF050
2.5-QF06O
1.2.4.5-QF070
3.4·QF350
3.4·QF355
3-QF370
1.2.3.4.5-00010
1.2.4.5-00030
3·00310
3-QG33O
SEPARATE WRITE
~6~A~~~~~~
CLOCK OPERATORS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5-QF070
4·0F03O
1.2.5-0F05O
2.5-0F055
1.3.4-QF06O
3.4·QF350
1.2.5-0F070
1. 2. 4. 5·0G010
1. 2. A. 5·0G04O
3.4·0F350
3.4·0F355
3·0F370
3.4·0F365
3·0G310
3·00330
I. 2. 3. 5-0G06O
1: ~: ~:1. ::3. t8li8!Jl
4·00040
1. 2. 3. ~: t8lig:
1.3.4·QF05O
1, 2.
r-_ _ _.l.._ _..;3.:.j4-QF~F370
SET UP TO READ
THE KEY FIELD
3.4-QF366
3-00310
3-00330
1,2,5-QG050
1,2,5-QG060
1,2-QH010
- 010
WA IT FOR SYNC
IN. REAO 10
BYTE.
1,2,5-QKOIO
2,5-QK015
2,5-QK011
1,2,5-QK020
3,4-QK310
3,4-QK030
3,4-QK040
END OF FIELD.
CHECK FOR
ERRORS.
~QF06O
SET UP TO READ
THE DATA FIELD
SET UP TO CLOCK
KEY FIELD
1.2.3.4.5,OF05O
2.5·0F055
1.2.3.4.5·0F06O
3.4·0F350
3.4·0F355
3·0F370
1.2.3.4.5-0F070
1.2.3.4.5·00010
3·0G310
1.2.3.4.5-00030
3·00330
1.2.3.4.5.QG040
1.2.3.4.5.QG060
I,Z,3,.,5-QHOtO
I ,2,3,4, 5-QHO I 0
.-____~____....."'4-QF350
. -____~~~~~5-QF350
LOAD DATA
LENGTH COUNTER
LQAD KEY-LENGTH
COUNTER
LOAD KEY-LENGTH
COUNTER
1,3,4-QH020
1,2,3,4'g:g:::m
'. READ AND
TRANSFER COUNT
FIELD TO
CHANNEL
~~ QKIIO
r-____~~~~~,5-QH030
. -____~~~~~\5-QH030
READ KEY FIELD
AND TRANSFER
KEY FIELD
CLOCK THROUGH
KEY AREA DATA
DEVICE
CHL-I 360
DEVICE
1:~:~!a.t8;gKo50
1,2,5-QKOIIO
1,2,5-QKIIO
.-____~__. .~~350
READ DATA FIELD
AND TRANSFER
DATA TO CHANNEL
1,2,5-QKOIO
DEVICE
3,4-QK310
1,2,3,4,5-QK030
CHL-I 360 1,2,3,4,5-QH030
1,2,3,4,5-QK040
1,2,3,4,5-QH090 r-______~I~,2~,3,;:~:~~gg
1,2,5-QK090
- 100
NOTES
END OF FIELD
CHECK FOR
ERRORS
I.
2.
END OF FIELD.
CHECK FOR
ERRORS
~~~~0~~C~:~ll~S~S~~W~6~L~~~APLE
DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE
MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE
REFERENCES.
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 234111105, 234111116, 234111111
~ : ~~;g/~~ IN~~=Mf=4~1~JA ~~:::~~ 23411991
4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - 416111111
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 416111116
4·0H035
4·0H085
3·0H330
3·0H380
1.3.4,OHOBO
1.2.3.4.5·QH09O
1.2.6·QK010
3.4·QK310
1.2.3.4.5-QK03O
1.2.l.4.5.QK040
3.4·QK350
1.2.3.4.5.QK05O
1.2.5-QK09O
1.2.l.4.5.QK 110
~~ :C¥~XENp~~~~~A~I~~~
ON THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED.
.-____~:.&.o.~~~5-QK 120
SEND CHANNEL
END AND DEVICE
END TO CHANNEL
CHL-I
END OF FIELD
CND 190
3830-2
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS IP8" 2 of 41
©Copyright IBM Corporation 1912. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976
o
o
o o o
CMD 120
-------------------------~----------~-------------------
()
o
'J'
'''\
.
r".
\~
/f"'~
I
\~J
0
r~.
V
r~
;J
(-~
~j
(.-'-
p(~.
L
.
("
(-.
(
(
(
(-
(
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 4)
(
(
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 3 of 41
(
CMD 125
.I,3,4-QKOIO
r-____~. .~~~-QK050
IPL BUTTON
PRESSED
READ AND CHECK
ECC BYTES
I-QK 110
2,5-QF055
1,2-Q~0IgI0
TA, I~6 ~g, TO,
REGISTERS ARE
RESET BY SYSTEM
~ESET
SEARCH FOR SYNC
BYTE BEFORE
NORMAL COUNT
FIELD
1,2-QH020
- 020
START 110
FORCED IN CPU
READ FLAG BYTE
-
0
LOAD KEY LENGTH
COUNTER
1,3,4-QH030
r-____~~~~.,-QH070
CLOCK THROUGH
KEY AREA
I ,2-QH030
- 030
READ DATA AND
TRANSFER DATA
FIELD TO
CHANNEL
SET FLAG IN STORAGE
CONTROL TO CONTINUE
3340,3344,3350 NATIVE
4-QP395
4-QP390
4·QP090
4·01'395
r-____-J~~~~-QP090
DEY ICE
CHL-I 360
1,3,4-QKOIO
r-____-J~~~~-QK050
READ SECTOR
NUMBER FROM THE
MODULE TO THE
SCU
r-___...r.~~~090
READ SECTOR
NUMBER FROM THE
MODULE TO THE
SCU
READ AND CHECK
ECC BYTES
RE~~6NgA~~U~TtL~~Y'
UNTIL INDEX DCCURS
3350 COMPATIBILITY MODES
READ THE TRACK USED
COUNT FROM THE DEVICE
ANO CALCULATE THE
EQUIVALENT
3330-1/3330-11 SECTOR
VALUE. FOR THE LAST
RECORD PROCESSED
READ ANI.>
TRANSFER COUNT,
KE~IEt~ ~aTA
CHANNEL
DEVICE
CIllO 170,
INITIAL
SELECTION
1,2-QH030
- 030
CLOCK THROUGH
COUNT AREA AND
STORE KEY ANO
DATA LENCiTH
BYTES
DEYICE
3350
LOAD DATA
LENGTH COUNTER
.-______
PRESENT STATUS
TO CHANNEL
, ,2,
NOTES
RESEEK OPERATION IS
PERFORMED INTERNALLY
FOR THOSE 334413350
IMULATION DEVICES THAT
ARE ALLOCATED TO THE
INNER CYLINDERS ON
THE PHYS I CAL SP ....IDLE.
CU ISSUES RECALIBRATE
TO DRIVE INSTEAD OF
SEEK.
SEEK TO
CYLINDER 00 AND
HEAD 00.
CMO 190
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE YERSIONS.THE FOLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES.
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348786, 2348187
2 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348151, 2348996
3 - 3330/3340 INTERMIX - PIN 2348802, 2348997
4 - 3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 4168811
5 - 334013344 - PIN 4168816
2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE DEY ICE
TYPE SELECTED.
AB8REY 'AT I ONS
ECC
8
TRANSFER SECTOR
NUMBER TO THE
SYSTEM
UPDATE RESTART
DISPLACEMENT
COUNTER AT END
OF DATA FIELD
CONVERT TO
LOGICAL SECTOR
VALUE
DECODE COMMAND
AS READ IPL
1021
4-0P025
1.2.3.4.S.QPOIO
3.4·01'400
r-___...I~. .~....5-QP090
~~~~5-QS060
PRESENT CHANNEL
END ANO DEVICE
END TO THE
CHANNEL
CHL-I
CMD 190
SENO CHANNEL
END AND DEYICE
ENO TO CHANNEL
AT END OF TRACK
ERROR CORRECTION CODE
3830·2
READ COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS IPart 3 of 4)
C)Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975.1976
CMD 125
---
00 00
(~
",j
~~-----
()
(~,
~JJ
----~~----~-~----------~-~----~--~-----------~~
()
o
()
-
o
f"''\
<-~)
(~
\.y
r~
0
,~)
r~'\
\_j
(Fj
"'--_/"
r~
',)/
(
""-
(
F
l
(
(
(
(
(
(
(~'
(
(
(
(:
(
(
(
(
(
(,'
(
(
(
(
(
--
(
(
(
(
(
THE DATA OR I YES
THE YFO TO SYNC'
THE SERDES TO
THE 0 I SK SPEED.
TURN ON XFEN "'AHCH
TO SIGNAL
W' CROPfIOCiII'" THAT
lID I S NEADY I'OR
NEXT aYTE
DEYICE
~ch
,~{: : : :t.f
byte from the drive i. de.e".llled
in SE ROES and piKed in the MA regiuer j~~~:;:;"
in the CU, the ST register btt 4 is turned on ?"
~:::- ~~ml.::~!..cc IS!OHI'::!:~"""~
I
NCO
WAIT FOR FilE
AND CHANNEL
IIC'
SENDX~:;~E ~O
£4 -KOOOO-
IIOO.--Ull
DATA FROM SHIFT
REGI STER I S PLACED
IN SERDES REGISTER
UNDER CONTROl. OF
THE alT RING
I':£AO ,.,.EPA,IUTION
laYPASS IF 011 I ENTEDJ
,. STAlIn F'LO LOCK-IN
TO SE"'WO TRACK.
STt
II
This IS
DATA FIELD CONTINUE
IX010G--IU4
1-.uS
I
" .·Me.......::
microprogram controUed. two byte.
counter to read the number of bytes c~led
out in the count field (Kl 0< DlDll.
PLACE FlLL BYTE
IN lolA REGISTER
Z. SELECT T>'QNSE FRDOI
CONTR"- WOOUl.E.
CHANNEL
INTERFACE
RAISES SERYICE
IN/DATA IN TO
THE CHANNEL
_Jr
IX~~~c
--lS:"
,------,
" k.Go .... n
OlIGD)
traub/mooting.
C
These blocks s.ve the bytes read. for
storage in control storage buffer.
DAft
!'Tflfl
I
L~-J[l"OI)-L'
DEY CE
CO-'HS.
2. ,AIT FaA
ECC • ERROII COIIRECT I ON CODE
PLO • PHASE-LOCKED OSCILLATOII
.,.
READ/WRITE
'iFO • VAft.ABLE FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR
JfI-X~O':lO
COUNT-KEY CONTINUE
ORE INTO BUFFER
No.: This ,x.mpl, i. for inltroctidn
on/y_ U•• ,"""hi". CAS /ogiC$ for
DEYICE
THE
M I C,.QPftOGlUM
IIOYES THE BYTE
FRDOI lolA TO lID
ABBREYI ATiONS
ST}C
DECREMENT LOW
COUNTER
TO'THE CONTROl.
WClOILE.
PREFIEl...O ..HALYSIS
1. 'SET uP
APPfitOPR I 14. TE 0.0\ TIi
STZ
J4-···00-JD
LOCK YF'O TO PLO.
DP C,£HUATE
I. O£TERWINE .... ,CH
GAP TO BE
ST3C IS RESET IF ON LAST 3
BYTES
ECREMENT
OUNTER
I ._ns
A a.. ..a.MC
YICE
3.
D~~R~~·~N{°lOW gECRo~~ENT HIGH COUNTER
CHAN. S REG IS ,COUNTER
AUTO LOADED I IX!!~~~-I~
WITH THIS BYTE
A •• ",,-=
SEPARATE DATA
FRDOI YFO IS
PLACED I N SH I FT
REGISTEN.
CQWMAICl DECQD£
(READI
~ING
CMD 130
Transfer byte read to the MO register in the CU. The
channel Interface transfers the MD register contents to
the buffer register wtlen the byte is needed .
•
STATUS II'
{
II
Read data from the disk and transfer
the data to the system.
"IIUEHT I N I TI AL
,
(
(
READ DATA TRANSFER
READ DATA TRANSFER
•
(
DONE -COUNT
OR KEY
~:~::O~!lh.---------------------------------t---------------------------------------------+--------------------------------~3-4X~:::~---I~!·r
TURN OFF THE
SET UP
CONDITIONS
THIS PAGE TRANSFERS BYTES FROM
FilE TO CPU. THE BYTES READ ARE
AUTOMATICAllY LOADED INTO THE
SA. SB. SC or SO REGS DEPENDING
ON THE STATE OF MC BITS 6 AND 7
cr.=::0l··'
_ u ... _ ••
DONE - BUFFER
MCI-3
X~:~I~'I~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
ON
THISEND.
PAGE
ISSETALERT.
BY SYNC IN,
CHECK
ORST4
ERROR
-~
.
MB. MC = DATA COUNTS PRE DECREMENTED
GB = ID BYTE
C'-'
ST1
NB. NC. NO = MClt. 2. 3
-X"oo-oc
ST2 = t IF DATA FIELD/DO NOT STORE
NO CHAN XFER
ST3 = 0 IF ON LAST 3 BYTES
CHECK FOR CLOCKING OR TRUNCATION
~
II
Transfer bytes read from MA
register to a buffer register
and bu. in to the channel.
Maintains sync with channel.
~
~
~
.......
~
~
SCU
~
~
~ ~~:~~~ :~~~::~ ~~ule
~
number of bytes re~ to end
operltion.
::~@jm:m'ft:::::tl:1:m:{t;f~:~mr:::a;::\r
cr.:!:o:-:i:1I
( . . o•••• u ...
III
DRIVE
CONTROL
MODULE
Transfen controls to set up the
drive circuits to read dlta.
Thi •• xampl. is for
instructional pur·
_only.
..
Control
ond
CONTROL
CIRCulTI
H..d i...Ioct.d. """ reid
circuits send ell.. to the
SERDES
DrlW
,
Locks to the data from drive and ct.
serializes the data. Transft" fufl by_
from buffer register to MA ntgister in
CU. Seu ST 4 bit when byte i.
,"ady.
3830·2
READ DATA TRANSFER
eCopyrighllBM Corporation 1972. 1973, 1914. 197&. 1971
CMD 130
C
~------------~
---------------------.---~------
-------------
---
SENSE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
SENSE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
Errors
Code
Command
CMD140
Function
Detail Description
Data Transferred
Set Unit Check-Channel
and Device End
Comments
Single Track
Multi-Track
Test I/O
00
-
Determine the status of a device on a channel.
CMD 145
One status byte.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Status byte is normally zero.
Sense I/O
04
-
Determine the type of error or unusual condition that
caused the last unit check.
CMD 145
24 bytes of sense information.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Sense data is reset after transfer.
Read and Reset Buffered Log
A4
-
Supply usage or error statistics on the addressed drive.
CMD 145
24 bytes of statistics on the drive
drive.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Data is reset after transfer.
Read Diagnostic Status 1
44
-
Determine the type of error(s) found on running a
diagnostic test (part of a diagnostic write command).
CMD 150
16 bytes of error code message.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Overrun.
If the command is not preceded by a
Diagnostic Write or Load command, 16 bytes
of data from the error code. message area are
transferred.
,'
Transfer a diagnostic test from the storage control unit
to the system (after a diagnostic load command).
Device Reserve
-
B4
512 bytes of diagnostic test
data.
CMD 150
24 bytes of sense information.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
If command is not the first one in the chain,
Command Reject will be set in sense data.
CMD 150
24 bytes of sense information.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
If command is not the first one in the chain,
Command Reject will be set in sense data.
Determines the I/O device type and model number.
CMD 145
7 bytes of sense information.
Command Reject.
Bus Out Parity.
Supported only in 3340/3344
Intermixmicrocode (PIN 4168816) and
3330/3340/3350. Intermix microcode
(PIN 4168811 at EC 442498 or later.)
Aesets bits in control storage and in controller to
cancel reservation for addressed device for
another path. It then sets bits to reserve addressed
device via this path.
CMD 150
24 bytes of sense information
Command Aeject.
Bus Out Parity.
Equipment Check.
Supported only in 3330/3340/3350
Intermix microcode (PIN 4168811at
EC 437464 or laterl.
Set bits in control storage and in controller (with
String Switch feature) to reserve addressed devices.
Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel.
I
Device Release
-
94
Store null value in control storage and in controller
(with String Switch feature) to cancel reservation for
devices addressed.
Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel.
Sense I/O Type
E4
Unconditional Aeserve
14
-
3830·2
SENSE COMMANDS-DESCRIPTIONS
CMD140
OCopyright IBM Corporation 1872. 1873. 1874. 1875. -t8M
()
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 () 0
(~
v...y
t'r-""I
'J
(~
",-y
r~
V
(--.,
I
"-_J
'
r~
',,~
('~
""j
("'"),
"'--'
a
()
f"""
V
(~
,y
--
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
.
?
If~
I
,,'-lL
(-
(
(-
SENSE COMMANDS -
'"
-.
(-
(-
(
SENSE COMMANDS-OBJECTIVES
OBJECTIVES
TEST I/O (00)
READ AND RESET BUFFERED LOG (A4)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
DEVICE RESERVE (B4)
Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references.
•
Transfer data from control storage to the channel.
•
•
Test I/O is not part of a CCW from the channel.
•
Test I/O is an immediate command and has only one
status byte.
Refer·to CMD 165 for subsystem components used.
Refer to CTRL 650 for layout of log data in control storage. Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references. Refer to SENSE 1 for environmental data meanings.
•
The initial status byte presented is normally zero.
•
•
If status for the selected device has been stacked or is
pending (see CMD 181), present it to the channel.
Log data is information pertaining to the operation of
a given device.
•
Data transferred is the same as sense format 6.
•
1. If limits are exceeded, a Unit Check is presented,
Sense data in control storage is not changed unless a
Unit Check occurs on the Test I/O command (Bus
Out Parity, Command Reject).
2. If the CPU program calls for the data (that is, the
end-of-day routine) with a Read and Reset Buffered Log command, the sense data is set up and
transferred to the channel. To clear the complete
log, the command must be repeated for each device
attached.
Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references.
Refer to SENSE 1 for sense data layout and bit meanings.
•
Sense data was set up, in control storage, in the proper format. This was done by the end procedure routine of the command that presented the unit check.
(See CMD 190.)
A Unit Check status on a command sets up a contingent connection state (see CMD 181) on the selected
controller/ device. The Unit Check also forces a busy
condition to other addresses.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer 24 bytes of sense data from control storage
to the channel. Fewer than 24 bytes are transferred if
the channel truncates the operation.
•
Reset the sense data in control storage.
•
Present Channel End and Device End in ending status.
b. If CCW count < 512, transfer CCW count and set
Command Reject.
and a Sense I/O command will transfer format 6
data.
SENSE I/O (04)
•
1. If the command is chained from a preceding Diagnostic Write CCW, transfer 16-byte error code
message. Sixteen is maximum; if CCW count is less
than 16, transfer CCW count only.)
2. If the command is chained from a preceding Diagnostic Load CCW, transfer 512-byte block of data
(diagnostic test).
a. If CCW count> 512, transfer only 512 bytes.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors occur, return zero status to the channel.
•
Set up sense data format 6 in control storage. Normally, this data is in coded form in log area of control
storage.
•
Transfer 24 bytes of data to the channel.
(Twenty-four is maximum; transfer fewer bytes if
CCW count is less.)
•
Reset log area for the selected device. Reset sense
data area of control storage.
•
Present Channel End and Device End in ending status.
READ DIAGNOSTIC STATUS 1 (44)
Refer to CMD 160 and CMD 165 for use of command
and subsystem components used. Refer to CTRL 650
for layout of control storage error code message data.
Refer to CMD 150 for flowchart and CAS references.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and Device End in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL l?50.)
3. If no diagnostic Write or Load command, transfer
16 bytes from error code message area. (Data is
invalid.) If CCW count is less than 16, transfer
CCW count only.)
•
•
Used with SCUs with more than one channel ..
attached or with the string switch feature installed.
(See Note 1.)
,. Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs, except that the
command must not be preceded by a Set File Mask
command in the same chain.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and device end in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors, return zero status to the channel.
•
Check addressed controller/device:
1.
If Bus Out Parity Error or Command Reject is indicated, present Unit Check, Channel End, and Device
End in ending status. Set appropriate bits in sense
data.
If no errors occur, present Channel End and Device
End in ending status.
UNCONDITIONAL RESERVE (14)
• Used with SCUs with the string switch feature installed.
(See Note 1.)
• Check for valid command.
• Must be first command in chain.
• If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and
device end status. Set Command Reject in sense data (see
SENSE 1 and CTRL 650).
• Balance of operation is the same as a Sense I/O operation.
If controller is out of service (powered down
Interface Disabled, etc.), set up to present condition code 3. (See Note 2.)
2. If device is reserved to other channel or control
unit, set Pending Device End indicator.
3. If device is available, set Reserve indication in the
control unit and/or the controller.
• Balance of the operation is the same as a Sense I/O
operation.
DEVICE RELEASE ('4)
•
Used with SCUs with more than one channel
attached or with the string switch feature installed.
(See Note 1.)
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs, except that
the conunand must not be preceded by a Set File
Mask command in the same chain.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End,
and device end in status. Set Command Reject in
sense data. (See SENSE 1 and CTRL 650.
•
If no errors, return zero status to the channel.
•
Check addressed controller/device:
• If no errors, return zero status to the channel.
• Check addressed controller/device:
I. If controller or device is 3350 operating in 3330·1 com·
patibility mode, set Command Reject.
2. Force reset of Reserve indication to addressed device on
other channel and set Reserve indication for addressed
device in control unit and controller.
1.
If controller is out of service (powered down
Interface Disabled, etc.), set up to present condition code 3. (See Note 2.)
Notes:
1. Refer to device MLM for circuit description of string
switch feature.
2. On SCU with 3330 feature and without string switch
feature, the command is executed.
3830·2
SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES
C>CopvrighllBM CofPCll"81ion 1972.1973.1974.1975.11178
eM D 142
eM D 142
(
SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Continued)
2.
If device is reserved to other channel or control
unit, set Pending Device End indicator.
3.
If device is available, reset Reserve indication in
SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Continued)
CM D 143
SENSE COMMANDS - OBJECTIVES (Continued)
CMD 143
the control unit and/or the controller.
•
Balance of the operation is the same as a Sense I/O
operation.
SENSE I/O TYPE (E4)*
i.
Refer to CMD 145 for flowchart and CAS references.
•
Check for valid command.
•
No requirement for preceding CCWs.
•
If errors occur, present Unit Check, Channel End, and
device end in status. Set Command Reject in sense data.
(See SENSE I and CTRL 650.)
•
If no errors, return zero status to the channel.
•
Transfer 7 bytes of sense data to the channel as follows
(Hex):
B te 0 'FF'
y
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
Byte
...
•
I
2
3
4
5
6
"
38 } Control
'30' Unit
'02' T e
Device T
No.
Device T
No.
Device Model No.
Present Channel End and Device End in ending status.
*For microcode PINs 4168811 and 4168816 only.
3830·2
C>Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973.1974.1975.19'"
()OOOO
r~
V
0 0
.
.
~,
IV
I~
~
0 0
tfF~.
J
0
t"~
~j
/'.......,.
'",,-)I
A'~
0.
,
0
r)
"'-
0 0
.1
~'
Ij
~'
0
'-
(')
I
.
~
0 0
OOOOO(~
--------_
('
F
l
(-
{'
("
('-
(
(~
(-' (,
(C
(,"
(-
('
(~
-------
..
(-
(
(
..
(
(:
(
(,~'
('\
('
f
(-
(-
(
(~
(-
(
SENSE COMMANDS--FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 21
SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of 2)
•
(~
("'\
(~
CMD 145
Execution of Sense Commands transfers sense
and status information to using system,
•
SenSe information summary referenced on SENSE 1.
CMD 183
~----~~~,~~.. ,-".I.I
READ AND RESET
BUFFERED LOG
IA41
1,2,3,.,5-QEObO
1,2,3,.,5-0E080
1,2,3,4,5-QE090
I,Z,3,4,S-QROIO
.-______-W~~~~5-0R020
TRANSFER SENSE
BYTES TO THE
CHANNEL
CHL-I
31>0
1,2,3,.,5-QQ090
~
1,2,3,4,5-00095
____~~~~~5-00120
SET UP THE
USAGEIERROR
DATA FOR
TRANSFER TO THE
CHANN I..
CTRL 1>50'
CHL-I 360
TRANSFER
USAGEIERROR
DATA TO THE
CHANNEL
C"D 190
CU TRANSFERS
7 BYTES OF SENSE
INFORMATION TO THE
SYSTEM TO IDENTIFY
DEVICE TYPE,
-----
1.2,3,4,5-00010
1,2,3,4,5-00020
1,2,3,4,5-00030
1,2,3,4,5-0001>0
1,2,3,4,5-00390
1,2,3, •• 5-0EQ10
THIS COMMAND
IS USED TO
DETERMINE THE CONTROL
UNIT TYPE AND DEVICE
TYPE OF THE SELECTED
DEVICE.
1.2,3.4,5-QR020
r-______. .~~~5-0S01>0
PRESENT CHANNEL
END AND DEVICE
END TO THE
CHANNEL
4.5-0EOI0
4.5-0E06O
4.5-0EOBO
4.5-0E090
4.5-00010
4.5-0R040
4.5-QR010
4.5-0R020
TRANSFER 1 BYTES
OF INFORMATIOo/
TO THE CHANN E L.
4.5-0S06()
4.5-0S090
PRESENT CHANN EL
END AND DEVICE
END TO THE
CHANNEL.
CHL-I
NDrES
I,
THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WiTH MULTIPLE
vER510~S,
THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE
USED TO IDt:NTIFY THE MICROCO"F AND
MIC~~CODE
COR~ES?~~OING
I
2
3
4
5
-
CAS PAGE
CMD 190
REF~~~NCE5:
3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348186, 2]4e787
3341 ONLY - PIN 234d157, 2348996
3330/33 4 0 INTER~IX - PIN 2348802, 234~99r
3330/3340/3350 INTERMIX - PIN 416881 I
3340/3344 -
PIN 4168811>
2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK
AC rUAL PACE Nt..:,",Sf R
DE~lCE
~30·2
CMD 190
CMD 190
"FOR MICROCODE PIN. 416aSll ANO 416aS16 ONLY.
IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
M.~
'(
DEPE"'O ON THE
TYPE 5£LECTEO.
SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 1 of
21
CMD 145
(
o ()
0 0 000000
----
(
F
L
(-
(-
(~
(
(-
('
(
(
(
(
(
("
("
('
(
(
(-
(
(
(-
(-'\
..
r-
SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 2)
(
(
(
----- -------
('
(
(
('
(
II
(-
(,-
CMD 150
SENSE COMMANOS--FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21
CMD 175
NO
1,i!,3,4,5-0D040
1,i!,3,4,5-0D042
r-____~~~~~5-QEOI0
SET UNIT CHECK
STATUS (COMMANDREJECT AND INVALID
SEQUENCE)
THOSE DEvICE
ADDRESSES THAT ARE
BUSY WITH OTHER
CHANNEL WILL HAVE
RESERVE PENDING
lNOICATOR SET.
SENO ZERO
STATUS TO
CHANNEL
YES
CHL-I 420
I,2,3,4,5-0E010
1,2,3,4,5-QE060
1,2,3,4,5-0£0110
1,2,3,4,5-QE090
1,2,3,4,5-QR010
SET UP TO TRANSFER
512 BYTES OF DATA
FRO... CONTROL
STORAGE TO THE
CHANNEL: TRANSFER
DATA
ORllO
OR120
RESET SWITCH.
RESET ASSIGNMENT. DESELECT
DRIVE. SELECT
DRIVE.
NOIRELEASE CO...... AND I
CTRL 650
4.as120
4.5-Of'JI]
4-0f'311
YES
r-______~~~~~5-QR020
SET UP TO
TRANSFER 16
BYTES OF ERROR
IoIESSAGE DATA TO
THE CHANNEL
1.1.J·OP111
YES 4-05120
4·OPJI]
4-OPJ1S
1.2.3-OP212
SET CHANNEL END
AND DEVICE AND
1,2,3,4,5-QP030
STATUS
RELEASE DEVICE
ORl30
----- RESERVE DEVICE
CLEAN UP CONTROL STORAGE
r-______LL~~~5-QS020
r-______~~~~~5-QW210
kET~I.)AVAIL_.
~-___,r__---I
SET COIol ... AND
REJECT, CHANNEL
END, DEVICE
END, AND UN IT
CHECK IN STATUS
1,2,3,4, !i-QRO I 0
r-____~~~~£;5-QR020
SEND 24 SENSE
BYTES
TRANSFER 16
BYTES OF DATA
TO THE CHANNEL
1,2,3,4,5-QS060
r-______~~~~~5-0S090
CHL-I 360
1,2,3,4,5-QR020
1,2,3,4,5-05060
r -______LL~~~5-QS090
CTRL 650
CHL-I 360
PRESENT STATUS
TO CHANNEL
PRESENT CHANNEL
END AND OE¥ICE
ENO TO THE
CHANNEL
PRESENT STATUS
TO CHANNEL
QR140
NOTES
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH ...ULTIPLE
IoIICROCOOE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS ARE
USEO TO IDENTIFY THE 1oI1CROCOOE ANO
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES:
I
2
:
5
- 3330 ONLY - PIN 234111105, 234111116, 234111111
- 3340 ONLY - PIN 23411151, 23411996
: ~~~g~~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERIoI~~N_2~1~II~f611~~iIl991
- 3340/3344 - PIN 416111116
2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE OlAGRAloI, THE
ACTUAL PAGE NU ... BER IoIAY DEPEND ON THE
OEvICE TYPE SELECTEO.
CHL-I
~
C/oID 190
EXIT TO RESERVE
DRIVE
SET UNIT CHECK
ST A TUS (COM·
MAND REJECT
ANO INVALID
COMMAND!.
CIoiD 1'10
CIoiO 190
CMD 190
See
3830-2
-r447461
EC Hist~ Mar 76
C!;)Coo,!,igh. IBM
C~.pvation
447463
L
16 Dec ~
1911. 197J, 1974. 1975,1976
SENSE COMMANDS-FLOWCHARTS (Part 2 of 21
CMD 150
(
TRANSFE.H INLINE DIAGNOSTICS TO CONTROL.UNIT
TRANSFER INLINE DIAGNOSTICS TO CONTROL UNIT
• Diagnostics stored in system diagnostic library can be sent
to SCU to test subsystem .
•
CMD16,O
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT
CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
After diagnostic is run. error code is returned to system.
To provide maximum facility availability. the SCU can execute
diagnostic tests on a drive concurrent with normal system
operations on the remaining drives. This mode of operation
allows the customer engineer to diagnose and repair most drive
failures while the facility continues to operate other attached
drives. The SCU provides a transient block of 512 bytes (128
words) of c.ontrol storage to allow temporary residence for a
specific diagnostic test.
The transient area is loaded under control of the Online Test
Executive Program (OL TEP). A special command. Diagnostic
Write. loads a selected test into control storage and instructs
the CU to execute the test. Loading and execution can also
be initiated from the CE panel.
After the test. error message information or test results are
transferred from the SCU to main storage by a Read Diagnostic
Status 1 command. If the CE panel is used. the test results are
displayed in the CE panel indicators.
4
•
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Decode the Diagnostic Write command.
• Set up and control the transfer of data from channel
interface to the control storage diagnostic buffer area.
1
•
•
SYSTEM
3
Executes a Start I/O instruction that addresses a
Diagnostic Write command.
After receiving Device End status. executes a Start
I/O instruction that addresses a Read Diagnostic
Status 1 command.
SYSTEM
.....
....
y
Store 16·byte error code in the control storage buffer
area if errors are found.
•
Send Channel End and Device End status to the channel.
Decode Read Diagnostic Status 1 command.
•
Transfer error code from the control storage to the
channel on Read Diagnostic Status 1 command.
• Checks parity of data trans·
ferred to the SCU.
•
Send Channel End and Device End status to the channel.
CHANNEL
.....
......
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
CONTROL CIRCUITS
...
......
CHl·ll
~
Error Message
Data
•
•
Ir
Status and
Run inline diagnostic.
• Controls timing of data to
and from the channel.
.....
Address. Command ......
and Diagnostic
Program Data
CHANNEL INTERFACE
•
CTRll
~ ~
,,
Diagnosti c
Program Control
Out
Diagnostic
Program Data In
Address
Control
......
2
CONTROL STORAGE
CTRL 600
CHANNEL
• Transfers address and corr" information to the seiecte
subsystem.
• Transfers status of subsysrc
to the system.
• Transfers diagnostic data
the subsystem.
5
t.
CONTROL STORAGE
• Stores main microprogram to control Diagnostic Write and
Read Diagnostic Status 1 commands.
• Transfers error code from
subsystem to the system.
• Stores diagnostic from system in a buffer area.
• Stores error code for any errors found.
3830-2
G~qX:~25~f02-r ~;;1~ot~J L~~~~s.~-r~[ ~i;~~~~l ~;~~~~:T-©C"py:t ..;i··18"l
()
a
0 0
(,lfPI,f.H;"n
a
197'2. 1'313, 197-', 197~. 19,,)
()
0
(~
0
(~
\....Y
- ._ L--'=r~__=r~=J
(~~
\""J!
() 0 0 C)
('!;
',y
TRANSFER INLINE DIAGNOSTICS TO CONTROL UNIT
~
i',J)
~
"'J
(
\..J!
~
\.)
0 'r"'"J
(.
....,
'''-_.Y
r\
i
.
\,J
('l
".J
(~
\.....Y
('''1
~
f"i
\.J
rl
"'--.j
C) 0
-
(''1
\;."J
CMD 160
0 r'
v
,0
"--.Ji
r',,-.
-------~--
c
p('; ('
L.
C' C:
(-
(,C, ("
(
(-"
(~'.
(,
(
(-.
(~
--
"--~
-----_.
--~-.----.--
c:
(-
('
('
(. ('
(-
(,-'
(~'
C"
~-~
(~\
(:~
(-'
•
Diagnostic tests resident in diagnostic library stored on the CE diagnostic 23FD disk (MPl file) can be read to CPU of
using system .
•
Execution of Diagnostic load CCW followed by Read Diagnostic Status 1 transfers 512 bytes from 23FD to CPU.
4
Any diagnostic test stored on the CE 23FD disk can be selected by the using system. To transfer the diagnostic
test, the using system must execute a Diagnostic Load CCW followed by a Read Diagnostic Status 1 command. The
Diagnostic Load command transfers 512 bytes (containing the specific diagnostic) from the 23FD to control
storage. The Read Diagnostic Status 1 command then transfers the 512 bytes from control storage to the using
system main storage. Refer to CMD 25 and CMD 30 for description of the command operations.
5
23FD DRIVE
(e,;,
(~.
CMD 165
23FD INTERFACE
•
Provides drive for disk.
•
Starts 23FD drive motor.
•
Provides for movement of head from track
to track.
•
Moves ahead to track selected by the
Diagnostic Load commands.
Picks up data signals from disk via read
•
Moves disk into contact with the head.
head.
•
Reads 512 bytes of data from the disk.
•
(~'
,,~
READ DIAGNOSTICS TO SYSTEM
READ DIAGNOSTICS TO SYSTEM
SCU
CPU
1
("
SYSTEM
•
Executes a Start I/O instruction that addresses a
Diagnostic Channel command.
•
After receiving Device End status, executes a Start
1/0 instruction that addresses a Read Diagnostic
Status 1 command.
Address Data
Command Data
SYSTEM
....
3
.....
CHANNEL
....
~
....
I
CHANNEL
CONTROLS
CHL-11
~
.
.......
Transfers address and command information to the
selected subsystem.
•
Transfers status of subsystem to the system.
•
Transfers diagnostic from subsystem to system
storage.
Diagnostic Data
23FD INTERFACE
MPL 245
Diagnostic
, Data
....
....
~ l
Servo Drive
~ ~
Servo Control
Read Control
Powe r On Control
CTRL 1
~
,
Diagnostic
Data In
.4~ Diagnostic Sense Data
7
Out, and Diagnostic
Microprogram
•
......
CONTROL STORAGE
CTRL 600
CHANNEL
•
,
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Address
Control
2
23FD DRIVE
MPL 1
• Controls timing of data to and from the channel.
• Checks parity of data transferred to the SCU .
.......
Status and
Diagnostic Data
CHANNEL INTERFACE
CONTROL CIRCUITS
Decode the Diagnostic Load command.
• Send Start, Seek and Read control lines
to the 23FD interface according to the
control byte sent with the Diagnostic Load
command.
• Transfer diagnostic data from 23FD to the
control storage.
6
CONTROL STORAGE
•
• Stores microprogram to control the operation
of subsystem.
Transfer Channel End and Device End to
the channel after data is read into control
storage.
•
Decode Read Diagnostic Status 1 command.
•
Stores diagnostic data read from 23FD by the
Diagnostic Load operation. This data is then
transferred by the Read Diagnostic Status 1
command.
•
Control transfer of data from control storage
to the channel.
•
Transfer subsystem status to the channel.
Reads diagnostic data out to CU on diagnostic
sense operation.
• Control transfer of data (512 bytes) from
control storage to the channel.
•
• Send Channel End and Device End status to
the channel.
3830-2
READ DIAGNOSTICS TO SYSTEM
©Copyright IBM Corporation 1972.1973,1974.1975,1976
CMD 165
('
(~
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 1 of 4)
•
•
•
•
•
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 1 of 4)
Poll for interrupt conditions.
Check for channel selection.
Check for inline operations.
Handle request in conditions.
Logically connect this control unit
(and addressed controller and
device) to the channel so that
commands, status, and data
may be transferred.
CMD 170
4,5-QB334
- 034
DROP TAG GATE
5-08424
4-08324
1,3-08025
5-08428
4-08330
1,3-08027
INITIALIZE
POLLING. RAISE
TAG GATE.
5-0B253
4-QB319
SET BSCA TO HIGHEST
AVAILABLE
CONTROLL.ER WITH
AVAILABLE DEVICE.
SET BSDA TO LOWEST
AVAILABLE DEVICE ON
THIS CONTROLLER.
SET TAG BUS TO
STRING SWITCH
CONTROL 07
2-QB026
SET BSCA TO HIGHEST
AVAILABLE
CONTROLL.ER WI TH
AVAILABLE DEVICE.
SET BSDA TO LOWEST
AVAILABLE DEVICE ON
THIS CONTROLLER.
STORE BSCA AND BSDA
IN INTERRUPT
BUFFER. USE TO
BUFFER REOUE:;'"
INISI.
PERFORM TAG
SEOUENCE
5-08425
4-08325
3-QB025
4,5-0B337
~~~-~037
UPDATE CHANNEL.
POINTERS
NO
5-08425
4-08324
1,3-08026
UPDATE CHANNEL
POINTERS TO
NEXT CHANNEL
5-QB435
4-0B335
- 035
UPDATE TIMERS
5-QB435
4-QB335
,...._ _....I.l.o.iIo...I~'035
NO
INITIALI ZE
TIMERS
RAISE TAG GATE
TO POLL. NEXT
STRING
5-08426
NOTES
4-08326
1,3-QB026
5-QB337
4-QB337
- 037
1,3-QB034
UPDATE CHANNEL
-
4
RAISE
SUPPRESSIBLE
I NTERRUPT FOR
THIS CHANNEL
SET FLAG TO
ALLOW
CONTROLLER
DISABLE
NO
-
067
RESET LONG
CONNECTI ON AND
ALLOW DISABLE
IF FLAG IS SET
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE
ANO CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES:
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348786, 2348787
2
3340 ONLY - PIN 2348757, 2348996
: : ~~~g~~~:g/~~X~R~A~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~68~~18997
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816
2. QBOXX REFERENCES BECOME QB3XX IF TWO
CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL IS INSTALLED.
3.
SET BSCA. RAISE
SUPPRESSIBLE
REQUEST IN. STORE
INTERRUPT IN BUFFER
AND BUFFER REQUEST
IN.
4,5-QB319
EXIT TO INLINE
ROUTINE
RAISE TAG GATE
TO POLL. NEXT
STRING
BU"FER STATIC
I SUPPRESS IBLEl
INTE'IPUPTS FOR
TH I S CHANNEL
INITIALIZE
TIMERS
.-______
5-08424
4-08324
1,3-08026
STORE BSDA AND
BSCA IN
INTERRUPT BYTES
ALLOW DISABLE
UNFREEZE
CHANNEL SWITCH
5-0B435
4-QB335
,...._ _....I.l.o.iIo...I,;;j-1IIII 035
UPDATE STR ING
TO BE POLLED.
(START WITH
HIGHEST!
~g~U~LG~X~ ~RI=A~~~~RS='THE
DEVICE TYPE SELECTED.
ABBREVIATIONS
BSCA
BSDA
OCC
EDI
ODE
PCH
RAISE
UNSUPPRESSIBLE
I NTERRUPT FOR
TH I S CHANNEL
5-08427
4-Q1132B
1,3-08026
ALLOW CHANNEL
UNLOCK
NEXT CHANNEL.
o I SABLE.
•
•
•
•
••
BIT SIGNIFICANT CONTROLLER ADDRESS
BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE ADDRESS
DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING
EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT
OUTSTANDING
PACK CHANGE DEVICE ENO
....______________-.,
A9
383C)..2
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 1 of 4)
CMD 170
C)Copyright IBM Corporation 1912. 1913. 1914. 1975. 1976
JOO
f)
~'
0
0
",----,,'
0. 0 J
(,
"
\,
~':",
,'-
,~
I
\'--}:
o
o o o
,0,
\~
o
o
00
(,):'
"
o o o o o o 00 ,j
4~
------- -----
r-
(-
(-
('
(--
(-~
(-
(-
(
(--
c-
(-
(
(~
(
(-
(-
(
(~;-
(-
(~-'
(-
(-
c-
(
(-
(--
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 2 of 4)
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 2 of 4)
(--'
(-'
('
CM 0 173
CMD 170
08
SET BUSY 13340AND ONLINEI IN
STATUS
5-QB450
1,2,3-QB100
4,5-QBtOO
1,2-QB050
3,4-QB050
NO
1,3-QB053
-
3
RAISE OP IN ANO
ADDRESS IN
PROPAGATE
SELECT OUT ISP
OP lEI
I -> ST2 IF
SUPPRESSIBLE OR
UNSUPPRESSIBLE
INTERRUPT
5,QB340
4,QB343
- 040
DECODE DEVICE
ADDRESS
SET OFF-LINE
FILE STATUS
2,3,4,
BUFFER
STORE
DEVICE
AND
STATUS.
CURRENT
ADDRESS
BSDA
5-QB450
4-QB350
1,2,3-QB050
INOTE 21
- 100
SET STRING
SWITCH
AS.SIGNMENT
RAISE OPERATE
IN AND ADDRESS
IN
4,5-QB320
- 020
SAVE OEVICE
LIMITS. CHECK
FOR RPS FEATURE
ON 3340
SELECT MODULE
SET CUEND FLAG
CND 170
ENABLE LONG
CONNECTION
'----... NO
NO
NOTES
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING
DIGITS ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE
MICROCODE AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE
REFERENCES.
~ : ~~~g g~~ : ~l~ ~~:A9g~~'2~~:=~:6. 2348787
~ : ~~~gl~~:g!~~~~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~68~~t8997
~
NOTES
RESET THE
AVAILABLETO-OTHER-CHANNEL
INDICATION. SET
EXPECTED DEVICE
INTERRUPT FOR THIS
CHANNEL IEDII.
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816
1,3-0B054
PRESENT CU BUSY
STATUS
r-_ _"--.Iio.o.II~4
SET FILE STATUS
TO ZERO AND 1->
ST3C
2. ~~~ ~c¥0XENp~~~C~U~~E~HijA~I~~~~~6 ON
THE DEVICE TYPE SELECTED.
3. QBIOO FOR 3330 WITH STRING SWITCH
4. ~:~+~H ~~gf¥lo~~~3:SI~N!~~LE~aNNEL
ABBREVIATIONS
BSDA= BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE ADDRESS
CE = CHANNEL END
DE
DEVICE ENO
EDI = EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT
RPS = ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING
NO
5-08260
4-08059
1.3-08060
2-08260
START 1/0
ENABLE LONG
SELECTION.
CMD 175
CMD 175
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE ANO
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES.
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2348805, 2348786, 234S7aJ
2 - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2348757, 2348996
~ : ~~~gl~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~68~~t899J
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816
2. QB060 FOR 3330 WITH STRING SWITCH
3. QB065 FOR 3330 WITH STRING SWITCH
4. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
MAY DEPEND ON THE
TYPE SELECTED.
ABBREVIATIONS
MCI= MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL
INFORMATION
PLO= PHASE-LOCKED
OSCILLATOR
3830-2
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 2 of 4)
@COPVri9htlBMCorporation 1972. 1973. 1974, 1976, 1978
1,3,4,5-QC020
____~____~~-QB2.0
CMD 173
(
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 3 of 4)
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 3 of 4)
CMD 173
RESET MCI BYTES
2 AND 3
RESET FILE
STATUS BITS 0,
I.
CMD 175
FAST PLO LOCK
IN
2
CM0176
CMD 176
8,----...1
G
,..------'
I-QB060INOTE
,.----...-....;('--lII0I........,
UNIT CHK STATUS.
MICROPROGRAM
DETECTED ERRORS.
EXIT TO UNTIMED END
PROCEDURE
~
______~~~~.,
GET STRING
SWITCH STATUS
4-08061
1·08052
3·08060
MODIFY RESERVE OR
RELEASE TO PERFORM
SENSE OPERATION.
1->ST2 IF DEVICE
END OR PACK CHANGE
OUTSTANDING
,-L~~~~'5-QBIOO
SET LONG
CONNECTION IN
STRING SWITCH
INCLUDE BUSY IN
STATUS
MODULE SELECT
r-______.. ..
~
~5-QBIOO
GET 3-0F-b CODE
AND STORE
DROP ADDRESS IN
WA IT FOR
RESPONSE FROM
MODULE
r-______~~~~5-QSObO
r-______~-w-w~~5-QBOeO
REQUEST MODULE
STATUS
EXIT TO UNTIMED
E~g ~~~~~~¥RE
STATUS
4·08060
3·08660
RESET BRb, BRT
'1 GNORE ALL FILE
STATUS BITS
EXCEPT ONLI NE
GET 3 OF b
CODE. CHECK
~Ht~ED~m~~
LlMI TS
COMPARE RETRY
CCW
4·08060
3·08660
~
________~~~4~,5-QBOeO
CMD 190
FETCH FILE MASK
TO SA
ERROR LOGGING
DECISIONS. EXIT TO
UNIT CHECK
SUBROUTINE (QS040).
SET MCI :) BYTE
UPDATE MCI
BYTES 2 AND 3
CND 210
CZJ
C/IO leJ
CMD DECODE
3830-2
CMD 175
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 3 of 4)
© Copyright I BM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1915. 1976
/-"
,,,-Y
,~~"
;4"'\
'"",.J1
\;;.~_~V
tf"""
.,)'
/')
,~J;
(")
.....P
t<'1,,\
'",... J;
i
:~."
':.\
"" JiI
('
( ,,""" F("
L '.,
(
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 4 of 4)
('
(~
(
"-,
,--
c
POLLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 4 of 4)
(
"'"
.,.y
(
"
CMD 176
CMD 175
IGNORE ALL FILE
STATUS BITS
EXCEPT OIoLINE
RESET FILE
STATUS BITS 0
AND I
SET ST2 IF NOT
SENSE COIoIMAND
_ - - -......,,;;r.;;j. . .,IIO
GET STRING
SWITCH STATUS
,...._ _...........,II/iIi,IIO
YES
,...._ _........,iiI,;,l. . .IIO
SET UN I T CHECK
ANO DEY ICE END
IN STATUS. GO
PRESENT STATUS
SET DEY ICE END
STATUS
. . -_ _...I... . .iIoOI!IIMi,n
SET LONG
CONNECT I ON IN
STR I NG SWITCH
CMD 175
CMD 175
3830-2
POOLING IDLE LOOP AND INITIAL SELECTION (Part 4 of 4)
CMD 176
"
STATUS INFORMATION (p.,t 1 of 2)
STATUS INFORMATION (Part 1 of 2)
•
II
The status byte (eight bits) notifies channel
of the condition of the CU and the selected
drive.
STATUS MODIFIER
• Set when a Search High, Search Equal, or Search
High or Equal command is completed and the
condition satisfied.
• Status is presented twice (initial and ending) for all
SCU commands except Seek, Set Sector! if RPS
installed), and the immediate commands.
• Status is presented three times by Seek Cylinder
commands (which cause access motion).
1. Initial.
2. Channel End after data transfer from the CPU.
3. Device End after the device has stopped seeking
(gated attention).
• Status is presented once (initial) containing Channel
End and Device End on immediate commands (NoOp) except when chained after a Write command.
In this case a second status byte (ending) is also
transmitted.
No-Op is processed as an immediate command
only if the control unit is not writing or erasing.
Channel End and Device End are indicated in the
initial status byte (one status byte only). If the
unit is writing or erasing, 0 is transmitted in the
initial status byte. Channel and Device End are
indicated in the ending status byte when SCU
finishes writing or erasing.
CMD 180
•
Indicates CU Busy when on in conjunction with
the Busy bit. When on with Channel End,
Device End and Unit Check, indicates retry of
last channel command. The CU and drive are
ready for immediate retry.
•
Indicates retry of last channel command when on in
conjunction with Unit Check bit. When on with
Channel End. indicates retry of last channel command. The CU and drive are not ready for the
retry procedure.
•
II
• Set when the channel portion of the operation is
completed.
Control Unit End
The CU has finished an
operation
Busy
Access mechanism in the
addressed drive is moving.
Also used in conjunction with
status modifier to indicate
CU busy.
CONTROL UNIT END
• Set when a CU Busy was generated previously and
the busy condition is terminated.
II
BUSY
• Set when a new command chain is initiated while
the CUis causing a track to be erased following
a Format Writ(l command or an Erase command.
•
Indicates CU busy if on in conjunction with the
status modifier (bit 1).
6
Unit Check
Indicates that an unusual or
error condition has been
detected. With status modifier.
it means command retf'{ is
requested.
7
Unit Exception
End of file
DEVICE END
• Set when a device is ready after a Seek is completed.
• Set when the record is ready to be operated on
after a Set Sector command (if RPS installed).
• Set when an attached device goes from a not
ready to a ready condition.
Indicates that an access mechanism is free to be used
• Set in response to any command except Test I/O
if there is outstanding status for the device.
Indicates that only the selected device is busy if
the status modifier is off.
II
The CU has received all the
data needed to do the operation
called for and the channel is
free
• Set when a new command chain is initiated while
the selected access mechanism is still in motion
because of a previous seek command.
•
CHANNEL END
• Set simultaneously with Channel End at the end
of all other commands.
•
Indicates that an access mechanism is free to be
used.
iii
UNIT CHECK
• Set whenever an unusual or error condition on the
selected drive is detected in the CU.
•
Indicates command retry requested if on in
conjunction with status modifier.
•
Indicates a system interrupt condition if status
modifier is not on and Channel End (bit 4) and/or
Device End (bit 5) is included in status. The sense
bytes provide detailed information about the
condition.
II
UNIT EXCEPTION
• Set when the data length in the count field is zero.
•
3830-2
437417 l447460 1447461
115 Apr 74 [19 Dec 75 12 Mar 76
Indicates that an End of File was detected during
a Read IPL, Read RO, Read CKD, Read KD, Read
0, Write KD, Write 0, or Search KD command.
It is not set for Read count, Write CKD, Search
Key or Search 10 commands. The key field, if any.
is transferred.
STATUS INFORMATION (Pan 1 of 2)
CMD 180
eCapyright IBM Corpor.tion 1974, 1976, 1976
8-00000
000
o a
o o
00
A
I.
.U
~
o
o
o
o o o
.
O
0·,··
.
o c
(-::
(
(
..
(::
(.
"
""
(.
STATUS INFORMATION (Part 2 of 21
STATUS INFORMATION (Part 2 of 2)
6. Inittal status indicates command retry.
INITIAL STATUS BYTE
The initial status byte is zero'for all non immediate cn .... mands
and Test I/O unless one or more of the following conditions
exist. If more than one condition exists, the first condition
listed determines the initial status byte:
7. Invalid parity is sensed in the command byte. Unit Check
occurs.
8. The command is rejected. Unit Check occurs. (Not all
command rejects occur in initial status however.)
b. An operation is still in progress after a Halt I/O occurs.
c. The CU is disconnected during command chaining with
writing in progress or with a CU error recovery pro·
cedure in progress.
d. The CU is executing a microprogram diagnostic test.
e. A status condition is pending in the CU for other
than the addressed device.
Note that status cannot be cleared from the CU by a Test I/O
if the CU is busy to the interface.
f. A system reset sequence is in progress.
g. The CU is maintaining a contingent connection to
some device other than the addressed device.
Status is pending in the CU if:
1. An interface disconnect was signaled after a command was
given but before Channel End was accepted by the channel
for the command. The ending status for the operation is
pending when the operation is conplete.
2. A status condition, pending in the CU, is associated
specifically with the addressed device or is not associated
with any specific device. In this case, the pending status
is presented as initial status, and the busy bit is included in
the status byte if the command byte is other than Test I/O.
The busy bit indicates that the device is busy because of
the outstanding status. The pending status is cleared unless
it is stacked by the channel. After the status is cleared,
the device must be readdressed to determine if the device
is available.
2. Status containing Busy, Channel End, or Unit Check was
stacked by the channel, or blank status in response to a
Test I/O was stacked. The stacked status is pending in the
CU for the device with which the stacking occurred.
3. Control Unit Busy was presented to the interface. Control
Unit End is pending for the interface and is included with
other status pending in the CU, if any.
3. The device is busy to the interface, in which case the busy
bit appears alone in the initial status byte. The device is
busy to the interface if Channel End occurred without
Device End for the device, and Device End has not yet been
generated; or if the device is attached to a controller with
the-string switch feature and is reserved to the other side
of the switch. Discussion in this paragraph does not apply
to cases where busy (pending sta~us) occurs with other status
bits. When busy occurs with bits other than status modifier,
the device is defined to be busy because of the included
status, which is outstanding.
4. A Unit Check was detected associated with an operation
where Device End has already been cleared. Unit Check
and Control Unit End are pending in the CU.
Address Associated with Pending Status
All status conditions in the device are associated with a specific
device address, except for Control Unit End. However, when
in the contingent connection state, Control Unit End is
associated with a specific address, and that address is the last
address presented on the interface by the CU. When no con·
tingent state exists, the Control Unit End is associated with
the smallest numerical device address on the highest possible
controller address which is not command chaining on any
interface.
4. Status pending in the device. The pending status is present·
ed as initial status, and the busy bit is included if the
command is other than Test I/O. The pending status is
cleared unless it is stacked by the channel.
5. A Unit Check condition exists at the device or CU. Unit
Check occurs in initial status.' Valid commands in the
sense group (xxxx0100) are an exception and receive zero
status so that the commands may be executed. This permits
transferring of the sense indicators.
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976
A pending status condition may exist in either the device or
the CU.
A status condition pending in the CU, other than Control Unit
End, causes the CU to appear busy for all devices except the
device for which the status condition e.xists. The condition
causes the Request In signal to rise if the CU is not busy to
the interface, Select Out is down, and Suppress Out is down.
A pending Control Unit End may cause the CU to appear busy
to all except one device address on the interface for which it
is pending. Status pending in the CU is cleared when it is
presented and accepted.
a. Writing is still in progress after chaining is terminated.
I~Historv I~~~5
PENDING STATUS CONDITIONS
Status Pending in the Control Unit
1. The initial status indicates Control Unit Busy (Bit 3) if
selection occurs and if:
3830-2
("
447461
12 Mar 76
CMD 181
Status Pending in the Device
A status condition pending in the device causes Request In to
rise on the interface if the device and CU are available (not
busy), Select Out is down, and no contingent connection exists
in the CU. Status pending in the device is cleared when status
is presented and accepted. Status pending in the device cannot
be cleared by a Test liD if the device or CU appears busy to the
interface. The only status condition which can be pending in
the device is Device End. When Unit Check occurs with Device
End (and not Channel End) it is not generated until the Device
End is presented on the interface, and the Device End and Unit
Check conditions then become pending in the CU if stacked.
Status is pending if:
1. Channel End occurs alone for an operation. Device End is
pending.
2. Busy status (busy bit alone) is presented. Device End is
pending on the interface.
3. The device has gone from the not ready state to the rcady
state. Device End is pending.
Priority of Pending Status Conditions
The priority of pending status conditions when presented via
polling is:
1. Status pending in the CU, other than Control Unit End.
2. Unsuppressible status conditions.
3. Suppressible Device End status.
4. Control Unit End status.
Note: During the contingent connection state, Control Unit
End status assumes highest priority in the preceding table.
The microcode supporting 3350 Control Unit End is
associated with the smallest numerical device address
on the last controller used by a control unit which is
not command chaining on any interface. In the non·
contingent case status can be cleared by addressing any
device attached to the control unit.
STATUS INFORMATION (Part 2 of 21
CMD 181
COMMAND DeCODe
COMMAND DECODE
•
•
•
CMD 183
Decode the command byte from the channel.
Check if valid command and command sequence.
.Break out to individual command flowcharts.
B3
1,2,3-QEOI
-
0
CMD 175
CMD 1~
2:~:~~~
2,5-QPIIO
r-____3,4-QP535.
w.&;.!oIIji310
I,Z,3,4,5-QPI30
r-__....;u..""'...~5-QPII0
READ CAR, HAR
PL.O L.OCK-IN
OPERATION UP
01
WRITE,SEARCH
KEY-DATA
OPERATION
2,3,4,5-QP235
2,5-QP230
r-____. .
~~~-QPIIO
STORE CHANNEL.
COMMAND AT L.DC
, 1600'
SENSE STATUS 2
TO SET DOD
TRACK BIT
1,2,3,4,5-QP130
r-_ _ _u..""'...~5-QPI 10
SEL.ECT HEAD
2,5-QP235
-
00
NO
SET FL.AG IN Mel
BYTE
FETCH DEVICE
LIMITS
-
1,2,3,4,5-QPI30
2,5-QPZ50
2,5-QP260
2,5-QP235
0
SET ST2 IF
SEARCH. CHECK
IF WRITE
r-___~~~~~5-QPII0
r--_.....~a.;;.toI~5
READ GATE ON
READ I OF I
CODE (PHYSICAL.
ADDRESS. AND
CHECK
CONVERT PHYSICAL.
ACCESS POSITION TO
L.OGICAL. POSITION
AND STORE
E4
I,2,5-QE070
I,2,3,4,5-QE060
0
l:~!~Gg.;;;...,I.-_ _ _ _
OK
1,3,4-QP230
I,3,4-QPOTO
1,3,4-QP110
I-QP230
1,2,3,4,5-QP135
1,2,3-QD050
~9
2,
5-QD060
I,2-QF050
3,4,5-QF05
1,2,-QE050
- 050
STORE CURRENT
PHYSICAL. ACCESS
POSITION
I,2!3-QDg30
RESET INITIAL.
STATUS. WAIT
FOR COMMAND OUT
TO OROP.
SEPARATE READ,
~~l..g~A~~,
I,3,4-QP200
r-____1,3,4-QPIIO
CL.OCK
OPERATIONS
~~~235
15 USEC DEL.AY.
COMPLETE READ
PREPARATION
READ STATUS IN
DECODE HA/RO
COMMAND
RESEL.ECT
CND 120
I,2,5-QE010
- 090
TEST 110
COMMAND
FETCH PERMANENT
POINTER
COMMAND
BREAKOUT
I
NOTES
_ _ _..w..a;;*'....'0
I,2,3-QEOIO
,..._ _.................0
COMMAND
BREAKOUT
READ I OF I
CODE (PHYSICAL
ADDRESS. AND
CHECK
r-_____
EXIT TO SENSE
~of..~::gt-
eM 0 55. 80. 110. 120. 125. 126
RAISE STATUS IN
CND 145
PRESENT STATUS
DISCONNECT FROM
CHANNEL.
1
_ ~~~gl~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERM~~N_2~1~1~~6~~~~991
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161116
2. FOR A GIVEN BL.OCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
ACTUAL. PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE
DEVICE TYPE SEL.ECTED.
ABBREVIATIONS
CAR
CYL.INDER AODRESS REGISTER
CEB
COMMAND EXECUTION BYTE
CKD • COUNT-KEY-DATA
HA = HOME ADDRESS
HAR
HEAD ADDRESS REGISTER
IPL. • INITIAL. PROGRAM L.OAD
PL.O
PHASE-L.OCKED OSCIL.L.ATOR
RO
RECORD ZERO
CMD 10
CND 15
!
I-QN200
2,5-QS040
2,5-QS060
2,5-QS090
- 100
I. THIS FL.OWCHART 15 USED WITH MULTIPL.E
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOL.L.OWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES.
I - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341105, 2348116, 2341111
Z - 3340 ONLY - PIN 2341151, 2341996
~~~~;5-QE090
,~:::=g~,
447461
3830-2
~2
Mar 76
COMMAND DeCODe
CMD 183
©Copyright IBM Corporation 1972.1973.1974.1975.1976
a o o o
000
o
(~
~
o
00
o
000
"r~
0
r~
V
A
~\
"y J
~)
\,
"'-
.~
'v
~
O()OO
1
,'.
lo',
. '
I",
..;'\
,.
'"
0 0, . .
: , . " .~
,~,
.'
O···~···
:,
o c
[~')
--...
'
!C'
L~:
("~
(,"
C
(-
(-
(-
(---
(-
('
(-
(:
(~...
(:
ENDING SEQUENCE
(-
f";
.,.,f'
ENDING SEQUENCE
(~
,;Y
CMD 190
OBJECTIVES
•
•
•
•
•
•
Present ending status to the channel.
Check if chaining.
If oriented and chaining, perform timed
initial selection routine.
Complete read/write housekeeping functions.
Update interrupt and available bytes.
Make exit decisions.
t,2.3,QS180
-
180
TEST FOR
CHANNEL END IN
LAST STATUS
TRANSFERRED
1,2,3,4,5-QQ010
1,2,3,4'g:ggg~g
PAD ZEROS TO
INDEX
ZERO OUT
OPERATE BYTE
CONSTRUCT SENSE
BYTES AND STORE
cwo f~A~'~~o 55'f~A~,,~IO,120
A
UPDATE
AVAILABLE AND
ASSIGNMENT
BYTES
1,2,3,4,5-QQXXX
ANALYZE SENSE
BYTES
RESET R/W
RESET OP IN
01 SABLE CU
BUSY6E~~~~LECT
1,3,4-QS120
125
CMD 110
FETCH DEYICE
BINARY ADDRESS
r-____~~~~~5-QC020
CWO 210
cwo 215
r-____
FETCH OPERATION
BYTE AND SET TO
ZEROS
ClIO 110
RAISE OP IN AND
ADOR IN
~~~~~15-QS090
CHAINING
ALLOWED I STO •• I
NOTES
r-____~~~~~5-QS090
RESET RII
INDICATOR
SET STATUS
STACKED IST2.11
AND UNTIllED
ENDING ISThll
r-____~~~~.,-QSI20
NO
CHAIN BRDKEN
ISTO.OI
RESET STO,
4,5,6,7
TURN ON R/W
INDICATOR
CMD 1113
r-____~~~~~5-QS090
RESET ST2 AND 3
r-____~~~~~5-QS090
RESET STATUS IN
3830-2
r-____~~~~,-QSI20
I. THIS FLOWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTIFY THE MICROCODE AND
CORRESPONOING CAS PAGE REFERENCES.
UPDATE DCC ONLY
UPDATE DCC AND
AVAILABLE AND
ASSIGNMENT AND
BYTES
I
2
:
5
- 3330 ONLY - PIN 234111105, 234111116, 234111111
- 3340 ONLY - PIN 23411151, 23411996
: ~~~g:~~:g/~~!~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1~1I~~&II~~111991
- 3340/3344 - PIN 416111116
2. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
ACTUAL PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE
DEVICE TYPE SELECTED.
AB8REV lATIONS
CE
DCC
EDI
ODE
PCH
R/W
CHANNEL END
DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING
EXPECTED DEVICE INTERRUPT
OUTSTANDING DEVICE END
PACK CHANGE
READ/WRITE
STORE OPERATION
BYTE
ENDING SEQUENCE
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975. 1976
CMD 190
------~--~--
0, 0, 0'
"
" ' 0
0,", 0'-1' ,0'"
r<~
0,',
"V'~
'0,'",
00
OOOOOO()O(~,
(~'
("
~(
f
(
(
(
(
(
('
(
(
(
(
(
("
(
(:"
(
(
(
f
(
(
DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING
(
(
(
(
(
(
DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING
(
(
("
CMD 200
• Allows the CU to disconnect from the channel on commands that require long delays because
of mechanical motion or searches. The channel is free during the delay period.
•
Disconnected command chaining enables multiple requesting, which allows up to 16 (32 if
32-drive expansion feature is installed I separate command chains to be active in the facility.
Disconnected command chaining allows the CU to disconnect from the channel after an opera·
tion, such as Seek or Set Sector, has started even though chaining is indicated.
Since burst mode is not forced during the execution of Seek or Set Sector commands, the CU
can disconnect between Channel End and Device End. The disconnect function reduces the
CPU interrupts needed to overlap channel data transfers with mechanical motion of the devices.
The CU retains the information necessary to control a disconnected CCW chain for each drive in
the facility. In effect, the CU is capable of simultaneously executing up to 32 CCW chains (one
per drive). Note: This is also referred to as multiple requesting. During a Seek operation, the
,CU attempts to reconnect after mechanical motion is completed. During a Set Sector operation,
the CU attempts to reconnect when the desired rotational position is detected. In either case,
the channel is made available during access motion and rotational delay periods. Disconnect is
also allowed on command retry procedures (3330 and 3350) and for format write padding of Os.
Control
Module
Circuits
STORAGE CONTROL UNIT
1
DRIVES
I~OOUlE I
Perform seek from Channel-AControl servo motion_
Interrupt CU when seek
is complete.
Disconnected command
chaining byte (DCC).
Module 0
DCC Bvte
Two examples of disconnected command chaining:
Disconnect command chaining can involve two or more channels, or one channel may have
several CCW chains.
CHANNEL A
1. Issues Seek command to module O.
2. Disconnects until Device End (seek complete I is received.
CCW Chain Example- Module 0
1. Seek-Locate cylinder
Disconnected
2. Set Sector-Locate area on track.
Disconnected
Search I0- Locate a record.
TIC-8
Write Data-Write data field
CHANNEL B
1. Issues Seek command to module 7.
2. Disconnects until Device End (seek completel fn
module 7 is received.
3. Issues Set Sector command to module 3.
4. Disconnects from this chain until Device End from
module 3 (sector is ready) is received,
CCW Chain Example-Module 7
1. Seek - Locate cyli nder
Disconnected
2. Read Home Address-Read Home Address field.
CCW Chain Example-Module 3
Seek-Locate cylinder
Disconnected
3. Set Sector- Locate record.
Disconnected
Search ID-Locate record.
TIC -8
4. Read Key Data-Read key and data fields.
3830·2
C> Copyright IBM Corporotian 11172. 1973, 1974, 1975
DCC Bvtes
(one for each
modulel
CONTROL
STORAGE
CHANNEL
A
To 2nd
SCU (with
Readl
Microprogram
Write
Perform set sector from
Channel-B. Check for
sector requested. Interrupt
CU when sector is ready.
Data
CONTROL
CIRCUITS
CTL-I
.---y-+"
(Microprogram)
To 2nd
Module
Control
CHANNEL
B
Two
Channel
Switch
Feature
Multiple requests (on two drives).
Controls each operation as it is
received from the channel.
Maintains status of disconnected
command chains in DCC byte in control
storage. 1
Brings up unsuppressible status for those
modules with a bit in the DCC byte as
their Device End is received.
Perform seek from Channel-B.
Control servo motion.
Interrupt CU when seek
is complete.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING
CMD 200
(
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 33501 (Part 1 of 31
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 1 of 3)
Command retry permits error recovery withoJt requiring intervention from the using system. The CU resorts to command
retry for the following conditions:
m SeEK MALFUNCTIONS
The SCU will attempt to recover from seek errors when home
address is clocked or because of a Seek Incomplete condition.
If, during a Seek operation, a Seek Incomplete condition occurs
or a Seek Error is detected while reading home address or
processing a count field, the CU sets the command execution
byte (CEB) to recalibrate and seek. The CU then retries the
Seek. Unit Check and Status Modifier indications are present
in the sense information. The retry is attempted up to ten
times and a permanent seek error is posted to the system,
where error recovery procedure (ERP) can be invoked.
m DATA OR COMMAND OVERRUN
B1I
If data or commands are not processed in a normal sequence at
the proper time, they can be lost.
When the CU detects a defective or alternate track condition
before data transfer starts, command retry will be invoked.
The CU determines the location of the defective/alternate
track and seeks to the appropriate track. After the Seek is
completed, Device End is presented and the command is
reissued. The CU processes the command normally,
verifies the correct access, and continues with the user's
command chain.
Note: If 3350 command retry pages differ from 3330, they
are shown in parentheses.
m DATA
DEFECTIVE OR ALTERNATE TRACK
CMD 210
ERROR
Correctable Data Error Not in Data Fields (3330)*
If a data error is detected at the completion of a Read or Search
in the count or key fields, and it is correctable, CU signals retry
status to the channel. Then the CU reorients on the failing
track and signals Device End to the channel to begin retry. The
failing field, which was buffered in control storage, is corrected
by the CU.
Processing a reissued Read command in the count or key fields
causes the corrected data from control storage to be transferred
to the channel; the CCW then continues. For a search in the
count or key fields, the CU executes a compare against the corrected data in control storage and continues with the CCW.
When clocking in a count field, the corrected data is used only
by the CU.
*For 3350, data errors in all fields except data fields are
treated as uncorrectable.
CHANNEL QU I ET
ROUTINE
Uncorrectable Data Errors
If a data error is detected at the completion of a Read, Clock.
or Search operation and it is uncorrectable. the CU signals
Retry Status to channel with Unit Check and Status modifier.
Then the CU reorients on the failing track location. and signals
Device End; the channel reissues the command. The retry is
attempted up to 28 times and Unit Check is posted to the
system where ERP can be invoked.
Command retry is not used for uncorrectable data errors
occurring during the clocking of a key field.
When an error is determined as uncorrectable, the CU attempts
to recover by offsetting the read heads from normal track
position on 3330 only. There is no offsetting for 3350.
SENSE CODE OF
OPERATIDN
I NCOIIPLETE
After the head shift is made. the CU orients on the record and
tries to read it. If. after any retry. the error becomes correctable. the CU proceeds as if a correctable error were detected.
Correctable Data Errors in Data Fields
Correctable data errors in the data field are corrected by the
system ERP using correction information sent to the channel
in the sense data. (See SENSE 1.)
F"ETCH AND STORE
SECTOR/CYLINDER
ABBREVIAT IONS
Cfa :: CO.... AND EXECUT ION 8YTE
Me I :: '" SCEllANEOUS CONTROL INF'ORMATION
GO TO CONTROL
ROUTINE TO SEEK
TO AL TERNA TE DR
OEF"ECTI YE P\..US
I TRACK
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 33501 (Part 1 of 31
© Copyright IBM Carpoqti... 1872, 1873, 1874, 18715
0·· ."
~
.,
o o
00
o
(J':
:
\
j
o o o o
f)·
.·
~
o
r.r).
,'"
oo o
~'.).
~"
o
CMD 210
o
"~
C
.01
.
.. _ - - - -
(,' F ('
(,\ ("
(":
(~
("'~
("
(~
(,"
-~------
(
("
("
(""
<-
L
"
,",,,-
('"
('-' (
('
r"'
("
(
(
"
",,',"'
(""
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 2 of 3)
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 2 of 3)
DATA CHECK
(
YES
~______~~~IQN5001
CI
CMD 215
~____~.w~~O~NLYI
OFFSET ACTIVE
IN WR ITE
AM/SYNC CHECK
NO
(
NOTE: IF 3350 COMMAND RETRY PAGES DIFFER
~:~~N~~~g~S:HEY WILL BE SHOWN IN
SET REQUIRED
LOGGING
SAVE SECTOR AND
RETRY COMMAND
CODE
r-____~~~~~.5001
FETCH AND
UPDATE RETRY
COUNT
SET SENSE
INFORMATION
STORE HIGH AND
LOW
DISPLACEMENT
SET SECTOR
r-____~~~~q5001
SET MCI 2
DO ECC ANALYSIS
r-____~~~~~,5001
SET APPROPRIATE
MESSAGE AND
SENSE CODES.
SET SENSE
r-____~~~~wq.5001
SET UNIT CHECK
IN MCI 3
DO SET SECTOR
DETERMINE COUNT
FOR HEAD SHIFT
DECISIONS
3330
SET COMMAND FOR
HEAD SHIFT
MLM0002 447460
:~J?-=~~~:~
MDC
__
ABBREVIATIONS
AM
ECC
MCI
PCI
__
..JFL_6/3/75
o
UN IT CHECK AND
STATUS MODIFIER
=
ADDRESS MARKER
= ERROR
CORRECTION
CODE
MISCELLANEOUS CONTROL INFORMATION
PROGRAM CONTROL INTERRUPT
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 2 of 3)
CMD 215
(~
c
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 3 of 3)
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 3 01'3)
CMD 220
COMMAND RETRY REORIENTATION-CKD
Error
Revolution
SECTOR
SECTOR
SECTOR
N-2
N-1
N-3
SECTOR
N
AM COUNT
•
KEY
DATA
Second Physical Address Byte
While reading or clocking the count field of
each record, the controller freezes the drive
target register and resets the reorient counter.
Assume sector value = N.
Uncorrectable Error 'Detected By ECC IN Key Field
1. Send retry status (Status Modifier. Channel End, and Unit
Check) to channel.
2. Drop Operational In to disconnect from the channel.
3. Execute a Read Sector operation and store sector value N
in working storage location of '00'. Also store sector value
N·3 in location '1900:
4. Execute a Set Sector operation with sector value N·3.
5. Wait for Record Ready from drive.
Retry
Revolution
f
i
AM COUNT
Record Ready Received From Drive
Record Ready Received From Drive
1. Raise unsuppresslble Request In.
1. Read controller; reorient counter range.
2. Do Read preparation functions.
3. Compare reorient counter range against
2. Send Device End status to channel.
Channel reissues failing command.
•
KEY
DATA
"Normal" reading resumes; specific type of
reading depends on channel command issued.
Read or clock the count field and read key.
high side of sector value N.
4. Execute a Read G3, Timed AM Search,
operation prior to AM.
5. Wait fo; ~T4 lAM found by controller).
3. Execute a Set Sector Operation to sector
value N·l.
4. Wait for Record Ready from drive.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830.2
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
COMMAND RETRY (3330 AND 3350) (Part 3 of 3)
© Copyright IBM Cor_ion 1972, 1973, 1974, 1976
:1000000
() 0
o
1"
~
o o o
00
000 0000
CMD 220
o
0 l;'
J 0 C
',.
,
~~'-
("
(
(:/ (
(
(".
(
(-.
('
(
(
(-
....,.
(-
('
c
(
DEFECT SKIPPING EXAMPLES (3340 ONL VI
DEFECT SKIPPING EXAMPLES (3340 ONLY)
CMD 230
Note: 3350 is similiar, however, there are 3 sets of SO bytes. Three defects per logical track may
be skipped. In this case, a field could be moved more than once or moved and split.
EXTENDED GAP
Index
point
1 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - Displacement from index
-----------------------------------------------------+1
~
-
G1
Home
address
RO count
1-=
Displacement from end of RO count field
~
--.....,..---..
-------"
SD=O
Rt count ....
RO data
\
F :: Flag
01234567
"-10 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
SD ::. Skip Defect
L
Rt key
I
Flag bit 2 = 1 => Data field affected; SO = 0
=>
Defect
Extended
I
(G2+G41
R1 data (moved)
Track
gap~
Field moved (or preceding gap extended)
so = 0 in all count fields that
lie beyond the defect
SPLIT FIELD
Index
POUlt.
i ' 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - Displawment from index - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.....-1
~Length of lst segment~
R t key (lst segment I
Gl
Horne
RO count
RO data
G4
~
R1 count ....
Defect
Key (2nd segl
R1 data
i.1ddrt~ss
ot
234 5 6 7 ' "
1010000001..)
Flag bit 1
= 1 => Key affected; SO '" 0 => Split field
IBM C{)NFIDENTIAL
3830-2
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1973.1974.1975
DEFECT SKIPPING EXAMPLES (3340 ONLVI
CMD 230
.). . O' 0.· 0, O.-,
~
'J,.'
01
.~
f)-I
~
aoo()OOOOOOC)OO
(-
.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _
..
(--
(-
(-
(
-.
r-
(-
(
'.-'
-.
(
'"
(-
r'-
..
_ - - _ . _ - - _ ..
RESETS (Part 1 of 3)
RESETS (Part 1 of 3)
•
•
(
Set up machine to start microprogram control.
Store error information for later use on a
sense-type command. Refer to CTRL 650 for
control storage layout.
4,5-QB3011
0011
4,5-QB3011
(NOTE .;.._ _....1.....""";&.;,10111°011
NB REGISTER TO
SA REGISTER
There are four types of resets:
CMD 250
STORE S
REGISTERS AT
'0654'
POWER-ON RESET
Power-On Reset is automatically actuated during any
power-on sequence of the subsystem. After reset, the
instruction address register (iAR) contains address
'0000'. Depending on the Mode switch setting, the
SCU either remains stopped or starts on Initial Microprogram Load operation.
4,5-QB3011
0011
4,5-QB306
-
6
STORE ERROR CHECK
REG I STER AND
FAILING INSTRUCTION
ADORESS (BARI AT
TC REGISTER TO
SB REGI~TER
4,5-QB3011
- 0011
176 TO SA. lERO
TO SB
'0641'
•• 5-QB3011
- 001
PUSH BUTTON (MANUAL) RESET
TG REGI ~TER TO
SC REGISTER
If the Mode switch is in any of three CE modes, pressing the Reset pulh button resets the lubsystem. The
subsystem clock remains stopped until restarted.
4,5-QB3011
- 0011
STORE S
REGISTERS
4,5-QB301
- 001
SELECTIVE RESET
RESET THE
SELECTED DEVICE
(IF ONE IS
SEL.ECTEDI
When the using system actuates the Selective Reset
line, the IAR is forced to hex address '0040'. This
address is the start of a store routine which will save
the check 1 error latches and the backup register
(which contains the address of the last executed
instruction). The selected device, if any, is reset.
Unit Check is presented in response to the next
Start I/O instruction.
lERO TO SO
REGISTER
4,5-QB3011
- 0011
RESET TG
REGISTER TO
ZEROS
QQOIO
QQ020
QQ030
4,5-QB3011
r-_ _~~~~001l
4,5-QB306
- 006
STORE S
REGISTERS AT
'064C'
SET UP AND
STORE REMAINDER
(4-7) OF THE
SENSE BYTES IN
'0644'
SET UP SENSE
CONTROL BLOCK
S~c2~6 f~3~8'
ON..YI
SYSTEM RESET
4,5-QB306
- 006
When the using system actuates the System Reset line,
the IAR is forced to hex address '0000'. This address
is the start of a reset sequence that returns the subsystem to a zeroed condition.
STORE S
REGISTERS AT
'0614'
4,5-QB301
001
FETCH CHECK 1
REGISTER DATA
FROM STORAGE
(SC AND SOl
RESET CHECK 2
CONDITIONS (IF
ANYI
4,5:QB~g:
TRANSFER SC TO
~a: ~~E¥OStO
AND 50 TO ZERO.
RESET OPERATE
BYTE
SP OP 04-GATE READ
ERROR PATTERN TO NB
REGISTER. SP OP
05-RESET STORAGE
ERROR REGISTER
NOTES
S.ored Data Available.o System on Sense 1/0 Command (See SENSE 201
By.e. 8 and 9
By'e 10 (201
By.e 11 (211
Check 1 Register
Check 1 Register
CND 170
I. QBOXX REFERENCES BECOME QB3XX IF
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL
IS INSTALLED,
ABBREV I ATI ONS
BAR
IAR
z BACKUP ADORESS REGISTER
=
INSTRUCTION ADORESS REGISTER
85M Low Error
85M High Err",
23F 0 No. Ready
Zero
3830-2
RESETS (Part 1 of 3)
@Copyrigh.IBMCorpora.ion 1972, 1973, 1974,1975, 1976
CMD 250
(~
C·
- - - - - - - - --------
------
-------------------
--
---------~~------~-
RESETS (Part 2 of 3)
RESETS (Part 2 of 3)
CMD 255
SYSTEM RESET
___
PERFORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RETURN
.w.~_1i!i3
SET TAG ANO BUS
TO SE~ECT
MODULE
SET ST2
___
r-____~~.w~~5-QBOI0
=I
.w..a.;;~I.\i0
_ _ _............."'\0
ENABLE CU BUSY
lTC • 04)
.....______..&.I.........a..a;-QBO
PERFORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RETURN
r-____~~~~~5-QBOI7
RESET SYSTEM
RESET CONTRO~
STORAGE AREA
ICTR~ 650)
SAVE BIT
SIGNIFICANT
DEVICE ADDRESS
THAT HAS PCH
INTERRUPT
r-______~~~~~~-QBOI7
SET TAG BUS TO
'06' ISTRING SW
CONTROL)
UPDATE ADDRESS TO
RESET RESERVED.
SHIFT ADDRESS
SAMP~ER ~EFT I
PDS IT ION
SECOND~V~~tRRUPT.
BYTES FOR CHANNE~.
RESET DCC BYTE •
I0
SA REGISTER
11TH BIT SIGNIFICANT DEVICE
ADORESS OF OEVICES
NOT BUSY TO CHANNE~
PERFORMING RESET
FI~~
, - - _...........---'1 0
r-______~~~~5-QBOI7
UPDATE ADDRESS
TO OTHER
CHANNE~
INTERRUPT BYTES
PERFORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RETURN
.....____~~.w~~5-QB010
INITIA~I ZE
ADDRESS SAMPLER
5T:?: I I F PACK
CHANGE RESTORED
TO OTHER S I DE
OF SWITCH
STORE DEVICE TYPE
IN PERMANENT
STORAGE IEXAMP~E:
'030C' FOR DEVICE
0, STRING 0)
SET TAG AND BUS
TO REQUEST
STATUS
PACK CHANGE
HOUSEKEEPING: ZERO
PHYSICA~ AND
~OGICA~ SEEK
ADDRESS STORAGE
AREAS
NO
FETCH DRIVE
ADDRESS AND
RETURN ADDRESS
FROM 'OFOO'
CMD 256
MOVE STATUS
BACK TO MA FROM
ND REG
SET TAG AND BUS
TO RESET
INTERRUPT
r-______
_ _ _"..::II,;;,IoI1IMifI5
-
RESET SEARCH
AREA OF
STDRAGE
FETCH ORIVE
ADORESS AND
RETURN ADDRESS
FROM 'OFOO'
SET PACK CHANGE TO
OTHER SIDE OF
STRING SWITCH.
CT~-I BUS OUT =
'90'. SET STO
I
.w~-QB008
r-______~~~~~-QSI80
I ,3,4-QBO 17
PERFORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RETURN
SAVE STATUS IN
ND REG
I-QBOIO
..
~
UPDATE PACK
CHANGE BYTE
WITH PACK
CHANGE
INDICATOR
RESET
DIAGNOSTIC
MON I TOR CONTRO~
INDICATOR
PERFORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RETURN
SET UP RETURN ADDRESS
AND EXIT TO: I.SE~ECT
MOOU~E 2.READ FI~E
STATUS 3.RESET
INTERRUPTS 4.RESET
CONTROL~ER 5.DEVICE
CONTROL RESET
r-____~~~~~5-QBOI7
SET AVAI~AB~E
TO OTHER
CHANNE~
INDICATOR
RES~T
008
r-______~~~~~-QSI80
OISAB~E CU BUSY
HARDWARE AND WAIT
FOR ANY BUSY
SEQUENCE IN
PROGRESS TO END
=
CND 256
......- _......a..tiI'"""t.5
SET TAG AND BUS
TO READ DEVICE
TYPE
SET TAG AND BUS
TO TRANSMIT
CONTROL AND
RESET INTERRUPT
CMO 170
NOTES
I. THIS F~OWCHART IS USED WITH MULTIP~E
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE FOL~OWING DIGITS ARE
USED TO I DENT I FY THE MICROCODE AND
CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE REFERENCES:
~ : ~~~g ~~-_P~7N2~;~:~li,2~;~l=~£ 2348787
~ : ~~~g~~~:g/~~~~R1~~ERM~'N_2~1~8~~£8i~48997
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4168816
2.
~I8X~H:~~E~~¥c~i~T"~~~ I~ INSTA~~ED.
3. QBOXX REFERENCES BECOME QB4XX IF
3340/3344 IS INSTA~~ED.
4. FOR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE DIAGRAM, THE
ACTUA~ PAGE NUMBER MAY DEPEND ON THE
DEVICE TYPE SE~ECTED.
ABBREVIATIONS
OCC • DISCONNECTED COMMAND CHAINING
PCH • PACK CHANGE
3830·2
RESETS (Part 2 of 3)
CMD 255
C> Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975, 1976
o
o o
C)
o o
r~_
IJ
()
o
o
r~
\-
U
"'--'
o
,~
~~}
.\,4'"-~
--
.:',
~
r~
~y
0
O
f
-
-
.-
(J
----
[I
F
('
(~'
(
(" (-
(-
(-
(
~,
(
(-
(~
(-
(
(
(
(-
(' (-'
(
(
("'
(-'
(-
(-
(
(
"
(-
(-
(-'~
("
('.
L
RESETS (Part 3 of 3)
RESETS (Part 3 of 3)
CMD 256
SYSTEM RESET (continued)
CMD 255
SET UP RET'-"N
ADDRESS AND EXIT
TOI I.POLL
INTERRUPTS.
2.SELECT MODULES.
3.READ ~ILE STATUS
ST2=1. SET
TAG AND BUS TO DO
SET RETURN
ADDRESS
~ORCE
~~~~~~~~E~~~~~~'
2/5
___
SET TAG AND BUS
TO POLL
INTERRUPTS
SET TAG AND BUS
OUT ~DR ~ILE
STATUS
PACK-CHANGE
HOUSEKEEPING. ZERO
PHYSICAL AND
LOGICAL SEEK
ADDRESS STORAGE
AREAS.
~&..lIt,;;WI:.I..J,O
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RETURN
UPDATE
AVAILABLE BYTES
3,4-QB019 (NOTE 21
_-_...1.1I.00:I,;;-_,,,7
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RET'-"N
REQUEST MODULE
STATUS
RESET
INTERRUPTS
SET TAG AND BUS
TO MODULE
SELECT
SET PACK CHANGE
INDICATOR
DO CONTROL
RESET
___
SET TAG AND BUS
TO DO STRING
SIITCH CONTROL
(UNLOCK SWITCHI
3340,3350
PER~ORM SENSE
TAG WHICH
WILL RESET ANY
PAR I TV ERRORS ON
3340 INTER~ACE
INTER~ACE
ST2= I: SET TAG
AND BUS TO XMIT
CONTROL 1 AND
CONTROLLER
RESET
3,4-QB240
,...._ _w..:a.;;,w
........0
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE> AND
RETURN
...I.L.o.i:~OIIIIiIIO
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RET'-"N
SET TAG AND BUS
OUT TO RESET
INTERRUPT
SET PACK CHANGE
TO OTHER S I DE
OF STRING
SWITCH
RESET PACK CHANGE,
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RET'-"N
DROP SELECT
HOLD. GO
RESET
PER~ORM
ON NEXT DEV I CE
PR~~~G~~~~U~~IN
STRING SWITCH
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RET'-"N
REQUEST STRING
SWITCH STATUS.
o -> ST2.
ClIO 255
RESET LONG
CONNECTION
NOTES
DESELECT DEVICE
UPDATE
AVAILABLE BYTES
SET TAG AND BUS TO
RESET STRING SIITCH
ASSIGNMENT, AVAILABLE
c~~~RV:ltR~~TPP~
CURRENT DEV I CE BE I NG
RESET
SET ~LAG ~OR
LATER USE I~
MULTI-TAG
ClIO 255
CMD 255
r--_.w..l,;;llc.u,0
PER~ORM TAG
SEQUENCE AND
RET'-"N
3830-2
\437417
16 Apr 74
C>Capyright IBM Corporation 1974. 1975.1978
1447480
19 Dec 75
12 Mar 76
1447461
I. THIS ~LOW CHART IS USED WITH MULTIPLE
MICROCODE VERSIONS. THE ~OLLOWING DIGITS
ARE USED TO IDENTI~Y THE MICROCODE
AND CORRESPONDING CAS PAGE RE~ERENCESI
1 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341105, 2341716, 2348717
2 - 3330 ONLY - PIN 2341757, 2341996
: : ~~~g:~~:g/~~~~R~~~ERM~'N_2~1=1~~'llf11997
5 - 3340/3344 - PIN 4161116
2. QaOXX RE~ERENCES BECOME Qa3XX I~ TWO
CHANNEL SWITCH ADDITIONAL IS INSTALLED.
3. ~OR A GIVEN BLOCK IN THE
~~Mi\A~~~P~:I
DEVICE TYPE SELECTED.
RESETS (Part 3 of 3)
CMD 256
("",
(~
,j
.-~
When the desired angular position (which has an
adjusted reselection delay factor) is reached, the SCU
signals Device End. The channel can then connect to
continue the command chain. If the channel does not
respond, connection is tried on subsequent
revolutions.
The facility provides rotational position sensing (RPS).
On devices without RPS, the channel and storage
control maintain connection while a record search
is in progress. RPS allows the channel and storage
control to be released during most of a record's search
time, thereby increasing their availability for' other
operations.
Two commands have been added for the RPS
function, Read Sector (CMD107, 125) and Set
Sector (CMD 16, 25):
--~-.------------
ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING CPa,. 1 of 2)
ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 1 of 2)
• Standard on 3330 and 3350, feature on 3340.
..
CMD 300
READ/SET SECTOR OPERATION
In 3350 compatibility mode, the sector value from the
channel is adjusted by 2/3 to ensure that the desired
record is not passed,
SET SECTOR GIVEN
DEVICE END
CHANNEL
RESELECTION DELAV
RECORD
READ OR WRITE
•
Initial selection
•
Channel End
•
Disconnect
Angular position, relative
to the read/write heads,
adjusted for reselection
delay.
If channel does not
respond, connection
is tried on subsequent
revolutions.
If channel reconnection is
establ ish ed, the record is
ready to be read or
written.
READ SECTOR
The Read Sector command transfers one byte of in·
formation from the SCU to main storage. This byte
provides the sector number (angular displacement
from index) of the last record processed. If the last
record processed was an overflow record, the sector
number returned is that of the first segment processed
in the current command chain.
Execution of a Read Sector command causes loss
of the previously established record orientation.
Therefore, if further processing of records of the same
track (or cylinder) is desired, a search- for the desired
record must be made.
In 3350 compatibility mode the angular position number
is not retrieved from the target register in the drive. It
is calculated from the track· used counter. It is valid only
if the Read Sector command follows the command
processing the record of interest. If the Read Sector
command follows the Set Sector command, the byte
transferred to the channel has no relationship to the Set
Sector command argument.
SET SECTOR
The Set Sector command transfers one byte of data
from mai~ storage to the SCU. This byte specifies
one of 128 (3330 and 3350) or 64 (3340) possible angular
positions per logical track. The byte value is checked
for validity by the SCU. If the value is proper, the
SCU generates Channel End and allows the channel
to disconnect.
3830-2
ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 1 of 2)
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1974, 1976. 1976
0000
,~,
,1
'0
o
000
o
o ()
0
()
o0
1
o
CMD 300
000
o ()
(~-
(--
(
(-
(
(
(
ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 2 of 2)
Note: 3330 figures are followed by 3340 figures in [
(--
(ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 2 of 21
f
CMD 305
J.
•
Rotational positional sensing IRPS) minimizes time lost by the channel.
•
RPS circuits are in the control module of the selected device.
• Number of sectors and timing vary with the device type.
•
Rotation time 16.7 [20.2] milliseconds.
•
128 sectors [per physical track or 64 sectors per logical track].
• Sector time 130 [158] microseconds.
• Sector argument from the system is from 0-127 [0-63].
For 3350 compatibility modes, the end-of-track virtual index
can occur in the range indicated depending on the number of
records written on the track.
[Odd Logical
Tracks
0-63)
1
When record is written, the sector
number may be stored in the system
by a Read Sector command.
Example: Record 22 is written.
Sector 126 [62] is stored by use of
the Read Sector command.
The sector can be calculated by the
system if the record size is fixed.
TRACK LAYOUT
Index [Even Index)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I
10
I
121
[57)
122
[58)
123
[59)
124
(60)
125
[61 )
126
(62)
127
(63)
(0)
2
Assume:
When sector counter and target register
compare, CU raises request in to the
channel. Channel can then do a Search
10 for record 22 with a minimum loss
of CPU time.
Head is at this point when
a Set Sector command is
received Ise~tor 126) [62].
Sector 124 [59] is set in target register
of selected module when a record
starting in sector 126 [62] is to be
searched. Target always set two
[three] less than desired sector.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
©
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973. 1974, 1975
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROTATIONAL POSITION SENSING (Part 2 of 21
CMD 305
OVERFLOW RECORD
OVERFLOW RECORD
•
Allow logical data records longer than one track.
•
Formatting controlled by the system.
•
Reading and nonformatting Write operations controlled
by the CU.
CMD 400
Flag byte bit 4= 1
First segment of overflow record ---------------------~
Index [Odd]
FORMATTING
R2-D (Segment 1)
Thp.se segments are written using Write Special
Count·Key-Data (CKD) commands.
Flag byte bit 4= 1
R 1-0 (Segment 2)
Command sequence:
Set Sector
Search ID (R 1 )
TIC'-S
Write Special CKO (1st segment)
Seek Head (next track)
Search 10 (RO)
TIC'-S
Write Special CKD (2nd segment)
-Seek Head (next track)
Search ID (RO)
TIC'-S
Write Special CKD (3rd segment)
Seek Head (next track)
Search ID (RO)
TIC'-S
Write CKD (4th segment I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.....
Rl-D (Segment 3)
Flag byte bit 4=0
[Even]
t
Rl-0 (Segment 4)
R2-D
Last segment of overflow record - - - - - - - - - - -......-1
PROCESSING
CU switches to the next head on all overflow records (flag
byte bit 4 = 1) of Read and nonformatting Write commands.
Command Sequence:
Search ID (Rl),TIC*-8. Read Key-Data, Read Data, Write KeyData or Write Data (read or write segments 1, 2, 3, and 4
with auto head switching at index, controlled by the CUI.
3330 and 3350.
Errors on the first segment (excluding- correctable data field
data checks) are retried by the CU.
3340Errors on any segment of the overflow record are handled by
the system error recovery procedures.
An error on the second or subsequent segments (Data Check,
defective track, etc.) causes sense byte 1 bit 7, operation
incomplete, to be set. A restart CCW is provided to the
system error recovery procedure (ERP) in sense byte 3.
After the E RP has corrected the problem, the restart CCW is
senno the CU to resume the operation.
aoooo110
106)
A Read command was
in progress.
00000101
15)
A Write command was
in progress.
See SENSE 35, byte 3
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830·2
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
©
o
t"',--"l\-"
~
OVERFLOW RECORD
CMD 400
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1974. 1975
a" () o o
I,;
t,:'
o
()
o
000
o o o
,;'I)
~-"'"
o o o
,.--...
I
~,\,
'I
~
C)
o
C)
(-
(\ (\
(~'
(-
(--
(
(
MULTIPLE TRACK (MIT) OPERATION
•
Bit 0 of the command byte identifies a MIT operation.
•
Effective only on Read and Search operations.
•
If MIT bit is on in a chain of commands the head is
switched to the next track at index time, providing
the command is issued between the last record and
index. (If the CU has issued a Read Gl head switching
operation to the controller, head switching occurs
39 bytes past the index.)
•
(
(
(
MUL TlPLE TRACK (M/TI OPERATION,
END OF FILE, ORIENTATION
CMD 430
ORIENTATION
•
Microprogram keeps track of relative position of the head and the format of the track.
•
Microprogram uses the orientation information to determine when to start an operation called for in a command.
•
Orientation is maintained by the microprogram in the command execution byte (CES).
•
As an operation is performed, the CES is updated as each field of a record is passed.
Command Execution Byte (CEB)
Eliminates the need for Seek Head commands in a
chain of Read or Search commands.
Index
~r-l.I_R_N_-_C....LI.....l..I_R_N_-_K....LI......l_ _ _R_N_-_D_ _....L_....l....JtL Head address is advanced plus one by the CU.
Bit
2
3
4
Use
HA
Count
Key
~---
I
l
Orientation Bits
5
--.....,..,.'0
~O-D
HA I I RO-C
Ready for new Read ~.LI_---l_ _ _.1..-J.L-_ _.l..--.J_ _ _.L_~
Search command.
.
Head switching does not occur:
If bits 3 and 4 of file mask are both on (file protected), or
if head address would advance past last cylinder (end of cylinder).
~
Programming note:
MIT Search chains should be started with a single track
Read HA or Read RO to prevent missing the record if the
record has passed the head when the MIT Search is started.
CURRENTCEB
Defines the end of a logical group of records.
•
Identified by a count field data length (D LD L )
of zero.
•
Data field consists of one byte of zero plus
ECC bytes.
•
Signals the system with Unit Exception status
(status byte, bit 7) on Read IPL, Read RO, Read
CKD, Read KD, Read D, Write KD, and Write
D commands.
o 0 0 0 0
X X
00001
XX
000 1 1 1 X X
000 1 0 0 X X
000010XX
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
I
X X
1
1
DL \ DL \
3830·2
0
1 0
X X
X X
X X
0
0
o
X X
X X
o
0
1
1
-
ECC
Data
X X
000 X X
1 1 1 X X
1
1
\
ECC
o
I
ECC
I.
•
1 X X
o 0 X X
R Data
x
Rx Key
\ KL
1
1
100 0 X X
o 0
X X
R Count
x
R
o 0
o
0 1
0 o lOX X
o 0 X X
0
o 1 X X
0
0
o X X
o
o
F}clcIH\H\
0
0
000
1 0
,,
NEXT CEB
Q.
01234567
END OF FILE
•
~:::I
o
o
o
0
X X
X X
X X
Process Data
Process Key
Process Count
Process Count
Process Key
End
Process Data
Process Key (Datal
End
End
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Clock
Process Next Record
Clock Data
Clock Key (Datal
Process Data
Process Key (Datal
Process Key (Onlyl
Clock Key
Data
Key
Count
Key
Count
Count
Count
Clock/Truncate Data
ClocklTruncate Key
ClocklTruncate Count
Clock/Truncate HA
Clock/Truncate Key
ClocklTruncate Count
End
End
End
End
Clock/Truncate Data
Clock Key (Datal
Process HA
Clock HA
Clock HA
Clock HA
End
Clock RO
Read·Write RO
Search ID RO Count
Clock HA
Clock HA
Clock HA
Clk RO CT/K, Pro Data
Clk RO CT, Pro K/D
Clk RO CT, Pro Key
o
23456 7
o
X X
X X
0 0 0 0
000 0
Read or Write
Read or Write
Read or Write
Read, Search, Space Count
Search Only
NEWCEB
1 0 0 0 0
X X
100011XX
o
0
0
001
0000
o 0 0 0
000
X X
1 XX
000
OXX
Read or Write
Read or Write
Search Only
67 Command
0.0 Search
000
o 0
100
o
1 0
010
o
(J
0
0
o u
x X
1 o Read
01 Write
X X
1 1 Space Count
1 1 X X
1 1 X X
o 0 .X X
Bit 1 Means RO Count
Bit 1 Means RO Count
lOX X
o
o
0 X X
1 X X
MULTIPLE TRACK (MITI OPERATION,
END OF FILE, ORIENTATION
C>Copyright IBM Corpor.tion 1972. 1973. 1974. 1976
COMMENT
CMD 430
TWO CHANNEL SWITCHING CONCEPT AND COMMANDS
TWO CHANNEL SWITCHING CONCEPT AND COMMANDS
DEVICE RESERVE AND DEVICE RELEASE
Note: If 3340 microprogram is installed in the SCU, the two
channel switch, additional, feature cannot be installed.
Reservation of a device is done by execution of a Device
Reserve command. Release of a device, previously reserved,
is done by execution of a Device Release command. In
addition, 24 bytes of sense data are transferred to the channel
when either command is performed.
The two channel switch feature enables two channels to share
the SCU and allows individual drives to be reserved for the
exclusive use of either channel. The channels may be attached
to the same or different CPUs. Channel switching and device
reservation are made under control of the system(s) programs.
Channel A
Channel B
A flowchart that lists the general microprogram steps and CLD .
page references for either command, is on CMD 150.
CHANNEL SWITCHING AND DEVICE
RESERVATION CONCEPTS
r-======;:::=====;r;:-,~
Refer to CMD 142 for command objectives. The string
switch feature modifies these commanas; see the device MLM.
COMMAND
CPU
A B
See INTR 140, CHL-1475
First channel to raise Select Out
• • • • • • •~ switches interface logic to that
channel. The other channel will
get Control Unit Busy if it tries to
Storage Control Unit
raise Select Out.
Switch will go back to neutral
when channel disconnects unless
coo
Unit Check occurred (contingent
connection).
CHANNELA
I
A device address reserved to one
channel or being used by one channel presents Device Busy status to
the other channel if selection is
attempted
-
Disk Storage
--
--
CODE
FUNCTION
B4
1. Set bits in control storage ('0690' = channel-A;
'0694' = channel-B) to reserve addressed devices_
2. Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel.
3. Send ending status to channel
94
1. Store null value in control storage ('0690'
channel-A; '0694' = channel-B) to cancel
reservation for devices addressed.
2. Transfer 24 bytes of sense data to the channel.
3. Send ending status to channel.
ERROR TYPE
-
CHANNEL B
Device
Release
I
CHANNELAINTERFACE
OD042
If command is not the
first one in the chain,
command reject is set
in sense data and Unit
Check is set in initial
status_
CHANNELBINTERFACE
TIE BREAKER
I
Reserve command sets indicators
in these words to reserve a drive
for the exclusive use of one channel. All drives are reservable_
The Release command resets the reserve indicators to a null value.
Device
Reserve
\
/
N
/.
CMD 450
ALTERNATE PATH RECOVERY (APR)
This function uses an Unconditional Reserve (UR) Command
to break device allocation to the interface that has become
inoperative, and establishes a path on an operable interface.
UNCONDITIONAL RESERVE
If a storage control attached to a string of drives with string
switch feature and Alternate Path Recovery stops operating
while an interface is selected or an assignment register position
is set, no operation to the string or effected drive is possible
from another storage control.
SEE CTRL 650
CONTROL STORAGE LOCATION '0690' CONTROL STORAGE LOCATION '0694'
I I
I I
I I
I
I I
I
DISK STORAGE
Module 1
I
Drive A ~ij
Drive B
.
. ..
DISK STORAGE
Module 2
I
DriveC ~
O,i"
°~
i.
..
.:
~:
DISK STORAGE
Module 3
I
Drive E~
· F
Dnve
~
[ij.
o
.
··
.
·
.. :.
..
DISK STORAGE
Module 4
I
DriVeG~
D· H
nve ~
~
~
.
.. .
To eliminate this condition the select latch and assignment
register position can be reset through the uSd of the Unconditional Reserve (UR) command. Once the select latch and/or
assignment register position for the desired drive have been
reset, the string is reserved for the storage control through
which the UR command was issued and normal operation
may continue on the functional interface.
Refer to CM D 150 for a flow chart that lists the general
microprogram steps and CLD page references. Refer to CMD
142 for command objectives. Refer to device MLM for more
detailed information.
&:
•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
~_....J
ONLY ONE STRING SHOWN
CONTROL MODULE
SATELLITE MODULES
3830-2
ClCopyright IBM Corpor.tion 1972. 1973. 1974.1976
()
o
TWO CHANNEL SWITCHING CONCEPT AND COMMANDS
o"--Y
I
,I
o
/.)
~...
o o
r.···~':
IJ
()
o
o
CMD450
0
----~-
("
(" p(
(
(-
(~
(C
(
(-
(-
(
(-
(
(
(
(-
(
(-
(
(
(
(
(0
(
(
('
(
(-"
(
(:'
("
(~'
L
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
M Ie 1
MIC
Microprogram Introduction
Microblock Format
Sample Microprogram Routine Command Decode Sense
Microcode Versions
Microcode Features
Additional Reference
MIC2
Micro-Orders • • •
MIC3
Reference Data, Register Assignments •
MIC5
Microword Format Summary
MIC6
Microword Format A
MIC 10
Microword Format B
MIC 11
Microword Format C
MIC 12
Microword Format D
MIC 13
Microword Format E
MIC 14
Microword Format F
MIC 15
Microword Format 1
MIC16
Microword Format 2
MIC 17
Microword Format 3
MIC18
Microprogram Instruction Examples
MIC30
Microprogram Routines
MIC35
Register Expansion Feature
MIC40
383()'2
CONTENTS
@ Copy,;gIIl IBM CorporMfon 1172, 1974, 1976
M Ie 1
(~-
-
----
(~
MICROPROGRAM INTRODUCTION
MICROPROGRAM INTRODUCTION
MIC 2
SAMPLE MICROPROGRAM ROUTINE
COMMAND DECODE - SENSE
•
Control of the control unit (CUI and modules is
performed by use of an internally stored program.
•
Each microprogram instruction is decoded in the control
unit when read out of the control storage.
•
•
Decoded lines cause the control unit circuits to perform
an action.
Microprogram controls actions of the channel interface,
MPL file, control interface, and the modules by placing
bits in registers that have outputs to the other units.
•
Information or data is available to the microprogram by
use of registers in the control unit with inputs from other
units.
•
Because control storage contents are lost when po_r is
off, the microprogram is permanently stored on the MPL
file (23FOI.
•
An initial microprogram load IIMPLI operation transfers
the microprogram to the control storage on po_r up.
•
Microprogram is listed on condensed logic diagrams (CLOsl.
•
•
•
Each block represents an instruction.
A group of instructions that performs a given operation is
called a routine.
Exclusive OR a constant of 4 with the contents of the BR
Set MO register to zero.
Branch high: Set IAR bit 12 to 1 if ST register bit 2 is on.
l,:r:eg:i:st:e:r:a~n~d~p;la;ce;;r;e;su;l;t;o;n;o;.;bu;;S';;;;;;;;;;;i~~It================~~ii~============~liP~~~~~~~~~~~~::::::::~~
I
I
Address ofthis block. Note that
when addre.... are the same, only
QD04Z.CHE
(lXl00)
• •
•
OX100,.l.--1284
.,OX10/0_12CA4.
I
D
;. O-MD
1--11T6
•
TSTZ
---------1-0-1
It
•
AND constant of 240 with contents of
SR register and place result on O·bus.
0-._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
QD030.QDI----------...;;~-...::;;;,....-------__;;;;.....--.....,
one instruction will be in storage.
Which instruction is used depends
on which feature is instelled.
Branch low: SetiARbit13toi
(OX100)
IXOOOO--l0A20
: .............................r~A O+IIA-oD
: .....................-~~
if BR register bit 3 is on.
r
:;-::::::.:::;. ;:::~::::.::.'Iod.
Page and block (EHI that line
carne from.
•
ST regi.ter control: Turn on ST
bit 2 if D-bus is not zero in this
block.
!. . . . . .
e83
J.
-~z:...XX.OO-CB
~4-XOXOO-CD
":'
.
f:=
La-o
I
r.:;:;:"':---C)-.l!~':. ~:.-I:::
_
.........................-
'1'1118
8
Z-XXOOO-EB
CHIICK CO_D FOR
ALL ZEROS
I
OX.OO-IC
C8BCK THAT BIT 5
OF COIIIIAND IS 011
13
PAGE DECODES '1'IIE SIIISI AND 'rEST
AND CHBCKS THAT '1'IIIY ARE VALID
~DS
Branch low: Set IAR bit 13 to 1
if D-bus __ zero in preceding block.
COJIHAIID
SIIISI I/O
DIAGNOSTIC SIIISE
SIIISB I.OG
ST2 • 1
To perform an operation called for by a channel command
word (CCWI, the microprogram uses a series of routines
(MIC35I.
ITS • 1
CCZII
lXXXOO--12~C.
COII'I'ROL
~
8 ST2
I
E7-X.XOO-EG
IIjX~~~~6--11~4
A K.Ba.D
I
C DNSTZI
M
A
.,lXl00 _ _ l1:C.
882
aRl
I
ES-XOOOO-E
CHICK TYPE OF
SENSE COMIWID
·-QII060--£HB
ixiooo)I
£8-Xl000-EH
~ TO RAISE STATUS
Page that
line is
X1XOO--l1CB
going to
A
·-QD070--GBE
(10100)
I
00000100
01000100
Oi000100
IIIVALlD COIIIIAIID
A
C8-X1XOO-CH
' -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ QS070_CGB
(XXXOO)
XOXOO--llCO
":]0 • _ _
Leg selector: • ·controlled by branch
conditions. Selects one of fou r
blocks for next instruction.
X1XOO--1ZDC
·-QD080--CHI
(X1XOO)
L.._c_S__x_.x_O_O_-_C_E_ _ _ _ _ _ _...I
E4-XXXOO-B
SBT COIIIIAND INTO
8R REGIS'l'ER
QD042 __ CBE
(XX100)
G6-1Xl00-GF
DIAGNOSTIC SBRSE
G8-10100-GH
CMD REJCT
Leg identifier: shows which block to
use as a result of branch in block
preceding.
~, Page number alpha position
o
:
indicate. major routine.
MIC 35
MICROBLOCK FORMAT
LEG IDENTIFIER
I AR Bits 11 thru 15: Bits 12 and 13 .how status of branch
conditions specified in line 6 of preceding microblock.
t_1Xl00-LF
1 = low branch condition satisfied
~
I
! i I
ALUSTATEMENT - - - - - - - - - - - (Except modes 2,3, and C, external function I
(MIC 101
MODE
(Format code, MIC 10 - lSI
MICROCODE VERSIONS
ADDITIONAL REFERENCE
DATA STATEMENT OR STORAGE (DARI ADDRESSING
Four hex bytes that will be stored at this address IIARI,
(3330 Series)
,:::!:~:::!=~:::~:::!~~::::!...!~
or address that will be set into DAR.
~~::::!:::!:::::::!=!=~=!::::!:!~I
,...
DATA CONTROL
Fetchlstore data
00 - Basic
02 - String Switch Attachment
04 - String Switch with 32 Drive Expansion
_--------------~CD.~I~:li:~:~:~:~~~11
! i . ! ! !
':t::1 ~:c::~~:nspecifiedbYCLfield(MICI0).
I
BITCONTROL ST register set/reset statement
B
(MIC 131
;.......!::!::!::~~!-.!:::!:::!:::!::~.
Branch condition specified by CH field (MIC 101.
If condition is setisfied, IAR bit 12 is set to 1.
!
~HEX
Of thisADDRESS
block (contents of IARI
1 = h'Igh branch cond'Itlon
. satls
. f Ied
K-CK EMIT VALUE - - - - - - - - - - - _
Constant to A·bus (may be decimal or binary I.
HIGH BRANCH _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
-Xll0_llBC
I
D
A O+IIA-oD
ORSTZI
If condition is satisfied, IAR bit 13 is set to 1.
L....L...L.-::!~~!::!:~i~...!......~I I
•
[ .I-i.-Li
. ~l...1 ----CO...
FEATURE CODE
Feature, if any, that provides this block.
MICROCODE FEATURES
(L ine F of microblock)
1 4 -
More details of microprogram instruction decoding
shown on:
MIC35
MIC 10-18
CTRL500
MIC 30-31
CTRL 230
CTRL 240
START 100
Major routine layout.
Microblock layout.
Format field descriptions.
Sample microblocks.
Addressing circuits.
Addressing circuits
Manual microword decoding.
Single or Two Channel Switch
Two Channel Switch Additional
BOX SERIAL NUMBER
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ (alphal
LEG SELECTOR
Setting of IAR bits (11-151 for next microblock.
Symbol • denotes that bit value (0 or 11 is determined
by a branch condition.
BOX PRINT POSITION - - - - - - - - - - . . . Page coordinates (row-columnl for textual reference
to this block.
3830-2
@Copyright IBM Corporation 1912. 1913. 1914, 1918
~)
0
o o o
o o
()
o o o
() 0 0
Q
MICROPROGRAM INTRODUCTION
MIC 2
o o
o
00
o c
(
(
(
if
(
C
:t
:f-
C
C
C
!t
I~
•
:(
:(
if
C
e
(
c
MICRO - ORDERS
The micro-order is a coded statement that appears inside the microblock. It specifies
Field
This page lists the typical micro-orders encountered in the microprogram routines and
BI
gives a brief functional defi.nition. Also listed are page references to the MLM and
&
Ell
.,
rID
tID
&
Micro-Order
or Reg Used
DNST21
STO
0- STl
0- ST2
0- ST3C
0- ST4
0- ST5
0- ST6
0- ST7
1 - STO
1 - STl
1 - ST3C
o·
0010
1100
1001
1010
1011
1000
1101
1110
1111
0100
0001
0011
1 - ST5
1 - ST6
l-ST7
0101
0110
0111
GA
GB
GC
MA
MB
MC
MD
1001
1000
0001
1111
1110
0111
0110
NA
1011
NB
NC
NO
1010
0011
0010
TA
1101
TB
TC
TO
1100
0101
0100
BR
01110
GA
00101
GB
00100
GC
01101
GO
10010
MA
01011
MB
01000
MC
01111
MD
01100
MLM
NO
10100
SA
00000
CFEALD
SB
00001
RB10l
SC
00010
SO
00011
ST
10001
TA
01001
Set ST register bit 2 if the 0 bus is nonzero
Reset ST register bit 0
Reset ST register bit 1
Reset ST register bit 2
Reset ST register bit 3
Reset ST register bit 4
Reset ST register bit 5
Reset ST register bit 6
Reset ST register bit 7
Set ST register bit 0 to 1
Set ST register bit 1 to 1
Set ST register bit 3 to 1. Th is bit takes
value of carrv out of ALU if "C" is added
to D bus statement
Set ST register bit 5 to 1
Set ST register bit 6 to 1
Set ST register bit 7 to 1
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL 240
CTRL 240
CTRL 240
CTRL240
RB10l
RB101
RB101
RB101
GP register with outgates to the A bus
GP register with ou tgates to the A bus
GP register with outgates to A bus
GP register usually used for device read data
GP register usually used for byte counter high
GP register usually used for byte counter low
GP register with outgates to the A bus
usually used for channel bus in
GP register usually used for CU address and
channel conditions.
GP register with outijates to the A bus
GP register
GP register outgates to the A bus, used for
CTL-I error input
GP register usually used for CTL-I bus out
bits
GP register usuually used for CTL-I gates.
GP register usually used for CTL-I controls
GP register usually used for CTL-I tags
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
CTRL
235
235
235
235
235
235
RG104
RG204
RG304
RG102
RG202
RG302
CTRL 235
RG402
CTRL 235
CTRL 235
CTRL 235
RG103
RG203
RG303
CTRL 235
CTRL 235
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the 0 bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the 0 bus
GP register with ou tgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the 0 bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from t.h e 0 bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the 0 bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the 0 bus
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
CTRL 235
CTRL 235
CTRL 235
00111
10101
Cont.
Page References
Function
NA
NC
lID
register assignments.
Field
Bits
Field
Bits
10110
MIC 2 for a description of the fields and edge characters that are associated with each
Field
Micro-Order
or Reg Used
NB
CFEALDs for quick reference to the hardware involved in the micro-order. Refer to
5 for
(
C
MICRO-ORDERS
a function to be performed during the microprogram.
micro-order and M IC
(
RB10~
RB10l
RB10l
RB10l
RB101
RB101
RB10l
RB101
RB10l
DE201
TB
00110
TC
10111
TO
01010
TG
01001
0
10000
ADDRO/
MC6
ILACT/
BOPAR
BRO
BR2
BR4
BR6
CARRY
1101
0111
1000
1001
1010
0010
CHK-2
INUN
1011
1001
RG403
COMMO
1100
RG10l
RG201
RG301
RG401
SECTR
1000
SUPPO/
XCHAN
STO
ST2
ST4
ST6
0
1
BRl
BR3
BR5
BR7
BTRDY
1110
lID
RB103
CTRL 235
RG104
CTRL 235
RG204
CTRL 235
RG304
CTRL235
RG404
CTRL235
RG102
CTRL 235
RG202
CTRL 235
RG302
CTRL 235
RG402
III
CUEND/
BFRDY
RSPON/
CHANB
1111
0011
0100
0101
0110
0000
0001
0111
1000
1001
1010
1000
1110
1111
Page References
Function
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
in gates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the D bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
ingates from the D bus
GP register usually used for status
indications
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the 0 bus
GP register with outgates to the B bus;
i ngates from the D bus
GP register with outg
----_.-
(-"",
~
-------------------------- - - - - -
C)
('"-~
\J
\,-/
0
'J
,r'l
0
,...--"""
:,-)
('--'"
-
\
'~
01
;-~"'"
'v 0
01
"'-JI
,....---'\-.,
\c...#
r~'\
'--pi
('"-'\
0
;r"""
'"j C)
!
I
~~
\
i
-"'-.J
('!
I
i
"--
---/
~-.,.."
(
)
"'-- p'
(~
"'-/
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
{
(
(
(
(
(
(
MICROWORD FORMAT A (FM=1, NO AND NB"'11)
MICROWORD FORMAT A (FM = 1, NO AND NB
•
General purpose use.
•
Cannot be used to modify status bit settings.
+11)
MIC 10
Format A Example
Iil...
XXXO 0 - - 08
~'t'K=llOOlOOO
FORMAT DECODE
•
Faur bits af the microword are decoded to determine the
format. (Some formats decode a fifth bit.)
•
Six configurations of these four bits are callectively known
as format A (see CTRL 500):
•
(
~R
I
N6-XX*OO-NF
In the example, the format is decoded as:
FM
1
KK
1
:r......:r
Always 1 in
format A
ND
0
NB
o
..,...
T
Allows gating of CK
field to A-register.
(If 0, allows gating of
GP registers to Aregister and CV field
to IAR).
Allows gating af 0bus to GP registers.
(If 1, blocks gating of
D-bus to GP registers).
CK FIELD (BYTE O. BITS 0 - 7)
•
Specified by KK = 1.
•
CK field is gated to the A-register.
K=l
o
K~GA
I'
Allows gating of GP
HSTO
registers to B-regis·
ter. (If 1, blocks
gating of GP registers
FM
to B-registed.
Th is Address
o
8 3 C
0
1
2
BYTE 0
3 4 6
6
7
P
0
1
2
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
ICK
II
BYTE 1
3
4
0
1
5
1
6
1
7
P
0
1
07'--OleXOIO--QG
NB
0
2
BYTE 2
3
4
5
0
0
0
1
6
1
I CB/CD
--p5P
B
7
0
P
1
CX
ID
II
OP FIELD (BYTE 1. BITS 0 - 2)
lip
•
Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed.
•
In the example, 001 is decoded as A·B~.
CB/CD FIELD (BYTE 1. BITS 3 -7)
1;1 •
o
o
Decoded to select a GP register to serve as B-entry and/or
destination register.
•
•
1
2
3
456
0
0
0
100
Next Address
0
or
0
NB and ND bits determine the function of the CB/CD field.
8
8
6
6
8
C
if D;O!O
if D=O
In the example, 01110 indicates that the BR register is to be
used for both B-entry and destination registers.
CX FIELD (BYTE 2. BITS 4 -7)
•
II
Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR.
CH FIELD (BYTE 3. BITS 0 - 3)
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, sets I AR bit 12 to 1.
•
In t~e example, 0001 sets IAR (12) to 1 unconditionally.
CL F'IELD (BYTE 3. BITS 4 - 7)
•
•
•
Senses a hardware conditian to determine a branch.
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1.
In the example, 0010 sets IAR(13) to 1 if the D-bus is zero as
Bits 4-7
of IAR
B Entry and Destination
Bit 3
0
ST
GD
=1
Bit 3 = 0
SA
SB
SC
a result of the ALU function performed in the preceding
, microprogram step.
.!!
>-
...
<
1;
trl'
.t:J
0
m
~
•
.E
Specified by KK=O.
•
De!=oded to select a GP register to serve as A-entry register.
•
In the example, CA is not specified.
~.,u
a.
Vl
TE
CV FIELD (BYTE O. BITS 4 -7)
•
Specified by KK=O.
•
Gated to bits
•
In the example, CV is not specified.
4-7 of IAR.
.,
>..
...
.t:J
0
0
"
:c
:c
M
CA FIELD (BYTE O. BITS 0 - 3)
D
0
u
I
.=
Glc:
.,
to:
0
I
M
.=
Glc:
to:
CII
0
GC
MF
BR
ME
MC
·During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR
• ·During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY
···Following Spec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INUN
•••• Following Spec Op 7, BR5 replaced by I LXEQ
3830-2
MICROWORD FORMAT A (FM = 1, NO AND NB "'11)
© Copyright I"M Corporation 1972, 1978
MIC 10
MICROWORO FORMAT B (FM, KK, NO, NB= 1011)
•
MIC 11
MICROWORO FORMAT B(FM, KK, NO, NB = 1011)
Format B Example
Register to register transfer,
FORMAT DECODE
Decoding offormat B (FM, KK, NO, NB = 1011) sets up the
following controls (seeCTRL 500):
•
,.
Blocks ingating to A register.
Allows gating of GP registers to B register.
•
Allows gati~g-of D bus to G~registers.
•
Allows gating of ev and ex fields to IAR.
CD FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 4)
•
Decoded to select a GP register to serve as destination register.
•
In the example, 00011 selects the SO register.
CV FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 5 -7)
•
m
II
Gated to bits 5-7 of IAR.
op FIELD (BYTE
FM
1, BITS 0 - 2)
•
Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed.
•
In the example, 011 is decoded as A+~.
•
The A bus entry is always zero for this mode.
BYTE ,
3
0
,
5
4
0
6
0
KKI NO
NB
BYTE 2
7
pi 0
1
0
01'
0
2
4
3
0
II
CB FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 3 -7)
•
Decoded to se Iect a GP register to serve as B entry register.
•
In the example, 00100 indicates that the GB register is to be
used for B entry.
........,
--L-
CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4 - 7)
•
IAR
/0
Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR.
fo
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1.
•
In the example, 0001 sets IAR(12) to 1 unconditionally.
0
1
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
7
8
9
0
0
o
0
e
10 11
1 1
3
Format B Bit Assignment Chlrt
BYTE 0
Cl FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4 - 7)
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1 •
•
2
Senses a hardware condition,to determine a branch.
•
m
1
2
Next Address
CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0 - 3)
•
6
1
ex
IlIB
II
.
5
0
0
2
3
4
CD
Hex Value
in Field
Destination
Bit 0=1 Bit 0=0
1
In the example, 0001 sets IAR (13) to 1 unconditionally.
1
0 0
1 ST
Ifg
~
"
NO
Ne
NB
TC
5
6
7
; Ig~
NF
A
B
NE
gIre
E
F
5
BYTE 2
BYTE'
6
7
ev
Bits 5-7
of IAR
0 1 2
OP
ALU Control
AOB .. D
A. B.. D
A\fB+O
A+ B+O
IA + B+ C"DC
A - B+ C"DC
A + B.... DC
A - B+ I-DC
SA
SB
~g
GB
GA
TB
NA
5
4
3
6
eB
B-Entry
Bit 3 I
=
0
Bit 3
~
NF
~:
MA
NE
MA
Tf
~~
ME
Me
ME
4
0
1
1
ex
Bits 8-11 of IAR
KK
FM
NO
NB
5
6
0
7
1
2
3
eH
Branch High
liAR Bit 12)
0
1
Carry
STO
ST2
ST4
ST6
BRO
BR2'
NA
TO
BR
3
GA:
TB
NB
TC
W
2
~GB
~~
TE
W
=0
BYTE 3
1
SA
SB
ST
GO
TG
~:
~g
0
1
7
TO
BR
MC
4 5
6
7
eL
Branch Low
liAR Bit 13)
0
1
0=0
Index.STl
0
1
2
3
ST3C
ST5
ST7
BRI
4
5
BR3"
6
7
8
BA4***
BRS··*·
9
BR6
CHK·2
COMMO
AOORO/MC6
sUPPO/XCHAN
ILACT& oev/
BOPAR
BR7
SELTD/MC7
A
B
C
0
HLTIO/XFER
SERVO/MULTI
CUENO/BFROY
RESPON/CHANB
E
F
'During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR
• 'During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY
"'FollowingSpec Op 7, BR4 replaced in INLIN
•••• FollOWing Spec Op 7, BR5 replaced by ILXEa
3830·2
MICROWORO FORMAT B (FM, KK, NO, NB
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1978
r~.
, j
,r\
/',\
,
,-~/
~
,
/
/--"
r
'\
/
//
"-
./
~
/
/"-"
'.
,,"'\
'"
./
,,.<-'~,
,
"
\
/
/\
/
'~ ./
"
/:----'\
/'~,
"
MIC11
=1011)
/
"'"'\
'-
/
I
r'\
r--",
/~
"
« c
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
MIC 12
MICROWORO FORMAT C (FM. KK, NO, NB -11111
MICROWORO FORMAT C (FM, KK, NO, NB
•
=1111)
Format C Example
Long addressing (module switching).
F
FORMAT DECODE
01XOIJ_06C C
Decading of format e (FM, KK, NO, NB = 1111) sets up the
following controls (see CTRL 5OOi:
c
Jfm"~"
• Allows gating of GP registers to B-register.
• Allows gating of O-bus to GP registers.
Allows goting of
ew,
•
'1'0
338B
• Allows gating of CW field to A-register (4-71.
•
(
ev, and ex fields to IAR.
CW FIELD (BVTE 0, BITS 0.3)
•
Gated to bits 0-3 of IAR and to bits 4-7 of the A-bus.
CV FIELD (BVTE 0, BITS 4 • 7)
•
III
Gated to bits 4-7 of IAR.
OP FIELD (BVTE 1, BITS 0.2)
1M •
FM
CB FI ELD (BVTE 1, BITS 3· 7)
• Selects a GP register to be gated to the B-register.
•
II
1
2
10
0
1
1
No ALU statement is allowed for this format; however, the
o.bus may be nonzero atter this block IS executed.
II
10
BYTE 0
3 4 5
In the example, 10000 does not gote a GP register.
0
0
ew
ev
II
II
6
7
p 10
1
2
1
1
1 10
0
0
,;-
NB
BYTE'
3
4
5
6
7
plo
,
2
BVTE2
4
3
o
0
o
0
0
1
1
1
1
I1
1
c~
5
6
7
pT 0
1
2
o
0
0
010
0
0
.
•
Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR.
II
•
In the example, 0001 sets IAR (12) to 1 unconditionally.
II
Set IAR
(12) '" 1
Ir
7
P
0
0
Set IAR
(13) ., 0
J
I
1
I
IAR
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1.
II
I
I
•
eL
I
CH FIELD (BVTE 3, BITS 0·3)
•
eH
ex
CX FIELD (BVTE 2, BITS 4·7)
BVTE3
4 5 6
3
1
0 o 0
Next Address
0
1
0
0
2
1
3
3
1
4
5
0
0
6
1
3
7
1
B 9
1 0
10 11
0 0
12 13 14 15
100
8
0
8
CL FIELD (BVTE 3, BITS 4 -7)
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1.
•
In the example, 0000 sets IAR (13) to 0 unconditionally.
Format C Bit Assignment Chart
Hex Value
in Field
No effective
ALU
( Suppress
o Busl
• During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR
• ·During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY
···FallowingSpec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INLIN
····FollowingSpec Op 7, BR5 replaced by ILXEQ
3830-2
@ Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1978
MICROWORO FORMATC (FM. KK, NO, NB =1111)
MIC 12
(
MICROWORD FORMAT 0 (ME, FM ·00 AND NO, NB ~11)
MICROWORO FORMAT 0 (ME, FM = 00 AND NO, NB:/: 11)
m
•
Format D ExamDle
General purpose use with ability ta rnadify status bits.
m...
,xXXOO--07
-~I<=II
FORMAT DECODE
•
Five bits af the micraword are decoded ta determine the format.
Iil"'i
•
Six configurations of these five bits are collectively kn_n as
format O.
..
•
I
~~~I~-=
KK
1
I NO
N8
0
1
__
AII_s gating of CK
field to A register_
(If 0, allowS gating
of GP registen to
A register) I
•
Gated to bits 0-3 of the A register or to bits 4-7 of the
A-register, depending on CX(7).
•
In the example, 0100 is gated to bits 4-7 of the A-register_
_
Blocks gating of
D bus to GP registers
(If 0, allows gating
of D bus to GP
registers)
BYTE 0
ST(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by the CS field.
•
The example (0010) is decoded as ONST21. This result sets
ST(2) to 1 if the D bus is nonzero following execution of
the ALU function in line A of the microblock.
0 1
Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed.
I
2 3
4
0
0
0
0
0
01000-- 07A8
K"OOlOOlOO-A
A
-I
O
K¥S~D
B ST2
I
L2-X·000-LB
01l00--07AC
K=II
A
A K-+SB
I
5 6 7
8 9 10 11
1111010
7
A
7
A
7
A
7
A
BYTE 0
The high-order (ME) bit of the C8/CO field is always 0 in format O.
N8 and NO bits determine the function of the C8/CO field.
•
In the example, 00001 indicotes that the SB register is to be
used as B entry and that the D bus is to be suppressed_
Format
Confi gurat ians
•
Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR.
•
The low-order bit CX(7) determines the gating of the CK field
to the A-register.
•
In the example, CX(7)=0; therefore CK is gated to A-register
bits 4-7.
~
Hex Value
InField
t
0
1
~
4
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1 •
5
•
In the example, 1110 sets IAR(12) to 1 if SUPPO (Suppress Out) Is up.
6
7
;
CL FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4 - 7)
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, setJ IAR bit 13 to 1.
A
B
--C
0
E
In the example, 0100 tests for ST(3) being on.
F
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 71
0 1 2
OP
CS
CA
OP
CA
CS
CS
OP
CA
CS
CK
OP
CK
CS
OP
OP
CS
CK
Ck gated to
A-Aegister
per byt.2,
Stotus
bit 7 A-Entrv. SetjReset
ALU Control
L---I
12 13 14
XXO
0
4
8
C
o
if
if
if
if
NOT SUPPO and ST(3)=O
NOT SUPPO and ST(3)=1
SUPPO and ST(3)=0
SUPPO and ST(3;,J
B
D=O
I
G2-01*OO-GB
r-.
0
GC
~g
~g
MO
MC
~:
NB
NA
IS
TA
MB
MA
AOB... O
A.8.... 0
I-STl
A'Q'B...O
~NS~~.
_S C A+ 8 ...
A+ B+ C ..~
A-8+C"OC
A + 8 ... 0C
I--ST6
I_ST7
A - B+ I-DC
~=~~g
g:::
~~t
0--ST2
0
3
4
oi
o
I
0
o
I
0
o
I
MEl
1
2
3
4 5 6 7
5 6 ,\
0
0
oI 0 I0
CB/CO \
CX
CD
1
CX
\ o : 0 :0
CB
0
CX
0 11
\ 0
o I 1 10
C8/CO
0
CX
1
CD
CX
o I 1 10
CB
0
CX
1
1
1'0
I'M KK NO NB Bi ts 8-11 of IAR
S entry and
Destination
u
....5
SA
SB
<:
g
~~
G8
GA
TB
NA
Specified by KK=O.
•
Decoded to select a GP register to serve as A-entry register.
II
>..
.!!
r:
-.!
>-
..t>
..t>
~
1i
0
...
0
'?
0
"M
l!
l!
i
I
O--ST3C
TO
MA
;:
:0
:0
a--~~o
~g
.~
:EII
I;:
;:
I;:
Q.
BR
MC
0
'"
;:
2 3
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
CH
Branch High
(lAR Bit 12)
0
1
If format
specifies CK
field for A-Bus
0
entry:
I
CX(7)=-O if K<16. Carry
This directs CK STO
field to A-Aegister bits 4-7
~U
ST6
CX(7)-1 ifK)15. BRO
This directs CK BR2*
BR4***
field to A-AeBR6
gister bits 0-3
_CHK-2
COMMO
ADDRO/Me6
SUPPO/XCHAN
ILACT II OEVI
C
II
0
BOPAR
I
CA FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 3)
•
0
-£
0-- 5
0--ST6
O--ST7
BYTE 3
BYTE 2
BYTE'
4 5
6 7
CL
CL
CL
CL
CL
CL
Branch Low
(lAR Bit 13)
0
I
10Index.
=0
STl
I~}~C:
ST7
BRI
BR3**
BR5····
BR7
SELro IMC7
HLTIO/XFER
SERVO/MULTI
CUEND/BFRDY
RSPON/CHANB
0
I
2
3
T
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
0
E
F
'During IMPL BA2 replaced by SECTA
"During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY
"'FoliowingSpec Op 7, BA4 replaced by INLIN
····FoliowingSpec Op 7, BA5 replaced by ILXEQ
3830-2
MICROWOROFORMATO(ME.FM=OOANDNO,NB~11)
@
'\
I
1 0 1
11
Format D Bit A.ignment Chart
II
Decoded to select a GP register t& serve as B-entry and/or
destination register.
III CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0 - 3)
1lII. Senses 0 hardware condition to determine a branch.
D
1 0
In the example, 010 is decoded as A"'It8-+0.
•
•
o
o 0 0 0
Next Address
or
or
or
II CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4 -7)
III
BYTE 2
:)
4
2
6 7 P 0
o 1 1 0
IAR
II CB/CD FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 3 - 7)
•
4 5
0 0
T
II' OP FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 0 - 2)
•
3
0
ST2
J2--x*000 -JB
NB
Decoded to set or reset specific status (ST) bits.
•
•
KKI NO
BYTE'
012
010
K0\'6D~D
I
FM
MEjO
01234567P
010000101
00100--07AII
K-00100100-A
1
---1
11,
D=o.
E2-01.00 -EB
b
AII_s gating of GP
registers to B registers
(I.f 1, blocks gating of
GP registen to 8
register)
. . CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4 -7)
III.
!i
T
T lrL_-'~====,~------,I
1pI. CK FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 3)
1;1. Specified by KK=1 .
iii.
I
suppa
B
o" oO
FM
0
o
r-------~==T~T
Always 0 in format 0 Always 0 in format 0
00000--07AO
K-II
A
A K~B
I
PaW/C DNST21
In the example, the format is decoded as:
ME
MIC 13
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 197B
~'\
I
/
/
/
I"
/
,
'", .
,
.. I
MIC 13
(~,
\~
)
(
(
(
{
(
(
(
MICROWORO FORMAT E (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB
•
(
(
(
(
(
(
f
(
=00011)
(
«-
(
MICROWORO FORMAT E IME, FM, KK, NO' NB= 00011)
Indirect addressing (64-way branch) with address update
capability.
(
(
MIC 14
Format E Example
FORMAT DECODE
Decoding of format E (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB
the following controls (see CTRL 500):
= 00011 ) sets up
•
Allows gating of GP registers to A register.
•
Allows gating of GP registers to B register and to IAR (8-13).
•
Allows gating of 0 ous to GP registers.
I
E1-
CA FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 -3)
•
Decoded to select a GP register to serve as A entry register.
•
In the example, 1001 selects the GA register.
CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4 - 7)
•
Decoded to set Or reset specific status (ST) bits.
•
ONST21 sets ST(2) if the 0 bu.s is nonzero.
e ST(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by the CS field.
",
e The example (0000) does not set or reset any status bits.
m
op FIELD (BYTE
1, BITS 0 - 2)
FM
e Decoded to specify the ALU function to be performed.
e In the example, 011 is decoded as
A+B~O.
BYTE 0
This Address
0570
0
1
2
3
4
5
KKI
NO
BYTE 1
6
7
POI
2
3
4
1001000010110
1
CBICD FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 3 - 7)
NB
BYTE 3
BYTE 2
5
1
6
7
P
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
3
4
0
5
0
6
7
0
0
P
1
0
0
1
2
0
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
7
0
0
P
1
&B/CO
e Decoded to select a GP register to serve as a B entry and
destination register.
GC REG
e The initial contents of the selected register (bits 0-5) are
also placed in the low-order byte of the IAR.
e
2
10
3
4
5
6
7
In the example, '01101' selects the GC register.
IAR
0
o
Next Address
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
5
6
8
0
1
0
5
X X X X
X
0
9
12 13 14 15
X X 0 0
10 11
X
Format E Bit Assignment Chart
BYTE 0
0
1
2
CA
A Entry
Hex Value
in Field
4
5
0
GC
NO
NC
TO
TC
MO
MC
7
CS
Status
Set/Reset
A
B
NB
NA
l .... STl
ONST21
I .... ST3C
I .... STO
I .... ST5
I .... ST6
I .... ST7
0--:'14
O--STl
0--ST2
0-- ST3C
E
F
MB
~~
g=:H~
~
4
5
6
7
;
g
g~
MA
BYTE 2
BYTE'
6
0
1
2
OP
ALU Control
0 .... ST6
0 .... ST7
3
0
ME
4
5
6
CB/CO
7
0
1
2
1
0
0
FM KK NO
3
BYTE 3
4
1
5
6
7
0
1
2
Ignored
197:l, '973,1978
4
5
6
7
Ignored
NB
ADB-O
AeB·O
A'\tB·O
A+B.O
A+B"'C-OC
A-B+C·OC
A+ B.OC
A-B + I-DC.
SA
S8
SC
SO
g~
TB
NA
~.:
TO
MA
~~
BR
MC
MICROWORO FORMAT E IME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 00011)
© CopyrightlBM Corporation
3
B Entry and
Destination
1
0
1
3830-2
3
MIC 14
MICROWORO FORMAT F (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB· 00'11)
IXXOOO--2B~8
MICROWORO FORMAT F (ME, FM, KK, NO. NB = 00111)
MIC 15
A ~TG
•
Accomodates special operations required by CCU or user hardware.
!
Format F Example
FORMAT DECODE
f::::f;;:l::::::'!
Decoding of format F (ME, FM. KK, NO, NB = 00111) sets up the
~:i:t: : : : : ft:·!r}: {@,!m(}· lmr!{){tl':W!t:@r:::r}L-xxl
following controls (see CTRL 500):
• Blocks ingating of A register and outgating of D bus.
....
• Allows special Op fields to be decoded.
• Allows gating of CX field to IAR (8-11)
:
-
,O~8q
C O~Sl'7
': , : _ y
:('
~
1'sPl;C:OE
I
)
SPECIAL OP FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 2, 3 AND BYTE 1, BITS 4·7)
• Decoded to activate' of 64 special operation controls.
DNST21
00 -
EC
.. XX100 --2BIC
K=3
A
K-+'fG
.'.:Y
::
..'
ST7
Dl""b-XX.OO-Gll
G3'-'XX:(OO-GC
• The 3830 Model 2 utilizes 24 special operation codes.
• In the example, 001110 selects special operation 14. Gate check 2 conditions to NA Register.
CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4.7)
•
II
Decoded to set or reset specific status (5T) bits.
I
• DNST21 sets ST(2) if the D bus is nonzero.
FM KKIND
•
5T(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by C5 field,
•
The example (1111) resets 5T(7). Note that 5T(7) is reset after
its status is tested (item F).
BYTE 0
BYTE 1
01234567P012
34667PO
00001111100.00111000
:
II CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4 • 7)
II CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0·3)
•
Gated to bits 8·11 of IAR.
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to I.
•
In the example, 0001 sets IAR(12) to I unconditionally.
NB
BYTE 2
3466
000
~WI
2
BYTE 3
3
4 6
6
i
II CL FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4·7)
•
Senses
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to I.
•
In the example, OliO sets IAR(13) to I if 5T(7) = I upon enterin9
this microblock.
Q
hardware condition to determine a branch.
~:;.
SpOpO
Sp Op 1
SpOp2
SpOp3
SpOp4
Sp Op5
SpOp6
SpOp7
Sp Op8
SpOp9
Sp Op 10
Sp Op 11
Sp Op 12
Sp Op 13
Sp Op 14
Sp Op 15
Sp Op 16
Sp Op 17
Sp Op 18
Sp Op 19
Sp Op 20
Sp Op 21
Sp Op22
Sp Op 23
Sp Op 24
Sp Op 26
Sp Op 28
SpOp30
Pgm-Stop Statement
Chk-Stop Statement
Not Used
Error 2 Reset to User
Gate Read Error Pattern to NB
Reset Storage Error Register
Set Address Compare From SA & SB
INUN Online) Branch in CE Mode and
ILXEa (Data Entry) Branch in CE Mode
Stop MPL Operation
Start MPL Operation
Gate MPL Data to SD Reg via D Bus
Not Used
Not Used
Load ND Register
Gate Check 2 Conditions to NA Reg
Set CI Bus In Parity Error
CI Response End
CI Recycle/Load CI Buffer from TA
Gate Alternate Branch Condition
Set Inline Active Latch/Set Dev Branch
Reset Inline Active Latch/Reset Dev Branch
Unfreeze Channel Switch
Allow Disable A
Allow Disable B
Gate Comparison Assist Latches to MB
Freeze Channel Switch
Selective Reset After Check-'
Propagate Select Out
-
Format F Bit Assignment Chart
He" Value
in Field
D
ADDRO/MC6
sUPPO/XCHAN
ILACT & DEVI
E
F
·During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR
• .During IMPL BR3 replacad by BTRDY
.··Following Spec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INLIN
•• ··FollowingSpec Op 7, BR5 .&placed by ILXEQ
3830·2
MICROWORO FORMAT F (ME, FNI, KK. NO, N8,-001111
MIC15
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972,1973, 197B
"
!'~"
'.,
.:/
('\
<,---j
('\
"-
r'\
'----_.//
1'-",\
,
)
'-~/
,""'
-""
'-,
r '""
\,
/
(~
\~"-
.:/
I'
"-
'\
/
'\
j
,
.;
"
c'
j
/
y
/
"-
'-
I
,/
(/'",\
\
"
.
.:/
(
'"
;,'~
,
!-
~
'--"
/
(''",\
\
/
'.
'---_./
j
c
(
(
(
(
(
{
{
(
c
(
{
MICROWORO FORMAT 1 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 10100/10101/10000)
MICROWORO FORMAT 1 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB
Format 1c ~
Fetch/store, with data address update capability.
•
FORMAT DECODE
•
Format I a (lOIOO)--four-byte fetch. The four bytes of data ot
the oddress specified by DAR(0-13) ore fetched ond placed in
storage registers SA, SB, SC, SD.
Format Ib (IOIOI)--four-byte store. The data in SA, SB, SC,
SO is stored at the address specified by DAR(0-13).
•
•
Format I c (lOOOO)--one-byte fetch. The four bytes of data at
the address specified by DAR(0-13) are fetched, but only the one
byte indicated by DAR(l4, 15) is placed in the SA register. The
contents of SB, SC, SD remain unchanged.
•
Following the fetch or store operation, the djlt" .,-ldress is
updated by the ALU function K+B~B.
'
Decoding of format la, Ib, or Ic sets up the following controls
(see CTRL 5001:
• Allows gating of CK field to A registed4-71.
• Allows gating of GP registers to B register and to DAR(S-15).
•
Allows gating of 0 bus to GP registers.
•
Allows gating of CX field to IAR(8-1I).
•
•
II'!I
11;1
Sets zeros in DAR(I-4).
•
Ii'
•
ST(4) is set by hardware only; it connot be set by the CS field.
•
The example (0000) does not set or reset ony status bits.
ML FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS
Gated to bits 5-7 of DAR.
III •
0 - 2)
II
I
ME.Lr----.L-~F":":M---::K~K~1 ND
Th is Address 10
0 0 7 C 10
II
r:I
_
III
The initial contents of the selected register are also placed in the
low-order' byte of DAR.
•
In the example, 10110 selects the NB register.
•
If no register is selected, zeros are placed in the low-order byte
of DAR.
•
BITS
BYTE 1
3
4 5
1
0 1
2
0
-ML
4 -7)
Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR.
CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0 - 3)
• Senses a hardware condition to determine 0 branch.
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to I.
•
In the example, 0001 sets IAR(12) to I unconditionally.
CL FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 4 - 7)
• Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If sotisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to I.
•
In the exomple, 1000 tests for BR(3) being on.
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1978
C
/
FTCH4
E5-XXXOO-EE
6 7 pi 0
1 0 010
Format Configurations
BYTE 2
1
1
2
3
0
1
4
0
5 6 7
0 0 0
plo
CX
o
o
3
0
4
0
567
000
.--
'\
',,- .
-
(-'\
\....
~C'
""
\..
-"
\
~
./
"
-")
MIC17
(
r
\... /
'
..... ,./
./
\..
"
,(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(-
(
(
(
MICROWORD FORMAT 3 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 10010)
•
One-byte fetch.
•
Entire address is provided by the microword.
•
~Iocks gating of O-bus to
•
Allows gating of CX field to IAR (8-11).
GP registers.
•
Sets zeros in DAR (1-4).
•
Allows gating of ML field to DAR (5-7).
•
Allows gating of NL field to DAR (12-15).
NH FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 0 - 3)
•
Gated to bits 8-11 of DAR.
CS FIELD (BYTE 0, BITS 4·7)
•
Decoded to set or reset specific status (ST) bits.
•
ONST21 sets ST(2) if the O-bus is nonzero.
•
ST(4) is set by hardware only; it cannot be set by the CS field.
•
The example (0000) does not set or reset any status bits.
II'
ML FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 0·2)
..
•
Gated to bits 5-7 of DAR.
NL FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 4·7)
•
II
Gated to bits 12-15 of DAR.
CX FIELD (BYTE 2, BITS 4.7)
•
III
(
(
MIC 18
iI Ii m1J~"==~rc11 1I
D 0608-DAR
C
f'TCHl
i
j------------,--------I
Et-tf_moc+~
IL _______
m m --.J
I
I
I
I
I
MEl
Th is Address 10
35DC 10
1
0
2
3
BYTE 0
4 5
6
7
pI 0
0
000
0
0
1
r"v
I
II
I
a
a
I
1
1
l'
FM
BYTE 1
3
4 5
1
1 0
2
0
7
6
o0
plo
1
Ia
KKiND
BYTE 2
1
a
iii
3
a
I
4
a
5 6 7
1 1 a
I
8
9 10 11
a
a
0.6
a
a
5
6
7
pi 0
1
1
a
1
II
a
1
a
Ia
2
a
ml
CX
-
3
a
BYTE 3
4 5
a a
I
I
IAR
a 1
10 a
8
Next Address
2
1
3
1
I
4
a
3
5 ,6
7
1
1
a
I
10 11
1 1 1 a
8
5
7
pi
a
'1
I
I
I
I
CL
11
I
0
I
I~et
IAR(13) = 0)1
1
12 13 14 15
1 a a a
6
a
ml
CH
Iset'
)1
IAR(12) = 0
DAR
2
a
4
1
3
II
-~
1
a
2
1
I
NB
NL
ML
II
9
I
I
I
I
12 13 14 151
a a a 01
0
E
~
'---------Format 3 Bit Assignment Chart
Gated to bits 8-11 of IAR.
a
CH FIELD (BYTE 3, BITS 0·3)
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 12 to 1.
•
(
(
Format 3 Example
Decoding of format 3 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB = 10010) sets up
the followina controls (see eTR L 500):
Allows gating of NH field to A-register (4-7) and to DAR
(8-11).
(
MICROWORO FORMAT 3 (ME, FM. KK, NO, NB =10010)
FORMAT DECODE
•
c
(
In the example, 0000 sets IAR(12) to 0 unconditionally.
CL FIELD (BYTE 1, BITS 4.7)
•
Senses a hardware condition to determine a branch.
•
If satisfied, sets IAR bit 13 to 1.
•
In the example, 0000 sets IAR(13) to 0 unconditionally.
Hex Value
inField
l
BYTED
1 2 3 4 5 6
NH
CS
7
DAR bits
Status Set/Reset
8-11 and A
bus bits 4-7
1 --STl
1
DNST21
2
I __ ST3C
1 --STO
I--ST5
5
I-.ST6
6
I--ST7
o
+
+
9
g=:~~j
B
0-- ST2
0-- ST3C
o
g=:H~
A
C
E
F
0-- ST6
0-. ST7
a
1 2
ML
DAR
bits 5-7
BYTE 1
3
4
1
ME
5
6
NL
DAR bits
12-15
7
a
a
FM
1
a
KK
2
1
NO
BYTE 2
3
4 5 6
a
CX
N8
7
Bi Is 8-11 of IAR
a
1
2
3
BYTE 3
4 5
6
7
CH
Branch High
(lAR Bit 121
Branch Low
0
a
1
1
CL
(lAR Bit 13)
a
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Carry
D~a
STa
IndexeSTI
ST2
ST4
ST6
BRa
ST3C
ST5
ST7
BRI
BR2'
BR4'"
BR6
CHK·2
COMMO
AOORO/MC6
sUPPO/XCHAN
ILACT & DEV/
BOPAR
SR3"
BRS ....
BR7
SELTD/MC7
8
9
HLTIO/XFER
SERVO/MULTI
CUEND/BFRDV
RESPON/CHANB
C
A
B
0
E
F
"During IMPL BR2 replaced by SECTR •
• ·During IMPL BR3 replaced by BTRDY.
"" "Following Spec Op 7, BR4 replaced by INLIN •
•• ". Following Spec Op 7, BR5 replaced by ILXEQ.
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1978
MICROWORD FORMAT 3 (ME, FM, KK, NO, NB =10010)
MIC 18
(
MICROPROGRAM INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES (Part 1 of 21
MICROPROGRAM INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES (Part 1 of 2)
•
•
Add 4 froM emit field to
contents of NC. Place
results in NC register.
Update address for next
data
Examples of the standard microprogram block operatienare given.
Examples of some more difficult to understand microprogramming techniques are given.
XXXOO--2F08
,X1XOO--2F~ 8
K=7
04SA
K~GB
*
*
I
Set the SA register to all
zeros.
*
02(NC)~DAR
STORLi
•
Set the SA register with
the complement of 70 (185).
, XX100--1LilC
Kz 255
A
from 5A,
in control
storage.
XXXOO--1LiAC
K=-l
A
A K+MC4MCC
, Y.X100--13~4
A O-O+C-+GCC
I
C
*
O-+STlI
B
n,
I
ST7
I
JLi-XX*OO-JD
..;...;...:.::.:.:.:...;....•
A and B registers = O.
B register is complemented
to = 255. If ST3C = 1, GC
register is set to 0 and
ST3C is set to 1. If ST3C
= 0, GC register is set 255
and ST3C is reset to zero.
I
X0100--2LiLiLi
K=18
A K-SC+14D
;~
B
'_A_R::.0:T_3_'G':
........... .
:.:.;.:.:.:.:.;.:.:-:.:.:.:.::::::~:::.:.:.:.:.:
! OOXOO--OBLiO
K=O
D
A
I
XOXOO--2F20
I
N9-X'lOO-NJ
TEST IF DEVICE
INTERRUPT TO
RESET
G6-XX·00-GF
Add 255 from emit field to
the contents of the MB reg·
ister plus a carry of one if
ST3C=1 and place results in
MB. If ST3C=O an entry, MB
is decreased by 1. If ST3C=O
on entry and MB=O, ST3C Is
not turnad on. If ST3C=1 on
entry, MB is not changed. ST3C
is turned off if there is no carry.
ST3C is turned an if there Is
a carry.
,XXXOO--17EO
,
A 1IIA-SD+14D
ST3=1
C DNST21
B STO
B CARRY
F 2
JLi-X*XOO-JD
INT~;RRUPTS GONEDELAY BEFORE
SN4PLING
1-1
<+0."."
I
L4-X·XOO-LD
DUMMY WORD TO
FORCE CARRY
Cor~PARE
Add the complement of the
contents of SO to the
contents of NA register
plus a forced carry in of 1 .
Place resu Its on the D bus.
Add one to contents of
GA register and place
result in GA. Loop in
this block until carry out
sets CARRY.
XXXOO--1Li9Li
K=-O
!
Add complement of zero
(255) to zero plus carry of
1 (ST3C = 1) and set ST3C
to 1. This is done to force
a carry branch in the next
block.
If 0 bus is not zero ST2 is
set to 1.. If D bus is zero
ST2 is unchanged.
X1XOO--2FSC
A
XXXOO--2F70
*
2
QLi-XX100-OD
OR BIT SIG ADDRESS
OF PACK CHANGE'
INTERRUPTS
OR contents of GA and NB
registers. Place results in
NB register. OR gives a
1 output if either input is 1 .
XXXOO--OC38
! K=OOOOlOOl-A
I
I
D 02 (GD)4DAR
*
C
FTCHl
02C8-+DAR
*
C O-+ST3C FTCHl
F 2
F 2
F 2
GLi-XX100-GD
UPDATE ADDRESS TO
RESET RESERVED
BUSY TO, AND
INTERRUPT BYTES
FOR RESETTING
CHANNEL.
E6-XXXOO-EF
FETCH BUSY TO
BYTES
L7-XXXOO-LG
FETCH BUSY TO
CHANNEL A BYTE
A K¥GD-+GD
TOGETHER
AND contents of GA ard SA
registers. Place results on
the 0 bus. 0 = 0 branch
checks the result in the next
block. AND gives a 1 output if both inputs are 1.
o is placed in ST2.
XOXOO--OC80
K=l
A
K+GA-+GA
0~ST5
Add an emitted zero to
zero. Set MC register to
zero. Turn off ST3C as
there can be no carry out
(MC"C").
XXOOO--2F78
1
C
07-01XOO-OG
ZERO STATUS
A GA.!1. NB4NB
*
I
I
BR3
L5-0X*OO-LE
WRITE
CHECK FILE MASK
FOR ALLOW NO
WRITE
,
D
I
A K+04MCC
*
to contents of SC
register and place results
on 0 bus only. "C" causes
ST3C to be turned on if
there is a carry out of ALU.
B STLi
ST4 is turned on by the
data transfer circuits when
a new byte is ready or
wanted. Loop in this block
until ST4 = 1.
K=32
I
*-
I
XX100--105Li
A K+SC-+DC
CARRY is ~et by~~~rry
out of the ALU. If turned
on in a block it stays on
for the first part of the
next block for branching.
ST3C is set by a carry out
of a ALU operation if
"C" is added to D bus
statement. ST3C stays on
until reset by 0~ST3C or
no carry out of ALU wifh
"C" statement. For both
CARRY and ST3C, branch
condition is result of conditions set up before
entering block.
I
A
I
,
•
0=0
B
Add the contents of GA
register to the contents of
GA and place results in GA
register. (GA has outputs
to both A and B bus.)
the DAR to address
control storage on 0 doto
cycle. Address is hex
02xx, "xx" is contents of
NC register on entry to
this block.
K+MB+C~MBC
I
*
N4-XXXOO-ND
SHIFT SAMPLER
register to
zero. No input from. A or
B register to the ALU.
Set branch low candition
if the D bus was zero in
the last block.
I XX100--2F!4
A GA+GA-+GA
·1
1
L4-XXXOO-LD
RESET MPL FILE
E8-XXXOO-EH
Set the GB register = 7
from the emit field (K).
1
A K+NC-+NC
*
1
N3-XX*00-NC
XXXOO--2F80
!K-4
A O+O-+TG
D=O
B
N6-xXXOO-NF
t XXXOO--04!O
, OXXOO--1Li8C
K=-70
A
K-+SA
A
MIC 30
*
I
1
I
I
"2" Indicates that this
block is used on two channel
sw itch feature on Iy .
Exclusive OR nine from emit
field with contents of GO
register. Place results in
GO register. Exclusive OR
gives a 1 output if one and
only one input is 1. In this
example bits 4 and 7 of the
GO register will be inverted.
3
Address control storage at
hex 02C8. ST3C is set to O.
Read four bytes out of
control storage. Place
the byte selected by the
two low order bits of DAR
in the SA register.
3830·2
© Capyright IBM Corporation1g72, 197B
MICROPROGRAM INSTRUCTION EXAMPLES (Part 1 of 21
(,\,
~
./
".
/,r-"
('
",----/1
".
\
J
./
,,;
./
(
"\
\.
/'
/--,
MIC30
~~~~~---~
-.r.:,.".
"'-/
1'('
(~""
<:
('
L
(
(
(~
(-
f
(
(.
(-
(
(
(--
('
(
(-
(-
(
(
(
(-
I XXXOO--2FA40
. AI
K~GC
C2-XXXOO-CB
SET SAMPLER
ADDRESS
Set up GC register to use it
as
Q
counter.
•
r~:'l\1
IU;
:,:::~
GC· GA~D
I XXXOO--2F4D4
.---i
C3-XXXOO-cc
TEST FOR ADDRESS
COHPARE
Check counter (GC) with
contents of GA (only one
bit is on), Stoy in loop
until equal (0 bus I 0).
GC+GC+GC
",""
y HS~,~,'J,,'D=O
I
ClI."."...,'lTD
DROP OP-OUT
053C
RAISE OP-OUT
SPEC I 15
UNFREEZE
CHANNEL. SWITCH
INDICATE FIRST
PASS
0550
05CO
0534
I->STO
RAISE OP-OUT
05B8
0574
D
0554
5-_...:.I-.;>~T~E;.;7_ _-I
CHAN D AL.L.OW
DISABL.E
DROP SEL.ECT-OUT
AND HOL.D-OUT
05F8
04DO
OIIOP OUT - TA(;S
EXCEPT OP-OUT
043C
BRANCH TO
SUBROUTINE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUTINE ADOIIESS
123&4777
I C80400
1 of 2 _
Seq
,."N_
ROUTINE 80 'Part 1 of 2)
MICFL 20
ROUTINE 60 (Part 20f 2)
IJOUTINE 80 (Par:t 2 of 2)
MICFL 25
BRANCH TO
'01500'
RA I SE OP-OUT
PLACE OVERLAY IN
0000 TO RETURN IF
SELECTIVE RESET
CAUSES A SYSTEM
RESET
BRANCH TO
'2000'
I->TOO 1->T0!5
RAISE
OP-OUT AND
SI.I'PRESS-OUT
YES
O->TOO
DROP OP-OUT
44
I->TOO
RA I SE OP-OUT
3830-2:
ROUTINE 80 (Part 2 of 2)
o o
00
0'. '\ 0'-'"
..
.
o o
()OOOOOO
o
MICFL 25
000 000000000
.--~---.~-
(-
(-
(
(
(
-,
-------~---~~-~.-
(-
(
---
(--
(
(
(
(
(
("
(~
(~
(-'
(
(~-
(~
(
ROUTINE 82
ROUTINE 62 (Part 1 of 2)
(-
(~
'''rt
1 of 21
(
(- (-
"
,"
MICFL 30
RA I SE HOLD OUT
04F"C
O->TG
CHAN A 18 DIIOP
REQUEST-IN
o
C
O-.TE
CHAN C 10 DIIOP
IIEQUEST IN
0414
2210
DESELECT AND
PROTECT NA
REGISTER
2214
0411
I->TDO
ENA8LE CU-ENO B
RA ISE OP-OUT
AND RESET
OUT-TAGS
041C
2218
O-.TC
I ->TEO
RESET IN-TAGS
CHAN 0 RAISE
REQUEST-IN
4
221C
SPEC.03
1->T80
RESET CHECK-2
ENABLE CU-ENO C
RA I SE SELECT
OUT
0424
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
2231
SPEC. 15
2240
1->TC3
\»FREEZE
CHAMEL S.,TCH
O->TE
RAISE OP-IN
CHAN C 10 DROP
REQUEST-IN
2220
ENABLE CU-ENO 0
2248
~Cro
WICFL
35
MICFL MICFL
35
35
MICF"L 35
3830-2
ICB0500
.... 1of2
I~~ I ~1~~8~37~04~~~7~2~______~______~______~______~______~____
--J
ROUTINE 82
'''rt
1 of 21
MICFL 30
("-
(~
ROUTINE 82 (Part 2 of 2)
ROUTINE 62 (Part 2 of 2)
ERROR COOE
ERROR CODE
6284/6285
62"0/62"1
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
6288/62119
102116162"9
ERROR COOE
ERROR CODE
62"C/62AD
6290/6291
1->T85
ENA8LE CU-ENo C
ERROR CODE
628C/628D
1->T80,1
RAISE
SELECT-OUT "NO
HOLD-OUT
ERROR CODE
62CCl102CD
ERROR CODE
62CO/62CI
22DC
22E8
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
102C411o2C5
ENA8LE CU-END 8
6294/6295
10280/6281
62911/10299
ENA8LE CU-END 0
ERROR CODE
10200/10201
ERROR CODE
102Clll1o2C9
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
MICFL 35
2204
228C
ERROR CODE
10284/6285
MICFL 30
MICFL 30
MICFL 30
ROUTINE 82 (Part 2 of 2)
)
f"'''''
~;;
0-·' 0·· ·,'·
\.
"'--
{,
"
o
o
('"0·'
.,.
o
00
o
00000
()
o o
MICFL 35
00000
o
000
"---
.~\
---~--
~(
(-
(
(-
(
(
(--
(
(
(-
(-
(:--
(-
(
(
(-
("-
f-
(-'
(-
(
(-
(-
(
ROUTINE 64 (Part 1 of 3)
A
('
(--
(-
("--
(-- --{"\
("
MICFL 40
AI
SINGLE CHANNEL
O->NA
START ROUTINE
64
IHOUSEKEEPING)
RESET 8US-OUT
INA REGI
I
RAISE HOLD-OUT
TWO CHANNEL SWITCH
ADDITIONAL MACHINE
0530
SINGLE CHANNEL
MACHINE
O->TA
SELECT
CHANNEL ISH)
ERROR CODE
ZERO BUS-OUT
6404/6405
042C
05C4
AlB
O->TG
SPEC: 03
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
RESET CHECK-2
049C
I
(
ROUTINE 64 (Part 1 of 3)
TWO CHANNEL
ADDITIONAL
CID
(
RAISE OP-IN
04AC
t
O->TE
SPEC: 15
CHAN CID DROP
REQUEST-IN
UNFREEZE
CHANNEL
I
04AO
04CC
t
O->TB
DROP SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT. PROTECT
NA REGISTER
GA->IAR
BRANCH TO
SUBROUTINE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUTINE ADDRESS
04A4
I
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
ERROR CODE
6418/6419
0430
048C
~
I->TDO
RAISE OP-OUT
0538
0468
I->TEO
01--..;.....;.;;.;.----1
CHAN 0 RAISE
REQUEST-IN
041C
ICFL 45
_F4-M ICFL 45
4-FO-M ICFL 50
_ _...J._ _ _. ,
'5_EC-M ICF L
~_F8-M
O->TE
CHAN CID DROP
REQUEST-IN
ERROR CODE
641C/641D
0438
-3
1
0474
5'1l0~
O->TC
I->TBO
RESET IN-TAGS
RAISE
SELECT-OUT
05A8
ERROR CODE
6420/6421
2580
ERROR CODE
6422/6423
1
0488
O->MD
ZERO BUS-IN IMD
REGI
I
WILL BE
CHECKED LATER
05AO
Part No. (8)
©
CHECK FOR
SELECT-IN UP
AND SAVE
258C
2354779
3830-2
INDEX
--
Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
I IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROUTINE 64 (Part 1 of 3)
MICFL 40
ROUTINE 64 (Part 2 of 3)
F8
ROUTINE 64 (Part 2 of 3)
ICFL 40
MICFL 45
40
04F8
l
l
1->TC3
SELECT
CHANNEL
15T6.7)
,
t ->TG3
CID
CHAN A RAISE
SUPPRESS
REQUEST-IN
1.1!.
O->TG
CHAN BRAISE
SUPPRESS
REQUEST-IN
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
0504
1..Eo
L..E.
SPEC.
Q->TE
1->T87
CHAN C RAISE
SUPPRESS
REQUEST-IN
CHAN C I 0 DROP
REQUEST-IN
ENABLE NA
REGISTER
1-~TEt
25E4
1
REQUEST-IN
UP INDII
YES
NO
-,
(
ERROR COOE
6424/6425
0510
)
0584
25EO
INCREMENT
BUS-OUT
2534
NO
,r
ERROR COOE
6426/6.27
)
NO
25EtTH PASS
2514
2524
YES
COMMAND-OUT
,UP ICOMMOI
YES
INCREMENT
BUS_IN
I +T"->T"
I
05FC
2560
DROP ADDRESS-IN
1->T80
RAISE
SELECT-OUT
BUS-IN EQUALS
ZERO IFROM
HOUSEKEEP I NG I
tTA=NAI
0->TC4
ADDRESS-IN
UP IND21
YES
0574
2560
2530
REQUEST-IN
050C
PROTECT NA
REGISTER
DATA
SENT EQUALS
DATA RECE I YEO
2504
0528
CH~MR~~pE
I
"
NO
II
I
•
BUS-OUT
PAR I TV ERROR
I BOPARI
YES
1->TE3
I
ERROR CODE
642C/642D
RAISE
COMMAND-OUT
0520
0508
(
257C
I
I->TGI
YES
NO
'RAISE
ADDRESS-IN
AlB
"'\
./
25E8
1->TC4
SELECT
CHANNEL IST61
0500
ERROR CODE
642A/642B
I
0518
I..!.
(
BUS-OUT EQUALS
ZEROS IFROM
HOUSEKEEP I NG I
RAISE OP-IN
2510
NO
-,
f
ERROR CODE
6428/6429
)
2578
A8
Q->TC5
DROP STATUS-IN
2520
0550
0->TC6 0:->TC7
RAISE
DROP COMMAND
OUT
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
MICFL 40
051c
I
I ->TC3
1->lBI
,
1 ->Te4
RAISE OP-1N AND
ADDRESS-IN
RAISE HOLD-OUT
T
2424
2434
2510
0500
AlB
O->TG
CHAN c/o DROP
REQUEST-IN
2408
3830-2
437408
447460
16 Ol:t ,72-
19 Dec 75
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
CHAN A I B DROP
REQUEST-IN
2400
ROUTINE 64 !Part 2 of 31
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
MICFL 45
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
j)
'"
'" ' --~-O"-O'
0, "', 0 0 0
()
o
0'
'~
"
o o
CJ"
r)',
~)
r",
~j
r)'
""
I"'"~
i"-Yi
C)
()
o
0
(/'",,!
~
(~
"--.Y
()
(-
(-
(-
(-
(-
(
(
(
(
ROUTINE 64 (Part 3 of 3)
f
(
(
MICFL 50
ROUTINE 64 (Part 3 of 3)
45
MICFL40
AI
RAJ SE
SUPPRESS-OUT
ZERO
ADDRESS
1- ___
280C
O-SR
<
ZERO
SWITCHES
ERROR CODE
MA->SO
6464
2810
SAMEAS~
FIRST
~
ERROR CODE
)
64_6_2_ _,
STORE CU
ADDRESS IN 0603
2414
SELECT SEQUENCE
ADDRESS IN GB
REGISTER
2830
SAVE
FIRST
ADDRESS
X'40' ... BR
SAVE
FIRST
ADDRESS
K=8
K + GB-GB
SET SELECTED
2908
8/0 SWITCH 'ON'
2970
2910
BUMP
ADDRESS
X'80' ... SR
SET SELECTED
AIC SWITCH 'ON'
2960
ERROR CODE
6401
ERROR CODE
6466
STORE CU
ADDRESS IN 0603
STORE CU
ADDRESS IN 0&02
2414
ERROR CODE
6468
MICFl 40
O->TC4
DROP ADDRESS-IN
3830-2
437408
1 16 Oct 72
447460
19 Dec 75
MICFL 40
MICFL 40
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1975
646A
646E
646C
MICFL 40
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
248C
ROUTINE 64 (Part 3 of 3)
MICFL 50
ROUTINE 66 (Part 1 of 2)
~START lobROUTINE
IHOUSEKEEPINGI
RUNNING
CHANNEL A/C
IST-71
M
YES
SD->TA
SC->TA
PLACE CHAN A/C
ADDRESS ON
BUS-OUT
,
O->TC
YES
bbOC/6600
BUS-OUT
PARITY ERROR
I BOPAR I
0440
0478
NO
ERROR CODE
6610/6bll
0418
YES
1
1->TD4
RAISE
ADDRESS-OUT
0488
NO
I
\.
0560
J
SPEC: 03
COMMAND-OUT
UP I COMMO I
RESET CHECK-2
0494
YES
1->TC3
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
RAISE OP-IN
0534
ADDRESS-OUT
UP IADDROI
0424
HALT-I/O UP
IHLTIOI
YES
r
\.
ERROR CODE
6604/6605
SELECT-IN
UP I INDEX 1
0426
0424
NO
NO
YES
ERROR CODE
6618/6619
ADDRESS
SENT EQUALS
ADDRESS RCVD
IMA=GB)
0454
04CO
YES
NO
\
RESET BUS-OUT
REGISTER
r
NO
\.
ERROR CODE
6624/6625
NA REGISTER
PROTECTED
NO
0470
YES
DROP ADDRESS
OUT
0430
AODRESS-IN
UP IND2)
I
NO
0590
0498
61028/6629
ALLOW NA
REGISTER
058C
04EO
049C
1
cv
MICFL 60
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
437408 il447460
1 ~6 Oct 72' 19 Dec 75
ROUTINE 66 (Part 1 of 2)
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
1
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1912, 1915
o o o o
b63C/663D
1->TB7
ERROR CODE
0450
0410
0 , 0 J,4"'"
1,.
ERROR CODE
\
tNA=G8J
1->TB7
3830-2'
04AO
0590
O->NA
ERROR CODE
661C/661D
ALLOW NA
I
ERROR CODE
6638/6639
0590
0460
YES
0490
.r
0->TD4
ERROR CODE
6608/6609
0428
NO
0468
04EO
NO
WAS NA
REGISTER
PROTECTED
.NA=OI
r
YES
04CO
NO
BRANCH TO
SUBROUTINE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUTINE ADDRESS
II
RAISE
COMMAND-OUT
PLACE 'FF' ON
BUS-OUT
043C
'CO'->TB
GA->IAL
SPEC:
tFF'->TA
0458
OS88
!
1
ERROR CODE
6614/6615
D43C
'CO'->TD
0544
IA
FREEZE CHANNEL
SWITCH
0488
R A I SE OP-OUT
AND RESET
OUT-TAGS
O->TB
,
SPEC:
1
DESELECT AND
PROTECT NA
REGISTER
)
044C
RAISE
ADDRESS-IN
DROP SELECT-OUT
AND PROTECT NA
REGI STER
0408
052C
0538
ERROR CODE
b61A/b61B
1->TC4
O->TBO 0->TB7
O->MD
SPEC: 03
\.
0444
ZERO DEVICE
ADDRESS
RESET CHECK-2
r
YES
0478
cu SELECTED
.SELTDI
RESET BUS-OUT
REGISTER
0528
ERROR CODE
0438
O->NA
DROP IN-TAGS
\.
CU ADDRESS
SENT EQUALS
ADDRESS RECEIvED
INA=GBI
041C
04FC
I
I
NO
NO
PLACE CHANNEL
B/D ADDRESS ON
BUS-OUT
100
A
ADDRESS-OUT
UP .ADDROI
NO
04FC
YES
MICFL 55
ROUTINE 66 (Part 1 of 2)
\,
0
\J
()
I"
"
"""~
(
'I
~
;f'"~
I
)
'-
0 0 0
\
'/r'l
,0
~y
(""'~
~y
r)
\...
I
•,
"
0 0
F-~
U
;r"'.
() "'-
I)
"
() ~-E)
/,
:F.~
[
,
",-y
,,,,,~
I
y
"-..
0
..
(,
('"'l\1
0
0, j
MICFL 55
,f"',!\
iJ
,c~
;
./
~,
I
1"-__ ./,,
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
{
(
ROUTINE 66 (Part 2 of 2)
ROUTINE 66 (Part 2 of 2)
YES
O->TC3
ERROR CODE
ERROR COOE
MICFL 60
DROP OP- IN
bb56/bb59
bb40/bb41
2b46
0480
0->TD4 O->TDb
ERROR CODE
6646/bb49
DROP
ADDRESS-OUT ANO
COMMAND-OUT
bbbC/b66C
YES
2626
NO
2bE4
ERROR CODE
6676/6677
ERROR CODE
bb2C/bb2D
ERROR CODE
RAISE
ADDRESS-OUT
NO
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
bb5C/bb5D
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
6610/6671
2748
2b5C
26AO
YES
ERROR CODE
RESET CHECK-2
2668
ERROR CODE
DROP HOLD-OUT
6b4C/664D
2624
6674/6675
26E8
0>TD5
DROP SUPPRESS-OUT
Q
0>TD6
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
b642/bb43
DROP SELECT-HOLD
6b50/6b51
2634
-AA-
BUS- IN
ON
bbbO/bbbl
MICFL 55
2b16
LOAD
ERROR CODE
2728
2664
272C
RAISE
ADDRESS-IN
DROP STATUS-IN
2bllC
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
RAISE STATUS-IN
bbb4/bbb5
6652/bb53
2666
2b36
ERROR CODE
ERROR CODE
ERROR COOE
6644/6645
b6b6/bb69
bb54/bb55
2608
2640
2610
RAISE
SUPPRESS-OUT
3830-2
437408
16 Oct 72
447462
5 Nov 76
ROUTINE 66 (Part 2 of 2)
MICFL 60
ROUTINE II
ROUTINE 68
START ROUTINE
1>11
I HOUSEKEEPINGI
INCREMENT
ADDRESS COUNTER
+11>
ZERO CU ADDRESS
COUNTER
MICFL65
ERROR CODE
1>808/1>1109
0418
SPEC:
NB->TA
15
UNFREEZE
CHANNEL SWITCH
LOAD ADDRESS TO
BUS-OUT
1>800
04EC
0444
RAISE OP-OUT
AND DROP
OUT-TAGS
0438
RESET IN-TAGS
PLACE ADDRESS
COUNTER ON
BUS-OUT
0410
ERROR CODE
b81 0 Ib81 ,
04A8
O->TB
04BC
1->TD4
DROP SELECT-OUT,
RAISE
ADDRESS-OUT
PRO~~~~-~~TRE~7~TER
04CO
I->TBO ,'->TBI
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
0484
CODE 6804
BRANCH TO
';UBROUT I NE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUT I NE A~ORE S~,
0548
MLM0002 437408
MICFL-b5_R
-----bl!Er---JFL_" 127172
-----bl!X----JFL_"
437408
16 Oct 72
3830-2
121172
447462
5 Nov 76
ROUTINE 68
0 0 0 0
0,
~
0
'J
r~
::,'
',,-y
!
1""-'
" 0,
\,J/
~'
0 0 0
r""\
~
0 0 0
----
-
-
----
0
"
0
0
~
U
r~
J
r~
,,-y
r~
''J
I~I
~
r'\>
v
J
0 0 0 0
MICFL 65
,~
~jJ
0
{"-""
Vi
0
,.,r"\.,
'
\
~y
(-
(-
(
(-
(~
(-
(
(
(--
(
(
(
(
(
ROUTINE 6A (Part 1 of 3)
ROUTINE 6A CPart 1 of 3)
JP'
II
04F"C
START ROUTINE
loA
(HOUSEKEEPING)
J
1->TC5
O->TBO O->TBI
RAISE STATUS-IN
DROP SELECT-OUT
AND HOLD-OUT
<>-~
UNF"REEZE
CHANNEL SWITCH
0->TD4
OROP
ADDRESS-OUT
ST7 = I
04AO
RAISE OP-OUT
AND RESET
OUT-TAGS
!
04E8
YES
SC->TA
O->TG
PLACE CHANNEL
BID ADDRESS ON
BUS-OUT
A/C ADDRESS ON
PLACE CHANNEL
UNBLOCK CHANNEL
SWITCH
BUS-OUT
0424
0418
1->TD4
RESET CHECK-2
ERROR CODE
6AOC/6AOD
04A4
'\
NO
STATUS-IN
DOWN INDOI
0518
0414
YES
0514
1
CHAN A RAISE
REQUEST-IN A
RAISE OP-IN
0440
,
0450
CID
CHAN BRAISE
REQUEST-IN B
l
......
045C
1->TC3
1->TGO
~
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
1->TG2
l
0594
C
RAISE
ADDRESS-OUT
L
050C
SD->TA
041C
<$>
'CO'->TB
CHANNEL
0594
I
04E8
SPEC, 15
,
75
B4
1->TC5
SELECT
CHANNEL
0444
RAISE STATUS-IN
054C
AlB
1
1->TE2
O->TG
1->TD6
CHAN C RAISE
REQUEST-IN C
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
l
I
0448
0460
05A4
1
t
SPEC.
'CO'->TB
RESET BUS-OUT
04A8
RESET CHANNEL
CID TAGS
UNF"REEZE
CHANNEL SWITCH
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
04BC
15
051C
0430
1
RESET IN-TAGS
04AC
STATUS-IN
UP INDO)
BRANCH TO
SUBROUTINE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUTINE ADDRESS
YES
O->TB
I
NO
\
ERROR CODE
6A04/&A05
DESELECT
0504
052C
DATA RECEIVED
EQUALS DATA SENT
IGB=IIAI
NO
ERROR CODE
6A08/6A09
05E4
0500
I
0->TC5
CHAN 0 RAISE
REQUEST-IN 0
CHAN C/O OROP
REQUEST-IN
DROP STATUS-IN
044C
,
-
1->TB6
0438
I
0488
I
'20'->110
DROP
SERVICE-OUT
05AO
CU-END UP
I CUEND I
NO
0541:
0->TD6
PLACE CU-END
STATUS ON
BUS-IN
C
CHAN B ENABLE
CU-END B
0468
I
r<$>
OROP IN-TAGS
0508
04B4
O->TE
l
O->TC
DESELECT AND
PROTECT NA
REGISTER
I->TEO
CHANNEL
1
;:':'1
.!...~
......
MICFL 70
YES
.~
05A4
IIICF"L 75
05AO
YES
...
RESET CHANNEL
TAGS
04B8
I
r
3830-2 i
1->TB5
1437408
16 Oct 72
I
ERROR COOE
6AI0/6Ali
CHAN C ENABLE
CU-ENO C
0454
0548
I->TB~
CHAN 0 ENABLE
CU-END 0
I
0458
l
ROUTINE 6A (Part 1 of 3)
MICFL 70
ROUTINE 6A (Part 2 of 3)
ROUTINE 6A (Part 2 of 3)
MICFL 75
ICFL 70
ERROR CODE
&AI4/&AI5
UNFREEZE
CHANNEL SWITCH
0534
INDICATE
SUBROUTINE F4
RUNNING
0554
RAISE OP-IN
SC->TA
PLACE CHANNEL
AIC ADDRESS ON
BUS-OUT
0484
PLACE CHANNEL
BID ADDRESS ON
BUS-OUT
0480
RETURN TO
HOUSEKEEP I NG
A
'OE'->TG
CHAN B,C,D
BLOCK CHANNEL
SWITCH
2A24
B
1->TD4
RAISE ADDRESS
OUT
FREEZE CHANNEL
SWITCH
0420
'OO'->TG
ERROR CODE
I>AIC'I>AID
sE~~~ ~~~~EL
SWITCH
0558
05CO
2A20
C
'OB'->TG
SET 'Fa' IN GA
REGISTER
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
FREEZE CHANNEL
SWITCH
sE~~~ ~~~~L
SWITCH
0570
2A2C
D
MICFL 70
'Ol'->TG
INDICATE
BEGINNING
SECOND PASS
0570
ERROR CODE
&AI8/1>AI9
CHAN A,B,C
BLOCK CHANNEL
SWITCH
NO
-IO'->T8
ND
RAISE LONG
SELECT AND DROP
SELECT-OUT
055C
SC->TA
LOAD CHANNEL
BUS-OUT
2A30
AIC ADDRESS ON
LOAD CHANNEL
BID ADDRESS ON
BUS-OUT
2A34
DROP IN-TAGS
057C
~I
3830·2
o
'0
o
I
ROUTINE 6A (Part 2 of 3)
00 O 0 , 0""" C--)
':
},
)'f·"
':
~'
oo
000
()
o
o
o
MICFL 75
0' ,0 0,
\~
"
'
,
,,',
o
Jtf"""
r\;,.,-,
(
(
(--
(
(
(--
(
(
(
ROUTINE 6A (Part 3 of 3)
ROUTINE 6A (Part 3 of 3)
MICFL 80
y:::' '"
O->I'IA
RESET BUS-OUT
REGI STER
2AFO
PLACE "FF" ON
BUS-OUT
2A48
RAISE
COMMAND-OUT
E,RROR CODE
bA40/bA41
2A5C
ERROR CODE
bA44/bA45
2AbO
MICFL 70
3830·2
43'7408
1
©
16 Oct 72
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1975
! 447460
19 Dec 75
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROUTINE 6A (Part 3 of 3)
MICFL 80
ROUTINE 6C (Part 1 of 8)
MICFL 90
START ROUTINE~ MICFL !IIi
IoC
•
MICFL 110
IHOUSEKEEPINGI
cy
AlB
ROUTINE 6C (Part 1 of 8)
84
MI~r
T
fc);ICFL 120
M~~
2C54
~
SELECT
CHANNEL 1STIl I
SELECT
CHANNEL
15T',71
CIO
O->TCi
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
0!10
1--
CHANNEL
ISTIo,71
1->TCiii!
CHAN A RAISE
REQU£ST-IN
12-
0->TCi2
CHAN A DROP'
REQUEST-IN
I
01120
01120
,
1->TCiO
!---i c~~~urs~~I~E
1
0"5T4
'01 '->TB
DESELECT AND
ALLOW NA RECi
!---i
I
"--Iii
I
lrU'I
1->TEii!
CHAN C RAISE
REQU£ST-IN
051C
'CO'->TO
RAISE OP-OUT
AND DROP
OUT-TAGS
0514
~
~
01l2S
,
...E.
OlllC
052S
(
2000
RETURtlorFROM
SUBRO INE
'07'->MO
SET GB REGISTER
FOR TEST CC
1->TCl
RAISE OP-IN
2004
1->T07
RAISE DATA-OUT
LOAD SECOND
BYTE INTO
BUFFER A
2024
200C
2020
011110
YES
CHECK
SERVICE-OUT
SET TEST
PATTERN
200C
'CO'->TO
RAISE OP-OUT
AND DROP
OUT-TACiS
01l5C
20011
2010
'01'->MO
LOAD SECOND
BYTE INTO
BUFFER B
2034
SPECIOl
RESET CHECK-2
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
0564
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
LOAD FIRST BYTE
INTO BUFFER B
'A4'->BR
2D2C
-----------
052C
P0'
2_F8- MICFL
3_F4- MICFL
4_FO- MICFL
EC - MICFL
_E8MICFL
,-E4- MICFL
_EO- MICFL
II
DC - MICFL
r-
-
o
90
95
100
105
105
110
110
110
ROUTINE 8C (Part 1 of IN
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
00 0 0 0
~
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MI CFL I 15
~
© Copyright IBM Corporation lin. 1975
000000
2008
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
'21 1 447460
19 Dec 75
U7401
SET TEST
PATTERN
2010
GA->IAL
BRANCH TO
SUBROUTINE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUTINE ADDRESS.
FC
I
. I 1. Oct
'FO'->MO
LOAD FIRST BYTE
INTO BUFFER A
SET TEST
PATTERN
O->TEO
CHAN 0 DROP
REQUEST IN
I
'CO'->TB
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
0554
3830-2i
01124
0->TE2
CHAN C DROP
REQUEST-IN
I
I->TEO
CHAN 0 RAISE
REQUEST-IN
I
O->TCiO
CHAN • DROP
REQU£5T-IN
YES
SET CHANNEL
READ MODE
SET TEST
PATTERN
O->TE
CHAN CIO DROP
REQUEST-IN
120
2CCC
54
2C84
MICFL 85
o o ()
0
o o o
o o
MICFL 85
0000
(-
(-
(
(-
(
(-
(
(
{'
(
ROUTINE 6C (Part 2 of 8)
ROUTINE 8C (Pert 2 of 8t
III
ICFL 120
2CB4
CCO
1->TD6
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
ND->IID
LOAD FIRST BYTE
INTO BUFFER B
YES
2CB4
MICFL 90
120
RESET CHECK-2
20511
1->TC5
RAISE STATUS-IN
20011
20311
CHECK
SERVICE-OUT
20311
INDICATE START
SECOND PASS
2044
0->ST3
RESET SECOND
PASS INDICATOR
I->TCI
SET CHAN READ
IIODE
2014
'oe'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
'AA'->MD
LOAD FI RST BYTE
INTO BUFFER A
2054
1->TC4
RAISE
ADDRESS-IN
DROP STATUS-IN
2D5C
ZCBII
DROP ADDRESS-IN
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET GB FOR
SECOND PASS
20411
COIlMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
IIICFL 115
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET TEST
PATTERN
RESET CHECK-2
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
2098
2018
LOAD ADDRESS OF
NEXT TEST
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL II"
1->5TO 'A4'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
COIIMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
IIICFL 115 '
20911
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
SPECI03
RESET CHECK-2
20911
RAISE
COMMAND-OUT
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
MICFL 115 .
2DEC
2D7C
RAISE DATA-OUT
2064
RESET
COMMAND-OUT
2D6C
3830·2
ROUTINE
Ie (Pert 2 of 8t
MICFL 90
- - - - - .... - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ROUTINE 6C (Part 3 of 8)
ROUTINE8C (Part 3 of 8)
MICFL95
120
RESET CHECK-2
SET TEST
PATTERN
2058
2080
LOAO SECOND
BYTE INTO
BUFFER B
1->TC5
RAISE STATUS-IN
2008
DROP STATUS-IN
RAISE
ADDRESS-IN
LOAD LAST BYTE
INTO BUFFER B
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
2DC4
2CB4
O->TCb
RESET
COMMAND-OUT
2D5C
I->STO '82'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
'08'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
2DbC
SET CHANNEL
WRITE MODE
2054
YES
2EI0
• IF' ->TA
RESET CHECK-2
LOAD FIRST BYTE
IN BUFFER A
2E04
2DCO
0->TC4
DROP ADDRESS-IN
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
SET TEST
PATTERN
2E2C
I->STO 'E5'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
SET TEST
PATTERN
2E08
2E30
RESET CHECK-2
RESET CHECK-2
2098
2098
RAISE
COMMAND-OUT
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
I->STO '8C'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
2DFC
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
RAISE DATA-OUT
2DbO
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
2E34
1->TD7
RAISE DATA-OUT
SET GB FOR TEST
94
2098
A
2E28
I->STO 'A4'->BR
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
SPECI03
RESET CHECK-2
LOAD SECOND
BYTE IN BUFFER
2Dce
I->STO 'A4'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL 115
MICFL 85
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUT( NE
MICFL 115
3830-2
()
I~B:!t~ I,=~ I
;r
. -~'.
\J
r-",
'J
LI437_16_o_408_ct_7_2..a.1_ _ _...a..._ _ _"--_ _--'_ _ _..L-_--..,._..L-_ _---I
a 000
() () 0 ()
oo o
MICFL 95
ROUTINE 8C (Part 3 of 8)
0- 0 0
'
.
.:
~,
,
,'I
J,
!.
",
o
'.J'.
"'-.-
I
."
o ()
0
0 0 0 0- 0 0 0 0
,"
\
:.-
'".
.:,
'I'
,',';:
.-:'
"
:',,'
;;
,,'
o
(-
(
(
(-
(
(
(~
(0
("
(
(
(
ROUTINE 6C (Part 4 of 8)
(
(-
ROUTINE 6C C"'rt 4 of 8)
(0-
MICFL 100
~
120
120
2CIIC
YES·
YES
SET CHANNEL
WRITE 1I0DE
2E58
'AO'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
·SET TEST
PATTERN
2E24
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
COIlllON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115 °
INOICATE
BEGINNING
SECONO PASS
2E48
'S2'->BR
'08'->8R
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET TEST
PATTERN
2E54
SPECIO]
RESET CHECK-2
LOAD ADDRESS
FOR SECONO PASS
TEST 94
2E50
SET TEST
PATTERN
2E4C
COIlIiON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
2E5C
LOAD FIRST BYTE
INTO BUFFER A
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
2E10
RAISE DATA-OUT
2EII0
2E14
LOAD SECOND
BYTE INTO
BUFFER A
2E18
RAISE DATA-OUT
DROP
SERVICE-OUT
2EII8
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
COIlIiON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
2C10
SET TEST
PATTERN
COli liON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
IIICFL 115
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
DROP DATA-OUT
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
2E60
'eO'->GB
LOAD ADDRESS OF
·TEST 80 INTO GB
REGISTER
SET BUFFER
2E1C
2EII4
I->STO 'At'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET TEST
PATTERN
1->STO
'91'->BR
SET TEST DOWN,
COIlIiON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
IIICFL 115
RAISE DATA-OUT
2EA4
COIIMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
I->STO '92'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
I->TDII
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
RAISE
SERVICE-IN
2E90
YES
COIIMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
I->STO '8C'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
I->STO 'C1'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
2E44
COIlIiON ERROR
CHECK ROUT I NE
IIICFL 115
3830-2
I->STO o'C1'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
COIIMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
IIICFL 115
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
IIICFL 115
MICFL 100
ROUTINE 6C (Part 50f8)
ROUTINE 6C (Part 5 of 8)
MI
MI
SET TEST
PATTERN
(";"l.ICFL
20
\.1.:
2C511
RESET CHANNEL
WRITE MODE
2ECO
MICFL 105
LOAD 'FF' TO
BUS-OUT
SET CHANNEL
WRITE MODE
2EB4
RAISE
SERVICE-OUT
RESET CHANNEL
FREEZE
2FDO
2FOC
2FOO
1'->SlO '20'->BR
RAISE DATA-OUT
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUT I NE
MICFL 115
YES
SET TEST
PATTERN
MICFL 115
2F20
SET TEST
PATTERN
I->STO 'OO'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
RAISE DATA-OUT
2F24
I->TCO 1->TC2
SET CHANNEL WRITE
MODE AND LAST BYTE
TRANSFER.
2F40
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUT I NE
MICFL liS
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUT I NE
MICFL 115
YES
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTINE
MICFL liS
'5C·->GB
LOAD ADDRESS OF
TEST.5C TO GEl
REGISTER
2EBO
SET TEST
PATTERN,
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
MICFL 115
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
MICFL liS
I->STO '1I2'->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
2E?C
2E94
GB-4->GB
DECREMENT TEST
ADDRESS TO SKIP
NEXT TEST
2F44
'SO'->GB
LOAD ADORESS OF
TEST 50 INTO GB
REGISTER.
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET TEST
PATTERN
SET TEST
PATTERN
CDIIIoION ERROR
CHECK ROUTI NE
MICFL 115
I ->STO 'A I '->BR
SET TEST
PATTERN
I->TCO I->TCI
FREEZE CHANNEL
CONTROLS
COMMON ERROR
CHECK ROUT I NE
MICFL liS
COMMON ERROR
CHECK'ROUTINE
MICFL liS
3830-2
ROUTINE 8C (Part 5 of 8)
00 a
o
( 1'.
J
o o
~,
\ .;;)
'-J
000000
o
C)
o o
o
MICFL 105
00 0 0 0 0
~--"~
-\
~-,-
('
(
,,-,
(" (,
(,
-------
(
(-
(
(
(--
(
(
(-- (
(-
c-
(-
(:
(-
(-
(
(-
(
(
(-
{
(
(-
------------------------------
ROUTINE 6C (Part 6 of 8)
ROUTINE 6e (Part 6 of 8)
MIC,FL 110
MICFl85
EO
2CEO
Common error.
Check routine
MICFl115.
No
r-----~~~~~----~
'FF' - >MD
load' F F' to Buffer A
2COC
1->TD7
'FF'->MD
Common error.
Check routine MICFl115.
2F48
Error Code
6C44/6C45
2F54
Increment subroutine
address (GAl to rerun
subroutine
2F4C
0- >STJ
Reset second pass
indicator
2F14
load address of test 44
into GB register
2F50
Error Code
6C48/6C49
2F58
1 - >SR7
Indicate second pass
subroutine EO DC
2F5C
MICFl115
MICFl85
3830-2
1447460 1 447461 1
1437408
16 Oct 72 19 Dec 75
12 Mar 76
ROUTINE 8C (Part 8 of 8)
MICFL 110
ROUTINE 6C (Part 7 of 8)
ROUTINE
Ie IPart 7 of 81
MICFL 115
OO,I-__T;.;';:.-..;>.;;"~C_ _-I
~ SAVE DATA SENT
RA I SE ADDRESS
OUT
2F98
2820
1->BRl
INOICATE
BEGINNING OF
SECOND PASS
MICFL
00/1 I
SAVE EXPECTED
Ita
00
DATA
ZFF8
0->T81
PROTECT NA
REGISTER
0->T9
2848
DESELECT ANO
PROTECT NA
REGISTER
SAVE BUS-OUT
REC IEVED
11
282C
RESET BUS-IN
REGISTER
NICFL
120
SET EXPECTED
DATA
2BF8
I ->TC2
SET LAST BYTE
TEST PATTERN
SR REGISTER
0= 1
1:1: I
Z=I
3= I
4= I
5='
6=1
7= I
XFER UP
EXPECT 8US-OUT =0
SERVICE-IN UP
XFER CHECK UP
DATA-IN UP
COMPARE DATA
BFROY UP
L.AST BYTE
5TO: 1 SERVO UP
383().2
C)
~"
y
("\
'--,
la
''-..'
447480.
447461
19 Dec 75
12 Mar 76
ROUTINE 8C IPart 7 of 8)
-=-rItIht 11M ~ 1tn, 1975, 1976
~)
~,
'
a
'J
,0
\,~J!
(~,
"',",
r~,
\~
A"·""
I
,
''''''-~
,.4',"",
'"J!
,E).
~j)
,~
'",,-,j!
,0
,,-,J)
0"
\1,,);
,~
',-,j
I'f'~
,j)
!~
",Y
,r~
~j'
10
'>C,);
!0,
•.,f'~"
j/
)/
"'-
,4"-",
,j
/""l,,,
'""J)
(',..~\
'"'- ,Ii
;7).
I
,;r",
',,:
\';'.,jii
"""
f ....' "
""-,,J/
MICFL 115
"'' ' '
C"j)
......""'"
'ct)!
!J
(
(
(
.~.
ROUTINE 6C (Part 8 of 8)
C·
c
(~'
~/
MICFL 120
ROUTINE 8C (Part 8 of 8)
K = X'3F'
K'TC -> TC
K= X'Bl'
KOTC"'TC
RESET CHANNEL
READ/WRITE
MODE
SET CHANNEL
WRITE MODE
ANDCTL·I
WRITE MODE
3034
2CD8
K = X'40'
KnTC"'TC
X'20' -+TF
SET CHANNEL
READ MODE
READ
CONFIGURATION
DATA
NO
K= X'OI'
KOTD->TD
K = X'40'
KG TD"'TD
TURN ON
DATA OUT
TURNONTD
REGISTER
BIT 1
300c
ERROR CODE
6C56
K = X'02'
KO TD-+TD
TURN ON
SERVICE OUT
NA+O-+D
SPEC:03
3008
RESET CHECK-2
CADECODE NA
SWITCH TO
SERVICE·IN
NO
K = X'FC'
K·TO-+TD
ERROR CODE
6C58
DROP OATA-OUT
RESET DATA
OUT &
SERVICE OUT
3010
AND SERV I CE-QUT
2804
ERROR CODE
6C5A
NA+O"'D
GB-> I AR
0->T06 0->T07
CA DECODE NA
SWITCH TO
DATA IN
8RANCH TO TEST
ADDRESS. THEN
DECREMENT TEST -4
DROP DATA-OUT
AND SERVICE-OUT
2808
NO
2C24
BRANCH TO NEXT LOWER SUBROUTINE WitH E.o;CH PASS".
CC-MICFL 85
C8-NICFL 85
C4-MICFL 85
CQ-MICFL 90
BC-MICFL
88-MICFL
B4-MICFL
BO-MICFL
90
90
90
90
AC-MI CFL 95
A8-MICFL 95
A4-MICFL ~5
AO-MICFL 95
9C-MICFL 95
96-MICFL 95
94-MICF"L 95
9Q-MICFL 100
lC-MICFL 100
18-MICFL 100
74-MICFL 100
10-MICFL 100
be-totl CFL
b8-tot) CFL
64-MICFL
6Q-MICFL
100
105
105
105
105
S8-MICFL 105
54-MICFL 85
50-MICFL 105
4C-MICFL
Be-tot I CFL
88-M I CFL
84-MICFL
BO-tot I CFL
5C-MICFL
ERROR CODE
6C56
105
48-MICFL 110
44-MICFL 110
40-MICFL 110
3030
O->ST3C
SPECIAL OP3
I-+ST3C
SPECIAL OP 03
100
100
85
SET SWITCH 'ON'
RESETCHK·2
100
MICFL85
RESET SWITCH
RESETCHK·2
3018
2EDO
t 437408
3830-2
~6
© Copyright IBM ~ation
1972, 1975
Oct 72
_1
447460
19 Dec 75
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 28,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROUTINE 6C (Part 8 of 8)
MICFL 120
(
I-~ R:UT~:E~:-
ROUTINE6E
MICFL 125
f::)
I
"""T
START ROUTINE
6E
IHOUSEKEEPINGI
AI
I
CIO
SELECT
CHANNEL
r<9>
CHANNEL
'
AlB
<$.?
0470
O->MBC 1->ST3C
RAISE OP-OUT
FORCE CHECK - I
RAISE OP-OUT
OFDO
AlB
O->TG
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
CHANNEL
DROP
SUPPRESS-OUT
SAVE ST
REGISTER
.F)
0586
0530
~ T04F4
0434
'20'->SA
SC->ST
O->TG
1->TG2
CHAN AlB DROP
REQUEST-IN
~
CHAN A RAI SE
REQUEST-IN
0470
I
L...o
O->TE
'C4'->TO
CHAN CID DROP
REQUEST-IN
RAISE OP-OUT
AND
SUPPRESS-OUT
0530
TURN ON BIT 2 OF
ERROR BYTE FOR
SECOND PASS OF TEST
RESTORE ST
REGISTER
CHAN CID DROP
REQUEST-IN
~
0458
SPEC. 07
O->TDO
I->TGO
'CO'->TD
CHAN BRAISE
REQUEST-IN
RAISE DP-OUT
YES
0504
0438
_1O->TE
04F8
UNFREEZE
CHANNEL SWITCH
DROP OP-DUT
RESET COUNTER
GATE INLINE
EXECUTE SWITCH
04F4
l
05F4
l
1
O->TB
DESELECT AND
PROTECT NA
REGI STER
1
~
1->TE2
L
I;;
I
1
'CO'->TB
RESET CHECK-2
I
RAISE
SELECT-OUT AND
HOLD-OUT
0584
FREEZE CHANNEL
SWITCH
0524
'05DO'->IAR
RAISE OP-OUT
0438
0418
1
FC
2
F8
1->TC3
DISPLAY COUNTER
IN CE PANEL
LAMPS
RAISE OP-OUT
BRANCH TO
'0500'
04E4
0040
DROP
SUPPRESS-OUT
0598
0424
F4
ERROR CODE
6E04/6E05
RAISE OP-IN
l
04DC
SPEC. Ob
BRANCH TO
SUBROUTINE AND
DECREMENT
SUBROUTINE, ADDRESS
2-\
1
ADD 1 TO
COUNTER
05F8
053C
~
SPEC. 03
YES
GA">IAL
CHAN 0 RAISE
REQUEST-IN
0518
1->50
IA
0538
l->TEO
DROP IN-TAGS
0520
SPEC.
CHAN C RAISE
REQUEST-IN
0588
O->TC
0534
Olll4
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
UNTIL MARCH 26.1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROUTINE 6E
MICFL 125
@ Copyright IBM Corporation 1912, 1975
o
-
- - - -_. __._-
~(--
(-
(- (
(
(
"-_._---_.- ---------
----~--
(-
(,-
(
(~
(
(-
-------,---.-~~---
(-
(
(-
(
(
(
(
(._-. (-
{'"
(-.
f-'
(
(-
(-
(
ROUTINE 96
ROUTINE 96
(-'
._---
(-. (
(~'.
MICFL 150
IbO
START ROUTINE
96
NF -> GC
SET MF-O TO 0
SAVE NF-X FOR
DISPLAY
I • NF -> NF
'80' -> TF
ADD I TO NF-X
SET TF REGISTER
FOR ADDRESS
MODE, x=o
9bl4
GF -> GC
SET ADDRESS
REGISTER VALUE
=0
971C
SAVE GF-X FOR
DISPLAY
'CO' -> TF SET
I • GB -> GB
TF REGISTER
=SEMISTEP MODE,
REGISTER =0
ADD I TO
REGISTER CHECK
WORD
9164
911.4
o -> ST
CLEAR STATUS
REGISTER
SET ADDRESS
REGISTER VALUE
=0
9628
SET TF ADDRESS
REGISTER, X = 0
SET REGISTER
CHECK WORD = 0
9604
91B8
MF -> GC
SET CHECK WORO
= 0
SET CHECK WORD
0
=
GB
SAVE MF-X FOR
DISPLAY
ADD I TO MF-X
GF -> GF
+
GF -> GC
SET ADDRESS
INTO GF-X
9690
SAVE GF-O FOR
DISPLAY
GF -> GC
SAVE GF-X FOR
DISPLAY
9718
GB
SET TF REGISTER
FOR ADDRESS
REGISTER X = 0
NF -> GC
NF -> NF
+
SET ADDRESS
INTO NF-X
9608
SAVE NF-X FOR
DISPLAY
SET NF-X INTO
SFLF
9700
SPEC: OC
I + GB -> GB
ENABLE TF
ADDRESS MODE
ADD I TO CHECK
WORD
GB
MF -> MF
+
SET ADDRESS
INTO MF-X
9634
SET GF-O TO 0
SET GF-X INTO
SELF
9704
I + GF -> GF
'9F'-TF -> 0
I + GB -> GB
ADD I TO GF-X
SET CHECK FOR
ALL REGISTER
CHECK
ADD I TO
ADDRESS VALUE
9610
I + TF -> TF
ADD I TO TF
(ADDRESS
REGISTER)
I
+
I
+
TF -> TF
ADD I TO TF
ADDRESS
REGISTER
'9F'
-
TF -> 0
SET CHECK FOR
LAST REGISTER
GB -> GB
ADD I TO
ADDRESS
REGISTER VALUE
MF -> GC
SET MF-X INTO
SELF
SAVE MF-X FOR
DISPLAY
91DC
NF -> GC
SAVE NF-X FOR
DISPLAY
9744
9708
9b6C
SET NF-O TO 0
SAVE NF-O FOR
DISPLAY
'9F' -TF -> 0
SET CHECK FOR
LAST REGISTER
SAVE MF-O FOR
DISPLAY
9754
GF -> GC
I
SAVE GF-X FOR
DISPLAY
9684
447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
© Copyright IBM Corporation
1975
+
TF -> TF
ADD I TO TF
ADDRESS
REGISTER
9158
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROUTINE 96
MICFL 150
('~
ROUTINE 96
ROUTINE 96
GB -> GB
1 +
ADO
MICFL 160
SET GF-O INTO
TA
TO CHECK
REGISTER
1
NF -> GC
91E4
SAVE NF-X FOR
DISPLAY
GF -> GC
TURN OFF AUTO
STEP MODE
SAVE GF-X FOR
DISPLAY
SET 'FF'
TA
INTO
9&04
9&A4
1 +
ADD 1 TO
REGISTER CHECK
WORD
OR'40' -> TF
TURN ON AUTO
STEP MODE
,.
GB -> GB
RESET TF
ADDRESS
REGISTER TO 0
MF -> GC
SAVE MF-X FOR
DISPLAY
MF -> GC
SAVE MF-O FOR
DISPLAY
SET NF-O INTO
TA
91F8
RESET MF-O TO 0
9&AC
150
CHECK CB AND CO
OF MF-X STEP TF
ONCE
SET REGISTER
CHECK WORD
0
=
TF -> GC
SAVE TF FOR
DISPLAY
9614
SET REGISTER
CHECK TO 0
ERROR CODE 96Cl
9698
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
ROUTINE 96
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976
O 0·', 0·, 0'.'" 0"··' 0,· 0, 0··,,, 0
.,
.
~
,~
'.
'K:/
'"
;
(,
'4.
0
\~
(~
,y
A
,,-,;i
0
"'-'
r\,
~;)
0 0 0 0.
,
0
0
.
--'--~'-~--
,y 0 0 0
0 r~
'I
a
f)
~. .
MICFL 160
0 0 0 0 0 () 0
\
'
"
-~---~.--~
c
-,",
p
L
('
('
(~c
(> ('
(~.
('
(-
(-
(-' (--
(-
('
("C_ (-
(-
("
('
(-~
C
(--
(~-
LAMINAR BUSES (LBs)
1/0 Gate LOC 14
Logic Gate LOC 2
Power Supplies LOC 2
CAPACITORS
DC Filter LOC 6
Laminar Bus LOC 16
Cl through C4 LOC 12
C12 through C23 LOC 6
(- (-- (-' (-- ("
LOC 1
TA LOC 10
TB
LOC 10
TC LOC10
Tl Power Sequence Box
LOC12
T2 Convenience Outlet LOC2
T3 Power Sequence Box LOC 12
01A-Al LOC 2
O1A-Bl
LOC2
01A-B2 LOC2
01A-B3 LOC2
01 B-A 1 1/0 Board LOC 14
Power Sequence Board P-A 1 LOC 12
Sequential Starter Card LOC 16
MPL FILE (23FD) LOC 2
Laminar Bus LOC 16
Wl through Wl0 LOC 6
(
TRANSFORMERS
LOC 16
LOGIC BOARDS
BUS
(
COMPONENT INDEX
COMPONENT INDEX
BLOWERS
(\ ('
TRANSISTORS
Ql
LOC 12
TRIAC
POWER CONTROL BOX
Power Control Box
LOC 12
POWER SEQUENCE BOX LOC 12
LOC 12
USE METER LOC 2, PANEL 1
CIRCUIT BREAKERS (CBs)
CB2
POWER SUPPLIES
LOC 12
CE PANEL
LOC 2, PANEL 10
CIRCUIT PROTECTORS (CPs)
CPl through CP10 LOC 10, LOC 12
CPll through CP18 LOC 6
CONNECTORS
EC1-EC4 LOC 2,14
1/0 Cable LOC 14
Pl, P2 (CTL-I) LOC 16
PCl LOC 2
PC5-PCa (EPO) LOC 16
Sl, S2 LOC 16, PWR 132
1, Power Sequence Box LOC 12
2, Power Sequence Box LOC 12
CONVENIENCE OUTLET LOC 2
DIODES
Bulk Supply CR l-CR36 LOC a
CR 1, Power Sequence Box LOC 12
CR2, Power Sequence Box LOC 12
Blowers LOC 2
Bulk 1 LOC 6, LOC a
Bulk 2 LOC 6, LOC a
PS3 through PS7 LOC 4
PS15 LOC 10
Regulators LOC 4
24V dc Sequence Supply LOC 12
RELAYS
Kl through K13 LOC 12
K21, K22, K31, K32 LOC 16
RESISTORS
Rl through R7 LOC 6
Rl through R2 Power Sequence Box
LOC 12
SWITCHES
Enable Disable PANEL 1
Indicators Test/Reset LOC 12
Mainline CB2 LOC 12
Multitag PANEL 1
LOC 2, PANEL 1
Power OnlOff, Sequence Box
TABS
LOC 12
FILTER
DC Power Supply
LOC 6
Laminar Bus LOC 16
Power Line LOC 2
HEAT SINKS
HS 1 through HS6 LOC a
+12V dc LOC 12
INDICATORS
GatelMemory Thermals
PS Failure LOC 12
PS Thermal LOC 12
LOC 12
TERMINAL BOARDS (TBs)
BTBl Bulk-l LOC 10
TBl 1/0 Gate LOC 14
TBl Power Control Box LOC 12
BTB2 BUlk-2 LOC 10
TB2 Power Control Box LOC 12
TB3 Power Control Box LOC 12
TB5 Gate A LOC 16
TB6 Gate A LOC 16
TB10 LOC 16
TBll LOC 16
Tl-TBl Power Sequence Box
Tl-TB2 Power Sequence Box
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
©
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1913. 1915
COMPONENT INDEX
LOC-'
f: C
FRONT AND REAR VIEW
FRONT ANO REAR VIEW
Pwr Supply
(YB110)
LOC2
MPL File
(23FD)
.lRlny",r.
Power Sequence Panel
(See PANEL 11
See MPL Section
for Details
Area Bilhi!\d Gete A
(Seq Star.ter Card)
LOC 16·
PS3-7
(DC Regulators)
4
LOC
CP1-CP10
LOC 10
~'1itti-
____ EC1-EC4
(See PANEL 11)
........;--...+i-------
CE Panel
See PANEL 10
and PANEL 11
PS-15 Bias Supply
LOC 10
....,.....---iTiiTi-----
Gate A
(OlA)
CP/Thermal
Indicators
LOC 12
Bulk 2 Pwr Supply·
LOCS
Line Filter*
(YB 100)
"""'~~i----- Gate A
-----H-b._
Blowers
CP11-CP18 Asm
LOCS
Hinge end of
LOC 16
Gate A
Bulk 1 Pwr Supply
LOCS
..m------ 11/0
Gate B
Board) LOC 14
Bulk Transformers
LOC10
Front
PCl
•
Not used in late production machines
View
383()"2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
©
~I
'" j
o
Rear
View
(. . ~
y
o
0. , a···
\
.,
0
,'J
FRONT AND REAR VIEW
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
Copyright IBM CorporatIon 1972. 1973. 1975
,a····
."
o
o
0 0 00 ()
o
00 ()OOOO
o
LOC2
000
(-
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
('
(-
(
(
(
(
DC REGULATORS (PSI
DC REGULATORS (PS)
LOC4
Power Reyulatol Card IPS -- 31
Note 3
Air Duct or
PS-6AO
Front
View
PS-6 Regulator Asm
3.5V (YB170)
Note 1
PS-3 Regulator Asm
-3€V/+6V(YB1631
Note 1, Note 2
PS-4
Regulator Asm
+7V (YB170)
Installed but not used
Note 1
------------------------ir---------rr~------------------4_~~~
-------------;;------;i"t-----------+-+-~~
•
•
I
. ...!..-!~_+-~I·+------------------PS-7
Note 1
Notes:
1.
PS-5 Regulator Asm .---------------ii'-----.;;-+-----------+--i-~
-3V /+1.25V (YB 1701
Note 1
Regulator Asm
-3V /+1.25V (YB170)
s.e
PWR 50 for locations of regulator/
ollervoltage cards and for location of the
IIoltage adjustment potentiometers.
2. -36V not present in late production
machines.
3. This configuration will be on late
production machines only. All others
will appear as shown in assembly.
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830c2
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIEO THEREAFTER
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973, 1975
DC REGULATORS (PSI
LOC4
BULK SUPPLY FILTER CAPACITORS
FILTER CAPACITORS
LOC6
Bulk 2 Resonants (YB202)*
,....----W8
Bulk 1 Resonants (YB201 )"""'II:=S~~~--------,.Ic:.
Bulk 2*
(YB202)
Front
View
3
~
R2
Bulk 1
(YB201)
Rl
Bulk 1
(YB201 )
Wl~~~
W2
W4
W3
W5--______________
W 6 - - - - - - -_ _ _ _ _ _ _
~~~~~~~
~
__
~~
C12 +7V Bulk 1
R4 (not shown)
ShuntsC12 (YB201)
This configuration will be on late production
machines only. All others will appear as shown
in assembly.
*Not used in late production machines.
3830-2
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
©
l',
\\j
':'
'I
,tt').,
"'-.J
for Heat sink
and CP Panel
Breakdown
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972. 1973. 1975
rr))
~J'
F\
i
'\.,
""-J
1
I~)
tf"'),
"',.J
:~
'J
[t
(
'.
....Ji
-"
( ....
\,,-'"
0
v'
t<.~
,[~
'~y
,3'
j),
;¢fl,
'·.'.1
\~\jl
..f"""
v~J
(''''-''\
',,--;
,-r"'"'\"
'it....J
~
,Y
"..~'"
'~j
FILTER CAPACITORS
/'~"""
J/
:$"'.
\,,~y
.~
,Ii
!r~
\q,
.. )1
,.~J!
[~
",-y
,f')-
,,-.J)
n.
\~,j
LOC6
,.,..,."\
"~.j'
("
(~
(
('
(
(
(
(-~'
(
BULK SUPPLY DIODES, HEAT SINKS, AND CP PANEL
BULK SUPPLY DIODES, HEAT SINKS, AND CP PANEL
LOC8
CPll
CP12
CP13
CP14
Front
View
CP15
HS4 (YB201)
CR19-CR24
CP16*
CP17*
T---1ri.....----i~-CP18*
HS6 (YB202)*
CR3l-CR36
Heat Sinks 1, 2, and 3
Diodes CR1-CR18
3830-2
* Not used in late production machines
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
Heat Sinks 4, 5, and 6
Diodes CR19-CR36
BULK SUPPLY DIODES, HEAT SINKS, AND CP PANEL
LOC8
BULK TRANSFORMERS. BIAS SUPPLY. AND CPS 1-10
BULK TRANSFORMERS, BIAS SUPPLY, AND CPS 1-10
LOC 10
G-CP9
G-CP1
a
CP6
CP6 - Early
Machines
Only
Front
View
~CP1
~CP2
~CP3
~ CP4
~
CP5
D
CP7
o
PS-15 Bias Supply
(YB 165)
Bulk 1
Transformers
(YB201)
,...
I
TA
-
A
TB
[3- CP8
Bulk 2Transformers
(YB202)
,
4_-CP7
- Early
Machines
Only
D
~
TC
TB1
TB-2
·Not used in late production mllChitlft_
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
3830-2
©
tf~
~
Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973,1975
0 0
---
--
--
r~
l~
t""-",
UJ
0
BULK TRANSFORMERS. BIAS SUPPLY. AND CPS 1-10
UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
r~
~!
r1l
\,.JI
0
J
f"'\
V
("'~
~J
~
'",--;I
t"~~
\Y
~)
~'"
!'~
0
() 0 0 0 ()
""-\L
!'~~
('
(~'
('
(
,
"
(
(
,
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
\
INST 1
INST
Unpacking And Locating
......... .
INST 5
Cabling-Control Module To 3830 Storage Control
INST 5
Control Unit Power Check (6o-Hz) .
INST 10
Control Unit Power Check (50-Hz) .
INST 15
Channel Interface Cabling
INST 15A
. .
Addressing . . . . . . . .
INST16
Control Unit Microdiagnostics .
INST 26
System Test.
INST26
. .
Cover Installation
INST26
Records
INST 26
. . ..
.',.
3830-2
CONTENTS
INST 1
~
Y
0
'-~
10
,r~ \
"'-
\",""yi
)/
("'1
",,-y
('"'''\
~"",
.~.
··,-_Y
1
1""""j
'"
r",\
'v. Y
I
r""'""
\.
Y
i
l"-'"
'\ )
r'"
y
'V n :/
'",
r~
, Y
\
0
("'1
,:'
''-
-'
(I:
\",Y
("~
\c.)i
n"
f~
"---
.1/
r---""
"-
.0,
."
"0'.
."
;/
n
0
\.
!~
)
\
)
0
fl,
('\
(
(
(
(
(
f
{
(
(
(' (
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
2
SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION:
Part Number
Digitec* Voltmeter
Tektronix** 453 Scope
MPL File CE Disk
SLT IMST Maintenance Tools
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
453585
453047
*Trademark of United Systems Corp.
"Trademark of Tektronix. Inc.
Check
When
Complete
...,...
CABLING-CONTROL MODULE TO 3830·2 STORAGE CONTROL
These instructions are for cable plugging at the 3830-2 only.
Refer to device installation instructions for cable plugging
of attached devices.
I
__ 1
Follow each installation step in sequence to ensure correct operation.
1
__ 2
UNPACKING AND LOCATING
INST 5
DANGER
Do not connect 3830-2 ac power cable until instructed.
Position CTL-I cables from Control Module(s) to 3830-2
Bus on top
Tag on bottom
Do not connect until Wrap Test is complete. Terminate
with two (2) Bus Terminators (PN 5440649) in the bus
and tag CTL-I connectors of the last cabled controller.
Position EPO cable from Control Modules(s) to connector
in 3830-2. Do not connect until step 4. Channel Interface
Cabling.
II
Area Behind A Gate
fJ
Check
When
Complete
~
--1
Remove packing and check for damage. (See Packing/Unpacking
instructions taped to cover.)
--2
Do an inventory of the parts in the shipping group.
__ 3
Remove the covers as necessary.
--4
Adjust leveling jacks.
IICTL-1
Connectors
{P1 IBus)
P2 ITag)
3830-2
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INST 5
(
INS'ALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(60-Hz Machines Only)
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(60-Hz Machines Only)
3
CONTROL UNIT POWER CHECK (60 HZ)
For 50Hz machines, go to step
page.
__ 12
3 WORLD TRADE on next
__ 13
~INST 10
Measure the dc voltages with Digitec voltmeter, and
adjust as necessary using the procedure on PWR 50.
When finished go to INST 15A.
Check
When
Complete
.......
___ 1
Open power control and sequence box covers.
___ 2
Turn off 3830·2 mainline CB-2. then
connect 3830-2 power cable to ac outlet.
___ 3
Measure ac line voltage at input to CB-2 and determine if it is
208 or 230V ac. If line voltage agrees with the voltage tag on
the 3830-2, proceed to step 5.
___ 4
If customer's voltage does not agree, remove ac power
connector and rewire the following transformers as
shown on YB026. Then reconnect power cable to ac
outlet.
Terminal Block
Transformer
Tl SCRID and seq
T2 cony outlet
Bulk 1 supply
Bul k 2 supply (Note 1)
Bias supply
Tl-TBlll
TB311
BTB11iJ
BTB2(1
PS15 TBl
m
___ 5
For power sequencing, verify that EPO jumper plug is
in PC-'
(See Figure' for EPO jumper plug wiring).
___ 6
Turn all drive start/stop SWitches to Stop if drive cables
previously connected.
__ 7
___ 8
Turn off CB2 in 3830-2.
m
Connect 3830-2 power cable to ac outlet and turn
on 38'30-2 mainline CB2. Check that all CPs in
3830:2 are on.
__ 9
Set operation mode switch on 3830-2 CE panel
to CE Mode.
__ 10
Operate Power On switch on 3830-2 CE panel. Power
will sequence up in the control unit.
__ 11
Check operation of cooling fans in 3830·2
m
a. Regulator.
G. MST logic gate.
c. I/O tailgate (01 B). OJ
0
Figure 1: EPO Jumper Plug Wiring
~
llflJ
Note 1: Onlv for early machines (with CP1).
~ I NST
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(60-Hz Machines Onlv) ' "
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975. 1976. 1978
---~
10
(
(
(
(
(
(
c
(
(
(
(
(
f
(
f
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS"I
(5O·Hz Machines Only) , .
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
NST 15
(50Hz Machines Only)
3
CONTROL UNIT POWER CHECK (50HZ)
(World Trade)
__ 12
Measure the dc voltages with Digitec voltmeter, and
adjust as necessary using the procedure on PWR 50.
__ 13
When finished go to INST 15A.
Check
When
Complete
U
__ 1
Determine type and level of voltage at ac .outlet:
delta (A) 200, 220, 235 or wye (Y) 380/408.
__2
Refer to the chart on logic page YB026 and verify that
the following terminals are wired correctly:
Terminal Block
Power Component
Primary Power Jumpers
T111
T2 Cony Outlet Transformer
TB3D1
T1 SCAlD and Seq Transformer
T1-TB111
Bulk 1 Supply·Transformer
BTB1
m
Bul k 2 Supply Transformer (Note 1) BTB2 (I
Bias Supply Transformer
I
PS15 TB 1
OJ
__ 3
If wiring of 3830·2 agrees with ac power source,
proceed to step 5.
__ 4
If wiring does not agree with power source, refer
to YB026 and rewire terminals listed in table above.
__ 5
For power sequencing, verify that EPO jumper plug
PC·11D (See Figure 1 for EPO jumper plug wiring).
__ 6
Turn all drive start/stop switches to Stop if drive cables
previously connected.
__ 7
__ 8
Turn off CB2 in 3830-2.
__ 9
Connect 3830·2 power cable to ac outlet and turn
on 3830-2 mainline CB2. Check that all CPs in
3830-2 are on.
Set operation mode switch on 3830·2 CE panel
to CE Mode.
__10 Operate poweroOn switch on 3830·2 CE panel.
Power
will sequence up in the control unit.
__11
Check operation of cooling fans in 3830-2:
a. Regulator II
b. MST logic gate . .
c. 1/0 tailgate (01 B) 0
Figure 1: EPO Jumper Plug Wiring
~
llfiJ
Note 1: Only for tIIIriv mllChines (with CP7)
Jill NST 15
3830-2
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(50·Hz Machines Only) , .
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975, 1976, 1977, 1978
r""\
\
~
\
"'--. /
(
,/-''',
'"
,/
"'-
""
/
!
/
'\,
~,
'"
/
)
,/
"
j
/'~
f\
"-
"
/
/
,'-
"-
,
\,
(~
,/
"- /
"
1"""/
("
"\
/
'"
,/'
'"
(
"-
''\
,/
",
('\
(~
/
c
«
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
4
I/O Connectors
(Channel Interface)
CHANNEL INTERFACE CABLING
_4
Check
When
11 0
Complete
~
_1
_2
Power down 3830-2 from CE paneL
If last device on channel, plug bus terminator
(PIN 5440649) and tag terminator (PIN 5440650)
into bus out and tag out receptacles for that
channeL
Tag In
Tag Out
Bus In
Bus Out
0 .....-.;..~--IO
'Tag In-Tag Out
Bus In
Bus Out
0 1-.;....;.;.....;;..;...;........ 0
Tag In
Tag Out
Bus In
Bus Out
1--.;....;....-...0
Tag In
Tag Out
Bus In
.=
Channel
C>
co
D
------
I~~
Chan nel
C
1-
.=
Channel
:;
0
C>
co
~
:;
0
.=
C>
co
~
.=
~
C>
co
~~
-~
:::l
Channel
D
al
:;
'"
B
Chan nel
A
Ira ~
I"
Channel
.=
A
Ira
C>
~
:;
0
------
If Two Channel Switch, Additional, feature is
installed, also connect jumpers for channel C and
D priorities. Cards are located at A-A 1D2 and
A-A1D4, respectively. (See logic pages CR10l
:::l
0
Channel
0
'"
~
C>
~- Channel
_e.J
.=
Relay
andDR101.)
B
BG 0
AH~
BH . . ~GH
BJ ... 'eGJ
AJ . . OGK
Ch
Ch
Ch
Ch
A:
B:
C:
D:
B-A1ES (AR101l
B-A1FS (BR10l)
A-A1D2 (CR10l)
A-A1D4 (DR10l)
:::l
0
__ 5
'":::l '":::l :::l'" :::l'"
al al
al
Relay
If Two Channel Switch feature is installed, also
connect jumpers for channel B priority. Card
is located at B-A 1 F6. (See logic page B R 101.)
0
INST 15A
PRIORITY
CARD TYPE 7552
High priority is shown. For lowest priority,
connect the following jumpers: AH-BG,
AJ-BH. and GJ-GK.
:::l
0
01
-.= .=
.. .. .. .
-- 110 al
--- ---
- -- - -
-
1
:; :; '":::l :::l'"
al al
C
Bus Out
Go to INST 16 next.
al~
:
:
J[
Early Machines
,,
Late Mechines
__ 3
0
Establ ish channel priority by connecting Select
Out jumpers. Card is located in I/O gate at
B-A1E6. (See logic page AR101.) Use jumper
assembly PIN 816645 or 815925.
(
PCl
mTI
PC2
]JJ
I I
I I
I I
I I
PCl
PC2
Remove EPO jumpers from PC-1. Connect CPO
cable(s) from CPU or channel(sl to PC-1, PC-2
(2 Channel) and PC-3 - PC-4* (2 Channel
Additional) .
Connect Drive EPO sequence cables - PC-5 (first
string), PC-6 (second string), PC-7 and PC-8 (third
and fourth string - 32 drive expansion feature only)
Remote Switch Feature - Connect remote switch
cable(s) to PC-10 and PC-11 if remote switch feature
is installed. * *
* PC-3 and PC-4 are located on bracket below 01 B gate.
** PC-10 (Channel A and Bl and PC-11 (Channel C and D)
are located below 01 B gate and to the left of PC-3 and
PC-4 bracket.
\447465
3830-2
15 Dec 78
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1978
INST 15A
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INST 16
ADDRESSING
START
~
In a 3830 subsystem, address plugging must be carefully
performed to ensure correct subsystem operation.
_
3350 Attachment
Feature
6. Obtain the subsystem addresses assigned to this
YES
Example 3830-2 with three
Controllers attached (the 3350 A02/ A2F
and C02/C2F are considered as one controller for addressing
purposes).
3830 by the customer.
Note: 3B30 addressing restrictions require that
addresses supplied by the customer must totalB, 16,
32, or 64.
_
Controller is a term used to
define a 3333, 3340A02,
3350A02,or3350A2F
attached to this 3830-2.
yes
microcode diskette shipped with this 3830.
NO
r -- is supplied for your machine configuration. Refer to
chart on FEALD Volume 001, page AA002 for disk
selection and INTR 005 for feature reference.
_
----,
ether Functional microcodedl
:disk PN (16 Drive Addressing~
CAUTION: Verify that proper 3830-2 functional disk
~--o---~
INST 16J
INST 16H
8. Use the following flowchart to locate the page
Storage
Control
If additional addresses are
assigned by the customer for
controllers to be installed
later select the path as if
those controllers were being
installed.
7. Obtain the part number of the functional
Alternate
Controller
3350
C02/C2F
Controller
3350
1 - - - - - 1 A02/A2F
3830-2
Controller
3340A02
Controller
3333
YES
applicable to the specific combination of DASD
units to be installed.
Yes
Note: Additional information on addressing theory
may be found on I NST 17, 17A, and 178.
_
9.----------------------~
Yes
INST t6A
3344
Attachment
Feature
INST 160
'ThreeOr FOUr
-
-
-
I Controllers Attached
,
r
I
I
t..f4-3i!!~- -.J
NO
INST 16B
ThreeorFour Controllers Attached
-,
I
L..a~O"-'-d- ..J
INST 16F
INST t6C
INST 16G
INST 16E
INST 16K
\447465
3830·2
15 Dec 78
I
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1978
('"
"\
I"
i
\..
f
'\,
\
./
('\
"
./
(
'\
",. ..c!
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1"'
~
/"-~
I.
/
('
"
",
,//
\
r~
."
/
(
"\
..... -'"
f''\
./
,
./
r'\
\..
)
('\
"'-..
I"
\
,
/'
~,
r
/
"
"
"-
/
!
'"
'\
r-"
~,
"
\.
i
"
.C·--'"
(/~
\
,(
i
./
\..
'\,
/
()
'-
/
INST 16
f'
f
f
(
(-
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
('
(
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
_ 4.
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 16 addresses
assigned, and at least one of its attached 3350s will
operate in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
_ 5.
When 3350s are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility
mode, the 3350 operates as two 3330s and requires two
logical addresses per spindle, a primary and a secondary.
_
_
2.
3.
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
Plug the cards at A1S2, A1T2, A1U2, and
B1G2 according to the card diagrams on
this page.
ADDRESS
RANGE
Go to I NST 18, entry C.
A-A1S2
If the addresses you were given do not appear in
Figure 2, return to INST 16 and retrace your path
in the flow diagrams. If this is the correct page and
you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the
customer. See INST 17 for additional information.
1.
A-A1T2
lI
,.. Single Channell1
Plug One ~ More than one
060 060 06'?> 060 000 000 06'?> 060
30
00-2F
00-07
OS-OF
20-27
28-2F
000 060 060 06b 060 000 060 000 06b 060
28
08-3F
08-0F
1S-1F
28-2F
38-3F
000
ObO 060 060 060 600 000 000 060 060
30
10-3F
10-17
18-1 F
30-37
38-3F
000 060 060 060 060 000 600 000 060 060
28
Single Channell1
More than one
40-77
40-47
50-57
60-67
70-77
000 060 060 600 060 060 000 000 600 060
30
"""",I~
40-6F
40-47
48-4F
60-67
68-6F
000 060 060 600
4S-7F
48-4F
5S-5F
68-6F
7S-7F
000 060 060 600 060 600 000 000
30
50-7F
50-57
5S-5F
70-77
78-7F
000 060 060 600 060 000 600
2S
SO-B7
SO-S7
90-97
AO-A7
BO-B7
000 060 060 060 600 066 000 000 060 600
30
SO-AF
SO-S7
SS-SF
AO-A7
AS-AF
000 060 060 060 600 000 060 000 060 600
2S
8S-BF
SS-SF
9S-9F
AS-AF
BS-BF
000 060 06b
9O-BF
90-97
9S-9F
BO-B7
BS-BF
000 060 060
CO-F7
CO-C7
00-07
EO-E7
FO-F7
000 06'?> 060
CO-EF
CO-C7
CB-CF
EO-E7
ES-EF
000 060 060
CB-FF
CB-CF
OS-OF
ES-EF
FS-FF
000 060 060
OO-FF
00-07
OS-OF
FO-F7
FS-FF
o
,0
'-0
I-
00
2. Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2_ (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
Each channel must be plugged according to the
allocation of addresses for that channel. They may
or may not all be plugged the same. If different
add resses are requ ired see Note.1.
....I-
Il-
I--
CARD TYPE BA89
o
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
A-B1G2
SECONDARY
00-27
10-17
A-A1T2
PlugOne L
- --
-,
A-A1U2
I--
I-
000 060 060
o
CHANNEL FEATURE
CHNL
LOCATION
Single Channel
A
A-A1Q2
Two-channel Switch
A
B
A-A1Q2
A'A1P2
A
B
C
A-A1Q2
A-A1P2
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
Two-channel SWitch
Additional (Four
Channels)
0
ADDRESS SELECT
CARD LAYOUT
--ooj'~
1447461
12 Mar 76
"
Note: Anytime
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re-IMPL
the functional
microcode disk.
..---"
r
\
'",
.)
r
"-.
"\
I
('
t"
./
\, j
r
,,
7~
(''\,
\
'"'.~
j
('"
/
\,
bOo 060
000 600 obO
30
28
30
2S
30
2S
/
'···1-··,···1.· ·I···~···I···
[JO [JB UO[J
II-
0
Note 1: For multiple channels the }
indicated jumpers must be plugged
identically on each of the address
select cards_
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
I
1 447465
I
15 Dec
28
,, / /
I
"-
obO
DO Do O!d [p
ADDRESSING
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978
!~
000 060 000 600
I
CARD TYPE Z512
3830-2
-..--
oliO
oliO 600 600 000 000 060 600
oliO 600 000 600 000 066 600
600 bOo 060 000 000 600 bOo
600 bOo 000 060 000 600 600
bOo bOo 6'?>0 000 000 600 600
600 600 000 600 000 600 bOo
......
o
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
MICRODIAGNOSTIC
CHANNEL WRAP
PARAMETER
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD
AS SHOWN BELOW
00-37
5. Go to IN5T 18, entry C.
A-A1S2
VALID ADDRESS
COMBINATIONS
PRIMARY
Plug the cards at A 152, A 1T2, A 1 U2, and B 1G2
according to the card diagrams on this page.
1. Match the customer supplied addresses to the
_
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
wrap parameter value (shown to the right of the
plugging column in Figure 2) on the label
attached tp the shroud of the address card. This
information will be used later during checkout.
If no label is available write this information in
Notet on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210,
Step 4.
When 3350s are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility
mode, the 3350 operates as two 3330s and requires two
logical addresses per spindle, a primary and a secondary_
""
\
1/
r
')"
r
\
")
r··~
'',.
\
"
\
INST 16B
\.
,/
;r "'\
/.
I
'\~
'-
" \1
/
....
('
..
I
"
"
\
\..
"
(
INST 16B
(
(
(
(
(
(
(' (
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
ADDRESSING
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 64 addresses
assigned, and at least one of its attached 3350s will
operate in 3330-1 compatibility mode.
_
When 3350s are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility
mode, the 3350 operates as two 3330s and requires two
logical addresses per spindle, a primary and a secondary.
_
4.
6.
_
_
2.
3.
Plug One L
". Single Channell1
More than one
,.£"b
CARD TYPE BA89
o
A-A1U2
A-B1G2
r-
A
B
C
D
A-A102
A-A1 P1
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
Two-channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
3830-2
1447461
12 Mar 76
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978
40-7F
40-47
4S-4F
50-57
5S-5F
60-67
6S-6F
70-77
7S-7F
000
o n o c!1.
6),0
o &b
000
000
000
no
SO-BF
SO-S7
SS-8F
90-97
9S-9F
AO-A7
AS-AF
BO-B7
BS-BF
000
o 6"b o Ob
06),
&b
0
000
000
000
oOb t'bo
CO-FF
CO-C7
CS-CF
DO-D7
D8-DF
EO-E7
E8-EF
FO-F7
F8-FF
000
066
&b
0
000
000
000
&b
\.
,,
o n Ob
0
0;)
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
Note: Anytime
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re.fMPL
the functional
microcode disk.
06),
Ob
0
0
"I
I
,,
I
I
I
,
I
/
I
I
4Jb-r-· 00
-,_. -1-· Old
-1-· 4J
-1-··
[Jo [Jd [Jo [J
ADDRESSSELECT ___~~
CARD LAYOUT
•
-1-· ., .. -1-·
0
I
I
II-
I
I~----~I
V
U
LOCATION
A-A102
A-A1P2
o Ob o 6"b
-
0
A
B
000
,_. -1-·
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
Two-channel Switch
000
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
0;)
0
A-A102
000
....
0:::>
A
o Ob o Ob o &b o &b
I-
Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel
wrap parameter value (parameter value =38) on
the label attached to the shroud of the address
card. This information will be used later during
checkout. If no label is available write this
information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11
and MICRO 210, Step 4.
Single Channel
000
00
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
Each channel must be plugged according to the
allocation of addresses for that channel. They may
or may not all be plugged the same.
CHNL
20-27
2S-2F
30-37
3S-3F
'.0
o~
SECONDARY
00-07
OS-OF
10-17
1S-1F
'h,"~IJ
o
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S)
AS SHOWN BELOW
VALID ADDRESS
COMBINATIONS
oo-3F
A-A1T2
A-A1S2
Match the customer-supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the
lowest and highest address supplied. These are
not consecutive addresses.) Use the valid address
column to determine if the primary and secondary
address assignments are valid. Any 3350 not in
compatibility mode and any 3340 or 3330 use
a primary address only.
CHANNEL FEATURE
ADDRESS
RANGE
Go to I NST 18, entry C.
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses, verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
1.
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
Plug the cards at A 1S2, A 1T2, A 1U2, and
B1G2 according to the card diagrams on this
page.
PRIMARY
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL y
valid combinations that can be used.
_
INST 16C
ADDRESSING
I~
____~I
I~
____~I
II-
~
I-
l-
CARD TYPE Z512
447465
15 Dec7~
I
ADDRESSING
INST 16C
INST 160
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
~.
This page is to be used for a 3830 with eight addresses
assigned, and all attached 3350s will be operated in
native mode or in 3330-11 compatibility mode.
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL y
valid combinations that can be used.
_
5.
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
Plug the cards at A 1S2, A 1T2, Al U2, and
B1G2 according to the card diagrams on this
page.
Go to INST 18, entry B.
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot match addresses, verify them with the customer.
See INST 17 for additional information.
_
_
1.
2.
_3.
A·A1S2
Match the customer-supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the
lowest and highest address supplied.)
A·A1T2
Single Channell1
Plug One~ More than one
'hO"O'l
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
Each channel must be plugged according to the
allocation of addresses for that channel. They may
or may not all be plugged the same. If different
addresses are required see Note 1.
Mark the plugging anJd the microdiagnostic channel
wrap parameter value (parameter value = 00) on
the label attached to the shroud of the address
card. This information will be used later during
checkout. If no label is available write this
information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11
and MICRO 210, Step 4.
<:
o
,6b
1,,"0
l-
I-
CARD TYPE BA89
o
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
A·A1U2
A·B1G2
o~
o~
o~
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
CHNL
Single Channel
Two-channel Switch
A-Al02
A
A-Al02
A-A1P2
A
Two-channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
B
C
D
'U'
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
A-Al02
A-A1P2
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
OS-OF
000 060 060 060 060 600 060 060 060 060
10 - 17
000 060 060 060 060 060 600 060 060 060
1S -1F
000 060 060 060 060 600 600 060 060 060
20 -27
000 060 600 060 060 060 060 600 060 060
2S-2F
000 060 600 060 060 600 060 600 060 060
30 - 37
000 060 600 060 060 060 600 600 060 060
38-3F
000 060 600 060 060 600 600 600 060 060
40-47
000 060 060 600 060 060 060 060 600 060
4S-4F
000 060 060 600 060 600 060 060 600 060
50-57
000 060 060 600 060 060 600 060 600 060
5S -5F
000 060 060 600 060 600 600 060 600 060
60 - 67
000 060 600 600 060 060 060 600 600 060
6S -6F
000 060 600 600 060 600 060 600 600 060
70-77
000 060 600 600 060 060 600 600 600 060
7S-7F
000 060 600 600 060 600 600 600 600 060
SO -S7
000 060 060 060 600 060 060 060 060 600
SS-SF
000 060 060 060 600 600 060 060 060 600
90-97
000 060 060 060 600 060 600 060 060 600
9S-9F
000 060 060 060 600 600 600 060 060 600
AO-A7
000 060 600 060 600 060 060 600 060 600
AS-AF
000 060 600 060 600 600 060 600 060 600
BO-B7
000 060 600 060 600 060 600 600 060 600
BS-BF
000 060 600 060 600 600 600 600 060 600
CO-C7
000 060 060 600 600 060 060 060 600 600
CS-CF
000 060 060 600 600 600 060 060 600 600
00-07
000 060, 060 600 600 60 600 060 600 600
OS-OF
000 060 060 600 600 :500 600 060 600 600
EO- E7
000 060 :500 600 600 p60 060 600 600 600
ES- EF
000 060 600 600 1000
FO - F7
000 060 600 600 100 0 :50 600 600 600 600
000 0:50
600 ~o 1000 600 600 600 600
Note: Anytime
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re-IMPL
the functional
microcode disk,
....,
fsoo
0:50 600 600 600
1000
I
\
I-
-
'- Db Ot] O'!d rp(
[Jg kJ o D [J
-
I
Note 1: For multiple chann.els the }
indicated jumpers must be plugged
identically on each of the address
select cards.
U
I
\
(
\.
/
0
1 447465
ADDRESSING
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978
"\
./
I
""I"'I"'I"'I"'I~I'"I'''I'''
ADDRESS SELECT _
CARD LAYOUT
12 Mar 76 .15 Dec 78
f
,
I
\
CARD TYPE Z512
1447461
3830-2
000 060 060 060 060 060 060 060 060 060
FS - FF
0:>'
0
LOCATION
A
B
II-
00-0'7
0
'U'
CHANNEL FEATURF.
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S)
AS SHOWN BELOW
ADDRESS
RANGE
/
(
-"
INST 160
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
('
(-
(
(
(
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
FIGURE 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
4. Plug the cards at A 1T2, A 1U2, B1G2, and A 1S2
according to the card diagrams on this page.
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 16 consecutive
addresses assigned and only two controllers attached.
All attached 3350s will be operated in native mode or
3330-11 compatibility mode.
5.
Go to INST 18, entry B.
ADDRESS
RANGE
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL y
valid combinations that can be used.
_
_
_
1.
2.
3.
A-A1T2
A-A1S2
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses, verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
'" Single Channell1
Plug One L. More than one
l-
I-
Match the customer-supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is
the lowest and highest address supplied.)
0'
CARD TYPE BA89
A-Al02
Two-channel Switch
A
B
A-Al02
A·A1P2
A
B
C
A-Al02
A·A1P2
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
A-B1G2
0;)
lI-
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978
1447461
12 Mar 76
447465
15 Dec 78
10 -17
1S -1F
cC'J
(')9;
(~~ r,/>.;
,)0.1
20 - 2F
20 - 27
2S - 2F
000
oo?,
600 050
01)0 r) ') 0
30-3F
30 - 37
38 - 3F
000 060 600 060
40 - 4F
40-47
48-4F
000 060
060
50 - 5F
50-57
5S - 5F
000 060
060 600 060
60 - 6F
60 -67
68-6F
000 060 600
70 - 7F
70-77
7S -7F
000 060
600 600
SO-SF
SO-S7
SS-SF
000 060
060
90-9F
90 -97
9S - 9F
000
AO-AF
AO-A7
AS-AF
000 0[;0 600 060 600 000 060 600 060 600
BO-BF
BO- B7
BS - BF
000 060 600 060 600 000 600 600 060 600
CO-CF
CO-C7
CS-CF
000 060 060
600
[;00
ouo
060
060 600 600
DO-OF
00-07
OS-OF
000 060
060
600
600
000
600
060 600 600
EO - EF
EO - E7
ES - EF
000 060 600 600 600 000 060 600 600 600
FO- FF
FO - F7
FS- FF
000 0[;0
od
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
Note: Anytime
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re-IMPL
the functional
. microcode disk.
0
--
060
/>.
r:..
0
.
'
','"j f)
060
n,
060
,,0/ r)00
600 ') rSO 060
060
060
600 060 060
600
000 600
060 060
600 060 000 060 060 600 060
600
060
000 600
600 060
060 000 060 600 600 060
uoo
600
600 600 060
060 600 000
060
060 060 600
060
060 060 600 000 600 060 060 600
600
600
600
000
600 600 600
600
~
\
\
I
\
I
r------'~~~-+--T-~,~--~I~~~~~/
°
'U
°
'U
CARD TYPE Z512
3830-2
10 - 1 F
°
0'
LOCATION
00 - 07 '
OS-OF
L -_ _ _ _ _.....I-
0'
A
b
I-
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD
AS SHOWN BELOW
VALID ADDRESS
COMBINATIONS
00 -OF
l-
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
Single Channel
=
c;o
A-A1U2
Two-channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
\0
tool
\00
Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic
channel wrap parameter value (parameter value = 08)
on the label attached to the shroud of the address
card. This information will be used later during
checkout. If no label is available write this
information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and
MICRO 210, Step 4.
CHNL
~
00.,
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
Each channel must be plugged according to the
allocation of addresses for that channel. They may
or may not all be plugged the same. If different
addresses are required see Note 1.
CHANNEL FEATURE
'h'""" ~£>
°
INST 16E
00 OoOid[p
,_. -, ... ,.. ·1-· ., ..
ADDRESS SELECT
CARD LA YOUT - -.....~
Note 1: For multiple channels the }
indicated jumpers must be plugged
identically on each of the address
select cards.
·'~I
... ,.. -, ...
[Jg~D[JD[J
I
I
0
I
ADDRESSING
INST 16E
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 32 addresses
assigned. and all attached 3350s will be operated in
native mode or in 3330·11 compatibility mode.
4.
Plug the cards at A 1S2. A 1T2. A 1U2. and B 1G2
according to the card diagrams on this page.
5.
Go to INST 18. entry B.
ADDRESS
RANGE
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y
valid combinations that can be used.
1.
20-3F
A·A1T2
A·A1S2
Match the customer·supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is
the lowest and highest address supplied.)
_
2.
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as i!1dicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) Iqcation
chart.)
," " i
_
3.
Mark the plugging and th~ microdiagnoslic
channel wrap parameter value (parameter
value = 18) on the label attached to the 'shroud
of the address card. This information will be
used later during checkout. If no label is
available write this iAformation in Note 1.
on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210,
Step 4.
Single Channell1
Plug One"':::' More than one
40-5F
Channel~
--
C ~,~
o
...
6O-7F
"0
S0-9F
r-
C')
0'
~
AO-BF,
--Jr-
L..-_ _ _ _
CARD TYPE BA89
o
CO-OF
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
EO-FF
A·A1U2
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S)
AS SHOWN BELOW
00-07
08·0F
10·17
18·1F
20·27
28·2F
30·37
38·3F
40·47
4B-4F
50·57
58·5F
60·67
68·6F
70·77
78·7F
80-87
SS·SF
90·97
98·9F
AO·A7
A8·AF
BO·B7
BS·BF
CO·C7
C8·CF
00-07
DB-OF
EO·E7
E8·EF
FO·F7
F8·FF
OO·lF
,,'\ If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses. verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
_
VALID ADDRESS
COMBINATIONS
A·B1G2
INST 16F
000
o Ob oOb o Ob o Ob
000
000
o Ob o Ob o Ob
000
o Ob dO
000
000
Ob
000
o dO o dO dO
0
o dO
000
000
o tb Ob
0
o Ob
000
o dO Ob
tb
0
o dO
,*00
000
Obo tb
0
o Ob.
o Ob o Ob
0
0
0
o dO o dO
\
I.
000
o dO o Ob o Ob dO
0
000
000
o tb o Ob dO
0
000
o Ob Ob
0
000
000
tb
0
000
o dO o Ob tb
o Ob Ob
0
0
o dO dO
0
Ob
0
000'
000
o Ob dO
0
dO
0
0
tb
0
00(>
000
dO
0
tb
0
,
o
000
cn-
dO'o dO
0
dO
'0:)
o:?
CHNL
Single Channel
Two·channel Switch
Two·channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
3830·2
A·A102
A
B
A·A102
A·A1P2
A
B
C
D
A·Al02
A·A1P2
A·A1K2
A·A1J2
......
)
0
'<.i
o.
LOCATION
A
I
I-
0'
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
CHANNEL FEATURE
r0'
...,.
{
I
U
I
...
Po
,_. -,_. -,_. 00
-,_. -I·· Old
-.-. -1-· -1-· [JJ
-1-··
[Jo [Jd [Jo lJ
II-
~I··
I
Note: Anytime
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re-IMPL
the functional
microcode disk.
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
I
ADDRESS SE LECT
CARD LA YOUT
- -.....~
~
H
I
U
,
I~----~I
CARD TYPE Z512
,..
"
'.
I~
____~I
447461 1447465
1 12 Mar 76 15 Dec 78
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978
(
(
.....\
/
'.
"\
/
ADDRESSING
/' '\
:-.
I
".
./
/
/
"-
"
/'
/
"
"\
/
/
\..
,,~-
J
\
"
" "\
,?--\
/
0
I
/"
'\
('
'"
,/._-.""\
'-
/
L'.~
\
.
J
r"
'-
I
,-
"
,
""
...
/
"
,.,-.--~\.
I~
..
I
____·~I
INST 16F
/
''\
;
,r
.'"
,
{"
(
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
{
(
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 64 addresses
assigned, and with 3344 Attachment Feature
(Functional Microcode diskette PN 4168816).
_
4.
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y
valid combinations that can be used.
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
_
_
_
1.
2.
3.
CARD DIAGRAMS
Match the customer-supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the
lowest and highest address supplied.)
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (see Figure 1 for Card(s) location
chart.)
Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel
wrap parameter value (parameter value = 38) on
the label attached to the shroud of the address card.
This information will be used later during checkout.
If no label is available write this information in
Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210,
Step 4.
ADDRESS
RANGE
A-A1T2
000
0.0
ot1>
on
o t1>
000
000
000
o t1>
o
40-7F
000
on
on
~o
000
000
000
000
t1>0
o t1>
aO-BF
000
otb
on
on
tb
0
000
000
000
on
&0
0
CO-FF
000
ot1>
ot1>
t1>0
bb
0
000
000
000
&0
&0
0
PlugOne L
"-
Single Channell}
More than one
0
'M"MI~
'U>
--
o~
,.60
0
'()
'U>
l-
I
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re-IMPL
the functional
microcode disk.
Single
Channel~
A
A-Al02
A
B
A-A1Q2
A-A1P2
O'~
Two-channel Switch
Two-channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
A
B
C
D
A-Al02
A-A1P2
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
/
/
Do 00 Old qJ
[Jo [Jd [Jo [J
f • • • ,- •
~
_I •• -I· • -,- • -,- • -, .'. -,- •• I ••• ,- ••
0
I
I
-
I~____~I
I~____~I
L~____~J
Figure 3: ALTERNATE PLUGGING IF 2151 AND 6111 FEATURES INSTALLED
A-B1G2
A-A1S2
•
A-A1U2
LOCATION
",
-
CARD TYPE Z512
'l9
o
o
o
/
/
ADDRESS SELECT
CARD LA YOUT
- -.....~
A-A1U2
CHNL
/
)
II-
I-
Note: Anytime
0
.----.-~-+--+---+---<~__:_~--,..----t-"-.,
'U>
o~
00
,,
II-
0
'U>
0
o
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
CHANNEL FEATURE
.n,
0O-3F
A-B1G2
o
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S)
AS SHOWN BELOW
Go to INST 18, entry C.
,return to INST 16 add retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses, verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
_
INST 16G
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
PlugthecardsatA1T2,A1U2,andB1G2
according to the card diagrams on this page.
Note: If 8K (2151 feature, see INTRO 5) is installed use
Figure 3 to plug A-B1G2, A-A1U2, and A-A1S2 and the
card diagrams to plug A-A 1T2.
5.
(-
(
(
(
o
0:>0
~
~
'l9
'l9
0
o
U
o
o
o
e'b
o
o
o
CARD TYPE 0792
A
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
CARD TYPE Z512
o
CARD TYPE BA89
If 2151 feature (Expanded Control Store, 8K) and 6111 feature (register
expansion) is installed and using 3344 microcode diskette PIN 4168816,
plug A-A 1S2, A-A 1U2 and A-B 1G2 as shown above.
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975,1976,1978
ADDRESSING
INST 16G
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
b. If 6K (2150 feature) and Register Expansion
(6111 feature) are installed use figure 4 to plug
A-A1U2, A-A1T2 and A-B1G2.
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 16 addresses
assigned, no 3344s or 3350s in the system, and using one
of the following microcode diskettes:
PIN 2348786 or
PIN 2348805 or
. PIN 2348787 or
PIN 2348757 or
PIN 2348996
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
A-A1U2
_
_
_
1.
2.
3.
4.
A-A1T2
0
Plug One L
0
0
0
Go to INST 18, entry A.
0
0
0
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses, verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
_
d"b
OO-OF
000
o~
o c0, o c0, oc0,
000
o c0, o c0, o c0, o c0,
10-1 F
000
6b
o c0, o c0, o c0,
000
c0,
~""'l
20-2F
000
o c0, c0,
0
06),
o tb
000
o 6b tbo o tb o c0,
.Db
30-3F
000
6b
0
o 6b o 6b
000
6b
40-4F
000
o 6b o c0, 6b
0
o 6b
000
o 6b o tb tbo o 6b
50-5F
000
tb
o c0, tb
0
o 6b
000
tb
60-6F
000
o 6b 6b
0
6b
0
o c0,
000
o 6b 6b
70-7F
000
6b
0
6b
0
o 6b
000
6), 0
80-8F
000
o c0,
06),
o~
6b
0
000
o 6b otb
0&0
6b
0
90-9F
000
6b
0
o 6b
0&0
6b
0
000
6b
0&0
6b
0
AO-AF
000
o 6b
6), 0
o 6b 6b
0
000
o 6b tbo o 6b 6b
0
BO-BF
000
6b
6),0
o 6b
6),0
000
6), 0
o 6b 6b
0
CO-CF
000
o 6b o 6b 6b
0
6b
0
000
o 6b o 6b 6b
0
tbo
DO-OF
000
6b
tb
0
&bo
000
&b
o&b tb
0
6b
0
EO-EF
000
o 6b 6b
0
c0,
0
&bo
000
06b
6),0
tb
0
db
0
000
db
0
6b
0
6b
000
6), 0
6),0
tb
0
6b
0
0
c0,
0
0
06),
tb
0
o c0,
06),
o tb o 6b
0
''0
o
0
'\.9
CARD TYPE 0792
4K or 6K without
Register Expansion
(6111 feature).
o
-
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
2722
Figure 4: 6K Machine with Register Expansion
A·A1T2
A·A1U2
o
PlugOne L
o
o
o
v
.
FO-FF
I'-
"""'--;:--1,no
o
o
o
0
6b
0
0
06),
0
6),0
o 6b
0
c0,
0
o 6b
6),0
6b
0
o c0,
06),
0
06),
0
6), 0
0
A·B1G2
Single Channel~
More than one
o
~
v
v
'0
.
• :>
\
\
\
\
\
\
\
00
0
,,,
,
\
I
I
/
I
/
I
I
I
J
\
\
ff-
6b
0
\
\
o
o
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
More than one
'U'
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
Each channel must be plugged according to the
allocation of addresses for that channel. They may
or may not all be plugged the same. If different
addresses are required see Note 1.
Choose one of the following using INTRa 5 to determine features:
a. If 4K (basic) or 6K (2150 feature) machine without Register Expansion (6111 feature) use figure
3 to plug A-A 1U2 and A-A 1T2.
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S)
AS SHOWN BELOW
~<;ingle Channel~
a
Match the customer·supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the
lowest and highest address supplied.)
Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel
wrap parameter value (parameter value = 00) on
the label attached to the shroud of the address
card. This information will be usee later during
checkout. If no label is available write this
information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11
and MICRO 210, Step 4.
ADDRESS
RANGE
Figure 3: 4K or 6K without 6111 feature
c. If 8K (2151 feature) and Register Expansion
(6111 feature) are installed microcode diskette
PIN 4168811 must be used. Return to INST
16 to determine correct address plugging.
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y
valid combinations that can be used.
INST 16H
I
I
\
/
I
I
\
I
CARD TYPE 0792
CARD TYPE Z512
CHNL
CHANNEL FEATURE
~
LOCATION
Single Channel
A
A·Al02
Two-channel Switch
A
B
A·Al02
A·A1P2
Two-channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
A
B
C
0
A·Al02
A·Al P2
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
o
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
If 2150 feature (6K) and
6111 feature (Register
Expansion) are installed.
Plug as shown.
ADDRESS SELECT
CARD LA YOUT
---j"~
Note 1: For multiple channels the}
indicated jumpers must be plugged
identically on each of the address
select cards.
3830-2
ADDRESSING
19 Copyright IBM Corporation 1975. 1976. 1978
.".
(."
..
/'
/
/"
'\
"
./
I
"-
/"
'"
'\
!
>.
/;'
."
/
0
/"~I
("\
"-
INST 16H
"
."
)
.,
/
./
\
./
(
f
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
c
(
(
(
This page is to be used for a 3830 with 32 addresses
assigned and no 3344s or 3350s in the subsystem.
_
5.
ADDRESS
RANGE
Figure 3: 6K WI THOUT 6111 FEATURE
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses, verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
3.
4.
."'OO"l
PLUG ADDRESS'SELECT CARD(S)
AS SHOWN BELOW
6b
000
000
o
060
060
000
000
no
o Ob
o
060
60 0
on
000
000
on
no
on
000
no
no
o Oh
000
000
no
no
060
000
000
060
on
no
000
000
060
060
60 0
AO-BF
000
000
60 0
on
60 0
000
000
60 0
o Oh
Oh
CO-DF
000
000
on
6'1,
0
60 0
000
000
o Oh
no
60 0
EO-FF
000
000
no
no
60 0
000
000
6"'b
Oh
Oh
00-1F
000
000
on
o
20-3F
000
000
60 0
40-5F
000
000
60-7F
000
80-9F
..,''''."'''~
Plug One ...:::. More than one
0
0
0
0
0
0
,
a
en, 't9
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
0
0
'U'
Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic
channel wrap parameter value (parameter
value = 01) on the label attached to the shroud
of the address card. This information will be
used later during checkout. If no label is
available write this information in Note 1. on
MICRO 200, Step 11 and MICRO 210, Step 4.
~
po
'",
r-
6K (feature 2150) without
register expansion (6111
feature).
CHNL
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
2722
Single Channel
A
A-Al02
Two-channel Switch
A
B
A-Al02
A-A1P2
A
B
C
D
A-A 102
A-A lP2
A-A1K2
A-A1J2
Two-channel Switch
Additional (F.our
Channels)
447465
15 Dec 78
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1978
on
0
0
Ob
0
I
I
\
\
/
\
I
\
I
I
I
\
Figure 4: 6K MACHINE WITH REGISTER EXPANSION
A-A1U2
Si.ngle Channel~
Plug OneL.. More than one
o
o
"~O"J
o
o
o
o
,
o
o
.,Cb
\,
I
\
\
A-B1G2
A-A1T2
0
\
\
v
.
I
\
I
\
.
I
\
"
.:>
,I
I
\
\
v
v
\
)
o
\.
00 00 O!dq]
I ••• ,- • -,- • ~ I·
ADDRESS SELECT
CARD LA YOUT
--~.~
CARD TYPE 0792
CARD TYPE Z512
If 2150 feature (6K) and
6111 feature (register
expansion) are installed.
Plug as shown.
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
3830-2
6b
\
o
LOCATION
o
\
o
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
CHANNEL FEATURE
6b
CARD TYPE 0792
a. If 6K (2150 feature) machine without Register
Expansion (6111 feature) use figure 3 to plug
A-A 1U2 and A-A 1T2.
c. If 8K (2151 feature) and Register Expansion
(6111 feature) are installed microcode diskette
PIN 4168811 must be used. Return to INST 16
to determine correct address plugging.
o
0
Choose one of the following using INTRa 5 to determine features:
b. If 6K (2150 feature) and Register Expansion
(6111 feature) are installed use figure 4 to plug
A-A 1U2, A-A 1T2 and A-Bl G2.
O'b
A-A1T2
A-A1U2
1. Match the customer-supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the
lowest and highest address supplied.)
2.
(
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
Go to INST 18, entry B.
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y
valid combinations that can be used.
f
INST 16J
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
_
(
(
•• I- • -I· •• I •• -I- •• I •• -,- ••
[JO [Jd [Jo [J
I
0
I
I~____~J
I~____~I
IL-____~I
I
ADDRESSING
INST 16J
ADDRESSING
ADDRESSING
This page is to be used for a 3830 with two non·consecutive
groups of eight addresses assigned and only two controllers
attached. All attached 3350s will be operated in native
mode or 3330·11 compatibility mode.
4.
Plug the cards at A1S2, A1T2, B1G2, and A1U2
according to the diagrams on this page.
5.
Go to INST 18, entry B.
Figure 2: ADDRESS SELECT CARD(S) PLUG CHART
ADDRESS
RANGE
CAUTION: Addresses shown in Figure 2 are the ONL Y
valid combinations that can be used.
If the addresses you were given do not appear in Figure 2,
return to INST 16 and retrace your path in the flow
diagrams. If this is the correct page and you still cannot
match addresses, verify them with the customer. See
INST 17 for additional information.
_
_
_
1.
2.
3.
A·A1T2
A·A1S2
Single Channell1
Plug One"':"" More than one
'h'"~IJ
~
Plug the Address Select Card(s) as indicated in
Figure 2. (See Figure 1 for Card(s) location chart.)
Each channel must be plugged according to the
allocation of addresses for that channel. They may
or may not all be plugged the same. If different
addresses are requ ired see Note 1.
o
Mark the plugging and the microdiagnostic channel
wrap parameter value (parameter value = 10) on
the label attached to the shroud of the address
card. This information will be used later during
checkout. If no label is available write this
information in Note 1. on MICRO 200, Step 11
and MICRO 210, Step 4.
.n
'""
CARD TYPE BA89
A·B1G2
A·A1U2
0;)
0;)
0 0'
'U0
0::>
Figure 1: CARD LOCATION CHART
CHANNEL FEATURE
CHNL
LOCATION
Single Channel
A
A·Al02
Two·channel Switch
A
B
A·A102
A·A1P2
Two·channel Switch
Additional (Four
Channels)
A
B
C
0
A·Al02
A·A1P2
A·A1K2
A·A1J2
000 060 060
060
060
000 060
060
060
80 ·1F
OS·OF
18 ·1F
000 060 060 060 060
600
000 060
060
060
20·37
20 ·27
30·37
000 060
28·3F
28 ·2F
38·3F
000 060 600 060
40·57
40 ·47
50·57
000 060 060 600 060 060 000 060 600 060
48·5F
48 ·4F
58·5F
000 060 060
60·77
60 ·67
70·77
000 060 600 600 060 060 000 600 600 060
68· 7F
68·6F
78 ·7F
000 060 600 600 060 600 000 600 600 060
80·97
80 ·87
90 ·97
000 060 060 060 600 060 000 060 060 600
88·9F
88 ·8F
98·9F
000 060 060 060 600 600 000 060
AO·B7
AO·A7
BO·B7
000 060 600 060 600 060 000 600 060 600
A8·BF
A8·AF
B8·BF
000 060 600 060 600 600 000 600 060 600
CO·D7
CO·C7
00·07 '
000 060 060 600 600 060 000 060 600 600
CS-DF
C8·CF
D8·DF
000 060 060 600 600 600 000 060 600 600
EO· F7
EO· E7
FO· F7
000 060 600 600
E8· FF
E8· EF
F8· FF
000 0'60 600 600 600 600 000 600 600 600
o
TRANSFER BUFFER
CONTROL CARD TYPE
BH98
'U'
the jumpers are
changed on this
card, Re-IMPL
the functional
microcode disk.
600
060
060 060 060 000 600 060 060
600
060
600 000 600 060 060
060 600 000 060 600 060
600
.... ...
.... ....
600
\
"
... ....
060
060 000 600 600 600
,,
...
--
I
I
\
I
\
"
I
I
\
\
I
00 OoO!dqJ
1_. -1-· -,_. -,_. -,_. ·'~I·· -,_. -1-··
ii-
Note: Anvtime
CHANNEL TRANSFER
CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
PLUG ADDRESS SELECT CARD
AS SHOWN BELOW
00·07
10 ·17
lI-
VALID ADDRESS
COMBINATIONS
00 ·17
/'
Match the customer·supplied addresses to the
address range in Figure 2. (Address range is the
lowest and highest address supplied. These are
not consecutive addresses.)
INST 16K
ADDRESS SE LECT
CARD LAYOUT - -.....~
[Jo. ~D;
I
c::::J
Note 1: For multiple channels the }
indicated jumpers must be plugged
identically on each of the address
select cards.
[JO lJ
0
I
l-
CARD TYPE Z512
3830·2
ADDRESSING
@ Copyright IBM Corporation 1978
~-"'\
I
\
\.., ~
/'
\ ... "
!
'"!
.
./
/'''\
'-.
/
.<'
'-.
r,,\
('-\
/
\ '.
," )
\.. j
\.,,-
/'
.. j
INST 16K
("'.
\,
)
./
c
(
(
(
f
(
(
f
(
c
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement)
(
64 Drive Addressing Capability for 3350 Attachment
64 Address Compare:
Address Select Card Plugging
With 3350 Attachment feature the 3830-2 CU has 64 Drive
Addressing capability. This refers to the number of addresses
the CU will answer to, not the physical number of drives
attached to the CU (a maximum of 32 drives can be attached
to one CUI.
The 3344 Attachment Feature requires "64 Addresses
Compare". The 3350 Attachment Feature, with 3 or 4
controllers attached to the CU and any 3350 operating in
3330 Model 1 Compatibility mode, also requires "64 Addresses
Compare." With other 3350 configurations, use of "64
Addresses Compare" will provide for any future change.
However, with some system configurations, 64 addresses may
not be available. To provide for this, other addressing options
are made available. Use of these options will depend on the
number of controllers attached to the CU and the 3350 mode
of operation (a 3350 operating in 3330 Model 1 Compatibility
mode requires two logical addresses and must have Bit 2 of
the CU address floating).
With 3350 Attachment feature, refer to the description of
64 Drive Addressing Capability. Use jumper assembly
PIN 816645 to connect bits 0-4 on the Address Select Card
for the customer's address for the 3830-2. Use INST 16 to
determine the proper table for address plugging. Card is
located at A-A 1Q2. (See logic pages KA 103 and 104.)
If 3350 Attachment feature is installed, ensure bits 3 and 4
of the controller's address cards are plugged to answer to
bits 3 and 4 of the CU (Control Unit) address.
If Two Channel switch feature is installed, also connect the
Channel B address select card jumpers. Read "CAUTION"
below. Card is located at A-A 1P2. (See logic pages KC103
and 104.)
If Two Channel Switch Additional feature is installed, also
connect channel C and 0 address select card jumpers. Read
"CAUTION" below before plugging. Cards are located at
A-A1 K2 (channel C) and A-A1J2 (channel 0). (See logic
pages KC103, 104 and KD103, 104.)
CAUTION
If Tvvo Channel Switch, or Tvvo Channel Switch Additional,
feature is installed the following rules must be followed or,
on some interrupt conditions, incorrect CU addresses will be
generated and system errors will result.
The 3350 operates in one of three modes:
Native mode; as a 3350 and requires one logical address per
spindle.
3330 Model 11 Compatibility mode,' the 3350 operates as
one 3330 Model 11 and requires one logical address per
spindle.
3330 Model 1 Compatibility mode; the 3350 operates as
two 3330 Model 1's and requires two logic addresses per
spindle.
These 3 modes can be intermixed on one controller.
When two logical addresses are required by one physical drive,
all bits of the two addresses will be the same except bit 2,
for example: Address 47 (0100 0111) bit 2 off and address 67
(0110 0111) bit 2 on. Bit 2 on selects one half of the disk
storage area, bit 2 off selects the other half. Therefore, to
have two addresses for one drive, bit 2 must be left floating on
the address compare section of the Address Select card.
Native 3330s, 3340s, 3350s, and 3350s in 3330-11
compatibility mode must be assigned to a primary address.
Address Select Card
1. If 3 or 4 controllers are attached to the CU, bits 3 and 4 of
address compare must float.
2 If only 1 or 2 controllers are attached to the CU, bit 3 of
address compare must be plugged the same on the Address
Select Card of all channels of the CU.
3. If only 1 controller is attached to the CU, bits 3 and 4
must be plugged the same on the address compare of the
Address Select Card for all channels.
The Address Select Card Plugging is shown on Addressing
pages INST 16A through INST 16K for all possible
combinations of selecting the CU with 3340 or 3350
Attachment Features;
Use INST 16 to select the correct Addressing page and
follow the procedure on the selected page to plug the
.
Address Select Card.
(-
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addr_ing Supplement)·
ADDRESSING FOR 3344 AND 3350 FEATURES
With 3344 Attachment feature, the Address Select card must
be plugged for "64 Addresses Compare."
(
(
INST 17
8,16, or 32 Address Options:
32 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 off; used with up to four
controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330
Model 1 Compatability mode.
32 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 on; used with up to four
controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330
Model 1 Compatability mode.
32 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 floating; used with up to two
controllers, with one or more 3350s operating in 3330
Model 1 Compatability mode.
16 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 off; used with up to two
controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330
Model 1 Compatability mode.
16 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 on; used with Uj; to two
controllers, with none of the 3350s operating in 3330
Model 1 Compatability mode.
16 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 floating; used with one
controller with one or more 3350s operating in 3330
Model 1 Compatability mode.
8 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 off; used with one controller,
with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1
Compatability mode.
8 Addresses Compare, Bit 2 on; used with one controller,
with none of the 3350s operating in 3330 Model 1
Compatability mode.
3830-2
~ Copyright IBM Corporation 1978
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement)
I NST 17
INSTALLATION iNSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement)
The 3830-2 detects and interprets only bits 0-4 of the
address presented by the channel on bus out. Connect both
Address Compare and Address Select.
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement)
Figure 1: Address Select Card
If 3344 attachment feature is present, check that jumpers
on A·B1G2 are plugged correctly.' If 3350 attachment
feature is present, check that card jumpers on A-B 1G2
and A·A1S2 are plugged correctly.
Example: Address select card shown plugged for address
range 158 through 15F.
Figure 1 shows the Address Select card plugged for address
range 158 through 15F. The Address Select card is located
at A-A1Q2. (See logic pages KB103 and 104.)
Type BA89
Type 2512
If Two Channel Switch feature is installed, also connect
the channel B address select card jumpers as described
above. Card is located at A-A 1P2. (See logic pages KB 103
and 104.)
If Two Channel Switch, Additional, feature is installed,
also connect channels C and 0 address select card jumpers
as described above. Cards are located at A-A 1 K2 and
A-A1J2 respectively. (See logic pages KC103, 104, and
KD103, 104.)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CU
Address
Compare
Bits
---~-~4~---1
o
o
_____ _
_.~--··2
2
~
CU
Address
Generate
.··'----3
L
K J
0
~
H
,
)-2
0
CL.P
-1
0
'l,.;'l
30
31
0
cg
Always
floated
{g ,," ,-' ,'not
used
------------ ------------,
:
0
0
, on (1)0
P
58e
"
I
I-I--
6
7
R 0
C-'o
<1:_,
bit:
,
'- -------,
Bit Definition, Bit 1
Channel
Channel
Channel
Channel
A;
B:
C:
D:
A-A102 (KA103, 104)
A-A1P2 (KB103, 104)
A.A1K2 (KC103, 104)
A-A1J2 (KD103, 104)
Bit 2 On
Off
Bit 3 On
Notes:
1. Bits 3 and 4 must be plugged identically for all channel
inputs (these bits define attached controllers). If
functional microdisk PN 4168811 with any 33508 in
3330-1 compatibility mode is installed, then bits 2, 3,
and 4 must be plugged identically for all channel inputs.
Off
Bit P
©
"
'-_/
"\
/~
',-
/;
-..
~\
(
/
'-
/
'"
'\
(I'
\,
Enable Offset Interlock
(Jumper active with FunctIonal
Microcode PIN 4168811 only)
O"b -
053 to 054
R51 to R52
-
Disable Offset Interlock
6-'0 -
R51 to 051
- R53 to 053
• Bit
Shown jumpered for:
No E.C.C.
3330-1 Compatability Mode
8K Storage
Offset Interlock
(Jumpers are used by microdiagnostics and functional
code to determine machine
configuration.)
I
Copy light IBM Corporation 1978
"\,
I-
• On (1)
Off (0)
•
2. Always plug for the actual storage size regardless of
functional disk Part Number (See INTRO 5).
15 Dec 78
ECC (3830 P21) I Rder to
No ECC (Snipe) f I NTR 005
No 3330-1 Compatability
3330·1 cOmpatability mode
or 3344
= 8K storage
} Note 2
6K stora~e
= Offset I nterlock (Jumper
on with functional microcode
PIN 4168811 only)
= No offset Interlock
Odd parity for bits 0·3
Bit 0 On =
Off =
Bit 1 On =
Off =
Jumper PN 816645
51
52
53
54
A·A1S2
A·B1G2
447465
tt-
0
,'~ffio):--\
3830-2
-
3
0
29
I--
Bit
~-.
} Note 1
o ••••• ,--------,
'8
o
, ',,
. ____4_
,,"~'
5
Bits
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement)
/~
"-
/'
/
INST 17A
\
\
/'
',-
(
/'
/
"
/
"-
"
/
,
"
"
c-
"
I'
,
(
~\
INST 17A
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addressing Supplement)
CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL CARD
TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL CARD
f
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (AddressingSupplementl
TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL
CARD TYPE BH98
D
Single channel
E22 to 022
More than one
channel
E22 to E23
Jumper as shown on card layout for type of
card present. Card type BAB2 is used with
3350 attachment feature.
f·
(
I NST 17B
TRANSFER BUFFER CONTROL
CARD TYPE 2722
f"\
r-'\
Single channel
E22 to 022
More than one
chan nel
E22 to E23
11111
11111
K
CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL
CARD TYPE BA82
P17 to P18 = Offset
Interlock active
(Jumper active with
Functional Microcode PIN 4168811
I
I
I I I I
0
0
0
0
0
p
0
to
P
S
nly)
Q P
10
J
lC-24
22-~
23-0~
P-26
'0-27
H
I
:-0-25
0-17
~P-26
--19
'0-27
00
o
o
0'b--22
iP18 '" 018·
Standard
}
H26 to H?7
S47 to S48
Ob
Or
Offset Interlock
inactive.
5
5
I
A·A1U2 (GK502)
0
I I
o 0-25
P
"tl
O'b
E
H
I I
13
-17
qA~ -18
P-20 E 0
't>- 21 I_I
0-22-0.::0
23 -0"-
CHANNEL TRANSFER CONTROL
CARD TYPE 0792
A·A1U2 (GK502)
P-46
'0-47
0-48
I
This card shown
jumpered for
and single channel
II
.
gil:',
:-0-46
:;.0-47
'0-48
D
A·A1T2
32 Drive Expansion }
Feature
H25 to H26
S46 to S47
A·A1T2
...
Card BH98 Address Plugging
16 Addresses
1H2a ro H27 -,
6
I J26 to J27
I K21 to K22
1547 to 548
II
I
t..!'~4..!~~~ ..J
32 Addresses
r-------,
II
I
I H25 to H26
I J26 to J27
K21 to K22
I 546 to 547
I
I
L!~~~~.J
64 Addresses
,-----,
I H26to H27 :
II
I J26 to J27
( K20 to K21
546 to 547
I
I
:.f~~~i....J
3830·2
447465
1 ~5 Dec 78
© Cop\·right IBM Corporation 1978
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Addre iSing Supplement)
INST 17B
(-
ADDRESSING
AODRESSING
~
~
Use the primary address range
assigned and the Controller
address column indicated to
determine the controiler
address assignments. Record
this information in Figure 1
to be used in Step 5,
INST 26.
PRIMARY ADDRESS
ASSIGNED
See Note 1.
+
~
Use the primary address range
assigned and the Controller
address column indicated to
determine the controller
address assignments. Record
this information in Figure 1
to be used in Step 5,
INST 26.
t
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS
ASSIGNMENTS
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS
ASSIGNMENTS
See Note 1.
See Note 1.
See Note 1.
18-1F.
20-27
28-2F
30-37
38-3F
0
1
2
3
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
2.
2.
2.
2.
40-47
48-4F
50-57
58-5F
60-67
68-6F
70-77
78-7F
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
2.
2.
2.
2.
80-87
88.8F
90-97
98-9F
AO-A7
A8-AF
BO-B7
B8-BF
0
0
1
1
0
2
3
0
1
2
3
CO-C7
CB-CF
00-07
D8-0F
EO-E7
E8-EF
FO-F7
F8-FF
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
PRIMARY
ADDRESSES
ASSIGNED
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS
ASSIGNMENTS
t
CONTROLLER
ADDRESS
ASSIGNMENTS
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
10~17
FIGURE 1
Use the primary address range
assigned and the Controller
address column indicated to
determine the controller
address assignments. Record
this information in Figure 1
to be used in Step 5,
INST 26
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
00-07
08-0F
INST 18
0
1
2
3
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
2.
2.
2..
2.
Note 1: All Channel inputs must be capable of addressing
all attached 3333s, 3340 A02s, and 3350 A021A2Fs, and
all associated logical addresses.
H.4Jen 33508 are to be operated in 3330-1 compatibility
mode, the 3350 operates as two 33308 and requires two
.logical addreSSBs per spindle, a primary and a secondary.
In strings vvhere there are no 33508 operating in 3330- 7
mode only primary addresses are used.
~GO TO INST 25 and Continue.
Note 2: No Real Device can be assigned to this address.
This is reserved for secondary addreS$8S.
0
1
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
See Note
See Note
See Note
See Note
2.
2.
2.
2.
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1978
ADDRESSING
/-'~
.------\
\ ....
--,I
'"
. ./
r''''
![>"\
--I
\
'-
/
/
'"
./
~.
I
\
.INST 18
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
~
__ 7
(
(
f'
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
__ 9
Check
When
Complete
(
(
I NST 25
On a two channel switch machine, jumper 01A-A1V2D07
to 01A-A1M2S03 and 01A-A1K2J13 to 01A-M2S04 (NE103)
using purple wire. These wires must be removed if two
channel switch additional is installed.
Check that card jumpers on A·A 1L2, A·A 1M2, and
A·A 1R2 match channel options as indicated by the
jumper coding shown here.
__ 10
Verify that the address range (including primary and
addresses) does not conflict with other
control units on the same channel.
~econdary
SELECTED BUSrfAG OUT
CARD TYPE 9965
CHANNEL SELECTOR
CARD TYPE 9966
-----......
.(Card type x999 on some machinesl
-11
--
A-A 1 R2(CS1031
_
12
Single channel - - - - - - - - Two Channel Switch - - -_ _
Two Channel Switch, Additional 1111111
If the attached CPU or channel has Block Multiplex feature,
be sure that it is activated. Check U.C.W. plugging in the
CPU or channel for 3830 addresses. System performance
can be seriously degraded if 3830 addresses are plugged for
"Share" at CPU or channel. Be aware of all the addresses
involved with 64 or 32 drive addresses.
If 3344s installed or any 3350 in 3,,0$0·1 compatability
mode installed review physical planning guide for resulting
individual drive addresses.
A-A 1 L2(NE2021
A-A 1M2 (NE1021
_13
__ 8
Go to INST 26 next.
If Two Channel Switch, Additional feature is installed,
maKe sure that violet jumpers are installed from B-A 1 E6D06
to B-A 1 E8B04 and from B-A 1 E6D12 to B-A 1B1009. (See
logic page AR101-102).
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1972, 1973, 1976, 1978
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INST 25
(
\
.
./
'-
'\
'\
/'
,/
('
'"
'\
,/
"-
"-
r~·
'\
,,r',,
('
"
"
j
,/
\.
-
"\
,/
',-
'\
/
'\
('
"\
,/,,'
"\
"--
./
,/
"
./
/'
'\
(' "-
',,-
./
"
/
\
",
"\,
(
'-,
/
"
'\
(~,--'
/
j
(-",\,
'- /
,('°1,\"
'"
j
,~
"
'7)'"
/
r="\I"
;
/
,
~
,
1
\
{
(
(
(
f
(
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
5
(
(
(
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
f
(
I NST 26
CONTROL UNIT MICRODIAGNOSTICS
___ Insert 3830-2 diagnostic disk in 23FD and perform step
A on START 25, and step B on START 27. Verify
controller address assignments by checking the controller
plugging (Use the controller INST section and the
information recorded in Figure 1 on INST 18 of this
section).
CAUTION: Verify that proper 383()'2 diagnostic disk
is supplied for your machine configuration. See INTR 005.
6
SYSTEM TEST
1
___ 2
7
Connect channel Bus and Tag cables between
channel and 3830-2
Run online test 3830AAA from the CPU.
Refer to step C on START 27.
COVER INSTALLATION
__1
Mount kickstrips.
Light tapping with
a hammer may be required
to properly seat them.
/.~
~- 10,,,,,,;,
Screws
Note: If installation ;s on a non-raised
floor do not attempt to mount kickstr;p
(P/N2277387) on right end of 3830-2.
__ 2
8
MtgBarY
1.
Re-install covers removed in step
RECORDS
__1
Assist customer with his checkout of the facility.
__ 2
Complete all installatioll' records.
__ 3
3830-2
Retain these installation procedures in the Maintenance Library
for future reference.
1
©
447461
12 Mar 76
Copyright IBM Corporation 1976, 1978
1447465
15 Dec 78
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
IN ST 26 ,
f
~
I'
'\
j
"-
'\
/"
'\,
"
/
/'
"-
'"
/
/'
-",
/"
'"
"
'\I
/
"
\
/'
'\
-~
"\.
\
'\
/
''\
''\
"
\
"
!
\
(
'-
/
"
/~,
!
/
/"
'\
/'
/
"
j
'\
,/
"
I
---
".
,~."
'\
,
(
"
"
/
"
~~"
,- /
(-"\
" ", / '
/~
r'\
'\ /'
'\
.J
(~
\
~,
~-
p(' (
(~\
(-- ("
-.
('
(
('
(-
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
(
('
(-
(
L
A AND B BUS-CHANNEL INTERFACE
INDEX
A and B Bus Assemblers CTRL 118
A Bus
Assembler CTRL 400
Introduction CTRL 200,INTR 115
A Register
Check CTRL 35
Error, FSI FSI55
Introduction CTRL 400
Parity Error PANEL 40
Abbreviations and Definitions LGND 16
Accept Data (Sequence Control) CHL-I 240
Accept Status (Sequence Control) CHL-I 240
Access Cycle CTRL 320
ACR (see Address Compare)
Address Assembler/Error Assembler CHL-1165
Address Buffer Description CTRL 605
Address Bus
Error 2 (23FD Attach) MPL 290
Address Byte Sector, MPL MPL 220
Address/Check/Program Display
Check I Error I Collection PANEL 40
Indicators (CE Panel) PANEL 10
Operation PANEL 100
Register PANEL 40
Address Compare CHL-I 165
ACR Sync, Stop and Recycle PANEL 120
Indicator PANEL 10
Operation PANEL 16
Recycle PANEL 16
SW Sync, or Stop PANEL 120
Switch PANEL 10
Address/Data Entry Switches PANEL 10
Address In (Timing) CHL-1350
Address In Introduction CHL-I 220
Address Out (Timing) CHL-I 350
Address Out Introduction CHL-I 220
Address Select Card Wiring INST 20
Addressing
Assignment I T 20
Control Storage CTRL 600
Decoding CHL-I 165,CHL-I 235
I/O Device CHL-I 230
Instruction Data Flow CTRL 230
ALD/Card Index START 905
Alert Lines, CTL-I CTL-I 10
ALU
Check, ECD CTRL 60
Check, Indication PANEL 40
Data Flow INTR 90
Description CTRL 400
Error CTRL 60
Error, Description CTRL 400
Error, FSI FSI 50
Inputs INTR 115
Introduction CTRL 200
Microprogram Instruction Word CTRL 235
Operation CTRL 225,CTRL 235
Operations - Examples CTRL 410
Statement MIC 2
Analysis, Entry Point START 10
Anti-Recycle Latch PWR 105,PWR 310
Arithmetic Logic Unit (see ALU)
Array Cards CTRL 605
Artificial Respiration (Back of Title Page) ii
Attachment Concepts MPL 230
Attachment Errors MPL 290
Attachment Introduction MPL 220
3830-2
© Copyright IBM Corporation 1975
U:~~~51
BBus
Assembler CTRL 400
Introduction INTR 115
B Register •
Check ECD CTRL 35
Check MAP CTRL 35
Description CTRL 400
Parity Error PANEL 40
B Time Timing Chart (Read) MPL 280
Backup Address Register (BAR)
Description CTRL 220
Introduction INTR 110
BFRDY Branch CL 14 CHL-I 145,CHL-1260
Bias Supply LOC 10
Bit Control MIC 2
Bit Counter MPL 230
Block Multiplex Mode CHI-I 230
Blowers LOC 2,LOC 14
Box Print Position MIC 2
Box Serial Number MIC 2
Branch
Controls INTR 110
Status Error PANEL 40
Status Error, FSI FSI35
Buffer
Assembly CHL-1165
Check, CHL-I PANEL 50
Controls, CHL-I CHL-I 200,CHL-I 260
Parity Check CHL-I 'I S5
Parity Error CTL-I liS
Ready CHL-1145
Bulk Supply Diodes LOC 8
Bulk Transformers LOC 10
Bulk I Power Problem PWR 60
Bulk 1 Supply PWR 61
Bulk 2 Power Problem PWR 70
Bulk 2 Supply PWR 71
Bus Assemblers Block Diagram CTRL 118
Bus In
CTL-I Data Transfer CTL-135
CTL-I Extended Operation CTL-I 50
Introduction, Channel CHL-I 220
Timing, Channel CHL-1350
Bus Out
Check, Printout MSG 20
CTL-I Data Transfer CTL-I 35
CTL-I Extended Operation CTL-I 45
Introduction, Channel CHL-I 220
Parity Check, CHL-I CHL-I 255
Parity Check, CTL-I CTL-I lIO,P ANEL 50
Parity Error, Channel CHL-I 30
Timing, Channel CHL-I 350
Write Data Path, Channel CHL-I 165
Busy Status CMD 180,CHL-I 245
Byte Assembly
Description CTRL 605
Register (Read) MPL 280
23FD Attachment Concepts MPL 230
Byte Counter MPL 270
Byte Format (23FD Attachment Introduction) MPL 220
CAFieid
Decode Description MIC 3
Decode Error, FSI FSI35
Description CTRL 235
Even Decode Error CTRL 20,PANEL 40
Odd Decode Error CTRL 20,PANEL 40
Cabling INST 5,INST 20
Card Function Chart START 900
Card Layout by Board START 905
Card Location Chart START 900
Card to Logic Page List START 905
Carry In Control CTRL 400
Cartridge MPL 2
CAS Flow (Read) CMD 130
CAS Flow (Write) CMD 90
CB/CD Field Decode Description MIC 3
CB/CD Field Description CTRL 235
CB Decode
Error, FSI FSI35
Even Error CTRL 25,PANEL 40
Odd Error CTRL 25,PANEL 40
CB2 Trips PWR 40
CD Decode
Error Latched PANEL 40
Error Timing Chart CTRL 30
CE Address
CE Communication Out Driver CTL-IIO
CE Initial Entry, Description of START 10
CE Mode Register Display Circuits
General Purpose Register PANEL 110
IAR Register PANEL 105
CE Panel LOC 2,P ANEL 10
Checkout PANEL 30
Controls INTR 9O,INTR 110
Description of Controls PANEL 10
Front View PANEL 10
Indications (Channel Wraparound Test) MICRO 200
Operations PANEL 10
ACR Addresss Compare Sync or Stop PANEL 16
Address Compare PANEL 16
Address Compare Recycle PANEL 16
Register Alter PANEL IS
Register Display PANEL 15
Storage Alter PANEL IS
Storage Display PANEL IS
Rear View PANEL 11
Rotor Switches Rear View PANEL II
Test (8A) MICRO 427
CH Field MIC 16
Decode Description CTRL 230
Description MIC 3
Chaining, Disconnected Command CMD 200
Chan B/Respon Branch CHL-1180
Channel Buffer Controls CHL-I 260
Channel Data Transfer Controls Description CHL-I 260
Channel Disabled CHL-I 20
Channel Drivers and Terminators LOC 14
Channel Interface
A Check, CHL-I PANEL 50
Address/Error Assembler CHL-1165
Addressing, I/O Device CHL-I230
Attachment CHL-I 500
B Check, CHL-I PANEL 50
Block Multiplex Mode CHL-I 230
Buffer A and B,(Read) CHL-I 360
Buffer A and B (Offset Read) CHL-I 370
Buffer A and B (Write) CHL-I 385
Buffer A and B (Offset Write) CHL-I 390
Buffer Controls CHL-I 260
A and B Buffers CHL-I 260
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
INDEX 1
Error Checking CHL-I 270
Initial Selection-Status Presentation CHL-I 260
Read Operation CHL-I 265
Write Operation CHL-I 260
Bus Out Parity CHL-I 25
Check Channel A, B, Cor D CHL-1185
Command Chaining (see also Block Multiplex Mode)
CHL-124O
Commands CHL-I 235
Connectors CHL-I 194
Control Check MSG 20,CHL-I 130
Control Unit Busy Sequence CHL-I 230
Control Unit Errors CHL-I 130
Control Unit Initiated Sequence CHL-I 230
Data Flow INTR 9O,CHL-I 500
Data Transfer CHL-I 230
Data Transfer Controls Description CHL-I 265
Description CHL-I 200
Detected Failure CHL-I 125
Diagnostic Flow Charts
Routine 6A MICFL 70
Routine 6C MICFL 85
Routine 6E MICFL 125
Routine 60 MICFL 20
Routine 62 MICFL 30
Routine 64 MICFL 40
Routine 66 MICFL 55
Routine 68 MICFL 65
Disabled Indicator(s) PANEL 10
Disabled Manual Switch Flowchart CHL-I 20
Disconnected Command Chaining (see Block Multiplex
Mode)
End Status CMD 180,CHL-I 250
Ending Procedure CHL-I 230
Error Condition Diagrams
Buffer Parity Check CHL-I 160
Buffer Ready CHL-I 145
Bus Out (Write Data Path) CHL-1165
Chan B/Respon Branch CHL-1180
Channel Bus Out Parity CHL-I 30
Channel Interface Disabled CHL-I 20
Control Unit End CHL-I 145
Halt I/O Busy CHL-I 140
Multiconnect Error/IFC CHL-II85
Overrun CHL-I 35
Request In CHL-I 135
Selective Reset CHL-I 190
Servo/Multi Branch CHL-I 180
Suppress Out CHL-I 150
System Reset CHL-1190
Transfer/Halt I/O CHL-I 140
Freeze CHL-114O
General Information CHL-I 230
Initial Selection CHL-1300
Initial Selection Sequence CHL-I 230
Inter-board Wiring Chart CHL-I 194
Interface Disconnect CHL-I 240
Introduction INTR 20,INTR 14O,CHL-I 200,CHL-I 220
Jumper Card Assignments CHL-I 225
Logic Flow CHL-I 200
MAPs
Buffer Parity Check CHL-I 160
Bus In Parity Check CHL-I 125
Channel Bus Out Parity CHL-I 25
Channel Time Out CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130
A AND B BUS-CHANNEL INTERFACE
INDEX 1
c~
INDEX
CHANNEL INTERFACE Icont'd)-CP15 OR 18
Channel Interface. MAPs (continued)
Channels are Disabled CHL-120
CU Busy Check CHL-I 125
Illegal Sequence CHL-I 125
Interface Check Channel A, B, C, or 0 CHL-II85
Log Disconnect In CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130
Multiple In Tags CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130
No Response Check CHL-I 125
Unit Address No Compare CHL-I 125
Operation CAS Flowchart CMD 35
Response
Latch CHL-I 260
Latch (Read) (,HL-I 365, (,HL-I 375
Latch (Write) CHL-I 385, CHL-I 395
Selection Switch CHL-I475
Sense Information CHL-I250
Sequence Controls CHL-I235
Special Control Lines CHL-I 225
Status Information CHL-I 245
Tag In/Out CHL-I 220
Timeout CHL-I 130
Timing Chart CHL-I 220,CHL-I 350
Transfer Buffer CHL-I 260
Transfer Controls CHL-I 260
Buffer Control During Initial Selection CHL-I 260
Buffer Control Error Checking CHL-I 270
Buffer Control of Data Transfer CHL-I 260,CHL-I 265
Buffer Controls to Control Unit CHL-I 260
Ending Sequence (Channel Truncation) CHL-I265
Truncation CHL-I 265
Unit Address Field MSG 20
Wrap Diagnostic
Cable Point to Point Diagram MICRO 205
CE Panel Indications MICRO 200
Channel Routine 60 MICFL 20
Description of MICRO 200
M,crodiagnostic Running Instructions MICRO 200
Physical Layout MICRO 200
Routine 60 MICFL 20
Routines Summary MICRO 210
Test Cable Installation MICRO 205
Wrap Diagnostic Description MICFL 5
Wraparound Test, Description MICRO 200
Channel Selector Card Wiring INST 20
Channel Switching CHL-I 470
Channel Transfer Control Card INST 20
Channel Transfer Controls CHL-I 260
Chart
Command Summary CMD 2
Control Command CMD 5
Control Unit Clock Timing CTRL 300
Format Decode Active Lines CTRL 500
Read Commands CMD 100
Read Cycle Timing CTRL 600
Search Commands CMD 50
Sense Commands CMD 140
Write Commands CMD 70
Write Cycle Timing CTRL 600
Check Bit Generator INTR 105
,Check End, CTL-I CTL-I IO,CTL-I 110
Check Indicators PANEL 10
Check Reset Lamp Test PANEL 10
Check I
Address/Check/Program Display Register PANEL 40
Definition of PANEL 4O,ST ART 5
Error Register Display PANEL 40
Errors CTRL 200,INTR 50
Errors, Description of PANEL 41
Register Card Location Table PANEL 40
Check 2
Error Collection PANEL 50
Error Collection, Description of PANEL 51
Errors INTR 50
Errors, Definition of START 5
CI (see Control Interface)
Circuit Protectors LOC 6,LOC 8,LOC IO,PWR 30
Circuits by Card START 900
Card Location START 905
Duplicate Card Chart START 905
CL Decoder (Error> CTRL 45
CL Field
Decode CTRL 230
Decode Description MIC 3
Clock
Cycle Controls CTRL 300,INTR 110
Errors FSI 30,CTRL 40
Stopped Indicator PANEL 10
CM Field MSG 20
Command (see also specific command)
Byte Decoding CHL-I 235
Chaining, Channel CHL-I 240,CHL-I 350
Chaining, Disconnected CMD 200
Decode Flowchart CMD 183,CMD 185
Execution Byte (CEB) Definition Charts CMD 430
Objectives
Control CMD 15
Read CMD 107
Search CMD 55
Sense CMD 142
Write CMD 77
Out (Timing) CHL-I 350
Out/Address Out CHL-I 260
Out Introduction CHL-I 220
Reject MSG 20,CHL-I 255
Retry, Description and Flowchart CMD 210
Summary CMD 2
Compare Assist Check CTL-I IIO,CTL-I 120
Console Error Message MSG 20
Control Circuits, Introduction INTR 10
Control Commands
Descriptions of CMD 5,CHL-I 235
Flowcharts CMD 20
Diagnostic Load CMD 25
Diagnostic Write CMD 30
Mask Byte CMD 20
No Operation (Instruction) CMD 25
Recalibrate CMD 20
Restore CMD 25
Seek CMD20
Set File Mask CMD 20
Set Sector CMD 25
Space Count CMD 30
Objectives CMD 15
Summary Chart CMD 2
Control Data Flow-Block Diagram CTRL 200
Control Errors, FSI FSI 20
Control Hardware Description CTRL 220
Control Interface (CI, CTL-I)
Buffer INTR 120
Extended Operation CMD 45
Immediate Operation CMD 30
Load S Register CMD 190
Buffer Parity Check CTL-I IIO,CTL-1115
Load S Registers CMD 190
Bus In CTL-I 10
I IBM CONFIDENTIAL
447460
3830·2
19 Dec 75
© Copyright
\...
'
UNTIL MARCH 26, 1976, UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
IBM Corporation 1975
iJ 0 0 0 n J 0
~
Bus Out CTL-I \0
Bus Out Parity Check CTL-I 115
Checks FSI 15,CTL-I 1\0
Checks. FSI FSI 15
Compare Assist Check CTL-I IIO,CTL-I 120
Compare Assist Logic CTL-I 120
Control Decode, Read CTL-I 50
Control Decode, Write CTL-I45
Controller Check CTL-I 110
Data Flow INTR 120
Extended Operation CMD 45
Immediate Operation CMD 30
Load S Registers CMD 190
Data Transfer CTL-I 35
Description of Lines CTL-I \0
Error Checking and Collection INTR 120
Error Condition Diagrams CTL-I I IO,CTL-I 115,CTL-I 120
Extended Operation CTL-I 15,CTL-I 35
Immediate Operation CTL-115,CTL-120
Introduction INTR 20,INTR 90,CTL-I I
Load S Registers CTL-I 190
Check CTL-I I IO,CTL-I 120
Logic with Wraparound Cable Installed MICRO 506
Microdiagnostic Error Code Dictionary MICRO 515
Microdiagnostic Routines Summary MICRO 510
Operation (Cylinder Seek Example) CMD 35
Polling CTL-I 25
Read Data Transfer from Device CTL-I 50
Register Assignments MIC 5
S Reg Decode CTL-I 190
Scope Points MICRO 505
Select Active CTL-I 115
Select Check CTL-I 115
Select Controller CTL-I 20
Select Device CTL-I 20
Special Operations MIC 3
System Orientation CTL-I 5
Tag Bus Parity Check CTL-I I 10
Tag Sequences CTL-I 15
Tags In/Out CTL-I 10
Transfer Error CTL-I IIO,CTL-I 120
Wraparound Cable MICRO 500
Wraparound Test MICRO 500
Write Data Transfer to Device CTL-I 45
Control Module, Disk Storage INTR 20
Control Options (Microdiagnostics) MICRO 16,MICRO 20
Control Storage
Address Buffer CTRL 605
Address Errors FSI 4O,CTRL 610
Address Relationship (MPL) MPL 220
Addressing CTRL 600
Array Cards CTRL 605
Byte Assembly CTRL 605
Check Bits CTRL 605
Contents (Address Assignments) CTRL 650,CTRL 652
Control Circuits INTR 100
Data Cycles CTRL 250
Data Flow INTR 100
Data Flow Description CTRL 250
Description CTRL 600
Diagnostic Mode CTRL 600
Error Checking Data Flow INTR 110
Error Correction Code (ECC) CTRL 600
Error Detection CTRL 610
IMPL Attachment Data Flow INTR lOS
()
",-j
()
''<-JI'
0
if'
(JJ,
'
'
~
~
a
0
rl\
\.JI
:)
0
a
'
,
A
~
a
!"'-"l\,
",,-..JJ
Instruction Format Decode CTRL 500
Instruction Word CTRL 230
'Introduction INTR 20,INTR 90
Load Decodes INTR 120
Manual Controls INTR 110
MPL File INTR 105
Power Sequencing PWR 105
Read Cycle CTRL 600
Scoping Procedures FSI 32
Timing Chart (Read/Write) CTRL 600
Trileads Chart FSI 33
Write Bus CTRL 605
Error FSI40
Write Cycle CTRL 600
Control Unit
A and B Bus Assemblers CTRL I 18
Address CHL-I 230
Busy Check CHL-I 125
Busy Sequence CHL-I 230
Clock (see Clock)
CU Cycle Error FSI 30
Cycle Controls CTRL 300
Data Flow INTR 90
End Status CMD 180,CHL-I 145,CHL-I 245
Error Condition Diagrams
A Register Parity Error CTRL 35
ALU Check CTRL 60
B Register Parity Error CTRL 35
CA Decode Even Error CTRL 20
CA Decode Odd Error CTRL 20
CB Decode Even Error CTRL 25
CB Decode Odd Error CTRL 25
Storage Address Bus Errors CTRL 610
Write Bus Bytes 0/2 Error CTRL 610
Write Bus Bytes 1/3 Error CTRL 610
Function Test (82-86) MICRO 400
Initiated Sequence (Polling) CHL-I 230,CHL-I 420,CHL-I
425
Interface Errors CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130
Interface to Channel Buffer Controls CHL-I 260
Microdiagnostics Track Location MPL 220
Controller Address CHL-I 230
Controller Check CTL-I I IO,PANEL 50
Correctable Data Errors in Data Field CMD 210
Counters (MPL)
Bit Counter MPL 230
Byte Counter MPL 270
Data Separation MPL 280
Sector Counter MPL 290
CP Panel LOC 8
CP/Thermal Indicators LOC 2
CP I or 2 Trips PWR 135
CP 1-10 LOC 10
CP 3 Trips (Fan Problem) PWR 260
CP 4 Trips Troubleshooting Procedures PWR 80
CP 5 - MPL File AC Control PWR 45
CP 6, 9, or 10 Trips PWR 150
CP 7 (Bulk 2) Power Problem PWR 70
CP 8 (Bulk I) Power Problem PWR 60
CPI I Trips PWR 220
CPI2 Trips PWR 240
CPI3 Trips PWR 200
CPI4 Trips PWR 180
CPI5 or 18 Trips PWR 160
CHANNEL INTERFACE (cont'd)-CP15 OR 18
0 <=~ 0
"
'",,-
'
INDEX 2
INDEX 2
0 () 0 0 0 0
"
'
,~
C)
n
I' ( -
(-
(-
('
(
(
(
{
(
(
(-
L
INDEX
CP16 OR 17-IMPL
CPI6 or 17 Trips PWR 270
CS Field
Decode Description MIC 3
Decode Error PANEL 40
Description CTRL 240
CSW Status Field MSG 20
CTL-I (see Control Interface)
CV Field MIC 6
CX Field MIC 6
Cycle Control Error FSI 30,CTRL 4O,PANEL 41
Cylinder Seek Example CMD 35
DBus
Assembler CTRL 400
Parity Check CTRL 60
D Equal to Zero CTRL 60
Data Address Register (DAR) CTRL 220
Data Check MSG 20,CHL-1 255
Data Collection MSG 10
Data Control MIC 2
Data Cycle CTRL 320
Data Detect (Read) MPL 280
Data Error CMD 210
Data Flow
Addressing CTRL 220
ALU CTRL 235,INTR lIS
By Card START 900
Channel Interface INTR 140,CHL-1 500
Control Interface INTR 120
Control Storage INTR 105
CU Clock CTRL 300
Data Cycles CTRL 250
Instruction CTRL 230
MPL Attachment INTR 105
Read CMD 130
Registers CTRL 225,INTR lIS
SCU Controls INTR 105
To Device CTL-145
Write CMD90
23FD Attachment Concepts MPL 230
Data In Introduction CHL-I 220
Data In (Timing) CHL-I 350
Data In/Service In Controls INTR 140
Data or Command Overrun CMD 210
Data Out (Timing) CHL-I 350
Data Out Introduction CHL-I 220
Data Out Seq Error CHL-I 165
Data Response CTL-I 45,CTL-I 50
Data Retrieval Overview MSG 10
Data Separation MPL 240
Data Separation Counter Timing Chart (Read) MPL 280
Data Statement or Storage (DAR) Addressing MIC 2
Data Strobe (Read) MPL 280
Data Transfer
Control Interface CTL-I 35
Controls INTR 120
From Channel (Address Out Command Out) CHL-I 260
Initial Selection CHL-I 300
Interface Sequence CHL-I 230
Operation (Read) ECD CHL-I 365, CHL-I 375
Operation (Write) Flowchart CHL-I 380, CHL-I 390
Read MPL 280
Read Channel Buffer Control CHL-I 265
Read Channel Controls CHL-I 360, CHL-I 370
To Channel (Address In Status In) CHl-1 260
Write Channel Controls CHL-I 380, CHL-I 370
3830-2
Write Operation Channel Buffer Control CHL-I 260
DC Ready Indicator PANEL \0
DCC (Disconnected Command Chaining Byte) CMD 200
DCI (see Control Interface)
Decode Error FSI 30
DecodeTables START 100
Defective or Alternate Track CMD 210
Definitions and Abbreviations LGND 16
Device
Address CHL-I 230
Control Operation, Description CMD 10
End Status CMD 180,CHL-1350
Error Collection INTR 50
Read/Write (CTL-J) CTL-I 35
Release Command CMD 140,CHL-1470
Release Flowchart CMD 450
Reserve Command CMD 140,CHL-1 470
Reserve Flowchart CMD ISO
Diagnostic
Command Objectives CMD IS
Control Options MICRO 16,MICRO 20
Controls MICRO 35
Description, Channel Wraparound Tests MICFL 5
Load - Microprogram Controlled MPL 260
Load Command Description CMD 5
Load Command Flowchart CMD 25
Mode (ECC Logic) CTRL 600
Write Command Description CMD 5
Write Command Flowchart CMD 30
Disconnect In CHL-I 225,CHL-I 240
Disconnect In Interlock CHL-I 425
Disconnect In Latch CHL-I 425
Disconnect Sequence Latch CHL-I 425
Disconnect, Interface CHL-I 240
Disconnected Command Chaining (DCC) CMD 200,CHL-I
230
Disk Cartridge Drive MPL 245
Disk Format, MPL MPL 220
Disk Layout (Rotational Position Sensing) CMD 305
Disk Storage Devices, Control Introduction INTR 10
Disk Storage Subsystem Conceptual Units INTR 20
Display
Check 1 Error PANEL 40
Check 2 Error Procedure PANEL 50
Tests Error Messages OLT 50
Distribution by Power Terminal PWR 305,PWR 306
Distribution, Control Unit AC and DC PWR 300
DOS-OLTEP (Online Tests) OLT IS
Duplicate Card Chart START 905
Early Error Indication PANEL 40
ECD (see Error Condition Diagrams)
ECI-EC4 LOC 2
EnableAddress In CHL-I 260
Enable Operational In CHL-I 260
Enable Status In CHL-I 260
End of File CMD 430
Ending Sequence
Channel Operation CHL-I 400
Channel Truncation CHL-l 265
Description CHL-I 230,CHL-I 350
Flowchart CMD 190
Enter/Display Switch (Microdiagnostics) MICRO 20
Environmental Data Collection MSG 10
Equipment Check MSG 20,CHL-I 255
Erase Command Description CMD 70
LM~7~.~O~I~M~7~.~1~
~
_19 Dec 7512 Mar 76 ______~____~____~______~__ ---l
II:> ~rigllt t8M Corporation 1975. 1976
Erase Command Flowchart CMD 85
EREP MSG30
Error
Assembly (Channel) CHL-1165
Check Flowchart CTRL 10
Checking Data Flow INTR I 10
Conditions (see also Error Condition Diagrams)
Check I PANEL 40
Check 2 PANEL 50
Control Commands CMD 5
Controls INTR I 10
Counter MPL 290
Data Collection MSG IO,MSG 30
Description Field MSG 20
Identification Flowchart START 10
Message Analysis, Console MSG 20
Message Display, CE Panel MICRO 25
Symptom Code, EREP (see also Fault Symptom Code)
MSG40
Error Condition Diagrams
A and B Bus Assemblers Block Diagram CTRL 118
A Register Check CTRL 35
Address Bus 0-7 Parity Error CTRL 50
Address Bus 8-15 Parity Error CTRL 50
ALU Error CTRL 60
B Register Check CTRL 35
Branch/Status Error CTRL 40
Buffer Parity Check CHL-I 160
Buffer Ready CHL-I 145
Bus Out (Write Data Path) CHL-I 165
CA Decode Even Error CTRL 20
CA Decode Odd Error CTRL 20
CB Decode Even Error CTRL 25
CD Decode Error CTRL 30
Chan B/Respon Branch CHL-1180
Channel Bus Out Parity CHL-I 30
Channel Interface Disabled CHL-I 20
Channel Overrun CHL-I 35
Control Unit End CHL-II45
CS Field or Stat Set Error CTRL 30
CU Clock Error CTRL 40
CU Cycle Error CTRL 40
Definition START 5
Halt I/O Busy CHL-I 140
Interface Check/ Multiconnect Error CHL-I 185
MPL (23FD) MPL 295
Request In CHL-I 135
Selective Reset CHL-I 190
Servo/Multi Branch CHL-1180
Special Operation Error CTRL 40
Storage Address Bus Errors CTRL 610
Suppress Out CHL-I 150
System Reset CHL-1190
Transfer/Halt I/O CHL-II40
Write Bus Bytes 0/2 Error CTRL 610
Write Bus Bytes 1/3 Error CTRL 610
Execute Switch PANEL 10
Extended Operation CTL-I 15
Facility Error Collection, Description of INTR 50
Facility Maintenance Philosophy START 5
Facility Problem, Entry Point START 10
Fan Problem PWR 260
INDEX 3
Fault Symptom Code, Determining (see also Error Symptom
Code) FSI5
Fault Symptom Index FSI 30
CD Decode Error FSI 30
Clock Errors FSI 30
Control Storage Failure Analysis FSI 32
Control Storage Trileads Chart FSI 33
Cycle Control Error FSI 30
Format 0 FSI 10
Format 2 FSI 15
Format 3 FSI 33
Feature Code MIC 2
Fetch Cycle CTRL 320
Fetch four Bytes CTRL 250
Fetch Single Byte CTRL 250
File INTR 105
Format
Decode CTRL 500,START 100
Microword (see Microword Format)
Sector, MPL MPL 220
Formatting Overflow Record CMD 400
Four Byte Cycle CTRL 320
Four Byte Fetch CTRL 250
Freeze CHL-I 260,CHL-1 475
FSI (see Fault Symptom Index)
Functional Microprogram MIC 35
Gate A LOC 2,LOC 16
Gate BLOC 2,LOC 14
GateD LOC 16
Gate P LOC 12
General Purpose Register
Alter PANEL 110
Data Flow CTRL 225
Display PANEL 100
Introduction CTRL 200
Glossary LGND 16
HA (see Read Home Address, Write Home Address)
Halt I/O Busy CHL-I 140
Hardcore
Check I Analysis MICRO 150
Stop Word List MICRO 65
Test Summary MICRO 60
Heat Sinks LOC 8
High Branch MIC 2
Hold Out (Timing) CHL-I 350
Hold Out Introduction CHL-1220
Home Address (see Read, Write)
I/O Connectors LOC 14
I/O Device (see Device)
IAR (see Instruction Address Register)
Idle Loop CMD 170
Illegal Sequence CHL-1125
Immediate Operation CTL-I IS
IMPL
Control Sorage Addressing MPL 270
Data Flow MPL 200
Error, Stop or Retry MPL 290
Failure Analysis START 35
Hardware Controlled MPL 240
CP16 OR 17-IMPL
INDEX 3
IMPL (cont'dl-READ
INDEX
IMPL (Continued)
Microprogram Controlled MPL 260
Switch PANEL 10
Initial Program Load CMD 125,MPL 220
Initial Selection
Buffer Operation CHL-I 305
Circuits CHL-I 200
Diagram CHL-I 300
Flowchart CMD 170,CMD 175
Idle Loop CMD 170
Sequence CHL-I 230,CHL-1 350
Sequence Introduction CHL-I 220
Initial Status Byte CMD 181
Inline Diagnostics Transfer CMD 160
Inner/Outer Switch PANEL 10
Input/Output Operations CHL-1235
Installation
Address Select Card Wiring INST 20
Cabling
Channel Interface INST 20
Control Module to 3830-2 INST 5
Channel Selector Card Wiring INST 20
Channel Transfer Control Card Wiring INST 20
Control Unit Power Check INST 10
Cover Installation INST 25
Priority Card Wiring INST 20
Records INST 25
Selected Bus/Tag Out Card Wiring INST 20
System Test INST 25
Transfer Buffer Control Card Wiring INST 20
Unpacking and Locating INST 5
Instruction Address Register (JAR) CTRL 220
Alter PANEL 105
Instruction Data Flow CTRL 230
Instruction Examples, Microprogram MIC 30, MIC 31
Instruction/Instruction Call Cycle CTRL 320
Instruction Word START 100
Interface Check CHL-I 185
Interface Disconnect CHL-I 240
Interface, CU to 23FD MPL 245
Intermittent Failures, Analysis MICRO 17
Intervention Required MSG 20,CHL-I 250
Introduction to Storage Control Subsystem INTR 10
IPL (see Initial Program Load)
Job 10 Field MSG 20
Jumper Card Assignments INST 20
K-CK Emit Value MIC 2
Laminar Bus LOC 16
Lamp Test PANEL 10
Line Name to ALD Page List START 905
Load Operation (Microprogram) MPL 200
Load S Register Check CTL-I IIO,PANEL 50
Load S Registers CTL-I 190
Loading Procedure, Microdiagnostics MICRO 15
Locations Index LOC I
Log Disconnect In CHL-I 130
Logging Mode MSG to
Logic Type Failures START 5
Loop Option 32 - Description of MICRO 17
Low Branch MIC 2
I 447460
3830-2
i
19 Dec 75
1. Description of MIC 16
2, Description of MIC 17
3, Description of MIC 18
MLM Documentation
Cross Reference MLX I
Description PLAN 5
Layout' PLAN 10
.
Ordering Procedure (Back of Title Page) ii
Preface ii
Symbology LGND 6
MPL Attachment Introduction MPL 220
MPLError ECDs MPL 295
MPL File (see also IMPL, 23FD Disk Drive)
Attachment, SCU Data Flow INTR 90
IMPL Switch PANEL to
Introduction INTR 20,INTR 105
Location LOC 2,MPL to
Microprogram Load Operation MPL 200
Not Ready FSI to,FSI 40
Description PANEL 41
During Microdiagnostic Load MICRO 16
ECD MPL295
IMPL Analysis START 35
MAP MPL 30
Message (Sense Format 0) FSI 10.SENSE 40
Parity Error (see also MPL File Read Check) MPL 290
Power On Indicator PANEL 10
Read Check FSI 10,FSI 15.PANEL 40
Description PANEL 41
During Microdiagnostic Load MICRO 16
ECD MPL 295
Hardcore Analysis START 65
MAP MPL 15
Message (Sense Format 0) FSI IO.SENSE 40
Seek Check FSI 10
During Microdiagnostic Load MICRO 16
Hardcore Analysis START 65
MAP MPL45
Message (Sense Format 0) FSI IO,SENSE 40
Seek In/Seek Out Load Head Switch PANEL 10
To Control Storage Address Relationship MPL 220
MST Card/ ALD Index START 905
Multiconnect Error CHL-I 185
Multiple In Tags CHL-I 125,CHL-I 130
Multiple Requesting CMD 200
Multiple Tag Check CHL-I 125.CHL-1 130,CHL-I 185
Multiple Track Operation CMD 430
Multitag Switch PANEL I
M/T (Multiple Track) Operation CMD 430
Machine Reset - ECD CHL-I 190
Maintenance Library Documentation Plan PLAN 10
Maintenance Library'lnformation PLAN 5
Maintenance,Entry Point START to
Manual Controls INTR I to
Message Analysis, Console MSG 20
Message Displays, CE Panel MICRO 16,MICRO 25
Messages, Sense SENSE to
Format 0 SENSE 35
Format 2 SENSE 40
Format 3 SENSE 45
Meter Panel (see Power Sequence Panel)
Micro-Orders, Definition of MIC 3
Microblock Format MIC 2
,Microdiagnostics MPL 220
Channel Wraparound Tests, Routines 6O-6E MICRO 2to
Control Interface Tests - Routines 8C-94 MICRO 500
Control Unit Tests - Routines 82-9A MICRO 400
Display Summary MICRO 25
Dynamic Control Options MICRO 20
Enter/Display Switch MICRO 20
Error Message Displays MICRO 25
Loading Procedure MICRO 15
Operating Information MICRO 25
Operation Mode Switch MICRO 20
Parameter Entry MICRO 20
Program Storage Area MICRO 35
Routine ID MICRO 10
Routine Summaries
. Channel Wraparound, 60-6E MICRO 210
Control Interface, 8C-94 MICRO 510
CU Tests, 82-9A MICRO 400
Hardcore, OO-OB, Check I MICRO 60
Run Options MICRO 20
Summary MICRO 10
Termination MICRO 20
Microprogram
Branch Conditions INTR 140
Controls, SCU Data Flow INTR 90
Data Flow Controls INTR 100
Decode, Introduction INTR 20,INTR 110
Detected Errors INTR 50
Format Decode CTRL 500,START 100
Format Decode Symbol Value START 102
Format Table START 100
Functional MIC 35
Inst~uction Decode MIC 3,CTRL 230,CTRL 325,CTRL 410
Instruction Examples MIC 30
Instruction Word CTRL 230
Introduction MIC 2
Load (MPU Operation MPL 200
Load Objectives MPL 260
Registers MIC 5,CTRL 225
Response Latch (Read) CHL-1365
Response Latch (Write) CHL-I 385
Routines MIC 35
Microword Format MIC 6
A, Description of MIC 10
B, Description of MIC II
C, Description of MIC 12
D. Description of MIC 13
E, Description of MIC 14
F. Description of MIC 15
INDEX 4
Error Messages OLT 50
Error Messages Display OL T 50
OLTSEP OL T to
OS-OLTEP OLT 10
Prerequisites OLT 20
Standard Error Messages OL T 300
T3830 AAB Error Messages OLT 200
Op Decodes, ALU CTRL 235,CTRL 400
Operating Modes (Microdiagnosticl MICRO 20
Operational In/Out (Timing) CHL-I 350
Operational In/Out Introduction CHL-I 220
Operations, I/O CHL-1235
Orientation CMD 430
Overflow Record CMD 400
Overrun MSG 20,CHL-1 255
P-A I Cards LOC 12
Panel, CE (see CE Panel)
Panel, Power Sequence LOC 2,PANEL I
Parameter Controls (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 15
Parameter Entry (Microdiagnostics) MICRO 20
Parity Assembler MPL 230
Parity, Bits Generator CTRL 600
Parity Predictor CTRL 400
Parity Time (Read) MPL 280
Partial A Bus Assembler CTRL 400
Partial B Bus Assembler CTRL 400
Pending Status Condition CMD 181
Performance Data Collection MSG 10
Polling (Control Unit Initiated Sequence) CHL-1425
Polling Sequence (CHL-J) CHl-1420
Positive Logic Diagrams LGND 6
Power Control Box LOC 12
Power Down Sequence PWR 120,PWR 311
Power On (Resets) CMD 250
Power Problem Analysis PWR 30
Power Sequence Box toc 12
Power Sequence Concepts PWR 2
Power Sequence Panel LOC 2.PANEL I
Power Sequence Problem PWR 100
Power Sequencing
Flowchart PWR 3 to
For Control Storage PWR 105
Power Supply Adjustment PWR 50
Power Up Sequence PWR 120,PWR 310
Power. Introduction INTR 20
Preventive Maintenance START 950
Priority Card Wiring INST 20
Problem Analysis, Entry Point START 10
Proceed (Sequence Control) CHL-I 240
Processing Overflow Record CMD 400
Program Display Indicators (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 15
PS 4 Voltage Distribution PWR 185
PS 5 Voltage Distribwtion PWR 205
PS 6 Voltage Distribution PWR 225
PS 7 Voltage Distribution PWR 245
Push Button-Manual (Resets) CMD 250
NE or Tag Bus Parity Check CTL-I 115
No Operation CMD 5,CMD 25
No Response Check CHL-I 125
Normal End CTL-I to
Objectives, Command
Control CMD 15
Read CMD 107
Search CMD 55
Sense CMD 142
Write CMD 77
Offset Interlock See CHL-I 1
Online Tests
Brief Descriptions OLT 25
DOS-OL TEP OLT 15
Read
And Reset Buffered Log CMD 145
Commands
Descriptions CMD IOO,CHL-1235
Flowcharts CMD I to
1447461
12 Mar 76
IMPL Icont'dl-READ
INDEX 4
©Copyright IBM Corporation 1975. 1976
)
()
\....
t)
,,-,
()
1"",\
\",j)
f")
'J
0 0.'
~
'''-,J/
rll
0
1
f"'~
J
I
/"',"1
V
()
('""
'-.Y
t"-~
(-"1
J"'-~
"y
V
J
(..=~
\..Y
10
\"J
0 () ()
~
~'y
/-".
",-y
r"'~
J
·0
\.._y
0 0 0 0
\,
'<
.
"",
0",-J
() () ()
'Ii., "
--~
(
(
(~
(
INDEX
("~
(
('
READ (cont'd)-UNSUPPRESSIBLE
INDEX 5
Read, Commands (continued)
Objectives CMD 107
Summary CMD 2
Count CMD 110
Count, Key and Data CMD 120
Cycle CTRL 600
Cycle Timing CTRL 600
Data CMD 120
Channel Controls, Simplified CHL-I 360
Flowchart CMD 120
MPL MPL2S0
Path, SCU Data Flow INTR 90
Transfer CMD 130,CTL-135,CTL-I 50
Transfer Operation ECD CHL-I 365, CUL-I 37S
Diagnostic I CCW (Sense Bytes) CMD 150
Diagnostics to System CMD 165
Home Address CMD 100,CMD 110
I/O Channel Interface Timing CHL-I3S0
Initial Program Load CMD 100
Key and Data CMD 120
MPL Data MPL 2S0
Operation CMD 10S,CHL-1 265
Record Zero (RO) CMD 110
Sector CMD 125
Sector (Rotational Position Sensing) CMD 300
Truncation CHL-I 270
Read Bus Byte 3 Parity Error CTRL 45
Recalibrate CMD S,CMD 20
Recycle, CTL-I CTL-I 10
Recycle/Sync/Stop Switch PANEL 10
Recycle, Address Compare PANEL 120
Register
Alter PANEL IS,PANEL 105
ALU Data Flow INTR 1 IS
Assignment MIC 5
Data Flow INTR 90
Display Circuit PANEL 100
Display Operation PANEL IS
Select Switch PANEL 10
Storage Display Indicators PANEL 10
Test Routine S2 MICRO 405
Relays LOC 12,PWR 105
Release (see Device Release)
Request In
Introduction CHL-I 220
Operation CHL-I 350
Reserve (see Device Reserve)
Reset Controls INTR 110
Reset Switch PANEL 10
Resets, Description CMD 2S0,CHL-1 245
Resistors LOC 6,LOC 12
Response LatchCHL-126O
Restore CMD S,CMD 25
Rotational Position Sensing
Description CMD 300
Track Layout CMD 305
Routines, Microprogram MIC 3S,MICRO 10
Run Options (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 15
Run Otions (Microdiagnostic) MICRO 20
Safety (Back of Title Page) ii
Satellite Module, Disk Storage INTR 20
SCRIO Cards Location PANEL II
SCU Data Flow
A Bus INTR 115
ALU Inputs INTR 115
B Bus INTR 115
447460
3830·2
19 Dec 75
tD COPYright
IBM CorporatIon 1975
Backup Register INTR 110
Branch Controls INTR 110
ByCard START900
Clock and Cycle Controls INTR 110
Control Storage Error Checking INTR 110
Control Storage IMPL Attachment INTR 105
Control Storage Manual Controls INTR Ito
Control Storage MPL File INTR toS
CTL-I (Read) CTL-I SO
CTL-I (Write) CTL-I 45
D Bus INTR 115
Data Flow, Block Diagram INTR 100
-Description of INTR 90
Disk Cartridge Drive INTR 105
Error Controls INTR 110
Manual Controls and Error Checking Data Flow INTR Ito
Microprogram Decodes INTR 110
Registers, ALU Data Flow INTR 115
Reset Controls INTR 110
Status Register Set Controls INTR 110
Search Commands
Descriptions CMD SO
Flowcharts CMD 55
Objectives CMD 55
Summary CMD 2
Sector
Address Byte MPL 220
Counter MPL 290
Not Zero (23FD Attachment Concepts) MPL 290
Summary CMD 5
Seek
Address Field MSG 20
Flowchart CMD 20
Malfunctions CMD 210
Operation Data Flow CMD 5
Select A Reg Entry CTRL 235
Select Active CTL-I 10
Select Active or Select Check CTL-I IIO,PANEL 50
Select Controller CTL-I 20
Select Device CTL-I 20
Select Hold CTL-I 10
Select In CHL-I 350
Introduction CHL-I 220
Timing CHL-I 350
Select Out
Introduction CHL-I 220
Operation CHL-1350
Selected Bus/Tag Out Card INST 20
Selection Sequence CHL-I 230
Selective Reset CHL-I 245
Description and Flowcharts CMD 250
ECD CHL-119O
Selector Channel Initiated Sequences CHL-I 350
Selector Channel Input Operation CHL-I 350
Sense
Byte CHL-I 255
Commands
Descriptions CMD 140,CHL-1 235
Flowcharts CMD 145
Objectives CMD 42
Conditions CHL-1255
Control Block FSI 5
Data
Description SENSE 30
Field MSG 20
Logic Type Failures START 10
Setup, Reset Operation CMD 250
Summary SENSE 10
Transfer CHL-I 250
Messages SENSE to
Sequence Controls, Channel Interface CHL-1235
Sequential Starter Card LOC 16,PWR 132
SERDES CMD 130
Service In/Out
Introduction CHL-I220
Operation CHL-I 350
Service Out Seq Error CHL-I 165
SERVO/MULTI Branch CHL-I ISO
Set File Mask CMD 5,CMD I 5,CMD 20
Set Sector CMD 5,CMD 15,CMD 25,CMD 300
Shutdown Cycle CHL-I 265
Single Byte Fetch CTRL 250
Single Byte Transfer CHL-I265
Space Count CMD S,CMD 15,CMD 30
Special Control Lines CHL-I 225
Special Operation
CTL-I Control MIC 5
Decode Table MIC 15
Error PANEL 40
Field Description MIC 3
Test (S4) MICRO 4to
Special Register Display PANEL 100
ST Reg Parity Error CTRL 45
Stack Status CHL-I 240
Standard Error Numbers (Online Tests) OL T 300
Start Switch PANEL 10
Statistical Data Collection MSG 10
Statistical Information, EREP MSG 30
Status
Accepted CHL-I 350
Byte CHL-I 245
Conditions Pending CMD lSI
Errors FSI 10
Information CMD ISI.CHL-I 245
Information, Description of CMD 180
Modifier CMD ISO,CHL-I 245
Presented CHL-I 350
Register Set Controls INTR Ito
Stack CHL-I 240
Status In
Address In CHL-1260
Introduction CHL-I 220
Operation CHL-I 350
Stepping Motor MPL 245,INTR 105
Stop (see also Truncation) CHL-I24O
Stop/SI Switch PANEL 10
Stop, Address Compare PANEL 120
Storage (see also Control Storage)
Access Registers CTRL 200,CTRL 220
Address Errors FSI 40,CTRL 610
Alter PANEL 15,PANEL 115
Display PANEL 15,PANEL 115
Write Bus Error FSI 40
Storage Control Unit (see Control Unit>
Store
Cycle CTRL 320
Four Bytes CTRL 250
Suppress Out
ECD CHL-I 150
Introduction CHL-1220
Operation CHL-I 350
Suppress Status CHL-124O
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
UNTIL MARCH 26. 1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
SW Indicator PANEL 10
SW Sync, Address Compare PANEL 120
Switching, Channel CHL-I 470,CHL-I 475
Symbology, Documentation LGND 6
Sync In/Out CTL-I to
Sync/Stop Switch PANEL to
System Error Collection INTR 50
System Reset
Description CMD 250,CHL-I 245
ECD CHL·II9O
Flowchart CMD 255
Tabs LOC 12
Tag Bus CTL-l 10
Parity Check (CTL-I) CTL-I IIO,PANEL 50
Tag Gate CTL-I 10
Tag In
Controls (CHL-I) INTR 140
Generation (CHL-I) INTR 140
Introduction (CHL-I) CHL-1220
Tag Out Introduction CHL-I220
Tag Valid, CTL-I CTL-I 110
Tail Gate LOC 14
Temporary Address Register (TAR) CTRL 220
Terminology LGND 16
Test Cable Installation
Channel Interface Wraparound MICRO 205
Control Interface Wraparound MICRO 500
Test I/O (Status Byte) CMD 145,CHL-I 235
Thermal Circuit Diagram PWR 31
Tie Breaker CHL-I 475
Tie Breaking and Interlock Circuits CHL-I 200
Timing, CU Clock CTRL 300
Track Data Orientation (23FD Attach) MPL 230
Track Layout (RPS) CMD 305
Track Not Zero (23FD Aftach) MPL 290
Transfer (see also XFER)
Check (CHL-I) PANEL 50
Controls CHL-I 260
Error (CTL-I) CTL-I 115,PANEL 50
Halt I/O CHL-I 140
In-Line Diagnostics to Control Unit CMD 160
Latch (Read) CHL-I 365
Latch (Write) CHL-1385
Transfer Buffer Control Card INST 20
Triac LOC 12
Trilead Chart, Control Storage FSI 33
Troubleshooting, Entry Point START 10
Truncation CHL-I 24O,CHL-I 265
Two Channel Switch CHL-1470
Channel Wraparound Test MICRO 200
Circuit CHL-I 475
Concept and Commands CMD 450
Controls INTR 140
T3S30AAA OL T 25
T3830AAB OL T 25
Uncorrectable Data Errors CMD 210
Unexpected End Check CTL-I I IO,PANEL 50
Unit Address No Compare CHL-I 125
Unit Check Status CMD ISO,CHL-1250
Unit Exception Status CMD 180,CHL-1250
Unsuppressible Register (Device) CTL-125
READ (cont',-UNSUPPRESSIBLE
INDEX 5
USAGE/ERROR-WAVEFORMS
INDEX
Usage/Error Threshold Values MSG \0
Use Meter LOC 2,PANEL 1
INDEX6
Transition Detector MPL 25
Waveforms MPL 25
Voltage Adjust, Control Unit PWR 50
Voltage Check, Control Unit INST 10
Voltage Regulation PWR 105
Voltage. Sequencing Logic PWR 110
Volume ID Field MSG 20
Word and Parity Assembly (23FD Attach) MPL 230
Write
Bus Errors CTRL 610
Commands
Description CMD 70,CHL-I 235
Flowcharts CMD 80
Objectives CMD 77
RO CMD70
Special Count, Key, Data CMD 70,CMD 85
Summary CMD 2
Cycle Timing CTRL 600
Data Transfer CHL-I 380,CTL-I 35
Flowchart CMD 90
Errors (23FD Attach) MPL 290
Operation CMD 75,CHL-1 260
Truncation CHL-I 270
XCHAN Branch CH 14 CHL-1150
XFER Branch CL 12 CHL-I 140,CHL-1260
Read CHL-I 365, CHL-I 375
Write CHL-I 385, CHL-I 375
23FD Disk Drive (see also MPL File)
Access Drive Mechanical Diagnostic (MAP) MPL 15
Access Housing MPL 55
Attachment Introduction MPL 220
Cartridge Handling MPL 2
Characteristics MPL \0
Cover Removal MPL 55
Disk Centering Cone MPL 55
Drive Belt MPL 55
Drive Hub MPL 55
Drive Motor and Pulley MPL 55
Frame MPL 55
Functional Principles MPL 5
Head/ Arm Assembly MPL 20
Cautions MPL I
Locations LOC 2,MPL \0
Operating Sequence MPL 5
Power Control MPL 40
Pressure Pad MPL 20
Pressure Pad Loading (MAP) MPL 45
Read Amplifier MPL 25
Read Channel Timing MPL 5
Read Circuit MPL 25
Read Circuit Diagnostic (MAP) MPL 15
Read Head MPL 20
Removal MPL 55
Scoping Procedures MPL 15
Sector Tower MPL 35
Seek Circuits Stepping Control (MAP) MPL 45
Stepping Motor, Lead Screw MPL 50
Test Points MPL 25
Timing MPL 5
447460
3830-2
19 Dec 75
IBM CONFIDENTIAL
USAGE/ERROR-WAVEFORMS
UNTIL MARCH 26,1976. UNCLASSIFIED THEREAFTER
INDEX 6
(1 C"PYP\lht IBM Corporahon 1975
('i'~"""
.J
o
(~
\,-j
r~
\
\.y
,ic " ,
"" ;;
C)
r)
\
'
C)
.1'.'"\
\.~"_ ej)/
/"~
't,..,
!
)-"
,"-",
I
i
1"" JI
/""/
\
~.,
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.3 Linearized : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19 Create Date : 2018:10:08 15:30:44-08:00 Modify Date : 2018:10:08 15:53:51-07:00 Metadata Date : 2018:10:08 15:53:51-07:00 Producer : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in Format : application/pdf Document ID : uuid:8a04c6d8-5f75-ff43-8304-e7d31c4a6d46 Instance ID : uuid:753bc62e-45ca-5c4f-837b-68cafc91b8fa Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseNone Page Count : 232EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools